OSP7000M

OSP700M
OPERATION MANUAL
(3rd Edition)
Pub. No. 3754-E-R2 (ME32-069-R3) Sep. 1995

1
OKUMA
 ME00-001-R1 P-(i)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The machine is equipped with safety devices which serve to protect personnel and the machine itself from
hazards arising from unforeseen accidents. However, operators must not rely exclusively on these safety
devices: they must also become fully familiar with the safety guidelines presented below to ensure
accident-free operation.
This instruction manual and the warning signs attached to the machine cover only those hazards which
Okuma can predict. Be aware that they do not cover all possible hazards.

.
1 PRECAUTIONS RELATING TO MACHINE INSTALLATION
(1) Install the machine at a site where the following conditions (the conditions for achievement of the
guaranteed accuracy) apply.
- Ambient temperature: 17to25°C
- Ambient humidity: 75% max. (no condensation)

- Site not subject to direct sunlight or excessive vibration; environment as free of dust, acid, corrosive
gases, and salt spray as possible.
(2) Prepare a primary power supply that complies with the following requirements.
- Voltage: 200 V
- Voltage fluctuation: ±10% max.
- Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz
- Do not draw the primary power supply from a distribution panel that also supplies a major noise source
(for example an electric welder or electric discharge machine) since this could cause malfunction of
the NC unit.
- If possible connect the machine to a ground not used by any other equipment. If there is no choice but
to use a common ground, the other equipment must not generate a large amount of noise (such as an
electric welder or electric discharge machine).

(3) Installation Environment

Observe the following points when installing the electrical control cabinet.
- Make sure that the NC unit will not be subject to direct sunlight.
- Make sure that the electrical control cabinet will not be splashed with chips, water, or oil.

- Make sure that the electrical control cabinet and operation panel are not subject to excessive
vibrations or shock.
- The permissible ambient temperature range for the electrical control cabinet is 0 to 40°C.
- The permissible ambient humidity range for the electrical control cabinet is 30 to 95% (no
condensation).
- The maximum altitude at which the electrical control cabinet can be used is 1000 m (3281 ft.).
 L.

ME00-001-R1 P-(ii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2. POINTS TO CHECK BEFORE TURNING ON THE POWER

(1) Close all the doors of the electrical control cabinet and operation panel to prevent the entry of
water, chips, and dust.

(2) Make absolutely sure that there is nobody near the moving parts of the machine, and that there are
no obstacles around the machine, before starting machine operation.
(3) When turning on the power, turn on the main power disconnect switch first, then the CONTROL ON
switch on the operation panel.

3. PRECAUTIONS RELATING TO OPERATION

(1) After turning on the power, carry out inspection and adjustment in accordance with the daily
inspection procedure described in this instruction manual.
(2) Use tools whose dimensions and type are appropriate for the work undertaken and the machine
specifications. Do not use badly worn tools since they can cause accidents.

(3) Do not for any reason touch the spindle or tool while spindle indexing is in progress since the
spindle could rotate: this is dangerous.
(4) Check that the workpiece and tool are properly secured.

(5) Never touch a workpiece or tool while it is rotating: this is extremely dangerous.

(6) Do not remove chips by hand while machining is in progress since this is dangerous. Always stop
the machine first, then remove the chips with a brush or broom.

(7) Do not operate the machine with any of the safety devices removed. Do not operate the machine
with any of the covers removed unless it is necessary to do so.
(8) Always stop the machine before mounting or removing a tool.

(9) Do not approach or touch any moving part of the machine while it is operating.

(10) Do not touch any switch or button with wet hands. This is extremely dangerous.

(11) Before using any switch or button on the operation panel, check that it is the one intended.
 ME00-001-R1 P-(iii)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

4. PRECAUTIONS RELATING TO THE ATC

(1) The tool clamps of the magazine, spindle, etc., are designed for reliability, but it is possible that a
tool could be released and fall in the event of an unforeseen accident, exposing you to danger: do
not touch or approach the ATC mechanism during ATC operation.

(2) Always inspect and change tools in the magazine in the manual magazine interrupt mode.

(3) Remove chips adhering to the magazine at appropriate intervals since they can cause
misoperation.
Do not use compressed air to remove these chips since it will only push the chips further in.

(4) If the ATC stops during operation for some reason and it has to be inspected without turning the
power off, do not touch the ATC since it may start moving suddenly.

5. ON FINISHING WORK
(1) On finishing work, clean the vicinity of the machine.

(2) Return the ATC, APC and other equipment to the predetermined retraction position.

(3) Always turn off the power to the machine before leaving it.

(4) To turn off the power, turn off the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel first, then the main
power disconnect switch.
 ME00-001-R1 P-(iv)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

6. PRECAUTIONS DURING MAINTENANCE INSPECTION AND WHEN

TROUBLE OCCURS
In order to prevent unforeseen accidents, damage to the machine, etc., it is essential to observe the
following points when performing maintenance inspections or during checking when trouble has occurred.

(1) When trouble occurs, press the emergency stop button on the operation panel to stop the machine.

(2) Consult the person responsible for maintenance to determine what corrective measures need to be
taken.
(3) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.

(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.

(5) Always turn the power off before starting inspection or changing parts.

(6) When parts are removed during inspection or repair work, always replace them as they were and
secure them properly with their screws, etc.
(7) When carrying out inspections in which measuring instruments are used - for example voltage
checks - make sure the instrument is properly calibrated.
(8) Do not keep combustible materials or metals inside the electrical control cabinet or terminal box.

(9) Check that cables and wires are free of damage: damaged cables and wires will cause current
leakage and electric shocks.

(10) Maintenance inside the Electrical Control Cabinet

a) Switch the main power disconnect switch OFF before opening the electrical control cabinet
door.

b) Even when the main power disconnect switch is OFF, there may some residual charge in the
servo amplifier and spindle drive unit, and for this reason only service personnel are permitted
to perform any work on these units. Even then, they must observe the following precautions.
- Servo amplifier
Discharge the residual voltage one minute after turning off the breaker inside the unit.
- Spindle drive unit
Discharge the residual voltage one minute after turning off the main power disconnect switch.

c) The electrical control cabinet contains the NC unit, and the NC unit has a printed circuit board
whose memory stores the machining programs, parameters, etc. in order to ensure that the
contents of this memory will be retained even when the power is switched off, the memory is
supplied with power by a battery. Depending on how the printed circuit boards are handled, the
contents of the memory may be destroyed and for this reason only service personnel should
handle these boards.
(11) Periodic Inspection of the Electrical Control Cabinet
 i

ME00-001-R1 P-(v)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

a) Cleaning the cooling unit

The cooling unit in the door of the electrical control cabinet serves to prevent excessive
temperature rise inside the electrical control cabinet and increase the reliability of the NC unit.
Inspect the following points every three months.
- Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?
The motor is normal if there is a strong draft from the unit.
- Is the external air inlet blocked?
If it is blocked, clean it with compressed air.
 -L.

ME00-001-R1 P-(vi)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

7. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
(1) Keep the vicinity of the machine clean and tidy.

(2) Wear appropriate clothing while working, and follow the instructions of someone with sufficient
training.

(3) Make sure that your clothes and hair cannot become entangled in the machine. Machine operators
must wear safety equipment such as safety shoes and safety goggles.

(4) Machine operators must read the instruction manual carefully and make sure of the correct
procedure before operating the machine.
(5) Memorize the position of the emergency stop button so that you can press it immediately at any
time and from any position.
(6) Do not access the inside of the control panel, transformer, motor, etc., since they contain
high-voltage terminals and other components which are extremely dangerous.

(7) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate to
confirm safety before proceeding to each new step.

8. SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL

The following warning indications are used in this manual to draw attention to information of particular
importance. Read the instructions marked with these symbols carefully and follow them.

ADANGER : Indicates an imminent hazard which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

: Indicates hazards which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates hazards which, if not avoided, could result in minor injuries or damage to devices or
equipment.

NOTICE Indicates precautions relating to operation or use.

 .1

P-0)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE

SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1

1. FEATURES 1
2. EXPLANATION 3

SECTION 2 OPERATION 4

1. OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS 4
1-1. Type of Operations 4
1-2. Operation Panel Description 4
1-2-1. NC Operation Panel 5
1-2-2. Machine Operaton Panel . 9
2. PROGRAM CREATION 12
2-1. Program Tape Format 12
2-2. Characters Available in Tape Code 13
2-3. Parity Check 17
3. TAPE READER HANDLING 18

4. FLOPPY DISK HANDLING 19

4-1. Precaution of Floppy Disk Handing 19
4-2. Floppy Disk Drive Operation 20
5. POWER ON/OFF AND INSTALLING NC CONTROL SOFTWARE 21
5-1. Power ON/OFF: Systems and Settings 21
5-1-1. NC Power ON Procedure 21
5-1-2. NC Power OFF Procedure 22
5-2. Emergency Stop 23
5-3. System Reset 23
5-4. KEY-LOCK Type Switch 24
6. DATA SETTING 25
6-1 . Mode Selection Keys 25
6-2. Data Setting 27
 p-(ii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

6-3. Data Set Commands 30

6-3-1. Commands for Data Setting 30
6-3-2. Commands for Parameter Selection 33
6-3-3. Input/Output Commands for Peripherals 37
6-3-4. Verify 43
6-3-5. Omitting the File Name and Device Name 43
6-3-6. Other Commands 44
6-4. Zero Set Commands 45
6-4-1. Work Coordinate System Origin 45
6-5. Tool Data Set Commands 47
.
6-5-1 Tool Length Offset and Cutter Radius Compensation ... 47
6-5-2. ATC Pot NoTTool No. Table 48
6-5-3. ATC Tool Number (Fixed-Address ATC Specification) ... 54
6-6. Parameter Setting 56
7. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT 57
7-1. Program Commands List 57
7-2. DATE 58
7-3. DIRECTORY 60
7-4. TRANSFER 63
7-4-1. Read 63
7-4-2. Punching Out Stored Program Data 67
7-4-3. Verifying Punched Out Programs 71
7-4-4. Duplication of Stored Program 79
7-4-5. Tape Reader Operation - Fast Forward Feed 83
7-4-6. Tape Reader Operation - Rewind 84
7-4-7. PIP Quit 86
7-5. Program Editing 87
7-5-1. Commands Used in the Program Edit Mode 89
7-5-2. Fundamental Operations Necessary for Program Editing 90
7-5-3. One Line Insertion 99
7-5-4. One Line Deletion 100
7-5-5. One Character Insertion 101
7-5-6. One Character Deletion 102
7-5-7. Deletion 103
7-5-8. One Line Erasing 105
 p-(iii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

7-5-9. Find 107

7-5-10. Change 110
7-5-11. Copy, Move, and Extract 112
7-5-12. Page Mode 119
7-5-13. Insert Mode 121
7-6. MULTI-FILE TRANSFER (MPIP) 124
7-6-1. Multi-file Read 124
7-6-2. Multi-file Punch 127
7-6-3. Multi-file Verify 130
7-6-4. Quitting Multi-file Transfer . 133
7-6-5. Notes on Using Multi-file Transfer Sub Commands 134
7-7. Free 137
7-8. List 139
7-9. Data Arrangement in Memory 144
7-10. Time 145
7-11. Initializing 148
7-12. Deletion 151
7-13. Rename 155
7-14. Protect 158
7-15. NC Program Input/Output Function Using MS-DOS Format Floppy Disk 162
7-15-1. Specifying MS-DOS File Names 162
7-15-2. MS-DOS Operation Mode 163
7-15-3. DIR (directory) 164
7-15-4. COPY (copying) 166
7-15-5. RENAME (renaming) 169
7-15-6. DELETE (delete) 171
7-15-7. FREE (free) 173
7-15-8. PROTECT (protect) 174
7-15-9. Quitting MS-DOS 176
7-15-10. Character Codes 176
7-15-11. Miscellaneous Supplements 177

8. TAPE PUNCH INTERFACE 178

8-1 . Parameter Settings 178
8-2. Operating Procedure 184
 1.

P-(iv)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

8-3. Tape Format 188

8-3-1. Input Format 188
8-3-2. Output Format 189
8-3-3. EIA Special Codes 190
8-4. Specifications 192
8-4-1. RS232C Interface 192
8-5. Connection to Peripheral Devices 196
8-5-1. BTR System (No DC Codes) 196
8-5-2. DC Code Control 199
8-5-3. DC Code Control TYPE2 202
8-5-4. Slave Station Function 205
8-6. Example Punch Connections 209
8-6-1. FACIT 4070 210
8-6-2. FACIT N1000 211
8-6-3. KYORITSUSHA - ALL Models (Tape Punch) 212
8-6-4. KYORITSUSHA - Accumulator D60 213
8-6-5. CITIZEN -7652NC 214
8-6-6. CITIZEN - CRP-2500 215
8-6-7. CASIO - 650NC, 750NC 216
8-6-8. JBM - PR30 217
8-6-9. NEC DATA TERMINALS - NDT-9501 218
8-6-10. TANAKA BUSINESS MACHINES - PT-30RS 219
8-6-11. TANAKA BUSINESS MACHINES - PT-30RP 220
8-6-12. FANUC-PPR 221
8-6-13. MIKUNI TOKUSHU KIKI - CF30, CF10 222
8-6-14. TAKAHASHI DENKI - HFD-35 223
8-6-15. ANRITSU - DPT610A 224
8-6-16. ACC SYSTEM - PT-PR 225

9. OSP FORMAT I/O FUNCTION 226

9-1. Floppy Disk Drive 226
9-2. Operation Overview 229
9-2-1. Operation Commands 231
9-2-2. Types of Floppy Disk , 232
9-2-3. Sector Devices . 233
 P-(v)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

9-3. Guide to Operations 234

9-3-1. Initialization of Floppy Disks 234
9-3-2. Deleting Specified Files 236
9-3-3. Renaming Files 237
9-3-4. Floppy Disk Directory 237
9-3-5. Free Area in Floppy Disk 237
9-3-6. List of the Specified File 238
9-3-7. Reading from a Tape Reader 238
9-3-8. Punching Out the Specified File 239
9-3-9. Verifying Programs Punched to Paper Tape 239
9-3-10. Saving Program Stored in Memory to Floppy Disk 240
9-3-11. Transferring Programs from Floppy Disk to Memory 240
9-3-12. Protecting Floppy Disk Files 241
10. DIRECTORY-SELECTION-BASED FILE OPERATION FUNCTION 242
10-1. File Processing 242
10-1-1. Procedure for Executing File Processing 242
10-1-2. Method for Creating Commands 243
10-1-3. Command Execution 246
10-1-4. Operation Transition 247
10-2. Creating and Editing Commands 248
10-2-1. Command Creation Screen 248
10-2-2. Operation of the Edit Pointer 249
10-2-3. Editing Modes 250
10-2-4. Deleting Characters 251
10-2-5. Notes on Creating and Editing Commands 252
10-3. Use of the Command History 254
10-4. Selecting Files From Directories (OSP Format) 255
10-4-1. Procedure for Selecting Files from Directories 255
10-4-2. Directory Selection Screen 256
10-4-3. Cursor and Page Operations 256
10-4-4. Function Keys [F6] (RETURN), [F7] (CANCEL) and Cancel Key 258
10-4-5. Effects of the Editing Modes 259
10-4-6. Method for Displaying Directories 260
 .„JL

P-(vi)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

10-5. Selecting Files From Directories (MS-DOS Format) 263

.
10-5-1 Procedure for Selecting Files from Directories 263
10-5-2. Directory Selection Screen (for MS-DOS Format Devices) 264
10-5-3. Changing the Directory 265
10-5-4. Function Keys [F6] (RETURN), [F7] (CANCEL) and Cancel Key 266
10-5-5. Method for Displaying Directories 267
11. PANEL DISPLAY SCREEN 269
11-1. Status Display 269
11-2. Actual Position Display 270
11-2-1.RELATIVE ACT POSIT Screen 274
11-3. Program Display 281
11-4. Block Display 283
11-5. ATC Tool Setting Data Display (Memory-Random ATC Specification) ... 286
11-6. Message Display (optional) 287
11-7. Check Display 288
11-7-1. Field Net I/O 290
11-7-2. Panel Input 291
11-7-3. Panel Output 291
11-7-4. Machine Input 292
11-7-5. Machine Output 292
11-7-6. NC Input 293
11-7-7. NC Output 293
11-7-8. NC Specification Codes 294
11-7-9. Machine Specification Codes 294
11-7-10. NC Axis Data 295
11-7-11. Machine Axis Data 296
11-7-12. Diagnostics 297
11-7-13. System Variables 298
11-7-14. DNC (optional) 303
11-8. Run Guide Display 305
12. FUNCTIONS AND OPERATIONS IN AUTOMATIC MODE OPERATION 308
12-1. Main Program Selection and Operation 308
12-2. Schedule Program Selection and Operation 315
12-3. Cycle Start and Slide Hold 318
12-4. Resetting NC 321
 P-(vii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

12-5. Sequence Search and Mid-Start 322

12-6. Return Search and Sequence Restart 324
12-7. Sequence Stop (optional) 327
12-8. MDI Operation 329
12-9. Single Block 332
12-10. Optional Block Skip 333
12-11. Program Branch 333
12-12. Optional Stop 333
12-13. Mirror Image 334
12-13-1. Mirror Image in the Work Coordinate System 336
12-14. Override 339
12-15. Manual Intervention During Automatic Operation and Restart 341
12-16. Inserting Pulse Handle Operations 343
12-17. Lock Functions 344
12-18. Dry Run 345
12-19. Operation End Light (optional) 345
12-20. Operation End Buzzer (optional) 345
12-21. Error Light (optional) 346
12-22. Auto Power Off (optional) 346
12-23. Library Program Registration 347
12-24. Work Counter (optional) 349
12-25. Hour Meter (optional) 350
12-26. F1-Digit Feed (optional) 351

13. MANUAL OPERATION FUNCTIONS 352

13-1. Manual Axis Feed Functions 352
13-1-1. Manual Rapid Feed 352
13-1-2. Manual Cutting (Jog) Feed 353
13-1-3. Manual Pulse Feed 354
13-1-4. Crossrail Control 355
13-2. Spindle Operation 356
13-3. Indexing Swivel Head (Indexing Attachment) 358
13-4. ATC 359
13-4-1. ATC Operations 359
13-4-2. Manual Tool Change 367
13-4-3. Manual Magazine Operation 368
 P-(viii)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

13-4-4. Manual Tool Change in Automatic Mode Operation 370

13-5. APC 371
13-5-1. APC Operation 371
13-5-2. Automatic APC Operations 373
13-5-3. Manual APC Operations .. 374
13-6. Other Functions 382

SECTION 3 PARAMETERS 384

1. KINDS OF PARAMETERS USED BY OSP7000M 384

2. PARAMETER TABLE BY FUNCTION 385

3. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER AND SETTING PROCEDURE 393

3-1. Common Variables 393
3-2. User Parameters 395
3-3. G/M Code Macro Setting 397
3-4. Machine User Parameter (Long Word) 399
3-5. Machine User Parameter (Word) 401
3-6. Machine User Parameter (Bit) 405
3-7. NC Optional Parameter (Long Word) 412
3-8. NC Optional Parameter (Word) 421
3-9. NC Optional Parameter (Bit) 433
3-10. Unit Systems for Programming 459
3-11. Machine axis parameter 460
3-12. Machine System Parameter (Long Word) 469
3-13. Machine System Parameter (Word) 473
3-14. System Parameter 480
3-15. Pitch Error Compensation 495

SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES 498

1. NC OPERATION PANEL 498

2. MACHINE OPERATION PANEL 499

3. PULSE HANDLE 500

4. OPTION PANEL 501

 P-(ix)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

5. MANUAL TOOL CHANGE OPERATION PANEL FOR OSP7000M 502

5*1. Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MC-40VA/50VA/60VA) 502
5-2. Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MC-400H/500H/600H/800H) 502
5-3. Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MDB-A/B, MCV-A/B) 503
5-4. Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MDB-A/B, MCV-A/B) 503
6. MAGAZINE MANUAL OPERATION PANEL 504
6-1 . Magazine Manual Operation Panel 504
6-2. Magazine Manual Operation Panel 504
6-3. Magazine Manual Operation Panel (Double Column) 505
7. PARALLEL TYPE 2-PALLET APC OPERATION PANEL 506
7-1 . Parallel Type 2-Pallet APC Operation Panel (MC-40VA/50VA/60VA) 506
7-2. Parallel Type 2-Pallet APC Operation Panel (MC-500H/600H/800H) 506
8. ROTARY TYPE 2-PALLET APC OPERATION PANEL 507
9. ROTARY TYPE MULTI-PALLET APC OPERATION PANEL 508
9-1 . Rotary Type Multi-pallet APC Operation (with Setup Station) 508
9-2. Rotary Type Multi-pallet APC Operation (without Setup Station)
— 508
10. ATTACHMENT OPERATION PANEL 509
11. LIST OF G CODES 510
12. LIST OF MNEMONIC CODES 515

13. LIST OF M CODES 516

 3754-E P-1-R2
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION

SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION

1. FEATURES
(1) Multiple Main CPU System Permits CNC Growth
The multiple main CPU system of the OSP7000/OSP700 allows it to use up to seven “engines" (main
CPUs).

a) In order to ensure that it will not lag behind machine tools as they become ever faster and
more accurate, the OSP7000/OSP700 features compatibility with sophisticated functions and
high cost-performance.
b) Due to the configuration of the main CPU, the CNC can grow, giving it the flexibility required to
suit different machine models and specifications.
(2) Compactness and High Reliability
Compactness and high reliability have been achieved by remodeling the hardware; innovations include
the adoption of a new generation “flash" memory, and surface-mounting.
One of the cornerstones of the OSP technical concept - the ability to change the software - has been
made possible by the flash memory. Our clients can add the functions of their choice to the NC system
even after delivery.
(3) Expansion of Standard Specifications
The high cost-performance means that more sophisticated functions can be offered. The following
specifications are featured as standard:
3.5" floppy disk drive
MS-DOS format I/O function
RS-232C interface
(4) User-friendly Operation Panel
User-friendliness was a priority in the development of the operation panel.
a) Design
The design emphasizes functional side faces, the display screen is easy to see, and the color
scheme and tastefulness accentuate the high-class impression of the equipment.

b) Improved key operation

In order make operator interactions with the machine easier, the sheet that overlays the keys has
been embossed.

(5) Compatibility with OSP5020M

Part programs created on an OSP5020M or OSP500*M-G can be used at an OSP7000M/OSP700M
without alteration.
 JL

3754-E P-2-R2
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION

(6) New Function “Machining Management Function" - History Management Function

The machining management function provides powerful back-up to ensure that the exceptional
functions of the OSP7000M/OSP700M can be used efficiently. It is intended to assist with profitable
small-lot production of a variety of workpieces and production of a variety of workpieces in variable lot
sizes.
a) Slashed set-up time
Since part data changes in small-lot production are becoming increasingly frequent, we have
attempted to speed up these part data changes by establishing an operating procedure that does
not depend on the floppy disk format and in which the operator simply selects a file name from a
directory.
Details of the work involved in setup (work instructions) can be displayed on the display screen.

b) Ascertaining the latest production status

The machining status and operating status can be displayed in real time on the screen of the NC
unit.
c) Slashed down time
The information required for troubleshooting can be output accurately, promptly, and in a form in
which it can be used, i.e., a hard copy output from a printer or data output to a floppy disk.
 .JL

3754-E P-3
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION

2. EXPLANATION
This manual describes how to operate the OSP7000M and gives precautions that should be observed.
Please read this manual carefully and follow the operating procedures that it contains. For greater
understanding, this manual should be read in conjunction with the Programming Manual forthe OSP7000M,
as the two manuals are very closely related.
Machine improvements made after this manual was written may occasionally result in discrepancies
between the manual and the machine.
 -it

3754-E P-4-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

SECTION 2 OPERATION
1. OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS

1-1. Type of Operations

The machine operation modes are largely classified into the following three modes:
(1) Auto mode

(2) MDI mode

(3) Manual mode

The following are the preparatory operations:
(4) Program operation

(5) Parameter setting

(6) Origin setting

(7) Tool setting data

It is possible to select either mode (1) or (2), and to execute any of the preparatory operations (4) through (7)
even while the NC is operating. For details, refer to 6-1, “Mode-Select Keys".

1-2. Operation Panel Description

Five types of operation panels are used:
(1) NC operation panel (with display screen)

(2) Machine operation panel

(3) Option panel

The machine operation panel, differs depending on machine specifications.
The option panel is equipped with an hour meter, and switches for rotating lamps, buzzers, lights, etc. Some
of these switches are also dependent on model specifications.
 -L

3754-E P-5-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

1-2-1. NC Operation Panel

(1) Display screen (2) MODE selection key (3) STATUS display lamps

VA
ll OKUMAOtPTCOO |
X A (10) Character keys
BSBBBBBB
m
H (7) BS key
H
C3ag7EEC3 a (8) Cancel key

®©(D(Z) [is] (9) WRITE key

lll§ ©®0® 0
CED (HIHD CED (H3 © CEL) dU ©®®o rr
/ ©fil ®0®Q "
7
(12) Function keys (5) Page keys (6) Operator keys
(4) Cursor keys (11) Ten keys

Fig. 2-1 NC Operation Panel

 ...1.

3754-E P-6-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(1) Display screen

The display screen can display 64 characters x 24 lines.
It shows actual position, part program, part program block, reference zero coordinates, tool offset
values, parameter data, alarm, and others.
The display contents are determined by the selected operation mode, active operation step, and
pressed function key (F1 through F8).
The basic display format is shown below:
1st line:
Mode currently selected (guide display) _ _

2nd line: Alarm contents

3rd line to 18th line: Data

19th line to 22nd line:

Console lines (display of Input data)

23rd line to 24th line:

Effective function of respective function keys,
J_ _T | [

000GDCD0CEXID
Fig. 2-2 Basic Display of Display Screen

(2) MODE Selection Keys

The MODE selection keys are divided into two groups:
Group 1: AUTO, MDI, and MANUAL
Group 2: EDIT AUX, PARAMETER, ZERO SET, and TOOL DATA
Required operation mode can be selected in each of the groups above. When a.key corresponding to
the mode required is pressed, the lamp lights at the upper left corner of that key. It goes off when
another operation mode is selected.
(3) STATUS Display Lamps
The status display lamps indicate the NC operation conditions.
 3754-E P-7-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) Cursor Keys

These four keys are for moving the cursor on the screen.

Move the cursor upward. p CURSOR -| Move the cursor downward.

Move the cursor to the left. Move the cursor to the right.

(5) Page Keys

These two keys are used for changing the displayed page.

Page return

Page advance

<5©
(6) Operator Keys

o Subtraction (minus or hyphen)

o Addition (plus)

© Multiplication (or asterisk)

© Division (or slash)

(7) BS Key
The BS (backspace) key erases the last character entered sequentially, every time it is pressed. This
key is also used for the directory and list displays.

(8) CANCEL Key

Press the CANCEL key when erroneous data has been entered. Each time this key is pressed, a line of
input data entered is erased.
(9) WRITE Key
Press this key to select the operation mode or setting he data in the MDI mode.
 JL.

3754-E P-8-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(10) UPPER CASE Key

To input a character at the upper right corner of a key, use the UPPER CASE key (for OSP7000M).

0000[|300@ To input character press

©zztzzzzr
the D key while holding
down the UPPER CASE
key.

(11) Ten Keys

0000000ÿ
(12) Function Keys
There are eight function keys on the NC operation panel. When the operator selects the desired
operation mode, the display screen displays the necessary operation functions at he bottom line. Each
function corresponds to a function key (F1 through F8). Select the function to execute and press the
corresponding function key.
The display screen provides guide of operative steps corresponding to the sequence of operation. The
operator can proceed with the intended operation simply by pressing function keys according to the
guide messages line on the display screen.
 3754-E P-9-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

1-2-2. Machine Operaton Panel

Controls described below are provided on the machine operation panel.
The arrangement differs depending on machine models. Refer to the appended drawings.

(1) The following are the NC-related controls.

a) Cycle start

b) Slide hold
c) Reset

d) Sequence restart
e) Single block

f) Optional stop

g) Block skip
h) Program branch 1 (Block skip 2)

i) Program branch 2 (Block skip 3)

j) Axis command cancel

k) STM lock
I) Machine lock

m) Dry run

n) Manual intervention off (or manual intervention)

o) Manual intervention on (or manual intervention)

p) Mirror image X
q) Mirror image Y

r) Mirror image Z

s) Mirror image 4
t) Pulse handle shift
u) Interlock release
v) Cycle stop
 3754-E P-10-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) The following are the axis-related controls.

a) Manual feed axis selection, X, Y, Z, pulse handle ON

b) Rapid feed in the positive direction
c) Rapid feed in the negative direction

d) Cutting feed in the positive direction

e) Cutting feed in the negative direction

0 Cutting feed off

g) Rapid feedrate overrride

h) Cutting feedrate override

i) Manual cutting feedrate

(3) The following are the spindle-related controls.
a) Spindle CW rotation
b) Spindle CCW rotation

c) Spindle stop

d) Spindle orientation
e) Release

f) Spindle override
(4) The following are the ATC/APC-related controls.

a) Operation/display selection (ATC/APC selection)

b) One cycle start

c) Return cycle start

d) One step advance

e) One step retract

f) Interlock release
g) Status display
Active step, next step, actual position, sequence number, run, starting conditions
(Status information is displayed on the display screen.)
 3754-E P-11-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) The following are the peripherals-related controls.

a) Coolant
b) Oil mist

c) Nozzle type air blower

d) Adaptor type air blower

e) Through-the-tool coolant

f) Work lamp

g) Chip conveyor

h) Slideway lubricating oil

i) Shower coolant

j) Display screen off

(6) In addition to the above, the spindle load ammeter, position encoder display, and panel lock are
available.
 3754-E P-12
SECTION 2 OPERATION

2. PROGRAM CREATION

2-1. Program Tape Format

The following is the general part program format for the OSP.
Tape
file
Program section

l Feed
holes,
$ File
name
%
C L 0 Program
R F name R
M Program
end
C L
R F
%
1
Feed holes
/ \
Tape start
start block

Program start
end block

Tapoond
holes

Since the OSP is capable of managing flies, store them in the part program. Presented below is the file name
format.

$ Main file name Extension

16 characters 3 characters
or less

For details, refer to Section 18, “File Management” in the Programming Manual for OSP7000M.
One EOB (CR) character may be used in lieu of CR and LF used in the ISO code. In the ISO code, CR may
be omitted.
The program section must begin and end with a percent (%) code.
On the OSP, three types of programs are handled. Presented below are their tape formats:
(1) Schedule Program

Program section

l $A. SDF % R F
C L
N001—PSELECT
1 END
C L
R F %
?
h Program
end block

No program name may be stored into the schedule program. The program end block must contain
END.
 .1.

3754-E P-13
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Main Program

Program section

C L C L M02 or c L „
$A. MIN % R p 01000 R F N001 M30 R F
%

Program
end block

The program end block must contain M02 or M30.

(3) Subprogram

Program section

$A. SUB % R F
C L C L
03000 R F N001
I RTS
C L
R F %

Program
end block

The program end block must contain RTS.

2-2. Characters Available in Tape Code

ISO or EIA code may be applied to the part program for the OSP. Note that there are available and
unavailable characters, and that there is no interchangeability between ISO and EIA codes. Presented in the
next page is a list of available characters. Specification of the characters not covered in the list trigger an
alarm or simply be ignored depending on the setting of the NC optional parameter (bit) No. 1, bits 6 and 7.
For details, refer to Section 3, “PARAMETERS”.
Among characters and codes used on the OSP, those indicated below are not specified in the EIA code.
They should be set by NC optional parameter (bit) matching the puncher to be used.

Codes Parameter No.

27
28
*( 29
] 30
$ 31
# 49
 3754-E P-14
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Example: Suppose the puncher key “[ ]” is determined for punching the “=” code, and that the
arrangement of punched holes by this key operation is as below.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Channel

O O O o O O

Feed hole

Set this arrangement of punched holes by a “1” and a “0”, where “1” indicating a punched hole and “0” a
position not punched. Setting will be as below:
01011011
Set this at the No. 27 of NC optional parameter (bit). Repeating the same operations, set all the codes used
on the OSP.
 -I...

3754-E P-15
SECTION 2 OPERATION

EIA/ISO Code Chart

BA Cod* ISO Code

Remade*
8 7 e 8 4 3 2 1
N?3
ary 8 7 6 S 4 3 2 1
mol»r \
0 O O Numerical character 0
0 O
1 O 1 O O O O Numerical character 1
O 2 O O O O Numerical character 2
2
3 o O O 3 O O O o Numerical character 8
O 4 O O O O Numerical character 4
4
s o o o 8 O o O o Numerical character 8
e [o lo o e [o o oO
7 ooo 7 o oO O o o Numerical character 7
8 O 8 O O O O Numerical characters
9 oo o 9 ooo o
A oo o A o o
B oo O B O o AlphabaSoal character B

c ooo oo c oo oo
D O O O D O O AlphabaSoal character 0

E ooo o o E O o O O E
F ooo oo F oo oo
o oo ooo O o ooo Q

H oo o H o o
I oooo o I o o o o
J o o o J oo o o
K o o o K o o oo
L O O O L O O O o AlphabaSoal character L
M o o o M o o o o
N O O O N O o oo AlphebeScal character N

0 O O O 0 O O O O O O AlphabaSoal character O
(program number or program name)
p o o ooo p lO o AlphebeScal character P
Q o oo o oo o o
R o o o R oo o o
8 O O O 8 O o oo AlphabaSoal charaolar 8

T O O O T O O O O AlphebeScal character T

U O O O U O O o o AlphabaSoal character 0
v o O O V O O O O
w o oo w oo o oo O
X oo ooo X oo oo
Y ooo Y o oo o
z o o o z o oo o
 -JL

3754-E P-16
SECTION 2 OPERATION

BA Cod* ISO Cod*

8 7 6 8 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 S 2 1

OOO o o O o Ptu*8ign

O O O o O Minus Sign
/ O O O I O O O O O O Block Mato or DMaion Symbol
BLANK NULL Nti
SPACE O SPACE O O Spawn
TAB 0 0 0*00 HT O O Tab
ER O OO % O O O O Program Start
cwEoa O NULF O O End of Block
CR O 0*0 O Carriage Ratumn
OO O O O O 0*00
O O O O O O O 0*0 Comma
DEL o o o o O O O DEL OOOOO O O O
BS o o o BS O o Back Spawn
6 0*00 4 o o oo

( oo o ( o o ConW Out (Start of Commant)

) o o 0 ) o o o o Control In (End of Commant)
8 O 0 Ddar Symbol (Conlnulng Block)
O O O O Symbol of MuNpfcaflon
O 0 0 0*0 O Equality Sign
7 ooo ooo Question Mark
c O O O O O O Bracket. Left
) O O O O O O Bracket Right
: OOO O Colon (Program Name of Number)
; o ooo oo Semicolon
*1 Ignored whan used as cutting data.
 3754-E P-17
SECTION 2 OPERATION

2-3. Parity Check

Two types of parity checks, TV and TH, are conducted during the reading of a part program tape or in a verify
operation.

®o

E o<

1 block TV check

(1) TH Check (Horizontal Parity)

This function checks if the number of holes per character of the machining tape is correct, and also
checks for EIA if the number of holes is odd and for ISO if the number of holes is even. The DEL code
which has eight holes does not cause a parity error.

(2) TV Check (Vertical Parity)

This function checks if the number of characters, including LF (ISO) or CR (EIA) which constitute one
block, is an even number. It may be selected whether or not this check should be carried out by the NC
optional parameter (bit) No. 1, bit 2. For details, refer to 6-6, “Parameter Setting”.
The check is applied to all the characters including comments.
In the TH check, it may be estimated whether the machining tape to be read is composed of ISO or EIA
code characters and it may be selected whether or not automatic recognition should be conducted, by
means of the NC optional parameter (bit) No. 1, bits 0 and 1. For details, refer to SECTION 3,
“PARAMETERS”.
 ,iL

3754-E P-18
SECTION 2 OPERATION

3. TAPE READER HANDLING

FLOPPY OISK DRIVE

'a Lights when there is

a PTR error.
RESET button
o-
a (B)

(A)

o o
°l°
w#DO \ OFF /

Fig. 2-3 Tape Reader

Operation Procedure:
(1) Insert the tape into the tape winder as shown in the diagram.

(2) Push (A) upward.

(3) Set the tape leader section in the tape reader.

(4) Move (B) downward to hold the set tape.

(5) Set the tape winder switch to “ON”.

At this point, reading by the tape reader may begin.
If an out-of-synchronization error occurs while reading the tape, the PTR ERROR lamp will light, press
the reset button.

[Supplement] : Turning on the tape winder switch after setting the tape on the winder may cause the set
tape to be cut. Therefore, check that there is no slackness in the tape when turning on the
tape winder switch.
' Use either black or gray tape. To prevent reading errors, never use tapes of other colors.
(2) Place the tape in the tape reader with the white arrow pointing left.
(3) Place the tape feed portion preceding the first % (ER) code.
 3754-E P-19
SECTION 2 OPERATION

4. FLOPPY DISK HANDLING

4-1. Precaution of Floppy Disk Handing

0.

»(i'r--
+

Do not bring close to magnets. Never touch the magnetic surface.

t 1
D
A
on
o

Do not twist or fold. Always insert accurately.

Fig. 2-4 Cautions on Handling Floppy Disk

(1) When not Using the Floppy Disk

a) Place the floppy disk in the floppy disk storage box.

b) The floppy disk storage box should be placed into a moisture proof bag or box made of plastic
or vinyl. In addition, avoid storing it in high temperature, high humidity or in direct sunlight.
c) Never leave it lying around on the machinery.
 3754-E P-20
SECTION 2 OPERATION

4-2. Floppy Disk Drive Operation

Lamp

ID
7 D \(B) (A)

Fig. 2-5 Floppy Disk Drive Operation

a) Press (A) as shown in the above diagram and insert the floppy disk. Pay attention to the side
of the floppy disk faces, when inserting. When the inserting floppy disk face is incorrect, it can
not be inserted to the end of the slot.

b) When the floppy disk is inserted correctly, reading of the floppy disk begins.

c) Press down (B) to remove the floppy disk from the slot.

A CAUTION : (1) Check that a floppy disk is not in the disk drive when cutting off the power.
(2) The indicating lamp will light when reading/writing the floppy disk (not light only for inserting
the floppy disk).
 ~L

3754-E P-21-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

5. POWER ON/OFF AND INSTALLING NC CONTROL SOFTWARE

5-1. Power ON/OFF: Systems and Settings

5-1-1. NC Power ON Procedure

(1) Turn ON the no-fuse breaker at the side of the control box.

z
OFF ON

Turn ON breaker.

(2) Turn the MODE switch at the machine’s control panel OFF.
(This switch is normally OFF.)
I—INSTALL I —
INSTALL MODE INSTALL START

ON Q
SYSTEM RESET

OFF
Q
\
Turn OFF INSTALL MODE switch

(3) Press the CONTROL ON button located at the left edge of the machine panel. Now, the CPU is
energized, and the following message is displayed on the display screen:
SBPLJ *-i-i ***,
MEMORY i_i TEST
**
I_I :L_J 0000
| CONTROL ON
AXIS SELECT

\
LOAD SYS
QCONTOOCOFF 00@
/V>6*PI0

+
Press the CONTROL ON
RESTART

RAPID
'W * OVERRIDE

OOOR INTERLOCK

s o
'o,
i (TO)
 -i.

3754-E P-22-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) System software is loaded from the memory disk (FR).

(5) After completion of loading, control is passed to the system software, and all control software
expressed as POLLOAD.SYS is loaded from the memory disk (FR).
The file name is displayed on the display screen as it is loaded.

(6) After the completion of the above steps, control is passed to the NC control software, all files
having an extension PBU (power off backup) is loaded from the memory disk (MD).

(7) After the power is turned on, initial setting is made for peripherals connected to the OSP before it
starts running as the NC. During this initial setup period, the display screen displays the following
messages.
The message displayed varies depending on the machine specification.

d) PBU FILE ON LOADING

e) TAPE CONVERT ON LOADING

f) IGF DATA ON INITIAL PROCESS

g) GRAPHIC DATA ON INITIAL PROCESS
h) EC PROCESSOR ON INITIAL PROCESS
i) SERVO PROCESSOR ON INITIAL PROCESS
(8) The actual value is displayed in the display screen and the AUTO mode is established: the NC is
ready for normal procedure. AXIS SELECT
| CONTROL ON
5-1-2. NC Power OFF Procedure

(1) Press the CONTROL OFF button on left

side of the machine panel.

(2) Turn OFF the no-fuse breaker at the side

OCONTROLOFF
EG® 'VXSAPID

of the control box.

RESTART

CAUTION :
-
lf Punchers and printers are connected,
RAPID
the above operations must be carried 'W % OVERRIDE

out after they are de-energized.

Press the CONTROL OFF DOOR INTERLOCK

o
i(TB)
°j

/V ) Data such as t001 ,en9th offset, cutter radius compensation, the work coordinate system
CAUTION
-
'

origin, and parameters are backed up by the memory disk (MD) for certain time periods.
If, right after the data is changed, the power is turned off, this may result in the data
remaining unchanged.
(2) In that case, data is changed if power is turned off after execution of the backup command.
The operation procedures are given in 6-3-4, (1) “Back Up Commands”.
 .X

3754-E P-23-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

5-2. Emergency Stop

For emergency stop, press the EMG.STOP button located on the machine operation panel or the side of
control box.
All drive power excluding NC CPU power supply is turned off and an emergency stop alarm message is
displayed at the display screen.
Once the EMG.STOP button is pressed, it remains engaged and power supply cannot be turned on.
The EMG.STOP button remains engaged once pressed, and the power cannot be switched ON. To cancel
the EMG.STOP status, turn the switch in the direction indicated by the arrow. After the switch has returned
to its original position, press the POWER ON button.

I EMOSTOPI

Press EMG.STOP.

5-3. System Reset

Pressing the SYS.RESET button causes the CPU to be reset in a hardware fashion on control soft-ware to
be started from the top (the address 0).
The SYS.RESET button is to be pressed when:

(1) starting control software installing,

(2) operation as NC is required after the completion of installing.

(3) a return to normal NC operation is required because of the occurrence of a hardware related alarm,
and
(4) the system program is started.
|— INSTALL
INSTALL MODE
— |
INSTALL START

ON O
SYSTEM RESET

OFF
Q
[Supplement] : For the control supporting the MOP-TOOL specification, turn off the power supply once
and then turn it on again for the reset operation or the reset operation for (2), (3) and (4).
 3754-E P-24
SECTION 2 OPERATION

5-4. KEY-LOCK Type Switch

Since the switches on the NC operation panel are flat, a key-lock type switch is provided lest the adjacent
keys are pressed or erroneous operation is caused even when keys are inadvertently hit.
The following are the mode restrictions and contents:

(D I
All the controls on the NC operation panel are operative.
(2) PL
The operation of the controls on the NC operation panel except EDIT/AUX (program operation) and
PARAMETER keys are operative.
(3) O
No controls on the NC operation panel are operative.

[~NC~l NC PANEL
I
 -I.

3754-E P-25-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

6. DATA SETTING
Explanation in this section concentrates on the NC operation panel for OSP7000M.

6-1. Mode Selection Keys

MODE selection keys

\
iJL OKUMAQ8P7000 | [ (ÿ|TrM]CgD(ÿ]CW](7SS)

0BS0BS00
30000
H H i IN II K II L
0 II P II Q II R II S
30000
03 E
'Mills ©©©© E
(?i](K)(ra]C«ICD©(E)©
m ©0@©
®o©0 r
r

Fig. 2-6 Mode Selection Keys

The mode selection keys are classified into two groups, operation mode and data setting mode.

(1) Operation Mode

a) AUTO
Selects the operation mode in which a program stored in the memory disk (MD) is read out to the IC
memory and executed.

b) MDI
Enter block commands to control machine operation.

c) MANUAL
Permits manual operation with the machine operation panel or pulse handle operation box.
 3754-E P-26-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Data Setting Mode

d) EDIT/AUX
This is the mode for reading, editing,punching-out, and printing out the program, operating the tape
reader, and managing files.

e) PARAMETER
Parameters and variables, including system parameters, user parameters, common variables, NC
optional parameters, machine system and user parameters, are set.
f) TOOL DATA
Used to set tool data such as tool length offset values, cutter radius compensation values, tool
numbers for automatic tool change operation, tool management data and tool number and tool pot
number correspondence data.
g) ZERO SET
Select this mode for setting the zero offset value.

- Pressing any of the mode operation selection keys will light the lamp in the key.
- If the mode is switched from any of the operation modes to the data setting mode, the lamp in the selected
operation mode key starts flashing. This allows the operator to recognize the selected operation mode at a
glance.

- Once program execution is started in the AUTO mode or MDI mode, switching the mode to Data Setting
Mode, such as EDIT/AUX, PARAMETER, TOOL DATA, and ZERO SET, will not interrupt the program
execution. Therefore, program editing, tape punching-out, tape reading-in, parameter setting, zero
setting, tool data setting and other data setting operations are possible during stored program execution.

- When program execution halts in the AUTO mode operation, while data setting operation is being carried
out, due to Single Block ON or Program Stop command, it is necessary to press the CYCLE START button
after switching the mode to AUTO to continue the AUTO mode operation.

- Switching the operation modes in the following sequence will reset the control:
a) From manual to auto or MDI

b) From auto or MDI to manual

c) When the mode is switched from manual to the data setting mode, although the control is not reset,
it is reset when any operation is selected after that.

IMH: (1) When the data has been set, the new data is stored in memory after two to three minutes
have passed. Therefore, if the power is turned off immediately after the data has been
set, the data may not be updated as desired.
(2) Before turning off the power supply and after setting the data, backup the data following the
procedure explained in 6-3-5. “Back Up Command”.
 -A

3754-E P-27-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

6-2. Data Setting

Here is a list of parameters for data setting, together with their contents.

Sub Entry Axis Data Elements Internal

Category Subcategory subcategory Type Type Unit Data
Standard Optional Type
Work Microns; Linear 4 20 Inch system 4-byte
coordinate integer axis 50 Metric system integer
origin Rotary 4 20 Degrees 4-byte
axis 50 integer
Tool data Tool data Tool length Microns; Linear 50 100 Inch system 4-byte
offset integer axis 200 Metric system integer
300
Cutter radius Microns; Linear 50 100 Inch system 4-byte
compensation integer axis 200 Metric system integer
300
ATC tool Integer 2-byte
number integer
ATC pot No. & Integer No. of tool pots in 2-byte
tool No. magazine integer
Tool Integer 50 100 2-byte
management 200 integer
data 300
Parameter Common Microns; 128 8-byte
variable integer floating-
point
data
System Travel end Microns; Liner 2/1 axis Inch system 4-byte
parameter (NC) limit integer axis Metric system integer
Rotary 2/1 axis Degrees 4-byte
axis integer
Pitch error Microns; Liner 2/1 axis Inch system 4-byte
compensation integer axis Metric system integer
range Rotary 2/1 axis Degrees 4-byte
axis integer
Pitch error 2-byte; Liner 1/1 axis Inch system 4-byte
compensation integer axis Metric system integer
interval Rotary 1/1 axis Degrees 4-byte
axis integer
Number of 2-byte; Liner 1/1 axis Inch system 4-byte
pitch error integer axis Metric system integer
compensation Rotary 1/1 axis Degrees 4-byte
points axis integer
Zero return 2-byte; Liner 1/1 axis Inch system 4-byte
operation integer axis Metric system integer
execution Rotary 1/1 axis Degrees 4-byte
sequence axis integer
 -t

3754-E P-28-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Entry Axis Data Elements Internal

Sub
Category Subcategory Type Type Unit Data
subcategory Standard Optional Type
Parameter System In-position 2-byte; Liner 1/1 axis Inch system 4-byte
parameter (NC) width integer axis Metric system integer
Rotary 1/1 axis Degrees 4-byte
axis integer
Home position 2-byte; Liner 32/1 axis Inch system 4-byte
integer axis Metric system integer
Rotary 8/1 axis Degrees 4-byte
axis integer
Machine Microns; Liner 1/1 axis Inch system 4-byte
coordinate integer axis Metric system integer
system origin Rotary 1/1 axis Degrees 4-byte
axis integer
Machine system Integer 60 2-byte
parameter integer
(word)
Machine system Integer 60 4-byte
parameter integer
(long word)
Machine user Integer 40 2-byte
parameter integer
(word)
Machine user Integer 40 4-byte
parameter integer
(long word)
Machine axis Microns; Liner 24 Metric system 4-byte
parameter integer axis integer
Rotary 24 Degrees 4-byte
axis integer
User parameter Programmable Microns; Liner 2/1 axis Inch system 4-byte
(NC) travel limit integer axis Metric system integer
Rotary 2/1 axis Degrees 4-byte
axis integer
G-60 Microns; Liner 1/1 axis Inch system 4-byte
over-passing integer axis Metric system integer
amount Rotary 1/1 axis Degrees 4-byte
axis integer
Backlash Microns; Liner 1/1 axis Inch system 4-byte
integer axis Metric system integer
Rotary 1/1 axis Degrees 4-byte
axis integer
Machine user Bit string 320 bits 1-byte
parameter (bit) integer
G/M code Simple call Character 10 4-byte
macro integer
Axis move call Character 10 4-byte
integer
 3754-E P-29-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Sub Entry Axis Data Elements Internal

Category Subcategory subcategory Type Type Unit Data
Standard Optional Type
Parameter Program name Character 4 4-byte
integer
Pitch error Integer Liner 384 2-byte
compensation axis integer
Pitch error Integer Rotary 384 2-byte
compensation axis integer
NC optional Integer 64 4-byte
parameter integer
(long word)
NC optional Integer 64 2-byte
parameter integer
(word)
NC optional Bit string 480 bits 1-byte
parameter (bit)

(1) The following parameters are not allowed to be set because there is no display screen display
unless “1" is set in bit 7 of the NC optional parameter (bit) No. 16.
(1) All system parameters

(2) Machine system parameter (word)

(3) Machine system parameter (long word)

(4) Machine axis parameter

(5) NC optionalparameter (long word) (from No. 32 onward)

(6) NC optionalparameter (word) (from No. 32 onward)

(7) NC optional parameter (bit) (from No. 17 onward)

(8) The unit system for data setting can be set at NC optional parameter (bit) No. 9.
 3754-E P-30-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

6-3. Data Set Commands

The data set commands are detailed in the following pages, and may be classified into three groups:
commands for data setting, commands for parameter selection,
and input/output commands for peripherals.

6-3-1. Commands for Data Setting

This group consists of three commands:
SET, ADD, and CAL

(1) SET Command

RRRRRHRB
0000CL1CZ)©®
SP

nnnHHHi
®@®© 0
MM, 0®®0 0
®@®0
CED dUo © (re) (w) [ft] (EE) MM ®Q®0 B
b) Key in data.
a) Press function key [F1] (SET).
c) Press WRITE.

Fig. 2-7 SET Command

The data entered itself is a command serving as new data. In parameter setting, the SET command is
effective when function key [F1] is pressed, and displays “S” on the 21st line on the display screen.
Data setting is then carried out only when data is entered and the WRITE key is pressed.
 JL

3754-E P-31-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) ADD Command

|A OKUMAOaWOOO | SG™l CSDIffiCSD (ÿ)

00000000
0000CZ10CZ)©

l o )| P JLQJLRJLS TJUIIM
0000GE cze
®(D(D© (?s
@©©© 0
©©©©CD©®©
jm ®©@© r
“
®Q©0

b) Key in data.
a) Press function key [F2] (ADD).
c) Press WRITE.

Fig. 2-8 ADD Command

The data entered is added to the current data to form a command serving as new data.
In parameter setting, the ADD command is effective when function key [F2] is pressed, providing a
display of “AD” on the 21st line on the display screen.
Data setting is then carried out only when data is entered and the WRITE key is pressed.
 3754-E P-32-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) CAL Command

| rss~i rr™iran nsnnssn |

rrrinTirTfsrTr;

Si
MIW)IX][Y1ZJULis
®©®0 [is
©©©©
©@®0
Hi)Cs) ® ® (S)(S)@ a® ®Q©0 E
b) Key in data.
a) Press function key [F3] (CAL).
c) Press WRITE.
“C" appears here.

Fig. 2-9 CAL Command

An arithmetic operation is carried out between the data entered and the current value to form a
command serving as new data for setting.
In parameter setting, the CAL command is effective by pressing function key [F3], providing a display of
“C” on the 21st line on the display screen.
Data setting is then carried out only when data is entered and the WRITE key is pressed.
 3754-E P-33-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

6-3-2. Commands for Parameter Selection

This group consists of six commands:
ITEM, SEARCH, AXIS CHANGE, CURSOR, PAGE and EXTEND

(1) ITEM Command

|1 OKUMA O8P70QQ | CED tH3 cm Cffl cÿ)(ÿ)

H II i ll J || K || L II M II N m
V || W II X || Y II Z
®©00 (BS
©0©©
dD[e)(ra)CE3(H]IH)(2)Cal ©00© \~
""
©O©0

Each time function key [F7] (ITEM j) is pressed, the

screen display switches to the next category.
Each time function key [F6] (ITEMf) is pressed, the
screen display switches to the preceding category.

Fig. 2-10 ITEM Command

This command is intended to select an appropriate parameter from those belonging to the
subcategories in the table given in 6-2, “Data Setting”.
In data setting, the ITEM command is carried out when function key [F6] or [F7] is pressed. Each time
one of these keys is pressed, the display screen display is switched over to the preceding or next
subcategory items.
“IP or “IB" is displayed on the 21st line on the display screen and the screen display is switched over.
 3754-E P-34-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) SEARCH Command

| rasp (mi nan res8) nsnrssan j

gggggggg
0000GO00I3
£)(Z)G][3£](I)0©
0000000(7
0®EM3QL®
@©®© ©
m ©@®0 ©©©© 0
[fT] (F2) (F3) (F£) (FF) [re] (R) (FS}
7 ®G©0 a
a) Press function key b) Key in a parameter
[F4] (SEARCH). number.
“R” appears here. c) Press WRITE.

Fig. 2-11 SEARCH Command

In the subcategory group, which involves several data elements, the screen display is, sometimes,
greater than one page. This SEARCH command, engaged by function key [F4], may be conveniently
used to set the cursor with ease, although it is possible to place the cursor at the desired data using the
Page key and the Cursor key.
Operating procedure is given below:

a) Press function key [F4].

This produces display of “F on the 21st line on the display screen.

b) Key in a data number on the keyboard.

Display of “F is followed by this particular data.

c) Press the WRITE key.

This allows the cursor to be positioned at the data number specified. If the desired data No. is not
displayed at the current screen, switch to the appropriate screen, then move the cursor to the data
No. in question.
 .A.

3754-E P-35-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

If there is nothing corresponding to the data number entered, the cursor is then positioned as follows:
a) When smaller
The cursor is positioned at the first data.
b) When greater
The cursor is positioned at the last data.
The screen for setting bit type data (machine user parameter (bit), NC optional parameter (bit)) allows
the simultaneous setting of both parameter number searching and parameter number setting.
a) Press function key [F4].

b) Key in the parameter number.

c) Key in a comma (,).

d) Key in a bit number.

e) Press the WRITE key.

(3) AXIS CHANGE Command

| HUM ||«.T.M1| a ||'TSJ1| UMT |fSw|

00000000

00000000
00000000
®©®(7) (BS
©@©@ E
Q®@© r
CEDGDCfD CED © (ID ® CED MM ®O©0
7
7
Each time function key [F5] (AXIS CHANGE) is pressed, the
“AX" appears here. screen is switch over to the next axis display. _

Fig. 2-12 AXIS CHANGE Command

In data setting, if there is a parameter of axis type, the 5th and 6th axes cannot be displayed on the same
screen. The AXIS command is intended to switch the screen from one display to another.
Since the pitch error compensation data may be displayed on one axis per screen, the commandis used
for axis selection. Depending on the options, the 4th and following axes may or may not be displayed.
When function key [F5] is pressed, “AX” appears on the 21st line on the display screen, resulting in a
screen switch.
 3754-E P-36
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) Cursor Keys

ll OKUMA08P7QOO | SCH3 CSD ® SlÿJ

gggggggg
A || B || C
H ][ ill J
SB Z)®@
FjlGljKj

oi(p](Q
S0S(7]E)CZ)C)@
88
®(D®(D (i
©©©© E
E) (ED(ED d±] © (ED (ED(ZD
•MJ ®O©0

Cursor keys
Page keys

Fig. 2-13 Cursor Keys

Move the cursor in the arrow-pointed direction, where the cursor stays at only the points including data
to be set. When, for example, the cursor is at rest at the extreme left, press the cursor key (ÿ) ; this
brings the cursor to the data element located at the extreme right. When the cursor is at the extreme
right, press the cursor key @
; this brings the cursor to the data element located at the extreme left. A
similar relationship exists between the cursor keys @and @
.
(5) Page Keys

© When the (Eg) key is pressed, the screen advances one page in the same category only.
(®)
When the key is pressed, the screen returns one page in the same category only.
 .1

3754-E P-37
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(6) EXTEND Command

l JL OKUMA 06P700Q | I HUH H«.T.H1| 88 ll"Sg*1l um

BBBBBBBB
0EJ00|T|00§
ramciraatiras

®©(D© g
SSI ©©©©
w ©©©©
(n)(ra)(ra][M)[re)[ra)|n][re|
7
©il ©O©0 B
“EX” appears here. Press function key [F8] (EXTEND).

Fig. 2-14 EXTENDED Command

Data setting involves many commands, which cannot be displayed at the same time (there are eight
function keys available). The EXTEND command is intended to switch command displays.
Function key [F8] provides a display of “EX” on the 21st line on the screen, resulting in a switched
command only.
6-3-3. Input/Output Commands for Peripherals
This group consists of two commands: READ, PUNCH and VERIFY.
(1) READ Command
This command is used to read a variety of setting related data from a paper tape or from another
designated device.

C L
% R F p_ _ (X_ Y _
Q )..!
C L
R F
C L
R F %

Feed holes P No. Q No. Data Feed holes

The format of paper tape is shown above:
The P and Q must be specified, and are related to data setting as follows: P and Q specify the category
and subcategory. Axis data is specified by X, Y, and Z, and the data not related to an axis is specified by
R.
P and Q numbers are modal. It is not necessary to reprogram if the number is the same as the one
programmed previously.
Both ISO and EIA codes may be used as conventional programs as the coding system.
 L.

3754-E P-38-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

The relationship of data setting, P numbers and Q numbers, is as indicated below.

Category Subcategory PNo. Q No. Remark

1 to No. of work coordinate

__
Work coordinate 100
system origin systems _
Tool data Tool length offset 200 1 to No. of offsets
Cutter radius compensa- 210 1 to No. of offsets
tion
1 to Largest tool pot
Tool management number 220
number
No. of tool management 230 1 to No. of offsets
number
Parameter Common variable 300 1 to 128
1 to 40 : real
System parameter 400 1 to 56 41 to 56 : integer
(Note)
User parameter 410 1 to 32
1 to No. of compensation
Pitch error compensation 600 (Note)
points. _
NC optional parameter 700 1 to 64 1 to 32 : user
_
(long word) 33 to 64 : system
NC optional parameter 1 to 32 : user
710 1 to 64
(word) _ 33 to 64 : system
1 to 16 : user
NC optional parameter (bit) 720 1 to 60
17 to 60: system
Machine user parameter 800 1 to 40
(long word) _
Machine system parameter 810 1 to 60 (Note)
(long word) _
Machine user parameter
(word) _ 820 1 to 40

(word) _
Machine system parameter 830 1 to 60 (Note)

Machine user parameter 840 1 to 40

(bit)
Communication 900 1 to 11 Optional
Parameter Byte
NC hour meter NC hour meter 910 1 to 4 Optional
NC hour meter setting 911 1 to 4 Optional
NC work NC work counter 920 1 to 4 Optional
counter NC work counter setting 921 1 to 4 Optional

[Supplement] : System parameters, pitch error compensation data, machine system parameters (long
word) and machine system parameters (word) are effective only when NC optional
parameter (bit) No. 16, bit 7 is “1” (interlock released).
 JL

3754-E P-39-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Operating procedure is given below:

a) Press PARAMETER, TOOL DATA or ZERO SET.

\
| JL OKUMAOSP7QOO ] rÿsn prrsi fBgÿrag”! rcas~i nusn j
\
fflFfflfom
afTirafDirBSN

®®®0 0
ipi ©©©© E
I© ©I ©0®©
HD © © HDHDHDHD CEE)
7
®O©0 §
7
d) Press function key b) Press function key
[F1] (READ). [F8] (EXTEND). e) Press WRITE.
“R" appears here.
Fig. 2-15 Reading the Data from Tape

n) Press the PARAMETER, TOOL DATA or ZERO SET key.

o) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND).

This displays the READ (F1) command.

p) Set a paper tape for data setting on the tape reader so that the leading feed holes come to the
reader.

q) Press function key [F1] (READ).

This displays “R” on the 21st line on the display screen.
Next, enter the device name and the file name.
r) Press the WRITE key.
This allows the paper tape to advance, so that the data on the tape is sequentially read and set.
Note that the tape reader stops when an error occurs during the setting and the display screen shows
the message below:
read continuing? (Y/N)l
Press Y or N key. Keying in “Y” permits the tape reader to continue reading. The entry of “N” aborts the
read command.
 3754-E P-40
SECTION 2 OPERATION

If the designated device is a sector device, a search will be conducted for the designated file name, and,
if found, reading of that file will begin. If the file is not found, an error will occur and operation will be
ended.
“5376 Data file not found”
* The tape reader is an optional device. If there is no tape reader, the tape reading operations
described in items (3) and (5) above will be impossible.
(2) PUNCH Command
This is a command to punch various data required for data setting on the paper tape or from another
designated device. Paper tape format is the same as with the READ operation. This command allows
setting data to be stored on a paper tape.
Tape format is the same as indicated in (1), “READ Command”.
Punching out data under special conditions are shown below:
R_ Normal data
R/0 Empty
R/1 + overflow
R/2 - overflow
R/3 + underflow
R/4 - underflow
When the data of the type indicated above is entered, the same condition is set. Operating procedure is
shown as follows:

a) Press PARAMETER, TOOL DATA or ZERO SET.

\
|X OKUWOSP7QOO | rwi rrnn [ a nws-1nan psan

SBBSBSBS

GZ)®G)(Z)E)(ZD©
©©©© (iD
©©©© 0
(ÿ3[B)(DtE)Cg)[g)(g)[p) M ®8!§Q
7 Z ri
c) Press function key d) Key in a P No\
[F1] (READ). b) Press function key
“R” appears here. [F8] (EXTEND). e) Press WRITE.

Fig. 2-16 PUNCH Command

 3754-E P-41-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

s) Press the PARAMETER, TOOL DATA or ZERO SET key.

t) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND)

This displays the PUNCH [F2] command.

u) Press function key [F2] (PUNCH).

This displays “PU" on the 21st line on the display screen.
v) Enter the device name following “PU",the following names are usable.
If a sector device is designated, a search will be conducted for the relevant sector device, and a
check will be conducted to determine if a file of the same name already exists. If a file of the same
name is found, a “File exists, over write? (Y/N)l* message will be displayed. Enter “Y" to execute
overwriting, or “N” to cancel the punch operation. A “Comment input” message will be displayed,
requesting any comments which may be required regarding the punch data. Enter a comment if
necessary. If no comment is required, nothing should be entered.
* Parentheses marks “(“ and ”)” cannot be used in the comment. If used, an error will occur.
“5320 Wring character”
w) Press the WRITE key.
The prompt “parameter No.l” then appears.

PARAMETER SET

DATA TAPE PUNCH MENU*

P NO. ITEM P NO. ITEM

100 ZERO OFFSET 700 OPTIONAL PARAMETER (LONG WORD)

200 TOOL LENGTH OFFSET 710 OPTIONAL PARAMETER (WORD)
210 CUTTER RADIUS COMP 720 OPTIONAL PARAMETER (BIT)
220 TOOL MANAGE NO. 80O MC USER PARAMETER (LONG WORD)
230 TOOL MANAGE DATA 810 MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (LONG WORD)
300 COMMON VARIABLE 820 MC USER PARAMETER (WORD)
400 SYSTEM PARAMETER 830 MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (WORD)
410 USER PARAMETER 840 MC USER PARAMETER (BIT)
600 PITCH ERROR COMP

•EX
•PU TT:
_
Please Input message !
»ameter No. i

READ PUNCH (VERIFY BACKUP I (EXTEND]

Use the (©) and (eg) keys to display P Nos. from “900” (2nd page).
 3754-E P-42
SECTION 2 OPERATION

an) From the menu, select the item number of the parameter data to be punched. The data entry
format is as below:

P No. (A) - PNo. (B) Q No. (A) - Q No. (B)

Entry of a P and Q number should be made without characters P and Q. Use a delimiter when a
Q number is entered following a P number.
When a range of P numbers or Q numbers is to be specified, the P number (B) or the Q number (B)
must be larger than the P number (A) or the Q number (A), respectively.
For the data entry, see examples below:
Example 1: Punching out all tool length offset data
parameter No. I200 [or 200-200]

Example 2: Punching out all the data from tool length offset to common variable
parameter No. I200-300

Example 3: Punching out No. 8 data of tool length offset data

parameter No. I200, 8 [or 200, 8-8]

Example 4: Punching out No. 8 data of parameter data from tool length offset data to common
variable data
parameter No. I200-300, 8

Example 5: Punching out tool length offset data within a required range, from No. 2 to No. 8,
for example
parameter No. I200, 2-8
Example 6: Punching out within a required range of parameter data from tool length offset
data to common variable data
parameter No. I200-300, 2-8
ao) Press the WRITE key.
The data within the selected range is punched out from the specified output device.

ap) After the completion of punching out the desired data, the parameter No. I is displayed again.
Repeat the steps f) and g) to punch out all the required data.

aq) Finally, press only the WRITE key.

The percent (%) code and the trailing feed holes are punched out on the paper tape, thus ending the
data punch mode. The display mode is also restored from the punch menu to the originally selected
mode.

[Supplement] : When the NC optional parameter (bit) No. 54 bit 3 is set to “0”, only one data item can be
specified for punching.
 3754-E P-43
SECTION 2 OPERATION

6-3-4. Verify
The VERIFY operation occurs in the same manner as the READ operation. The data which is read is not
determined by the parameter settings. There may be cases when an error occurs even though the numeral
displayed at “Parameter Set” is the same as that at the verify data. However, this is due simply to the fact that
the number of digits following the displayed numeral are being held by the OSP, and there is no actual error.
A “tolerance” designation can be made at the VERIFY operation as follows:
DV Device name; file name; numeric value
By entering the optional tolerance (numeric value) designation, an error will not occur even if a data
mismatch occurs, provided that part of the parameter data which is read is within the tolerance range. Only
positive integers can be designated as tolerance values. The tolerance system-of-units varies according to
the parameter types being compared. Regarding data items with decimal points (system parameters, user
parameters, zero offset, tool data, etc.), comparison will begin from the smallest displayed numeral
(following decimal point). Optional parameter words and long parameter words, etc., have no decimal
points, and are therefore compared as they are.
If the data error value exceeds the tolerance range, the following error message will be displayed:
5375 DATA VERIFY ERROR “MISMATCH LINES”
The following parameters (including the tolerance value) are compared during the VERIFY operation:
PNo.
100 Zero offset
200 Tool length offset
210 Cutter radius compensation
400 System parameter (excluding home position return order data)
410 User parameter
600 Thread pitch offset
700 NC optional parameter (long word)
710 Optional parameter (word)
800 Machine user parameter (long word)
810 Machine system parameter (long word)
820 Machine user parameter (word)
830 Machine system parameter (word)

6-3-5. Omitting the File Name and Device Name

- If the device name is not specified at the READ and VERIFY operations, the setting will be determined by
optional parameter word No. 104 (initial value: 0, setting range: 0-11).
The devices which correspond to the setting values are shown below.
(This parameter setting becomes valid when power is switched ON.)

Setting Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Device Name TR CN0 CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 MD0 MD1 FD0 FD1 FD2 FD3

The “CN0” device name shown above represents the same device as the “TT” (teletyper) name.
 3754-E P-44-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

- If the device name is not specified at the PUNCH operation, the setting will be determined by optional
parameter word No. 103 (initial value: 0, setting range: 0-11). The devices which correspond to the setting
values are shown below.
(This parameter setting becomes valid when power is switched ON.)
Setting Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Device Name CNO CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 PP MDO MD1 FDO FD1 FD2 FD3
The “CNO” device name shown above represents the same device as the “TT” (teletyper) name.
-
If the file name is not specified, a default file name will be designated according to operation function and
device in question.
The default file name is “A.TOP”. This function features separate default values for the file and extend
names. If only the extension name is omitted, it will be designated as “.TOP”.
6-3-6. Other Commands
_ The QSP7000M has other commands as explained below:
A
CAUTION : Back Up Command
Data such as tool length offset, cutter radius compensation, origin of work coordinate systems and
parameter except system parameter is backed up to memory disk (MD) in a preset interval.
Therefore, turning off the power to the control right after renewing the data will cause the data to
stay as it was without being updated.
The execution of the back up command will update the data even when the power is turned off.
Operating procedure is shown below:
(1) Press the PARAMETER, ZERO SET or TOOL DATA key.
(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND). The display will then be as follows:

--
PARAMETER SET

VARIABLE* (VC )
NO. NO. NO. NO.
1 11 0 21 0 31 0
2 0 12 0 22 0 32 0
3 0 13 0 23 0 33 EMPTYC*)
4 0 14 0 24 0 34 EMPTYC*)
5 0 15 0 25 0 35 EMPTYC*)
6 0 16 0 26 0 36 EMPTYC*)
7 0 17 0 27 0 37 EMPTYC*)
8 0 18 0 28 0 38 EMPTYC*)
9 0 19 0 29 0 39 EMPTYC*)
10 0 20 0 30 0 40 EMPTYC*)

X Y Z
ACT POSIT (WORK) -43.524 -30.656 -2970.419
A-Mtd

-EX
•BA

READ FUNCH VERIFY BACKUP [EXTENDI

“ = BA" is displayed. fTTl fTT) fTTI fF~D fF~5l fF~6~) fF~7l (TIT)

displayed.__
After the completion
of backup, “ = " is c) Press the function key
[F7] (BACKUP).
b)Press the function
key [F8] (EXTEND).
(3) Press function key [F7] (BACKUP).
“= BA" appears on the console line and back up is continuously executed. After back up completion, “="
will appear on the screen.
Now, all the data has been backed up and the power to the control may be turned off at any time.
 ...11.

3754-E P-45-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

6-4. Zero Set Commands

6-4-1. Work Coordinate System Origin
This is the origin of the work coordinate system viewed from the origin of the machine coordinate system.
There is 1 standard set and 20, 50 or 100 optional sets available.

Yd Ym YW1 Ywa
2k Tool*
X1 Xj

Local coordinate
2k Xw3
' system zero
(Set by user) Y3
/-
c-
Work coordinate system Xw1
/ zero (Set by user)
Y2
Machine coordinate system zero Xm
' (Set by maker)
Y,

Position encoder zero point

Xd

Y,: Machine zero offset amount

Y2: Work zero offset amount

Fig. 2-17 Work Coordinate System Origin

A function called the machine coordinate system origin has been implemented. After the position detector is
replaced, all that remains is to set another machine coordinate system origin, without having to set all of the
work coordinate system origins (and others) at new values. This may be applied to soft-limits, thus helping to
reduce the jobs required after the position encoder is replaced.
How to set the work coordinate system origin as follows:

(1) Press the ZERO SET key.

This changes the display screen to Zero Set display.

(2) The amount displayed on one screen covers up to 10sets; to see any remaining sets, if 20, 50 or
100 optional sets are selected, press the page key (K) to see on and after 11 set. One full screen
of display covers up to four axes. Function key [F5] (AXIS CHANGE) should be pressed to see the
remaining axes. When the desired screen appears, move the cursor to the particular data element.
 3754-E P-46
SECTION 2 OPERATION

ZERO SET

ZERO* lmm
HO. X Y 2
1 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 0.000 0.000 -1000.000

HI
3 45.000
* 1003.000
5 1004.000
6 1005.000
7 1006.000
8 1007.000
9 1008.000
10 1009.000

X Y Z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 1004.300 2067.100 47.100
A-Mtd

-S45.
-S 32.

SET ADD I CAL I SEARCH | C EXTEND]

nr~H(TTT(Tÿ(TTirFT1ITin(TTirF~sT

(3) Setting
a) When the offset of the work zero (origin of work coordinate system) is known, press function
key [F1] (SET) and enter that work zero offset. (The entry data is X2 and Y2 on the previous
drawing.)

b) When the work zero has been set and it serves as the reference of further offset, press
function key [F2] (ADD) and enter the distance of the position to be set as viewed from the
preset position.

c) When it is necessary to set the work zero offset which causes the present actual machine
position to be the new desired actual position, press function key [F3] (CAL) and enter the new
actual position data. (In the previous drawing, key in and Y4, to set X2 and Y2.) The entered
data is displayed on the 21st line of the screen.

(4) Press the WRITE key.

This updates the data indicated by the cursor.
Note that a appears before the number of the work coordinate system which is currently selected.
[Supplement] : Local coordinate systems are effective only in programming.
 J.

3754-E P-47
SECTION 2 OPERATION

6-5. Tool Data Set Commands

6-5-1. Tool Length Offset and Cutter Radius Compensation
Tool offset or compensation has been incorporated since the tip position is dependent on tool type. Tool data
consists of length offset and cutter radius compensation. The system offers 50 standard data elements (No.
1 to No. 50) and 100 (or 200 or 300) optional data elements. (No. 0 is limited to 0.)
Data is set as follows:
Before executing steps (1) and (2), set the zero offset of the tool axis. Mount the tool for setting. Manually
align the tool tip with the reference surface. Press function key [F3] (CAL) and key in the data, which consists
of the axis name, the direction, and the current position as viewed from the origin, on the keyboard. Note,
here, that the axis name represents the axis parallel to the axis on which the tool rotates (X,Y, and Z-axis).

(1) Press the TOOL DATA key.

This displays the tool data. If the ATC tool number is displayed, press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM).
This changes the display to the tool data screen.

(2) One page of display covers 20 sets of tool length offset values and as many sets of cutter radius
compensation values. If desired data is not seen on the page, operate the page keys or the [F4]
(SEARCH).

TOOL DATA SET

—
NO.
1
2
_LENGTH OFFSET*

5.000
NO.
11
12
(H~)

0.000
-41.230
NO.
1
2
R COMP* (D )lmm

50.000
20.000
NO.
11
12
0.000
12.500
3 0.000 13 0.000 3 0.000 13 0.000
4 -43.750 14 136.914 4 0.000 14 0.000
5 0.000 15 0.000 5 10.000 15 0.000
6 -10.154 16 -28.654 6 5.000 16 0.000
7 0.000 17 0.000 7 0.000 17 0.000
8 45.970 18 0.000 8 10.000 18 0.000
9 0.000 19 0.000 9 0.000 19 0.000
10 36.474 20 -92.030 10 0.000 20 0.000

Z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 1004.300 2067.100 47.100
A-Mtd
-IF
•IF
•IF

SET ADD CAL SEARCH ITEMt ITEM! I [EXTEND]

After obtaining the page displaying the desired tool data, position the cursor at the desireddata element.
 3754-E P-48-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Setting
a) When the tool data is known, press function key [F1] (SET) and enter tool data on the
keyboard.
b) When the tool data has been set and the change amount from the set data is known, press
function key [F2] (ADD) and enter the change amount.
c) Tool length offset
Before carrying out the above steps (1) and (2), set the zero offset of the toolaxis. Mount the tool for
setting.
Manually align the tool tip with the reference surface.
Press function key [F3] (CAL) and key in the data, which consists of the axis name, the direction,
and the current position as viewed from the origin. Note, here, that the axis name represents the
axis parallel to the axis on which the tool rotates (X-, Y- and Z-axis).
Generally, the axis name is Z-axis.
Example: CAL Z 10.5
CAL Z -20.5
(4) Press the WRITE key.
The data is set at the position indicated by the cursor.

Note: The tool offset numberpresently selectedis identifiedby an asterisk (') appearingright before
that tool offset number.
6-5-2. ATC Pot No/Tool No. Table
Memory-random ATC Specification:

MS : In the memory-random ATC system, the tool set in the spindle is returned to the magazine
toolpot of the tool to be set in the spindle next. Therefore, the correspondence between the
tool number and the pot number will change each time the tool change cycle is carried out.
This requires the initial correspondence between the tool number and the magazine pot
number to be stored in the control memory after setting all the tools in the magazine.
In addition, since the use of a large-diameter tool will cause an interference with adjacent tools, the
control must be capable of recognizing a large-diameter tool so that the toolpot which
accommodates one is placed between the pots having dummy tools or no tool. That is, the
large-diameter tool must be returned to the toolpot originally stored.
A large-diameter tool is distinguished from other conventional tools based on tool diameter as
shown below:
MC-50VA
MC-40VA [40VB]
MC-60VA
Less than 95 mm dia. (3.74 in.) Less than 135 mm dia. (5.31 in.)
Conventional tool [110 mm (4.33 in.)] _
95 mm dia. (3.74 in.) 135 mm dia. (5.31 in.) or larger
Large-diameter tool [110 mm (4.33 in.)] or larger
 3754-E P-49-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Setting of the correspondence between the tool number and toolpot number is made in the following two
ways:

(1) The table listing the original correspondence between the tool numbers and toolpot numbers should
be made beforehand on the display screen. After that, the tools are set in the toolpots in
accordance with the correspondence table data.

(2) Tools are set in the spindle and they are returned to the magazine in the manual tool change
operations. In this case, the toolpot where the tool in the spindle is to be returned may be specified
or the one automatically selected may be used, as required.
Explanations in this section cover the procedure indicated in (1). For the procedure of (2), please refer
to SECTION 4, 2-4, “ATC”.
Setting:

, TOOL BATA SET *ATC POT NO./ TOOL HO. TABLE*

POT TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL

NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO.
1 802 11 Oil 21 D 31 031
z
3
ns
003
12
13
012
013
22
23
022
023
32
33
032
033
4 004 14 014 24 024 34 034
5 005 15 015 25 025 35 035
6 006 16 016 26 026 36 036
7 007 17 017 27 027 37 037
8 O08 18 018 28 028 38 038
9 009 19 019 29 029 39 039
10 010 20 028 30 030 40 040

X Y Z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 1004.300 2067.100 47.100
A-Mtd
•IF
-IB
•S
*
SET SEARCH ITEMt ITEM1 j CEXTEND3

(T~r~irFÿiTiriiTT)fFin(TinrFTiiTTr)

Fig. 2-18 Tool Data Offset (ATC Pot No/Tbol No. Table)

(1) Press the TOOL DATA key.

(2) Press function key [F7] (ITEM J).

The CRT will display the page of “*ATC POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE*”

(3) Locate the cursor at TOOL NO. position of the POT NO. for which the tool number is to be set.

(4) Press function key [F1] (SET).

“S I_I
” will be displayed on the console line. (“L_. " indicates the space.)
 ..X

3754-E P-50-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) Key in the desired tool number through the keyboard.

a) Conventional tool Su 1

b) Large-diameter tool Su 7, L

c) Dummy tool SI_J D

d) For clearing tool number SI_I

e) Planer tool (optional) Su6,P

*
f) Heavy tool (depending on the machine type) S i_i 5, M

g) Press the WRITE key.

This sets the correspondence between the tool number and the toolpot number.

[Supplement] : 1. The symbols “-4” and “»" appearing in the POT NO. column indicate the position of
the corresponding toolpot.
-4 : Tool change position with A TC
» Manual tool change position

2. The range of toolpot numbers which can be set is from “1" to the magazine capacity
(the number of tools accommodated in the magazine).
Standard Specifications:
MC-40VA 20 tools
MC-SOVA 20 tools
MC-60VA 20 tools
MC-400H 32 tools
The usable number of tool numbers is identical to the programmable number of tool
offset numbers.

3. For a large-diameter, setting is allowed only when the two adjacent toolpots are
assigned with no tool number or dummy tool code, “D". An alarm occurs if either of
two adjacent toolpots is assigned with an actual tool number.
The setting of a large-diameter tool in a toolpot automatically sets dummy tool code,
“D”, at two adjacent toolpots.

4. In case the tool number already used is again entered for a new toolpot, an alarm
occurs.
5. Any attempt to set a tool number for a toolpot which has a dummy tool in it causes an
error. In this case, cancel the dummy tool code by entering code. Note that the
dummy tools placed in the adjacent toolpots for the one accommodating a
large-diameter tool should not be cleared. A dummy tool may be placed between two
large-diameter tools as a common dummy tool.
 ...I..

3754-E P-51
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Fixed Address ATC Specifications:

To select a tool from the tools in the magazine using a tool number command, it is necessary to set the
correspondence between the tool numbers and the toolpot numbers.
If an interference occurs between the tools stored in the two adjacent toolpots due to their diameters, set the
safety adaptor in toolpots at both sides of the toolpot which holds a large-diameter tool. This prevents an

_ _
occurrence of interference between the tools during tool setting operations.
Setting:

, TOOL DATA SET POT NO./ TOOL NO. TABLE*

POT TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL

NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO.
1 002 11 011 21 D 31 031
2 tSM 12 012 22 022
023
32 032
33 033
3 003 13 013 23
4 004 14 014 24 024 34 0.34
5 005 15 015 25 025 35 035
6 006 16 016 26 026 36 036
7 007 17 017 27 027 37 037
8 008 13 018 28 028 38 038
9 009 19 019 29 029 39 039
10 010 20 020 30 030 40 040

X Z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 1004.300 2067.100 47.100
A-Mtd
•IF
•IB
*
SET | SEARCH ITEMt ITEM I [EXTEND!
rrriiTÿrririiTzifFTnnHnfTÿrFiri
(1) Press the TOOL DATA key.
(2) Press function key [F7] (ITEM J).
The CRT will display the page of “*ATC POT NO/TOOL NO. TABLE*”.
(3) Locate the cursor at the TOOL NO. position of the POT NO. for which the tool number is to be set.
(4) Press function key [F1] (SET).
The CRT will display “S” on its console line. ( L_I indicates the space.)
(5) Key in the desired tool number through the keyboard.
a) Tool number Si 1 1 _
b) Safety adaptor Sÿi D

c) For clearing tool number S i—i

d) Planer tool (optional) SI_I 6, P *
e) Heavy tool SL_. 1,M

(6) Press the WRITE key.

This sets the correspondence between the tool number and the toolpot number.
[Supplement] : 1. If the tool number already used is again entered for a new toolpot, an alarm occurs.

2. An attempt to set a tool number for a toolpot which has a dummy tool in it causes an
error. In this case, cancel the dummy tool code by entering and set.
 3754-E P-52
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Clearing/Setting Tool Numbers:

it is possible to clear tool numbers set on the “ATC POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE” screen at one time, or to set
tool numbers which correspond to toolpot numbers (having same numbers) on the “ATC POT NO./TOOL
NO. TABLE" at one time.
Note tool numbers can not be set at one time unless the correspondence between toolpot numbers and tool
numbers are all cleared.
Operating Procedure

(1) Clearing tool numbers

a) Press the TOOL DATA key.

b) Press function key [F7] (ITEM i).

The CRT will display the page of “ATC POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE”.

c) Key in “TCAN” through the keyboard and press the WRITE key.
The following message will be displayed on the screen.
Tool table initialize OK? (Y/N)

d) Key in “Y” and press the WRITE key to clear tool numbers.
Key in “N” and press the write key to cancel clearing tool numbers.

(2) Setting tool numbers

a) Press the TOOL DATA key.

b) Press function key [F7] (ITEM 1).

The CRT will display the page of “ATC POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE”.

c) Key in “TSET” and press the WRITE key.

[Supplement] : When an attempt is made to set tool numbers without clearing the correspondence
between toolpot numbers and tool numbers, no data will be set.
 3754-E P-53
SECTION 2 OPERATION

ATC Magazine Pot Number Display:

The following display allows the operator to check the correspondence between the registered cutting tools
and the magazine pots. On this display page, setting is not possible.
Operations:

TOOL DATA SET NO./ ATC POT NO. TABLE*

TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL POT

NO. NO. NO. NO. NO.
001 2 011 11 021 NA 031 31
002 1 012 12 022 22 032 32
3 013 13 023 23 033 33
004 014 024 24 034 34
>005 5 015 15 025 25 035 35
006 6 016 16 026 26 036 36
007 7 017 17 027 27 037 37
008 8 018 18 028 28 038 38
009 9 019 19 029 29 039 39
010 10 020 20 030 30 040 40

Z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 1004.300 2067.100 47.100
A-Mtd
•IF

1 | I I ITEMf | ITEfU |[ EXTEND]

r?rirrrirrrirFT)rrÿfFTi(TTirF~8ÿ

L: Indicates a large-diameter tool.

P: Indicates a planer tool.
: Indicates the tool number of the tool in the spindle (active tool number)
*
» : Indicates the next tool.
When function key [F7] (ITEM 4) is pressed on the ATC POT NO./TOOL NO. TABLE screen, the TOOL
NO./ATC POT NO. TABLE screen will be displayed.
Since the number of cutting tools is identical to the number of tool offset pairs, it is not possible to display all
tool numbers (for a total of 40 tools) on one display page. Press the page key to change the display page.
 3754-E P-54
SECTION 2 OPERATION

6-5-3. ATC Tool Number (Fixed-Address ATC Specification)

With the fixed-address ATC specification, the active and/or next tool can be changed when any of the
following operations has been executed.

- The tool in the spindle has been removed manually using the switches/buttons on the magazine manual
operation panel.

- A tool has been manually set in the spindle using the controls on the magazine manual operation panel.

- The next tool number has been input erroneously.

Note however this operation is allowed only if is absolutely necessary. If ATC operation is interrupted, use
the 1 STEP ADVANCE, 1 STEP RETURN, and RETURN CYCLE START keys on the machine operation
panel to restore the interrupted operation.

(1) Active Tool

This indicates the tool currently set in the spindle.
If the tool has been removed manually from the spindle using the switches/buttons on the magazine
manual operation panel, set “0” at ACTIVE TOOL.
To return a tool to the ATC magazine, first set the tool in the spindle using the switches/buttons on the
magazine manual operation panel, set the active tool number, and then press the 1 CYCLE START key
on the machine operation panel. This returns the tool to the ATC magazine.
In this case, the ATC sequence number must be “1”. This means the magazine pot number to which the
tool is returned must be set at the active tool number.
Note that setting of the next tool is possible only when the ATC sequence number is “1”.

(2) Next Tool

This indicates the tool to be replaced with the tool currently set in the spindle.
This setting is used to change the next tool number which has been entered erroneously. In this case,
simply set the correct tool number.
“0” cannot be set as the next tool number. If it is necessary to clear the next tool, select the MDI
operation mode, enter TOO or M63, and press the CYCLE START button.
Note that setting of the next tool is possible only when the ATC sequence number is “1”.

(3) Return Tool

During automatic tool change operation, the tool set in the spindle is taken as the return tool when it is
removed from the spindle by the tool change arm. This means the active tool number becomes the
return tool number and the active tool number is cleared to “0”. Then, the tool change arm swings and
sets the new tool in the spindle. At this moment, the next tool number is cleared to “0” and the next tool
number becomes the active tool number.
The return tool number can be displayed but cannot be set.
 3754-E P-55
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Procedure to set tool numbers:

(1) Select the TOOL DATA SET mode.
(2) The TOOL DATA SET screen has two different pages: the ATC TOOL NO. page and the TOOL
DATA page. The screen can be switched between these two pages by pressing function keys [F6]
(ITEM t) and [F7] (ITEM 4).
Cursor

TOOL DATA SET

/ÿATC TOOL NO.*

NEXT TOOL
ACTIVE TOOL
RETURN TOOL 002

X Y Z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 1004.300 2067.100 47.100
A-Mtd
-IF
•IB
-S 3
y

SET ITEMt I ITEM1 I C EXTEND]

(TTiiT~2yr~T)rFÿfF'TniTTnfFÿiTir)

Entry data
Press the function key [F1] (SET).

(3) Move the cursor in the vertical direction and place it at the desired data position (cursor cannot be
moved in the horizontal direction.)
Press function key [F1] (SET) and key in the desired tool number. The keyed-in number will be
displayed on the 21st line of the screen.
For MCM
When setting the actual tool number, it is necessary to designate whether the tool is set in the vertical
spindle or the horizontal spindle.
a) Data to be entered
Vertical spindle : tool number
Horizontal spindle : tool number, H
Entry of the data in other format will cause an error. The spindle types designation not matching the
spindle presently selected sill also cause an error.
Example:
[F1] (SET) 6 : for vertical spindle
[F2] (SET) 8H : for horizontal spindle
 3754-E P-56-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

b) Display
When tool numbers for the horizontal spindle are displayed, character “H” will be displayed
following the tool number. For the vertical spindle, only the tool numbers will be displayed.
(4) Press the WRITE key.

6-6. Parameter Setting

To perform NC operations, for example positioning, program editing, and so forth, data such as axis travel
ranges, tape output code, and others, are predetermined for each individual function. However, there are
cases in which these data needs to be changed in accordance with the change in operation conditions.
The data elements used to control NC functions are called parameters.
The parameters can be classified into 15 types as indicated below. Parameter setting screens can be
displayed as needed by pressing function keys [F6] (ITEM t) and [F7] (ITEM I) in the parameter setting
mode.

(1) Common variable

(2) User parameter

(3) G/M code macro

(4) Machine user parameter (long word)

(5) Machine user parameter (word)

(6) Machine user parameter (bit)

(7) Machine system parameter (long word)

(8) Machine system parameter (word)

(9) NC optional parameter (long word)

(10) NC optional parameter (word)

(11) NC optional parameter (bit)

(12) Input unit system

(13) Machine axis parameter

(14) System parameter

(15) Pitch error compensation data

Contents and setting procedures of parameters are detailed in Section 3, “PARAMETERS”.
 3754-E P-57-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7. PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
The capacity of the memory for storing part programs is 80 meters (262 feet) in the standard model.
Furthermore, capacities of 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 3840, 5120, 6400, 7680, 8960 and 10240 meters
(525, 1050, 2100, 4200, 8400, 12600, 16800, 21000, 25200, 29400 and 33600 feet) are optional.
The OSP7000M has commands for DATE entry, initializing, program deletion, etc. in addition to reading in
and punching-put of a program tape and program editing.
In this system the file names can also be interchanged as individual programs are assigned a file name for
managing the programs.

7-1 . Program Commands List

Item Command Functions Remarks
Date DATE Sets the date.
Directory DIR Displays file directory.
Transfer PIP Transfers program file. Sub commands provided
Edit EDIT Edits program file. Sub commands provided
Free capacity FREE Indicates remaining memory capacity.
List LIST Lists file contents.
Arrangement CONDENS Arranges the stored data.
Time TIME Sets the time.
Initializing INIT Initializes the memory disk (MD),
floppy disks and other data storage
devices.
Deletion DELETE Deletes the specified file.
Renaming RENAME Changes the specified file name.
File protection PROTECT Prohibits writing to or renewing of the
specified file. _
MS-DOS MSDS Transfers the program files in the MS- Sub commands provided
DOS format.
In a file name entered for directory display or for deletion, symbols (asterisk) and “?” (question mark) are
usable.
Here, indicates a character string and “?” a character.
Example:

*.MIN All files with extension MIN

*.* All files
AB*.MIN Among files with extension MIN, those whose file name begins with AB
*AB.M!N Among files with extension MIN, those whose file name ends with AB
SH7FT.MIN Among files with extension MIN, those whose file name is SH7FT.
(7 represents an alphanumeric character, A through Z and 0 through 9).
Each command is explained in detail in the following pages.
 3754-E P-58-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-2. DATE
For the files, file creation date is entered for the file data, and referencing of the creation date is possible
using the directory function. Once set, the date is maintained even if power supply is shut off.
[Supplement] : Since this date data is very important for the functions such as MacMan, alarm log, etc.,
do not change it inadvertently.
Date setting procedure is given below.
(1) Select the PROG OPERATION mode by pressing the EDIT AUX key.

jAUTpjlÿMDI |jtAANUAlj|EOITMLXJ jwWtTgj Sfrj jmX.MTa||M»C Marj

PROGRAM OPERATION BATE.

MULTI
DATE DIR PIP EDIT PIP LIST | CONDENSJ C EXTEND]

rFllfFTirpTlfTTlfFTIITÿfFTltF eJ

(2) Press function key [F1] (DATE).

PROGkftl OPERATION DATE

•DA
1995. 4.12 WEDNESDAY 11:45:50
enter date (Y.M.D) ! 1985.4. 13
MULTI
DATE DIR PIP EDIT PIP LIST | CONDENSl C EXTEND]

IZX)(Z3(Z3DIZ3DCE3CE1D(ZZ)CES
 3754-E P-59
SECTION 2 OPERATION

The following message is display on the console lines and readiness for inputting is completed.
= DA
1995. 4. 12 WEDNESDAY 11:45:50
enter date (Y.M.D)I

(3) Key in the year, month, and day with period put after each item following the prompt T.
Example: 1995.4.12

(4) Press the WRITE key.

WRIT!

/P
PROGRAM OPERATION DATE

enter date (Y.M.D) IDA

enter date (Y.M.D) ! 1905.4. 12
1995. 4.12 FRIDAY 11:47:45

DATE DIR PIP EDIT

MULTI
PIP LIST I CONDENSj C EXTENDI

(TTinÿfFTifirÿrFÿ

When the correct entry has been made, the CRT indicates date and a day of the week.
If the data entry is not correct, the CRT requests data entry again.

[Supplement] : 1. Entry of only right two digits is acceptable for year entry.
2. Pressing the WRITE key without entering the date ends the operation and nothing
occurs.
 3754-E P-60-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-3. DIRECTORY
This is the function for making a list of files stored in the memory disk (MD1:) or the floppy disk (FDO:). The
list may be displayed on the CRT and it may also be printed.

(1) Select the PROG OPERATION mode by pressing the EDIT AUX key.

lÿAUTO| juANUAl-j AUxj |PARAMETER| jzEBO SElj|nXlDATA||M>C Manj

The function names on the display screen will change as shown below.

PROGRAM OPERATION

MULTI
DATE DIR RIP EDIT PIP LIST | CONDENS| [EXTENDI

f?riiT?i(TTi(TÿrFÿrr6ifF~7irrri
(2) Press function key [F2] (DIR).
The display screen displays the prompt “Dl" on its console line.

PROGRAM OPERATION

DATE DIP PIP EDIT

MULTI
PIP LIST |C0NDEN5| [EXTEND]

f?Ti(TinrFinfFT)fEinrFTDLF7jLF &)
n
 .X

3754-E P-61-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

.
(3) Enter the device name, MD1: or FDO: The default is MD1

(4) Press the WRITE key.

WRIT!

/9J
(5) The list of file names is displayed on the display screen.

PROGRAM OPERATION DIR

DIR MD1:*.* PAGE 1

FILENAME SEC BYTE CHARACTER DATE

G.MIN 0001 O0000C 12 1995. 4.12

XX. MIN 0001 00O07F 127 1995. 3.23
CONEI. MIN 0001 000044 68 1995. 3.23
N.MIN 0034 003264 12900 1995. 3.20
COtfFIG.CNC 0001 000042 66 1995. 4. 7
X.MIN 0001 00004D 77 1995. 4.11
TAIWA.MIN 0004 0002FC 764 1995. 3. 17
ZZZZZ.MIN 0001 000073 115 1995. 3.17
G121.MIN 0015 0O13CF 5071 1995. 3.17
H3-7-17-1.MIN 0003 000253 595 1995. 3.17
A1000.MIN 0001 00006B 107 1995. 3.17
A157.MIN 0008 0007CE 1998 1995. 3.17

•DI

DATE DIR PIP EDIT

MULTI
PIP LIST |cONDENS| EXTENDD
C

(TT1fFTIITTirr4l(TÿITTirF~7'lfF~8l

[Supplement] : 1. Up to 12 filenames are displayed on the screen.

When all filenames are not indicated on one display page, the CRT does not provide
the prompt “=" and the cursor remains as it was.
In this case:
a) Press the BS key, and the display advances one page.

__
b) Press the WRITE key, and the display will advance continuously. To stop this
advancement, press the BS key.

c) Press the CANCEL key, and the command will be aborted with the display
unchanged.
Example: When there are many filenames,

- DIR and WRITE Display of the 1st page

- BS Keep pressing until the required page is
displayed.

- CANCEL Abort the directory mode

- EDIT Specify the file, observing the display.

 3754-E P-62
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : 2. When there are no files, the message “no file” is given.

3. Key in a file name following the prompt “Dl”, and you can check whether that file
exists or not.
In this file name entry step, the use of symbols (asterisk) and “?” (question mark)
is permitted. “*”
The symbol indicates a string of characters while the symbol “?” represents a
character. “*”
“*” may be used only once in both a file name and extended name.
Therefore, by specifying and “?” in a filename, all the file names corresponding to
the entered file name are “*”
given.
Example 1: = Dl *.MIN [WRITE]
All the file names assigned with the extended file name MIN
Example 2: =DI BOX*.MIN [WRITE]
All the file names assigned with the extended name MIN and the
main file name beginning with BOX.
Example 3: = Dl L_J *.* [WRITE]
All the file names (same as no data entry)
Example 4: = DI???.SUB [WRITE]
All the file names assigned with the extended name SUB, and whose
main file name consists of up to three characters.
Example 5: = Dl BOX-1 ???.* [WRITE]
All the file names whose main file name begins with BOX-1 and the
remaining filename consists of up to three characters.

4. Output device name can be entered following the filename. A comma should be
inserted before the output device name.
Example: = Dl i_i TT: [WRITE]
With the data entered as above, all the filenames are printed out by
the teletypewriter.

As an output device name, PR: (printer) is also used.

5. There is an Option Setting, indicated below, which follows the filename.

;P (file protected state is displayed following the date)
00 Not protected
01 User-protected
02 Maker-protected
Refer to “Part Program Floppy Disk Input/Output Function” in “Special Function Manual”
for the directory of a floppy disk.
 JL

3754-E P-63-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-4. TRANSFER
This is the command to transfer a program, with the following sub commands:
Item Functions
Registers a part program after reading it through the floppy
Read READ
disk, etc. _
Punch PUNCH Punches out the part program stored in the memory.
Verifies the program in the memory with the program on the
Verify VERIFY floppy disk, etc. _
Copy COPY Copies the program file on memory.
Forward FAST FORWARD Tape reader rapid forward feed motion
Rewind FAST REWIND Tape reader rewinding
QUIT
Ends transfer mode and restores the program operation
PIP quit mode.
Macro Copies files with extension .LIB in the floppy disk supplied by
MACRO LOADING
program loading Okumato MD1:. _

IMi; Never turn off power supply during the execution of file transfer. If it is turned off, the file
contents will be unreliable.
7-4-1. Read
This is the operation to read a program by the tape reader or floppy disk and to store it in the memory.
The operation procedure details are as follows:
(1) Select the PROG OPERATION mode by pressing the EDIT AUX key.

The function name on the display screen will change as shown below.

PROGRAM OPERATION

TSTiip
PIP I LIST |CONDENS[ C EXTENDI
1
DATE DIR PIP I EDIT

fFTirm rr4irr5)fF~6ifr7ifF~8i
 3754-E P-64-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Set the program tape in the tape reader.

Set this portion in the

tape reader.

_
K 7

Tape feed holes Program

file name
Tape feed
’I* holes “T"
Program name (number) and
machining program ——— Tape feed holes

[Supplement] : Insert the tape into the tape reader, making sure that the feed holes of the tape leader
section are aligned correctly over the tape reader sprocket.
This applies only when the system is equipped with a tape reader.

(3) Press function key [F3] (PIP).

(Note that the function name on the display screen will change.)
 -X.

3754-E P-65-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) Press function key [F1] (READ).

The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen and the following is displayed
on the screen.
PIP :READ,_i R§I

i-.-f y.w • I v*-v,

INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2] -> MDI:*.MIN
[F3] -> FD0:*.MIN
TO DISPLAY OTHER INOEXES. AFTER PRESSING (FI).
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME ANO FILE NAME, THEN PRESS (WRITE) KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME -- MDK
•.MIN

>XR
>
MD1: TOO: COMMAND OVEftR/ CHAR
INDEX INDEX INDEX I HISTORY IINSERT I DELETE CANCEL

iFTrrr2i(TTi(TTifFÿ(TTirFyirF~8i

" 'J
u. MII;
R TST9.MIN|

INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2] -> MD1 :*.MIN
(F3) -> RX3:*.MIN
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES. AFTER PRESSING [FI).

--
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME, THEN PRESS (WRITE) KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME MDK
DEFAULT FILE NAME •.MIN

>»
>
101: FDO: COMMAND OVER*/ CHAR
INDEX INDEX INDEX I HISTORY IINSERT I DELETE CANCEL

(~FTT(TinfFTnrFTiiT'TriiTirirF~7ifF~8T
 3754-E P-66-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) Press the WRITE key.

Pressing this key starts the tape reader. The commands on the tape are read and stored in memory.
While the tape is being read, the display screen displays “READ” along with the “file name” on the first
line.
When the first EOB code appears after the start of the tape reading-in, the message “VALID
INFORMATION READING” is displayed.
At the completion of the tape reading-in, the tape is then rewound and read in the reverse order to verify
the read and stored program against the program on the tape.
When the tape reading-in and verification is completed, V appears on the console line.

[Supplement] : Tape rewinding with or without tape verification is selectable by setting bits 4 and 5 of NC
optional parameter (bit) No. 1.

PROG OPERATION

recHSTERÿÿ)
/
Iwea.mwl

Program file name

Indicates the tape is read.

mee.TON
flic t«l»t overwrite ? (Y/N) tv
VALID IWOWATIOM READING

RIHCH I vERinrl COPY IrQRuARol REUINDI OUIT It EXTEND:)

CET)(TTirrgifTOfFÿrrÿrrTifF~8i
/?

(6) Press function key [F7] (PIP QUIT).

This completes the tape reading-in operation and the display screen returns to the mode as in step (1).
Refer to 7-4-3, “Verifying Punched Out Programs" for details and precautions of this operation.

[Supplement] : If an error occurs during tape reading, 31 characters preceding the error character are
displayed on the console line of display screen.
 -JL

3754-E P-67-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-4-2. Punching Out Stored Program Data

This is the function to punch out the program data stored in the memory.
The procedure is as follows:
(1) Select the PROG OPERATION mode with the EDIT AUX key.

|AUTojÿMDI | AUXJ jpAfmgTEfj jzEROSET| jrOOLDATA| |M»C MANJ

The function name on the display screen will change as shown below.
PROGRAM OPERATION

DATE DIR PIP EDIT

MULTI
PIP LIST |cONDENS| [EXTEND!

rmnnCODCODCODCOD CEZ) COD

(2) Press function key [F3] (PIP).

The function name on the display screen will change as shown below.

PROGRAM OPERATION TRANSFER

•PIP

READ |
PUNCH VERIFY | COPY |FORWARD| REWIND| QUIT | [EXTENDI

n
 .X.

3754-E P-68
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Press function key [F2] (PUNCH).

The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen andthe following is displayed
on the screen.
PIP :PUNCH PH

INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2] -> 101 MIN
[F3] -> RX):#. N»N
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES. AFTER PRESSING [FI].
HPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME. THEN PRESS [WRITE] KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME
--
101:
*.MIN

>XP
>
101: FDD: COUIAND OVERWR/ CHAR
INOEX INDEX INOEX I HISTORY INSERT DELETE I CANCEL

(TTÿiTTirr3irrTifTTirrÿrF'7ifF8i

OV- M'tl ! .
P BOX-1350. MINI

INOEX DISPLAY PROCBXWE

[F2] -> I01:*.MIN
[F3] -> RX).**.MIN
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES. AFTER PRESSING [FI],
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME, THEN PRESS [WRITE] KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME --
101:
•.MIN

>»>
>
MDi: FOO: I COMMAND OVEFWR/ CHAR IITE
INDEX INDEX INOEX I HISTORY I INSERT I DELETE CANCEL

(Tll(TTI(TTTfFTT(TTirrarF~7TrF~8T

(4) Key in the program filename to be punched out.

Example: BOX-1350.MIN
For a program whose file is not specified, i.e., A.MIN, this name specification step is necessary.
 3754-E P-69-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) Press the WRITE key.

WRITE

This starts the tape punching out operation, during which the display screen displays “PUNCH” along
with the “filename”.
When tape punching-out is completed, the message “file-end” is given on the console line and “>"
appears in the following line.
<|gX-135o!Mjfr

TREWSTOÿUoi)
PROG OPERATION

File name

Indicates program data is

being punched out.

•PIP
it BOX-1350. MIN
Til* end

ReAO T PUNCH I wvl Zt ItEXTEND!

HÿiTTiPHjnfFÿrriifTHnrFTinHr)

ft
(6) Press function key [F7] (PIP QUIT).
This completes the tape punching out operation and the display returns to the mode as in step (1).
[Supplement] : That tape punching speed will be slowed down while machine operation is carried out
simultaneously.
 .2.

3754-E P-70-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Supplement: Tape Punching Out Format

® O 0 O » SA.MIN - O O e'°*
®® 0*
***
Program name
Feed holes Fite name Feed holes Machining program Food holes
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) 600 tape feed holes are punched in the tape leader section.
The number of feed holes to be punched out can range, as needed, from 1 to 10000 with a parameter.
For details, consult SECTION 3, “PARAMETERS”.
(2) The file name is punched out following the “$” code. (Program data is punched out in the ISO
coding system.)
(3) 50 tape feed holes are punched out.
The number of the tape feed holes cannot be changed.
(4) “%", and “CR", “LF” codes are punched out.
(5) The part program data is punched out following the program name (number).
(6) The same number of tape feed holes as in (1) are punched out in the tape trailing section.
[Supplement] : 1. When the program data is punched out in the EIA coding system, the “CR” code is
punched instead of the “CR” and “LF” codes.
When the program data is punched out in the EIA code, the presence of a code not
available in the EIA coding system causes an error. Tape punching-out halts and an
error message is given on the display screen.
When the tape delimiting code is the “%" (ER) code, i.e., when bit 3 of parameter No.
1 of NC optional parameter (bit) is 1, the “%" code is punched out before feed holes.

2. The part program is split and punched out, if it is too long to be contained in one paper
tape roll. Paper tape length may be changed from 1 to 300 meters (3 to 984 feed)
using the NC optional parameter (word) No. 2.
As the format, the file name is also punched out, for the second tape and so on. Since
the tape ends with “CR” or “LP, actual tape length is somewhat different from the
tape length set using the parameter.
When designating paper tape punch out operation on more than one paper taper roll,
specify option D in the following format:
P <file-name>, <device-name>:;D

* ••J J = SA.MIN %
96°*‘“ \\ "88 1st tape

Feed holes
J j
name hotel j Tape length lor parameter setting j holes
SA.M1N
\\ 2nd tape

L
Consult 7-4-3, “Verifying Punched Out Programs” for details and supplements on this
operation.
 3754-E P-71-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-4-3. Verifying Punched Out Programs

This is the function for verifying the program transmitted to a target device or medium against the program
stored in the source device between the paper tape and the floppy, the paper tape and the memory, the
floppy and the memory, the floppy and the floppy, the memory andthe memory. The procedure is as follows:
(1) Select the PROG OPERATION mode by pressing the EDIT AUX key.

n
The function name on the display screen will change as shown below.
PROGRAM OPERATION

' DATE | DIR I PIP | EDIT I PIP | LIST |CONDENsj [EXTEND]

CEZDCEJDG! 3i(TTi(TTirr6~irFTifF~8i
(2) Set the tape to be verified in the tape reader in the same manner as for storing a program from a
tape to memory.
(3) Press function key [F3] (PIP).
(Make sure that the display of the function names and the title changes.)
PROGRAM OPERATION TRANSFER

-PIP

READ | PUNCH UFVICCT 'SSJSSHJZT I C EXTENDI

fmrrsif?~6ifmfF8i
GET) COQ
T
 •X

3754-E P-72-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) Press function key [F3] (VERIFY).

The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen and the following is displayed
on the screen.
PIP :VERIFY V

PIP :V' Y QVr-Hrtm IF

VT

INOEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2] -> MDi:*.MIN
[F3] -> FD0:«.MIM
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES. AFTER PRESSING [FI],
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME. THEN PRESS [TRITE] KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME
UD1:
MJIN
--
>XV
>
MDi: FDO: COMMANO OVEFHV CHAR
INDEX INDEX INDEX I HISTORY I INSERT I DELETE I CANCEL

(ÿT)(TT)|TTl(TTIfTTirr6~irF~7irF'8T

PROGRAM 0:<-tA ION MANS* > M

OVI 'M'tnp
V 80X-1350.KIN|

INOEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2) -> UDI:*.«IN
(F3) -> FD0:*.UIN
TO OISPLAY OTHER INDEXES, AFT0T PRESSING [FI],
IHVT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAIC.THEN PRESS WRITE] KEY.

--
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME UDI:
DEFAULT FILE NAME *.UIN

>XV
>
MDi: FDO: COMMAND OVEWR/ I CHAR
/Q RfTE
INDEX INDEX INDEX I HISTORY | INSERT I DELETE I CANCEL

IF 1 HF 2jfFTirrTifFTirr6irFTifF~8T

(5) Key in the file name of the program to be verified.

Example: BOX-1350.MIN.

This step is unnecessary for a program without a file name, i.e., A.MIN.
 3754-E P-73-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(6) Press the WRITE key.

WRITE

This starts the tape reader, and program data on the tape is read and compared with the stored program
data.
While verifying operation, the display screen displayed “VERIFY” along with the “file name”.

PROG OPERATION TRANSFER VERITY

7
Rle name

Indicates verifying made.

t «p« #nd
fll* tnd
d«t« Mtch
L
RCRD WCH I vERirv| COPY |FORUARD| FAST | PIP
REMIND QUIT CEXTENO)

n
(7) Press function key [F7] (PIP QUIT).
 -t.

3754-E P-74
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : This completes verification of the punched out program data and the display mode return
to the one in step (1).
When a data mismatch is found during tape verification, the block (line) which contains
inconsistent data is displayed on the screen and the inconsistent character flickers.

PROG OPERATION TRANSFER VERIFY BOX-1JOOJRN .

Blinks
>V I.HIN
tap*
N005 caaa-
/
•verify continuing
- ? (Y.'NJ !
fCEXTEND}
RE* I PUNCH I VERIFY| CCPY THE? FAST I PIP
REWIND QUIT

fFT1fFT1fp~3lfFTlfFs1fF~6irFTlCF~8l

The following message is displayed, asking the operator if he wants to continue

verification.
To continue verification, type “Y" and press the WRITE key.
To abort verification, type “N” and press the WRITE key.
When no data mismatch is found in verification operation, the following message will be
displayed on the screen.
- tape end
- file end
- data match
If data is left in the file after data on a tape has been read, the following messages will be
displayed on the screen.
- tape end

- data match
If data is left in the tape after data on the file has been read, the following messages will be
displayed on the screen.
- file end
- data match
 3754-E P-75
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Supplements for Tape Reading-in, Punching-out, and Verifying Operations

(1) There are two tape coding systems, EIA and ISO. The selection of a coding system can be
conducted by:
- Parameter setting, or
- Designating the desired coding system each time tape reading-in, punching-out, or verifying
operation is carried out.
a) Parameter setting
Bit 1 and bit 0 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 1 are used to determine the tape coding system: bit
1 for tape code parity discrimination and bit 0 for tape code. The tape coding system is determined
by the combination of these bits.
bit1
Tape Code bitO Operation Condition
Parity Tape Code
Discrimination
In the READ and VERIFY modes, the coding system is recognized
(A) 1 1 automatically and program data is read or verified.
In the PUNCH mode, program data is punched in the ISO coding system.
In the READ and VERIFY modes, the coding system is recognized
(B) 1 0 automatically and program data is read or verified.
In the PUNCH mode, program data is punched in the EIA coding system.
In the READ and VERIFY modes, the control assumes that the coding
(C) 0 1 system is ISO. (If the actual tape code is not ISO, an alarm occurs.)
In the PUNCH mode, program data is punched in the ISO coding system.
In the READ and VERIFY modes, the control assumes that the coding
(D) 0 0 system is EIA. (If the actual tape code is not ISO, an alarm occurs.)
In the PUNCH mode, program data is punched in the EIA coding system.
The standard setting is (A), in which the control reads both EIA- and ISO-coded tapes, and
punches out program data in the ISO coding system.
Refer to SECTION 3, “PARAMETERS" for the procedure to set parameters.
b) ISO or EIA designation for READ, VERIFY, and PUNCH operations.
Follow the steps below when conducting READ, VERIFY, and PUNCH operations. This will allow
the operator to directly select the coding system regardless of the coding system set by the
parameter.
Example: To punch out stored program data in the EIA code
Key in the following command in step (4) of the punch-out procedure of a stored
program.
Indicates EIA.

BOX-1350.MIN;E

/
Key in “;E” following the file to be punched out.
 3754-E P-76
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : Designation of EIA ISO, and Verifying

;E EIA code
;i ISO code
;V Verifying
(2) There are two different methods to operate the machine with stored programs.
- One main program is stored in the memory and controls machine operation.
- More than one program is stored in the memory and the desired program is read and executed.
a) When one main program is stored in the memory
In this case, it is necessary to assign a file name to the program. In the memory, however, the
program is assigned the file name “A.MIN”.
b) When more than one program is stored in the memory
In this case, a program can be executed in two different ways.

1) One file for one program

Only one program is registered in one file.
2) One file for several programs
More than one program is registered in one file.
In both cases, it is advisable to create the program by assigning a file name on the tape. If the file
name is not assigned on the tape, follow the steps below and assign a file name when storing a
program in the memory.
1) Press function key [F1] (READ).
2) Key in the file name following a comma.
“.file name”
3) Press the WRITE key.
With the steps above, the file name is specified and the program on the tape is stored in the
memory.
To simplify program tape management, it is recommended to register one program in one file.
(3) To store program data following the program data already stored in the memory, follow the steps
below.

a) Press function key [F1] (READ)

b) Key in the file name and “;A”.

“.file name;A”
c) Press the WRITE key.
When the program is long and cannot be punched on one tape, the second and subsequent tapes
should be read following the above steps.
 3754-E P-77-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) When the file name is already registered in the memory and when it is necessary to store a
program with the same file name, follow the steps indicated below to erase the previous program
and to store a new program.

TRANSFER READ TST1,MIN

PROG OPERATION

_ File name already registered

x*

-
T*TV .HIM
—
flit
’
***&

fil» txl«t o«j»rwrltt 7 (Y4i? !

TO
in the memory

| PIWW | VERIFY! COPT |FORUAAD| REMIT®! can |cEXTEND:

f?mrrrirFÿ(TT)frafFÿrF~n(F~8i
a) Press function key [F1] (READ), key in the file name and press the WRITE key.
b) The following message will be displayed on the display screen screen.
file exist overwrite? (Y/N)
c) Type “Y" and press the WRITE key.
Data in the specified file is erased and new data is read from the tape reader and stored in the
memory.

[Supplement] : If data does not need to be stored, type “N” and press the WRITE key.
When a file name is not given on the tape while the name of the file stored in the memory is
“A.MIN” (that is, the file is not assigned a file name), it is not necessary to specify the file
name after pressing function key [F1] (READ).
(5) File names can be specified and changed as required by inputting the following.
[F1] (READ) “Input File Name”, “Output File Name”
When an input file name has not been specified, the file name given on the tape is taken as the input file
name. If no file name is given on the tape, the program is assigned the file name “A.MIN."
When an input file name is specified, it is necessary to check that the specified file name agrees with the
file name on the tape. If the specified file name agrees with the file name on the tape, an error is
generated. (An error message is displayed on the display screen.)
When an output file name has been specified, the specified file name is created in the memory.
When an output file name has not been specified, the input file name is used as the output file name.
In this case, the delimiter “,” can be omitted.
To specify an output file name without entering an input file name, be sure to enter the delimiter “,”.
 3754-E P-78
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Example 1: [F1] (READ) BOX-1.MIN, BOX-2.MIN, [WRITE]

A program assigned the file name “BOX-1.MIN” is stored in the memory with its file name
changed to “BOX-2.MIN”.
Example 2: [F1] (READ) BOX-2.MIN, [WRITE]

The program is stored in the memory assigned the file name “BOX-2.MIN” regardless of
the current file name.
Example 3: [F1] (READ) BOX-2.MIN, [WRITE]

The control first checks whether or not the file name given on the tape is “BOX-2.MIN”.
Then, the program is stored in the memory assigned with the file name “BOX-2.MIN”.
Example 4: [F1] (READ) [WRITE]
The program is stored in the memory with a file name assigned on the tape. If not file name
is given on the tape, the program is assigned the file name “A.MIN”.
Example 5: [F1] (READ) BOX-1.MIN, BOX-2.MIN£l [WRITE]
Stored in succession with a file name Designates the ISO code.
which is already stored in the memory

The ISO-coded program data which has the file name “BOX-1.MIN” is stored following the
file which is already stored in the memory with the file name “BOX-2.MIN”

(6) The following command reads a tape which contains wrong codes up to the end while replacing
them with “I”.
[F1] (READ) File name;C [WRITE]
The number of read wrong codes is counted and displayed after the completion of tape read operation.
Correct them in the program edit mode.

(7) Reading of a tape which has a file name punched in the EIA code
The file name punched in the EIA code can be read if an ElA-coded character which corresponds to $
has been set at NC optional parameter (bit) No. 31.

E
File name in Feed holes Significant information
Feed holes $ 0
EIA code B
f
EIA corresponding code
The control recognizes the coding system of the file by the first “$” code.
The coding system employed for NC data within the significant information area is recognized by the
first end-of-program code (EOB).
During tape punch operation, the file name is always punched in the ISO code irrespective of the coding
system which is employed to punch NC data.
 3754-E P-79-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-4-4. Duplication of Stored Program

To duplicate a file in the memory (MD1:) or a floppy disk (FDO:), follow the steps below.

(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

pUTO j j juAMUAlj|LrMlxj jwTOtmj jzEBO SElj jroX0*T<| ju«cItoj

MDI

The function names on the display screen will change as shown below.

PROGRAM OPERATION

DATE DIR PIP EDIT LIST |CCNDENs|IEXTENDI

CFT1(T?l(TTlfFÿfi5~5lfFÿinF~7irF~8l
/?
(2) Press function key [F3] (PIP).
The screen will change. Make sure that TRANSFER is displayed on the screen.

PROGRAM OPERATION TRANSFER

-PIP

I FAST I FAST | PIP T

READ PUNCH |VERIFY COPY |FORWARD! REMIND! QUIT |C EXTEND]
nmnÿrranrrirrÿnÿrF'TirF'er)

n
 3754-E P-80-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Press function key [F4] (COPY).

The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen andthe following is displayed
on the screen.
PIP :COPY LJ CO

coT
INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE
[F2] -> MDi:«.UIN
[F3) -> R»:#. MIN
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES. AFTER PRESSING [FI],
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME, THEN PRESS [WITH] KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME
--
MDi:
•.MIN

>XC0
>
FBO: | COUMO OVSWV CHAR
ITOEX I "ilia I INOex I HISTORY I INSERT I OELETE I CANCEL

rrriiTT)(TÿfFTifFÿfF~ÿrr7TrF~8)

X
CO BOX-l350.MIN.eOX-2000.NINB

INOEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2J -> ici:*.aiN
[F3) -> F00:*.NIN
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES. AFTER PRESSING [FT).
INPUT THE DEVICE NANE AND FILE NAME. THEN PRESS [XRITE) KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NANE
DEFAULT FILE NANE -- 101:
*.NIN

>XCO
>
ICOHIAND lOVEWH/ I CHAR
o
INDEX hiixl RX):
INOEX I HISTORY | INSERT I OELETE I CANCEL
RfTE

(TTT(TT1(TTIfFÿrrÿrra(TTirF~8T
Enter the device name, MD1: or FDO:. (The default is MD1:.)
(4) Key in the file name of the program to be duplicated.
Example: BOX-1350.MIN, BQX-2000.MIN

f
Input file name
t
Output file name
 3754-E P-81-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) Press the WRITE key.

WRITE

The program which has the file name “BOX-1350.MIN” is duplicated and stored in the memory with the
file name “BOX-2000.MIN”.

PROG OPERATION TRANSFER COPY BOX-2000.MIN

•PIP
KO BOX'1MO.MIN, BOX -3000.MIN

READ | PUNCH | vcU cc~ VSJi £IND| OJIT CEXTEND]

rFÿrF~ÿfFÿrFT)(~F~5ifF~6~)rF~7irp~8T
ft
(6) Press function key [F7] (PIP QUIT).
This completes program duplicating operation and the display screen returns to the one in step (1).
For duplication of a floppy disk, refer to Section 1, “PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS BY
FLOPPY DISKS” in the Special Function Manual (No. 1) (Publication No. 3294-E).
 3754-E P-82
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : 1. When the specified file name “BOX-1350.MIN” is not found in the memory, the
message “no file” will be displayed on the command line.

2. When the file name “BOX-2000.MIN” which has been specified as the output file
name already exists in the memory, the following message will appear.
BOX-2000.MIN
file exist overwrite? (Y/N)
To erase the currently stored program and store the duplicated one, type “Y” and
press the WRITE key.
3. The output file name can be omitted when the output file name is the same as the
input file name.

When the output file name is omitted, symbols and “?” can be used in an input file
4.
name. In this
“Directory”.)
case, all the corresponding “*”
files are duplicated. (Refer to 7-3,

5. In addition to the above duplicating functions, the following functions are optionally
available.
a) [COPY] Input File Name, Output File Name ;A
Duplication is executed following the file which is specified as the output file
name.
b) [COPY] Input File Name, Output File Name A
The message “copy OK? (Y/N)” is displayed before starting program
duplication.
To start duplication, type “Y” and press the WRITE key.
To abort the operation, type “N” and press the WRITE key.
c) This function is effective when an optional external device such as a floppy
disk drive is selected.
 3754-E P-83-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-4-5. Tape Reader Operation - Fast Forward Feed

To feed the tape rapidly, follow the procedure below. (1) Press EDIT AUX.

|l OKUMA Q8P7000 |

*
00000000

0 II P
XT

II Q100000
)000O©
V II W II X

®®®© (BS
®®®®
®®@®
[Fÿ(ÿ[ÿ[F4][ÿ)[Fg[g3[F8] a® ®0©0 "
X X
\ (3) Press function key [F5] (FAST FORWARD).
(2) Press function key [F3] (PIP).

Fig. 2-19 Tape Reader Operation - Fast Forward Feed

(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode. The function names on the
display screen will change as shown below.

jXlTO| J| XUAL|p>nMJxj jXtETBlj jXoSET| jmMTAJ|M»C

UDI

PROGRAM OPERATION

I MULTI I
DATE DIR PIP | EDIT | PIP I LIST |COND£NS| C EXTEND}

(TTi(??irrTirFiirFTirFÿrFÿ7irF~8i
 3754-E P-84
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Press function key [F3] (PIP).

The screen will change as shown on the first figure in the previous page.

(3) Press function key [F5] (FAST FORWARD).

The prompt “ > FP will be displayed on the command line (21st line). The tape is fast forwarded to the
end of the tape.
By setting corresponding data at NC optional parameter (bit) No. 1, bit 3, it is possible to select whether
the control recognizes the end of a tape by feed holes or by a code. (% for ISO and ER for ElA).

7-4-6. Tape Reader Operation - Rewind

To rewind the tape, follow the procedure below.

(1) Press EDIT AUX.

x
|JL QKUMtoaiTOOO |
x
CM] dlsi CSE) (ffij Ess)

000I

®(D®0 (BS
®@®0
©@(D© n
(EL)©
|ÿ[M3(F5)[ÿ[R]|j8) ®O©0

\ (3) Press function key [F6] (FAST REWIND).

(2) Press function key [F3] (PIP).

Fig. 2-20 Tape Reader Operation - Rewind

 3754-E P-85-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.
The function names on the display screen will change as shown below.

|AUTO|pvtoTj|MAMWI| |EDIT«UX| jwwicTgj jzER08Erj jroa.«T<|

/?
PROGRAM OPERATION

' DATE I DIR | PIP | EDIT I PIP I LIST |cONDENs| [EXTEND]

(TTl(TTIfFÿ(TT)fF~5lfF~6irFTl(Tÿ~l

(2) Press function key [F3] (PIP).

The screen will change as shown on the first figure in previous page.
(3) Press function key [F6] (FAST REWIND).
The prompt “ > FR” will be displayed on the line (21st line). The tape is rewound up to the beginning of
the tape.
By setting corresponding data at NC optional parameter (bit) No. 1, bit 3, it is possible to select how the
control recognizes the beginning of a tape; feed holes on a code. (% for ISO and ER for EIA.)
 JL„, ..
JL.

3754-E P-86-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-4-7. PIP Quit

This sub command quits the transfer mode, and provides a return to the previous program operation mode.
The operating procedure is indicated below.

PROGRAM OPERATION TRANSFER

-PIP
>
I FAST I FAST I PIP
PUNCH (VERIFY COPY |FORWARD| REWIND! QUIT |\ [EXTEND]
READ

(ÿTlfFÿ(TÿlTXirFÿ(TÿrFT1fF-8l
J
(1) Press function key [F7] (PIP QUIT).
The prompt “>Q” will be displayed on the command line. The transfer mode is quit and the previous
program operation mode is restored.
The display screen will change as shown below with assigned function names also changed.

PROGRAM OPERATION TRANSFER

•PIP
>Q

DATE DIR PIP EDIT

MULTI
PIP LIST |C0NDENs| [EXTEND]

(E3DCESCODCE3
 A

3754-E P-87-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5. Program Editing

In the program edit mode, modification, insertion, deletion, and others can be conducted for on programs
stored in the memory.
Programs are edited in units of file.
Program editing-related terms are defined as follows:

- Edit Line
This is the line on which program edit operation is carried out.
On the display screen, the symbol “»” appears at the left-most position of the edit line. One line on the
display screen contains a maximum of 63 characters.

- Edit Pointer
This refers to the identifier indicating the character to be edited. On the display screen, such a character is
displayed in the reversed display mode.

- Record
This is so called a block in the program. The record consists of several commands beginning with a
character right after the “LF” code and ending with the next “LF” code. If commands in a block cannot be
displayed in one line on the display screen, they are displayed on multiple lines with the 2nd and
subsequent lines preceded by “&”, indicating that the commands are continuous.

PROG OPERATION EDIT p note ucaiea.MH

Edit line 10QO

'/niva coo xaoo Y3O0 S250

Edit pointer / N101 C56 2-55 Z-S5 H09 M03

/ me C41 GOl X4O0
xsaa
V200
Y300
1100
10
Dll
JIM
Y300 1-200 J0 ] 16 lines
N10 X200 Y200 1100 J0
A record N10 C01 X400
N10 CdO X30O Y300
(one block for Ni0 COO C53 Z1CO
a machining me M05
Nil H02
program)

•c Mn.iee.niN

. .
file end
>
LINE Lire CHAR. LWC EDIT
INSERT) DELETE DELETE| UCLCTCl ERASE QUIT [EXTEND)

fFT1fFT)fF'3llTT)fFÿfTÿ(TTirF'8T

Fig. 2-21 Program Editing

 .JL

3754-E P-88-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

iMM : When program edit operation has been completed, press function key [F7] (PIP QUIT).
Otherwise, edited data cannot be stored in the memory.

PROG OPERATION EDIT P MO£€ WHEEL100.MIN

>|l000
N100 G00 X300 Y300 S250
N101 656 2-55 H09 M03
N10 641 601 X400 Y200 no© DU
me 603 X5O0 V30O
N10 xioo Y300
N10 X200 Y200
N10 601 X400
N10 640 X300 Y3O0
N10 600 653 2100
N10 M05
Nil MG2

•E UCEL100.MIN

*II* w*
EDIT
LINE
INSERT! DELETE | INSERT) DELETE) DELETE) LlfC
ERASE QUIT [EXTENDI

fFTirFÿfFinfTTtiTinrFirirFyifFTn

n
Program edit operation is complete, and the display screen as indicated below will be displayed on
the command line.

PROG OPERATION EDIT P MODE WHEEL 100.MIN

>|100Q
N100 600 X3O0 Y300 S250
N101 656 2-55 H09 M03
N102 641 601 X400 Y200 noo DU
N103 603 X500 Y300
N104 XIOO Y300
N105 X200 Y200
N106 601 X400
N107 640 X300 Y3O0
N100 600 653 2100
N109 M05
NU0 M02

>0

VltC I LINE CHAR. CHAR. I LltC EDIT

INSERT! DELETE! INSERT) DELETE! DELETE! ERASE QUIT | [EXTENDI

iTTifTTifTTirFÿrFTi(TTirF~yirF8T
 3754-E P-89-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-1. Commands Used in the Program Edit Mode

Item Functions
Insert line INSERT LINE Inserts a blank line right after the present edit line.
Delete line DELETE LINE Deletes the line including the edit pointer.
Insert character INSERT Inserts a blank space (for one character) right before the edit pointer.
CHARACTER
Delete character DELETE Deletes the character identified by the edit pointer.
CHARACTER
Delete DELETE Deletes the specified number of records (blocks) in a program.
Erase line ERSE LINE Erases the commands in the line which contains the edit pointer.
The line remains as a blank line.
Quit QUIT Ends the program edit mode.
Find FIND Searches the specified character-string.
Shifts the edit line by the specified number of lines.
Change CHANGE Replaces the specified character-string with the newly specified charac-
ter-string. _
Copy COPY Duplicates program data in the specified number of lines to the extract
_
buffer. The original program data remains as it is.
Move MOVE Duplicates program data in the specified number of lines to the extract
buffer. The original program data is deleted. _
Extract XTRACT Inserts program data in the extract buffer before the edit pointer.
Page mode PAGE MODE Replaces the character located by the edit pointer with the keyed-in char¬
acter.
Insert mode
fore the character located by the edit pointer. _
INSERT MODE Inserts the character which has been keyed i through the keyboard be-

A CAUTION ' Never turn the Power supply during the file transfer operation. If it has been turned off,
- data in the file might be unreliable.
 3754-E P-90
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-2. Fundamental Operations Necessary for Program Editing

(1) Readout of a Program File from the Memory

a) To directly input the file name

1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

lÿALTTojlÿ MDI

/9
PROGRAM OPERATION

DATE I DIR | PIP | EDIT m LIST |CONDENsj CEXTENDI

(TT)(TTiCEJ)CrT\frÿ(TTirFlÿCFT1
ft
 .JL.

3754-E P-91-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

2) Press function key [F4] (EDIT).

Make sure that the display will change as shown below.
The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen and the following is
displayed on the screen.

PROGRAM OKRAIION

toil ovdmuifc
Efl

INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

(F2J -> KOI :*.UIN
[F3] -> RX):".MIH
TO 01SPLAY OTHER INDEXES. AFTER PRESSING (FI],
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME, THEN PRESS [WRITE] KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME * MDI:
OEFAULT FILE NAME ~
•.MIN

>XE
>
MDI : RX): COMMAND OVEFRR/ CHAR
INDEX INDEX INDEX I HISTORY I INSERT I OELETE CANCEL

fFTT(TÿfFTTfT4TrTTirF6TfF~7lf?~8T

IHOOt AM OPERATION

EXM T OVERWRITE
E WHEEL 100. MlNfl

INDEX 01SPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2] -> MDI :*.MIN
[F3] -> FDO:*.MIN
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES, AFTER PRESSING [FI],
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME. THEN PRESS [WRITE] KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME
- “ 101:
‘.UIN

>XE
>
IOC FDO: COUUND OVEFWV OUn
IfOEX INDEX INOEX I HISTORY I INSERT I OELETE CANCEL

(F~T1fF2i(F3I(F4I(F5I(F6IIF7I fF8l
 -JL.

3754-E P-92-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

3) Key in the file name to be edited through the keyboard.

WHEEL1OO.MIN
When a program has been stored without specifying a file name, that is, when a program is
stored with the file name “A.MIN”, this step can be skipped.

4) Press the WRITE key.

WRITE

/P
Program data of the specified file is searched and read into the editing area. At the same time,
program data is displayed on the display screen.
PROG OPERATION p MOK ucaioe.MiH

tfieeo
mea cee woe Y300 S250
N101 C56 Z-55 W9 M03
N10 MI cal xjae Y200 noe on
me 0)3 XS00 Y303
me xioo
N10 X200 YZ00
rue G01 X400
M10 S40 X300 V300
me C00 css Z100
me MBS
NU M02

tKB.100.MIN
flit end
>
Lire I Lire I CHPR. I CHflR. I I Llt€ EDIT
INSERT! KLETEI INSERT| XLETE| DELETEI ERASE QUIT [IEXTENDI

(TTi(TTi(TTifrTirrÿiT~6irFinrF~ri

Program data of the file name “WHEEL1OO.MIN” is ready for editing.

 .1.

3754-E P-93
SECTION 2 OPERATION

b) Program selection using directory

A program to be edited can be selected by displaying the directory of programs stored in the
memory and placing the cursor at the desired file name.

1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

PROG OPERATION EDIT

PROGRAM EDIT INDEX

PROGRAM FILE PAGE 1

B.MIN
14-CEL100. MIN
SHIL2.MIN
GEAR-1.MIN
GEAR-2. MIN
GEAR-3. MIN
SHAFT100.MIN
SHAT T200. MIN

•E *
mh*t ts the flit nine for editing ?

DATE | DIR PIP | EDIT | j**" | LIST |cOt(t£NS| C EXTEND]

ITÿITÿlTinfFXIlTTl(Tÿ(ÿTirr8l

A
2) Press function key [F4] (EDIT).

3) Key in an asterisk and press the WRITE key.

The CRT screen will change to the PROGRAM EDIT INDEX screen and the directory of the
program file names is displayed on the screen.

4) Move the cursor to the desired file name.

5) Press the WRITE key.

The above procedure reads the program of the specified file in the memory to the edit buffer
and allows program edit operation.
[Supplement] : 1. When any files have been registered in the memory, the PROGRAM EDIT INDEX
screen is not displayed.
2. One screen page can display up to 12 file names. When more than 12 files are stored
in the memory, press the PAGE key to change the display page.
3. When a file name is specified using symbols and “?”, all the corresponding files
will be displayed on the PROGRAM EDIT INDEX screen.

4. For details of file name designation, refer to Note 3 in 7-3, “Directory”.

 JL.

3754-E P-94
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Cursor Operations

When the cursor key is pressed, the edit pointer and the edit line can be moved.

a) Cursor right movement

PROG OPERATION EDIT P MOCC UCCUO0.MN

>|100O
M00 Gee xaee Yaee szse
N101 2- H M M03
me G41 G01 X400 F D DU

-
)

Hie GQ3 X500 I J

me X1Q0 J
me x2ee Y200 J
Hie G01 X400
me xaee vaee
Hie Gee G53 zioo
Hie nes
mi MG2

•E UCEL100.HIH
file end
>_
LINE I Lire I CHRP. I CHAR. | I
INSERT! DELETE! INSERT) DELETE) DELETE|
Llh€
ERASE
EDIT
QUIT I [EXTEND]

fFT1(TT)rF3l(TTIfFÿfFÿfTT1fF~8T

Each time the cursor key is pressed, the edit pointer (reversed display) moves to the right.
The edit pointer moves continuously while the cursor key is held down.
 ,.x.

3754-E P-95
SECTION 2 OPERATION

b) Cursor left movement

PROG OPERATION EDIT P note wccuee.MiN

>OIK|
N100 600 X300 vsee S250
mei 656 H M
N10 641 601 X400 Y200 0
N10 603 X500 Y300
N10 X100 Y300 J
N10 X200 Y200
N10 601 X400
N10 640 X300 Y300
N10 600 653 Z100
N10 M05
Nil M02

•E mEH.100.NIN
flic end
>_
Lire I Life I CHflR. I CHAR. I I LI* EDIT
I«EHT| DELETE!INSERT! DEL£TE| XLETE| ERASE QUIT [EXTEND)

lTT1fFTllTTllTÿrF~ÿfFÿ1fFTIf?~B~l

@©
//

Each time the cursor key is pressed, the edit pointer (reversed display) moves to the left.
The edit pointer moves continuously while the cursor key is held down.
 3754-E P-96
SECTION 2 OPERATION

c) Cursor downward movement

PROG OPERATION EDIT P MOM: UCEU00.MIN

>{1000
see
< N101
: MM
/ 656
X300 Y300

Y200
S250
Z-
P
H
D
M
;«0 641 G01 X400
see xsee
' Nio
N10 X100
Y30o
Y30O I-
N10 X200 V200 I
N10 601 X400
N10 640 X300 Y300
see 653 Z100
M05
M02

•E V*€£U00.MIN
flic end
>_
Lift I
INSERT! LD£TEI S£jSSSJ*«JSi SS IC EXTENDI

(~FT1fFÿITÿrF~TirFÿ(T~6~lfF~7lfF~8~l

©@
ii
Each time the cursor key is pressed, the edit pointer (reversed display) and the edit line (») move
down one line.
The edit pointer and the edit line move continuously while the cursor key is held down.
When the cursor key is pressed with the edit line placed at the bottom, the edit line will return to the
top.
 •X

3754-E P-97-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

d) Cursor upward movement

PROG OPERATION EDIT P hODG UCEL100.HIH

01000
N100 G00 X300 Y300 S250
N10 CS6 2- N M
H10 G41 G01 X400 Y200 D
N10 C03 X50O Y300 I
N10 X100 Y300 I- J
*10 CQ1
X200
X400
Y20O I
N10
N10 C40 X300 Y300
N10 G00 C53 Z1C0
N10 M05
Nil M02

•E lfCEL100.NIN
UIt end

oacTcl ER«C I SIT |C EXTEND]

I23D(Z1DCE1D(ZZDCE1D(ZJDCE3C£I1)

@©
ii
Each time the cursor key is pressed, the edit pointer (reversed display) and the edit line (») move
up one line.
The edit pointer and the edit line move continuously while the cursor key is held down.
When the cursor key is pressed with the edit line placed at the top (01000 on the display screen ),
the edit line will move to the bottom.
[Supplement] : When the cursor key is pressed continuously or held down until the edit pointer (reversed
display) reaches the left-end or right-end position, the edit line (») moves up or down,
respectively.
The edit pointer (reversed display) is placed on the edit line (»). This means that the edit
line and the edit pointer move together. The edit pointer moves as the edit line changes.
 JL.-

3754-E P-98-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) PageDown
When the page key (ÿ) is pressed, the next page is displayed.
On the display screen, 16 lines of program data are displayed on one display page. When program data to
be edited is not found on the given page, press the page keys until required data is obtained.
Positions of the edit pointer and edit line remain unchanged.
When the last part of the file has been reached while the page key is pressed, the remaining blocks are
displayed on the screen. The message “file end” will appear on the command line.
(4) PageUp
When the page key (SB) is pressed, the previous page is displayed.
When the first page has been reached, the display remains unchanged even if the page key is kept
pressed. The message “beginning of file" will appear on the command line.
 3754-E P-99
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-3. One Line Insertion

(1) This function inserts a blank line right before the edit line.
Press function key [F1] (LINE INSERT) to insert a blank line before the edit line (»).

(2) Lines following the edit line shift down and the last line on that page disappears from the display
and shifts to the next page.

(3) The edit pointer shifts to the beginning of the inserted blank line.

(4) The prompt “ > IL” will be displayed on the command line.

(5) This function is effective for inserting lines in the stored program.

N101 GOO X800 Z200

» N102 ®250
N103 G01 Z150 F0.3
N104 X300

N117 G01 X113

•E WHEEL 100.MIN
tile end

>lk
LINE LINE CHAR. CHfiR. LINE EDIT
INSERT DELETE INSERT DELETE! DELETE! ERASE QUIT [EXTEND!

fFTi(iÿ(iÿpÿnHnrFin(T~7irF~ir)

n
N101 GOO X800 Z200
» m ]
N102 X250
N103 G01 Z150 F0.3
N104 X300
 X

3754-E P-100
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-4. One Line Deletion

(1) This function deletes the edit line.
Press function key [F2] (LINE DELETE) to delete the edit line.

(2) Lines following the edit line shift up and the first line on the next page shifts to the current page and
displayed on the last line.

(3) The edit pointer shifts to the first character of the line next to the deleted line.

(4) The prompt “>DL” will be displayed on the command line.

(5) This function is effective for deleting an entire line in the stored program.

N101 GOO X800 Z200

» N102 [X|250
N103 G01 Z150 F0.3
N104 X300

>DL
file end
LINE Lift CHAR. | CHAR. LINE | EDIT |
INSERT| DELETE! INSERT! DELETE! DELETE! ERASE QUIT | tEXTEND]

rrrirrÿ(TÿiTÿrF~ÿfF~6irF~7irF~8i

N101 GOO X800 Z200

» H103 G01 Z150 F0.3
N104 X300

N117 G01 X113

 3754-E P-101
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-5. One Character Insertion

(1) This function inserts a space before the edit pointer.

Press function key [F3] (CHAR. INSERT) to insert a space right before the edit pointer.

(2) Data following the edit pointer shifts to the right when a space has been inserted.

(3) When there is any character other than a space at the end of the edit line, the message “letter
insert impossible” will appear on the command line and the attempted insertion operation is not
executed.

(4) The position of the edit pointer remains unchanged.

(5) The prompt “>IC” will be displayed on the command line.

(6) This function is effective for inserting a character (numeral).

) »N01 GOO X®0 Z2007

l
>ic
LINE I LIfC
INSERTl DELETE!
I OWR. I CHfiR.
INSERT DELETE! DELETE]
LHC
ERfiSE
| EDIT I
QUIT ! C EXTEND]
J
rFÿfF~Ti(TinfFÿrFin(T~6irF"7i(T~8"i

/?

\ »N01 GOO X|800 Z200 /

 3754-E P-102
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-6. One Character Deletion

(1) This function deletes a character located by the edit pointer.
Press function key [F4] (CHAR. DELETE) to delete the character located by the edit pointer.

(2) When the character is deleted, characters following the deleted one shift to the left.

(3) The position of the edit pointer remains unchanged.

(4) The prompt “>DC” will be displayed on the command line.

(5) This function is effective for deleting program data in units of character.

1»N01 GOO ffiOO Z200 }

>x

l Lift
INSERT|
Lift 0«R.
DELETE! INSERT!
CHflR.
KLETEj DELETE!
Lift | EDIT
ERASE | QUIT
|
|[EXTENDI

CED (ED COD CED (ZJD(ZDCED COO

»N01 GOO §30 Z200 )

 3754-E P-103
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-7. Deletion

(1) Program data in a specified range is deleted.

After specifying the number of lines to be deleted, press function key [F5] (DELETE). The specified
number of lines will be deleted including the edit line (»).

(2) The edit pointer is placed at the first character of the block which follows the final line of the deleted
blocks.

(3) When the number of the specified lines to be deleted is larger than the final block of the file, all
program data up to the end of the file is deleted and the line right after the final line of the file
becomes the edit line. In this case, the message “file end” will appear.

(4) After program data has been deleted, the message “**RECORD DELETE” appears on the
command line. Here, indicates the number of the deleted lines.
“**”
(5) Lines following the deleted range will shift up.
Operation:
[F5] (DELETE)-8 [WRITE]
Eight lines preceding the edit line (edit line not included) are deleted.
[F5] (DELETE) [WRITE]
Only the edit line is deleted.
 3754-E P-104-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Example: To delete four blocks from N103 to N106

N101 GOO X800 Z200

N102 X250
» N103 |Sp1 Z150 F0.3
N104 X300
N105 GOO X310 Z200
N106 X200
N107 G01 Z100

>00-4
UK I UK I CHPR. | CHfiR. t I LIK I EDIT
INSERT| OCLETEI INSERT! DELCTE! DELETE! CRASE | QUIT |[EXTEND!

(ED CEE) CEU(ED COD CEE CEZ)CEE)

J
Key in “4" through the keyboard.

! key.
Press the WRITE

J
N101 GOO X800 Z200
N102 X250
» [Njl 07 G01 Z100

The command line of the display screen will show the following message.

>DQ_ 4
4RECORD DELETE
beginning of f iIc
LIK | UK | CHRR. | CHAR. ....
L1K | EDIT
INSERT! DELETE! INSERT! DELETE! DELETE!ERASE | QUIT l [EXTENDI
 3754-E P-105
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-8. One Line Erasing

(1) This function erases program data in the edit line (»). The blank line remains.
Press function key [F6] (LINE ERASE) to erase program data in the edit line. When data is erased, a
blank line will remain.

(2) The edit pointer is placed at the first character of the erased edit line.

(3) The prompt “>ER” will be displayed on the command line.

(4) This function is effective when replacing entire program data in a block with new program data.

N101 GOO X800 Z200

N102 X250
» N103 G01 0150 F0.3
N104 X300

l
ICR
LINE LHC CHAR. CHAR. LINE EDIT
INSERTl DELETE| INSERT| DELETE! DELETE! ERASE | QUIT | [EXTEND!

fFÿiÿÿrFÿ(TÿfFÿ(TÿrFTirF~ri
/?

N101 GOO X800 Z200

N102 X250
»BZ
N104 X300
 JL

3754-E P-106-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Before executing operations explained in 7-5-9 to 7-5-13, press function key [F8] (EXTEND).

PROG OPERATION EDIT P note UCO.1O0.MIN

>{1000
m00 G00 X30O Y300 S250
N101 G56 Z-S5 HOT NOT
N10 C41 GOl X400 Y200 F1O0
N10 GOT X5O0 Y300 I
me X100 Y300
N10 X2OT V200
N10 cei X480
N10 G40 X300 Y3M
me GOT G53 2100
N10 MOT

•E UCEL1OT.MIN

—
flit end
>ER
LIfC
INSERT I LIfC COIT
OUIT
'
EXTENDI

tP 1 ItP 2 )[ F 3 ] fF~4l fF~5l fF~6~l (~F~7~I fF~6~|

Press function key [F8] (EXTEND). The function names on the display screen will change as shown below.

PROG OPERATION EDIT P MODE UCEL1OT.MUI

>§1000
HI00 GOT X3OT Y3OT S250
N101 C56 2-55 HOT M03
N10 C41 GOl X400 Y200 F100 Dll
N10 GOT X500 Y3OT
N10 X1W Y300
N10 X2O0 Y2OT
N10 GOl X4O0
N10 G40 X3O0 Y30O
N10 GOT C53 2100
N10 M05
Nil M02

•E UCEL1OT.MIN

>CX

FIND CHPNGEI COPY MOVE |EXTOTCT|

PACE
MODE
INSERT
MODE Ic EXTEND)

fFTl(TTIITTI(TTlfFT1(TTI(T7l(F~8l
 3754-E P-107
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-9. Find
This function searches for a specified character-string. It is also possible to advance or return the edit
pointer by the specified number of lines.

(1) Search for character-string

a) The character-string specified by keying-in operation is searched for, starting from the
character which is next to the one located by the edit pointer.

b) When the specified character-string has been found, the edit pointer stops at the first character
of the character-string.

c) To specify a character-string, key in a character before and after it. Here, the character before
and after the character-string must be the same, and the following characters cannot be used.
+, -, „ ;, :, 0 through 9, space, and characters used within the character-string
Example: /G02/

d) The symbol “?" which specifies an arbitrary character can be used.

Example: /N?01/
This is the command to search for three-digit N codes whose lower two digits are “01”.
Once a character-string has been specified, it is searched for each time function key
[F1] (FIND) and the WRITE key are pressed.

e) The symbol in character-strings represents one character other than numbers and a
decimal point.
Example: /X10b/

With this command, character-strings such as X100, X10.5, and others are not
searched for.

f) Pressing any key on the operation panel interrupts this function at the point the key has been
pressed.
 3754-E P-108
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Operation Example:
To search for*X300” from the program shown on the display below:

» N101 WO X800 Z200

N102 X250
N103 G01 Z150 F0.3
N104 X300
N105 GOO X310 Z200
N106 X200
N107 G01 Z100

# 1 le cod
i
>CX
>T /£BQ/

riHD I CM5r<a:|I COPY

I I I POCX. I iNSCRrl
I rove IcxrwCTl rooc I nooc |(CXTtM>j

( F 1 )(~F~2~ll F 3 11 F 4 l[ F 5 It F 6llF 7||F 8 l

J
i
Key in “/X300/" through the keyboard.

Press the WRITE key.

J
N101 GOO X800 Z200
N102 X250
N103 G01 Z150 F0.3
» N104 ®300
N105 GOO X310 Z200
N106 X200
N107 G01 Z100
 ..L

3754-E P-109-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Edit Line Shifting

a) This function shifts the edit line by a specified number of lines.
b) The edit pointer is placed at the first character of that line.
c) On the display screen, the display changes so that the edit line is located on the first line of the
screen.
d) When the specified number is larger than the last line of the file, the edit pointer is placed in the
line next to the last line. In this case, two lines from the last line are displayed on the screen,
followed by the following message on the command line.
file end
e) When a negative number is specified, the edit line shifts backward and the edit pointer is
placed at the first character of the specified line.
f) When a negative number exceeding the first line of the file is specified, the edit pointer is
placed at the beginning of the file. The message “beginning of file" will be displayed on the
command line.
Operation Example:
To specify the fourth block from the edit line:

» N101 GOO 0800 Z200

N102 X250
N103 G01 Z150 F0.3
N104 X300
N105 GOO X310 Z200
N106 X200
N107 G01 Z100

>F < T
l IKM: I I
J
1/-SCT
ri*> | Ort'CCI cofir conoe)

fTT1frTllTTl(T'4'lfF~5lf?~6irF'TlfF~6l
/9

Key in “4" through the keyboard.

i
Press the WRITE key.

$>
ft •WIT*

i
»B)05 GOO X310 Z200
N106 X200
N.107 G01 ZJOO
 3754-E P-110
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-10. Change
(1) This function replaces a specified character-string with another character-string specified.
Press function key [F2] (CHANGE) to select this function.

(2) The edit pointer is placed at the first character of the character-string which has replaced the
previous character-string.
Whenthe specified character-string is not found, the message “no character string” is displayed andthe
edit pointer does not move.
(3) The same delimiter as explained in 7-5-9 is used.

(4) The symbol “?” is used in quite the same manner as in 7-5-9. “Find” operation.

(5) When program data contains several same character-strings, press function key [F2] (CHANGE)
and the WRITE key. The character-strings will be replaced one by one.
(6) Pressing any key on the operation panel interrupts this function at the point the key has been
pressed. In this case, character-strings are not replaced.

(7) The following option code can be used:

“;A” When this option code is designated, global search and replace can be executed. The
character-strings are replaced at one time.
 3754-E P-111
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Operation Example:
To replace “Z200” in the N105 block with “Z210”

»N101 §00 X800 Z250

N102 X250
N103 G01 Z150 F0.300
M104
N105 GOO X310 Z200
N106 X200

>C/210/200 ]
>c/zaxvz2io

T|MO I owrcel COPY | ixM [cxrRÿif nxc IMSCRTj

rODC |CCXTDO)

fpTirFT1ITTI(TXl(Tÿ(TÿirF~7lfF6l
/?

Key in 7Z200/Z210/” through the keyboard.

J
Press the WRITE key.

]
N101 GOO X800 Z250
N102 X250
N103 G01 Z150 F0.300
N104 X300
»N105 GOO X310 0210
N106 X200
 3754-E P-112
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-11. Copy, Move, and Extract

These functions are used to transfer a group of commands from one program to another or to insert the same
group of commands into several different positions of a program.

!
N101
N102
N103

N121
N122 Copy or move
N123
i Extract buffer
i r N103
1

Stored
N121
J
i
N215
N216 Extract
N103
Extract
N121
N217
N218
:
i To other areas

Fig. 2-22 Copy, Move, and Extract Functions

Operation Sequence:

- Save the group of commands into the extract buffer using the COPY of MOVE command.
- The EXTRACT command will insert the commands saved in the extract buffer into the specified sequence.
Here, the extract buffer means the buffer where commands are temporarily saved for copy or transfer
operation. The buffer capacity is 64 character x 23 lines.
 3754-E P-113-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(1) Copy
This function transfers specified program data to the extract buffer.
Press function key [F3] (COPY) after the range (in terms of lines) of program data to be duplicated has
been specified.

a) Program data in the specified range which starts from the edit line (») is transferred to the
extract buffer.

b) The edit pointer is placed at the first character of the line that is preceded by the last line of the
specified range.

c) Program data previously registered in the extract buffer is erased.

d) When the specified number is larger than the last line of the file, program data up to the last
line is transferred.

e) When a negative number is specified, program data in the blocks preceding the edit line (edit
line not included) is transferred.
When a negative number exceeding the first line of the file is specified, program data up to
the first line of the file is transferred.

f) Pressing the WRITE key without entering the number of lines causes program data in the edit
line to be transferred.

g) When an attempt has been made to transfer program data which is larger than the extract
buffer, the message “extract buffer overflow” will appear on the display screen and copy
operation is not executed.
 -i.

3754-E P-114
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Operation Example:
To duplicate blocks N103 through N105:
N101 GOO X800 Z200
N102 X250
»N103 G01 Hi 50 F0.300
M104 X300
N105 GOO X310 Z200
N106 X200
N107 G01 Z170

I
Move the symbol “»” to N103 using the cursor control keys.

>CO 3
I
l
«se
I
J
iretRT
Fit© | CH*<2| COPY I rove ICXTWCTI rote I nooe I CCXTCMDJ

rFTifFÿfF3ifFTirF~5ifF~6irF~7irFÿi
/?
I
Key in “3” through the keyboard.

i
Press the WRITE key.

I
N101 GOO X800 Z200
N102 X250
N103 G01 Z150 F0.300
N104 X300
N105 GOO X310 Z210
»[§106 X200
N107 G01 Z170
 3754-E P-115-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Move
This function extracts program data in the specified range of a file and transfers it to the extract buffer.
Press function key [F4] (MOVE) after the range (in terms of lines) of program data to be transferred has
been specified.

a) Program data in the specified range which starts from the edit line (») is transferred to the
extract buffer.

b) The lines transferred to the extract buffer are erased from the display screen.
c) The edit pointer is shifted to the first character of the line next to the last line of transferred
lines.
d) Program data previously registered in the extract buffer is erased.

e) When the specified number is larger than the last line of the file, program data up to the last
line is transferred.

f) After program data has been transferred, the message “**RECORD DELETE” appears on the
command line. Here, indicates the number of the specified lines.

g)
“**”
When a negative number is specified, program data in the blocks preceding the edit line (edit
line not included) is transferred.
When a negative number exceeding the first line of the file is specified, program data up to the first
line of the file is transferred.

h) When an attempt has been made to transfer program data which is larger than the extract
buffer, the message “extract buffer overflow” will appear on the display screen and move
operation is not executed.

i) Pressing the WRITE key without entering the number of lines causes program data in the edit
line to be transferred.
 3754-E P-116
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Operation Example:
To transfer blocks N103 through N105:

N101 GOO X800 Z200

N102 X250
» N103 £5)01 Z150 F0.300
M104 X300
N105 GOO X310 Z200
N106 X200
N107 G01 Z170

I
Move the symbol “»" to N103 using the cursor control keys.

>M 3

««
l rir® | CH*OC| COPT |I txrf. ICXTWCTI note | rotc

I~F~T1(~F~ÿn lÿ~3l fF~4~l f~F~5~l fF~6~) rp~7l (~F~8~I

leexiooj
J
/?
i
Key in “3” through the keyboard.

I
Press the WRITE key.

N101 GOO X800

1 Z200
N102 X250
» 0)106 X200
N107 G01 Z170

The following message is displayed on the command line.

>M 3
3 RECORD DELETE

l rire I o**cc| COPY ! rove ICXTRACTI

(TTl(T~F)rF~T)fF~T)1 F 5l(T~6~lfF~T)(T~8l
note I rote | t00003
J
 3754-E P-117
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Extract
This function inserts program data which is registered in the extra buffer before the edit line (»).
Press function key [F5] (EXTRACT) and the WRITE key after the edit line has been selected.

a) Data in the extract buffer is inserted before the edit line (»).

b) Data in the extract buffer is not erased.

c) The edit pointer remains at the same position.

d) If no data is registered in the extract buffer when EXTRACT operation is attempted, the
message “extract buffer empty” is displayed and data transfer is not initiated.

e) To erase program data registered in the extract buffer, proceed as follows.

[F5] (EXTRACT);C [WRITE]
File data is not changed.
 3754-E P-118
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Operation Example:
To insert program data in the extract buffer before N203

Data in the extract buffer

N103 G01 Z150 F0.300

N104 X300
N105 GOO X310 Z200

N210 GOO X600 Z200

N202 X150
»[§203 G01 Z150 F0.400
N204 X200
N205 GOO X210 Z200

I
Move the symbol “»” to N103 using the cursor control keys.

x<

l Ii MOVE
J
PAGE IffiOIT
riND | CW*G£| COPY |EXT(WCT| ftxc I note ICXTOCJ

rrri(TTirFTirFÿrFTirr'6ÿrF~7irF~8'i
/?
I
Press the WRITE key.

N210 GOO
I
X600 Z200
N202 X150
N103 G01 Z150 F0.300
M104 X300
N105 GOO X310 Z200
» [§203 G01 Z150 F0.400
N204 X200
N205 GOO X210 Z200
 3754-E P-119-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-12. Page Mode

The page mode (P mode) is used to fix the display given on the display screen to enable substitution of
characters and others.
The page mode is used in the following cases:

- creating a new file

- replacing one character in an existing file
- adding a character-string to the end of a line
The operating procedure is as indicated below.

(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

(2) Press function key [F4] (EDIT).

(3) Key in a file name and press the WRITE key. The screen as indicated below will be displayed.
This establishes the P mode.
When the insert mode needs to be changed to the P mode, follow the steps below.

PROG OPERATION EDIT P MODE WHEEL 180.MIN.

01000
M100 C 00 X300 Y300 S250
N101 G56 Z-55 H09 M03
N103 C41G01 X4 00 Y200 7100 Dll
N104 C03 X500 Y300 10 J100
N105 X100 Y300 1-200 J0
N106 X200 Y200 1100 J0
N107 C01 X400
N10S C40 X300 Y300
N109 G00G53 Z100
N110 M05
>_
N116

>ER
LINE I CHAR. I CHAR. LINE I EDIT
LI“J
INS DELETEI INSERT l DELETEI DELETE| ERASE I QUIT [EXTEND]

nÿfTTiiT3iiTÿrrriiT-rifp~nrF'e)

(4) Press the function key [F8] (EXTEND).

(4) With the above screen displayed, press function key [F8] (EXTEND). The screen will change as
indicated on the following page.
 .X.

3754-E P-120
SECTION 2 OPERATION

PROG OPERATION EDIT P MODE WHEEL 100.MIN.

> 1009
N100 C00 X300 Y3M S250
N101 CS6 Z-55 H09 M03
N103 C41C01 1400 T200 F100 Dll
N104 C03 X300 Y300 10 J100
N105 X100 T300 1-200 J0
N106 X200 T200 1100 J0
N107 G01 X400
N108 G40 X300 Y300
N109 C00G53 Z100
N110 M05
Nlll H02

>
>EX

FIND jCHANGE| CCPY | MOVE IjEXTRACljI MODE

PAGE INSERT
lMODE |[EXTENDI
rrrirrr)rrTir?ÿf?ÿrrÿrrTirrai

(5) Press the function key [F6] (PAGE MODE).

(5) Press function key [F6] (PAGE MODE). “P MODE” will be displayed on the screen and the page
mode will be established.
Page Mode Operation:
a) When a character is keyed in in the page mode, the cursor-located character is replaced by the
keyed-in character and the cursor moves to the right. In other words, in the page mode, the
cursor is moved to the right and the character (including a space) located by the cursor is
replaced by a keyed-in character each time data is entered. Therefore, if an attempt has been
made to assign a character-string many digits of characters, subsequent character data might
be replaced.

b) The edit pointer and the edit line do not shift to any other pages.

c) Each page has a total of 16 lines for edit operation.

When the WRITE key is pressed while the bottom line is designated as the edit line, 16 lines of data
are shifted by one line each and a blank line is created on the 16th line. The edit line does not
change and the edit pointer is placed at the beginning of that line.

d) When the WRITE key is pressed while a line other than the bottom line is designated as the
edit line, the edit line is moved to the subsequent line and the edit pointer is moved to the
beginning of that line. This also applies to the insert mode.

e) When the program cannot be displayed in one page (16 lines), press the page key (tg) . To
~
return the display to the previous page, press the page key (GO) .
 3754-E P-121
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-5-13. Insert Mode

The insert mode (I mode) is used to add character-string(s) to the existing file. Each time data is keyed in
through the keyboard, it is added.
The operating procedure is as indicated below.

(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

(2) Press function key [F4] (EDIT).

(3) Key in a file name and press the WRITE key. The screen as indicated below will be displayed.
This establishes the page mode.
To change the page mode to the insert mode, proceed to the following steps.

PROG OPERATION EDIT P MODE WHEEL 100.MIN.

01000
HIM CM X3M Y300 S250
Hl«l C36 Z-55 H09 M03
N103 C41G01 X400 Y2M F100 Dll
N104 G03 X500 Y300 10 J100
N103 X100 Y300 1-200 J0
N106 X200 Y200 1100 J0
H107 C01 X400
N108 C40 X300 Y300
N109 C00G33 2100
NL10 M0S
>_
M116

>ER

LINE CHAR. CHAR. LINE EDIT

INSERTI DELEIEl INSERT I DELETEI DELETE| ERASE I QUIT I[ EXTEND]

rPTifTÿnÿf7T7if?rinrgiiT~7irrFi

(4) Press the function

key [F8] (EXTEND).

(4) With the above screen displayed, press function key [F8] (EXTEND). The screen will change as
indicated on the following page.
 3754-E P-122
SECTION 2 OPERATION

PROC OPERATION EDIT I MODE KEM. MIN.

0TST9
>_C3-100 VC4-0 VC6-0
ctt xe Y0 20
/CRON
N1 C17
VGCLR-1
C00 X—VC3 Y0 Z-VC4
/ G02 X-VC3 Y0 I-VC3 J0 F4000
VCCLR-2
/ X—VC3 Y0 VC30-0 I—VC3 J0
VGCLR-3
/ C03 X-VC3 Y0 I-VC3 J0
VGCLR-4
/ X—VC3 Y0 I—VC3
CIS
VCCLR-5
>DC
>DC
>EX
>m
PACE INSERTI
FIND OHANCEl COPY MOVE IEXTRACT] MODE MODE I
[EXTEND]

(TTi(T~T)r?ÿ(TTif?ÿrr¥irrTif’Firi

(5) Press the function key

[F7] (INSERT MODE).

(5) Press function key [F7] (INSERT MODE). “I MODE” will be displayed on the screen and the insert
mode will be established.
 3754-E P-123
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Insert Mode Operation:

a) Each time a character is keyed in in the insert mode, it is inserted before the edit pointer and
the character-strings following the edit pointer are shifted by one character. When data is
inserted successively and the currently displayed data has reached the right end, data insertion
is disabled.

b) The edit pointer and the edit line do not shift to any other pages.
When the cursor key @ is pressed while the bottom line is designated as the edit line, the edit
line moves to the top line.

c) When the cursor key (ÿ) is pressed while the top line is designated as the edit line, the edit
line moves to the bottom line. Movements activated by the cursor keys @ and (g) can be
understood in the same manner. That is, when the cursor key @ is pressed while the edit
pointer is located at the right end of the bottom line, the edit pointer moves to the left end of the
top line and the edit line moves to the top line. Similarly, when the cursor key @) is pressed
while the edit pointer is located at the left end of the top line, the edit pointer moves to the right
end of the bottom line and the edit line moves to the bottom line. In these cases, the display
on the screen does not change.

d) Each page has a total of 16 lines for edit operation.

When the WRITE key is pressed while the bottom line is designated as the edit line, 16 lines of data
are shifted by one line each and a blank line is created on the 16th line. The edit line does not
change and the edit pointer is placed at the beginning of that line.

e) When the WRITE key is pressed while a line other than the bottom line is designated as the
edit line, the edit line is moved to the subsequent line and the edit pointer is moved to the
beginning of that line. This also applies to the page mode.

f) When the program cannot be displayed in one page (16 lines), press the page key ([g) . To
return the display to the previous page, press the page key (0) .
"
 3754-E P-124-A1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-6. MULTI-FILE TRANSFER (MPIP)

The MPIP command is used to transfer multiple part program files at a time using the RS232C interface.
The following sub commands are provided.
Item Command Function
Multi-file read MR Reads multiple part program files from an external device and
stores them to the memory.
Multi-file punch MP Outputs multiple part program files, stored in the memory, to a
tape punch. _
Multi-file veiry MV Verifies multiple part program files, in an external device,
against those in the memory.
Multi-file transfer end Q Quits the multi-file transfer mode.

A CAUTION] :
l- During file transfer processing, do not turn off the power supply. If the power supply is turned
' ' off during file transfer, the contents of file might be destroyed.

7-6-1. Multi-file Read

The multi-file read function reads multiple part programs from the external device and store them in the NC
memory.
The operation procedure is indicated below:

(1) Press function key [F5] (MULTI PIP).

=MPIP
>
± I MULTI I I
DATE DIR PIP EDIT PIP LIST CONDENS C EXTEND]

“=MPIP
>' is displayed. Press [F5] (MULTI PIP).

The function key names change as indicated in item (2).

(2) Press function key [F1] (MULTI READ).

=MPIP
>MR_
#ULTI MULTI MULTI M-PIP
/ READ PUNCH VERIFY QUIT

(Tÿr?ÿrrTiiTxi(TTirrr)rF7irF~8i
“>MR” Is displayed. Press [F1] (MULTI READ).

“MR” is displayed on the console line.

 3754-E P-125-A1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Following “>MR”, enter the file name of the file to be read using the keyboard and press the WRITE
key.
The machining programs are read and stored in the NC memory.
While the program is being read, “M-READ” andthe file name are displayed at the upper right area of the
screen.
After the start of program reading, “Valid information reading” is displayed on the console line.
At the completion of reading, V appears on the console line.

PROGRAM OPERATION M-PIP M-READ BOX-1350. MIN

BOX-1350. MIN
file exist overwrite ? (YxN) !Y
varid information reading

MULTI MULTI MULTI I M-PIP

READ PUNCH VERIFY QUIT

rrrirriniTiniTTiiTTifF~6iiT"7irF~iri
(4) Press function key [F7] (M-PIP QUIT).

>Q_
MULTI MULTI MULTI M-PIP
READ PUNCH VERIFY QUIT

rrrinÿiTÿrFÿnÿnÿij'T)
“>Q" Is displayed. / 3ress [F7] (M-PIP QUIT).

The function key names return to those as displayed in item (1).

 ..X

3754-E P-126-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : (—Command format'

>MR<dnput-device:xinput-file-namex,<output-device:>x;option>WRITE

(1) Input-device
TT:, CNO:, CN1:,CN2:, CN3:
If no input-device name is specified, the default device set for NC optional parameter (word) No. 57 is
selected. (If “0" is set for this parameter, CNO: is selected.)
(2) Input-file-name
Main file name : Alphanumerics (max. 16 characters), beginning with an alphabetical letter. Wild
card (“*", “?”) can be used.
Extension : Alphanumerics (max. 3 characters), beginning with an alphabetical letter. Wild card
(“*’’, “?") can be used.
(3) Output-device:
MDO:, MD1:, FDO:, FD1:, FD2:, FD3:
Default device is MD1:.
(4) Option
Y: Unconditional overwrite; if the file of the same file name to be output already exists in the
specified output device, the file is unconditionally overwritten in this operation.

[Supplement] : 1. If the text (tape data) read from the input device does not agree with the specified
input file name, it is skipped and not stored to the output device.

2. If input file name is omitted, input file name of is assumed and all read texts are
stored to the specified output device.
3. If available space in the output device becomes full during reading, an error occurs
and communication is shut off. In this case, the file being read is not stored.

4. If the file of the same file name already exists in the output device while no option Y is
specified, the following messages are displayed on the console line.
A.MIN
file exist overwrite ? (Y/N) I
If “Y” is input, the existing file is overwritten, and if “N” is input, the text to be read is
skipped and the next file is read.

5. If an output file name is specified, an error occurs.

5213 File name, error 11

6. If the read file agrees with the file selected for DNC-B mode operation, the text to be
read is skipped and the next file is read.
5226 Main program file selecting ’A.MIN
 3754-E P-127-A1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : 7. If the read text already exists in the output device and if it is protected, the text to be
read is skipped and the next file is read.
’A.MIN File write protect
Example 1: >MR *.MIN [WRITE]

All files with extension “.MIN” are read and stored to MD1

Example 2: >MR BOX1???.MIN [WRITE]

All files beginning with “BOX1” and with extension “.MIN” are read
and stored to MD1:. Files such as BOX1001.MIN and
BOX1002.MIN are read.

Example 3: >MR [WRITE]

All input files are read and stored to MD1:.

7-6-2. Multi-file Punch

The multi-file punch function outputs multiple part programs, stored in the NC memory, to the punch device.
The operation procedure is indicated below:

(1) Press function key [F5] (MULTI PIP).

=MPIP
>

DATE DIR PIP EDIT

MULTI I
PIP | LIST ICONDENsj C EXTEND]

rmrrÿirrÿifFTiCEDrmrmrrei
“=MPIP
>" Is displayed. / Press [F5] (MULTI PIP).

The function key names change as indicated in item (2).

(2) Press function key [F2] (MULTI PUNCH).

=MPIP
>MP_
MTI MULTI MULTI M-PIP
/ READ PUNCH VERIFY QUIT

/ rrri(TÿiTÿ(TxifFTif?ÿrFT]fFÿ
/ “MP* Is displayed. _ Press [F2] (MULTI PUNCH).

“MP” is displayed on the console line.

 3754-E P-128-A1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Following “>MP”, enter the file name of the file to be output to the punch device using the keyboard
and press the WRITE key.
The part programs are output to the punch device.
While the program is being output to the punch device, “M-PUNCH” and the file name are displayed at
the upper right area of the screen.
At the completion of output, “file end” appears on the console line, then “>” appears.

PROGRAM OPERATION M-PIP M-PUNCH BOX-1350. MIN

-MPIP
>MP BOX-1350. MIN
BOX-1350. MIN file end

MULTI MULTI MULTI I M-PIP

READ PUNCH VERIFY QUIT

(4) Press function key [F7] (M-PIP QUIT).

>Q_
MULTI MULTI MULTI M-PIP
READ PUNCH VERIFY QUIT

nÿnÿnÿnrrif?Ti(Tÿ(jTirr8i
“>Q” Is displayed. /Press [F7] (M-PIP QUIT).
The function key names return to those as displayed in item (1).
 3754-E P-129-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : i— Command format'

>MP<dnput-device:xinput-file-namex><output-device:>x;option>WRITE

(1) Input-device:
MDO:, MD1:, FDO:, FD1:, FD2:, FD3:
Default device is MD1

(2) Input-file-name
Main file name : Alphanumerics (max. 16 characters), beginning with an alphabetical letter. Wild
card (“*”, “?”) can be used.
Extension : Alphanumerics (max. 3 characters), beginning with an alphabetical letter. Wildcard
(“**, “7”) can be used.

(3) Output-device:
TT:, CNO:, CN1:, CN2:, CN3:
If no output-device name is specified, the default device set for optional parameter (word) No. 45 is
selected. (If “5” is set for this parameter, CNO: is selected.)
(4) Option
P: Only protected files are output.
C: Only files which are not protected are output.

[Supplement] : 1. If input file name is omitted, input file name of is assumed and all files are output
to the punch device.

2. If none of the specified files exists in the input device, file is not output.
File not found

3. If an output file name is specified, an error occurs.

5213 File name, error 11
4. If only one file is output, it does not cause an error.
Example 1: >MP *.MIN [WRITE]

All files with extension .MIN in MD1: are output.

Example 2: >MP BOX1777.MIN [WRITE]

Ail files beginning with “BOX1” and with extension “.MIN” in MD1: are
output. Files such as BOX1001.MIN and BOX1002.MIN are output.

Example 3: >MP [WRITE]

All files in MD1: are output.
 3754-E P-130-A1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-6-3. Multi-file Verify

The multi-file verify function verifies multiple machining programs, stored in an external device, against
those in the NC memory.
The operation procedure is indicated below:

(1) Press function key [F5] (MULTI PIP).

=MPIP
>
4
DATE DIR PIP EDIT
MULTI
PIP LIST ICONDENs] [EXTEND]

(TllfTTlfTTIfFTIfF~5l(TDfTTKm
“=MPIP
>’ Is displayed. / Press [F51 (MULTI PIP).

The function key names change as indicated in item (2).

(2) Press function key [F3] (MULTI VERIFY).

=MPIP
>MV

//MULTI
MULTI MULTI M-PIP
READ PUNCH VERIFY QUIT

rmiml£ÿLJ t F 4 1 f F 5 11 6 11 F 7 1[ F 8)
“MV” Is displayed. Press [F3] (MULTI VERIFY).

“MV” is displayed on the console line.

 3754-E P-131-A1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Following “>MV”, enter the file name of the file to be verified using the keyboard and press the
WRITE key.
The specified part programs are read and compared to those stored in the NC memory.
While the program is being verified, “M-VERIFY” and the file name are displayed at the upper right area
of the screen.

PROGRAM OPERATION 11-PIP M-VERIFY BOX-1350. MIN

tape end
file end
data match
>
MULTI MULTI MULTI I M-PIP
READ PUNCH VERIFY QUIT

(TTirrTirrTirFÿ(T5i(TTirF'Ti(T,Fi

(4) Press function key [F7] (M-PIP QUIT).

>Q_
MULTI MULTI MULTI M-PIP
READ PUNCH VERIFY QUIT

rrni(TÿrririfFXi(TÿfTÿfTÿfF~8~>
*>0” Is displayed. /Press [F7] (M-PIP QUIT).
The function key names return to those as displayed in item (1).
 3754-E P-132-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] :

r Command format-
>MV<input-device:xinput-file-namex,<output-device:»WRITE

(1) input-device:
TT:, CNO:, CN1:, CN2:, CN3:
If no input-device name is specified, the default device set for NC optional parameter (word) No. 57 is
selected. (If “0” is set for this parameter, CNO: is selected.)
(2) input-file-name
Main file name : Alphanumerics (max. 16 characters), beginning with an alphabetical letter. Wild
card (“*”, “?") can be used.
Extension : Alphanumerics (max. 3 characters), beginning with an alphabetical letter. Wildcard
(“*", “?”) can be used.

(3) output-device:
MDO:, MD1:, FDO:, FD1:, FD2:, FD3:
Default device is MD1:.
[Supplement] : 1. If the text (tape data) read from the input device does not agree with the specified file
name, it is skipped and not verified.
In this case, the following message is displayed.
5210 Input file name not same a ‘(tape) file name’
a: Number of unmatched files
If no files match with the tape data, the following message is displayed at the end.
5210 Input file name not same error p
p:Total number of unmatched files

2. If input file name is omitted, input file name of is assumed and those which
match the read texts are verified.

3. If unmatch is found, the corresponding line is displayed on the console line with
unmatch character blinking on and off.
The message “verify continuing (Y/N) I" is displayed. To continue verify, input “Y”,
then the program verify restarts from the next line. If “N" is input, the file containing
the unmatch is skipped and program verify is executed from the next file.
For each file, the result of verify is displayed:
a) If all data matched, the following message is displayed and the next file is
continuously verified.
. .
tape end file end data match .
 JL

3754-E P-133-A1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : b) If file data remains although text (tape data) has been read to the end, the
following message is displayed on the console line and the next file is
continuously verified.
tape end
data match
c) If tape data remains although file data has been read to the end, the
following message is displayed on the console line and the next file is
continuously verified.

4. If an output file is output, it does not cause an error.

5213 File name, error 11
Example 1: >MV *.MIN [WRITE]
Verify is made with the files which have the same file name as the input
files, having extension .MIN.
Example 2: >MV BOX1???.MIN [WRITE]
Verify is made with the files which have the same file name as the input
files, having extension .MIN and beginning with BOX1. The files such as
BOX1001.MIN and BOX1002.MIN are examples of such files.
Example 3: >MV [WRITE]
Verify is made for all input files with the files having the same file name.

7-6-4. Quitting Multi-file Transfer

This function is used to quit the multi-file transfer mode and to return to the program operation mode.

(1) Press function key [F7] (MULTI QUIT).

>Q_
MULTI MULTI MULTI M-PIP
READ PUNCH VERIFY QUIT

fTT1fFÿ(TÿfTT1(TTl(TT](J~7irF~8~l
“>cr Is displayed. /Press [F7] (M-PIP QUIT).
“>Q” is displayed on the console line and the system quits the multi-file transfer mode. The screen
returns to the program operation mode screen and the function key names as indicated below are
displayed.

MULTI I
DATE DIR PIP EDIT PIP LIST CONDENS| [EXTEND]

I £ 1 II F £ l(~P~5~lf F 4"][ F 5 l( £ SlfF 7 |[ F 8*l

 3754-E P-134-A1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-6-5. Notes on Using Multi-file Transfer Sub Commands

(1) Communication Text Format

The text format used in multi-file transfer operation differs from the format used in a single file transfer
operation. The format used in multi-file transfer operation is indicated below.

a) ISO code

File File
$ name % CR LF NC program % $ name % CR LF NC program % %

-First file-- *+* Second file Last file -*j

1) The file name is preceded by “$” symbol.

2) The data which follows “% CR LP is regarded as the machining program.
3) The program end code is fixed to “%”. (NULL code is not allowed.)
4) The end of communication code is fixed to “%%”. (NULL code is not allowed.)
5) Leading and trailing feed holes (NULL or space) are not provided.

b) EIA code

File File
$ name ER EOB NC
program ER $ name ER EOB NC program ER ER

-First file Second file Last file -H

1) A file name is preceded by “$” symbol (set for optional parameter (bit) No. 31).
2) The data which follows “ER EOB” is regarded as the part program.
3) The program end code is fixed to “ER”. (NULL code is not allowed.)
4) The end of communication code is fixed to “ER ER”. (NULL code is not allowed.)
5) Leading and trailing feed holes (NULL or space) are not provided.

(2) Timing Chart

a) Multi-file read and multi-file verify (CNC: master)

DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3
Send
(CNC-*HOST)
_n rui run run_n_
\I t \ t t \t
Receive Communlca-
tion text 1
%[ Communlca- <y0
tion text 2
1 „ I Communica- % I
tion text n
%n
(HOST-CNC) );

|**| Infinite Hn Hn H«
 ,z~

3754-E P-135-A1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

1* The DC3 code is output in the following cases.

1) Just after receiving the text file name

2) Just before writing text name to output device (every 252 characters)
(multi-file read only)

3) Just after receiving “%” code at the end of a part program

4) Just after receiving “%%" code which indicates the end of communication.
2* t1
“tr indicates the “RS232C ready wait time” set for parameter.

b) Multi-file punch (CNC: master, DC2/DC4 code output)

Send M Communica- %] Communica- %[ Communication %%| [

(CNC-HOST) DC2 tion text 1 tion text 2 textn DC4

c) Multi-file punch (CNC: master, DC2/DC4 code not output)

«5 _
Send I Communica- %l Communica- %| Communication %% [
(CNC-HOST) tion text 1 tion text 2 textn

d) Multi-file punch (CNC: slave)

Send Communica- %
(CNC-HOST) - tion text 1
I Communica- % I
tion text 2
«
n
I Communica- % I
tion text n
J%L
t \ t t \ t
Receive
(HOST—CNC)
_n
DC1
nn
DC3 DC1
n+si
DC3 DC1
n_n
DC3 DC1
**| t2 **| t2
hJ Infinite
t2
H O H t3
1* t2
“t2” indicates the “RS232C ready wait time” set for parameter.
2* t3
13” indicates the “RS232C ready wait time" set for parameter.

e) Multi-file read and multi-file verify

Receive _J Communica- %| Communica- %| Communication %%| [

(HOST—CNC) DC2 tion text 1 tion text 2 textn (DC4)
 JL

3754-E P-136-A1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Parameter Settings

Before connecting an external device, it is necessary to set the following parameters.
For details of parameters, refer to SECTION 3 “PARAMETERS”.

a) NC optional parameter (bit) No. 1, 8, 12, 13, 14, 21, 22, 40

[Supplement] : 1. In multi-file transfer operation, since the tape delimiter code is fixed to “%" or “ER",
the parameter (No. 1, bit 3) used for this setting is not used.

2. Verify in tape reading is effective only when the input device is TR: (tape reader).
Therefore, the parameter (No. 1, bit 4) used to set the device is not used in multi-file
read operation.

3. The multi-file transfer operation supports only standard DC code. Therefore, if the
parameter setting* is for “DC code control type 2” or “no DC code control”, an error
occurs.
* Bit 5 and 6 of No. 8, 13, 14, and 15:
Setting should be ON for bit 5 and OFF for bit 6.
5261 Device name error 1 ‘CNO’
t
Varies depending on the selected device name

4. In multi-file transfer operation, since file name punch is fixed to “yes”, the parameter
(No. 12, bit 2) used for this setting is not used.

5. In multi-file transfer operation, since feed hole punch is fixed to “no”, the parameter
(No. 12, bit 4 and bit 5) used for this setting is not used.

b) NC optional parameter (word) No. 6, 34 to 42, 45, and 57

[Supplement] : 1. In multi-file transfer operation, if “5” is set in the punch device name designation (No.
45), it selects “CNO:" instead of “PP:”.

2. In multi-file transfer operation, if “0” is set in the tape read device name designation
(No. 57), it selects “CNO:” instead of “TR:”.
 -X.

3754-E P-137
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-7. Free
This function displays the available capacity of the memory (MD1:) or a floppy disk (FDO:). The indication is
made both in the number of sectors and bytes.
1 sector = 252 bytes
When creating a new file, all the remaining storage area cannot be used for storing program data since a file
name, the number of sectors to be used, and other data are also stored together with program data.
One byte corresponds to one character.
The operating procedure is as indicated below.

(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

AUTO MDI 11MANUAL] IEOT AUX I .DAT : Man

The screen as indicated below will be displayed.

PROGRAM OPERATION

•EX

RUN
TIME INIT | DELETE |RENAME FREE | GUIDE | C EXTEND]

fTTi(Tÿ(TTi(TTirrTifFTirFÿrF8i

(2) Press function key [F6] (FREE).

 3754-E P-138
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Key in a device name, MD1: or FDO. The default is MD1

(4) Press the WRITE key.

The screen as indicated below will be displayed.
142/$008E TOTAL SECTORS AVAILABLE
35784 TOTAL BYTES

PROGRAM OPERATION FREE

FREE MDIJ PAGE l

5884/S16FC TOTAL SECTORS AVAILABLE

1482768 TOTAL BYTES
3766 m TAPE STORE LENGTH

-EX
-FR

RUN
TIME INIT [DELETE (RENAME FREE GUIDE C EXTEND]

iT~TirF~ÿfT~3i(?TirF~5~irF~6TrF~T]fF~Tr)

The number preceded by the symbol “$” is a hexadecimal notation.

[Supplement] : $008E is the hexadecimal notation of 142.
$80 = 16 x 8
$E = 14
Therefore, $008E = 16x8 + 14=142

Refer to Section 1, “PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS BY FLOPPY DISKS” in

the Special Function Manual No. 1 for details of the remaining capacity of a floppy disk.
The following option code can be used:
“;C” When this option code is designated, sizes of continuous capacity available
are displayed in succession.
Example: = FR;C
 3754-E P-139-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-8. List
This function displays the list of a file on the display screen or prints them out using a printer. The operating
procedure is as indicated below.

(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

jÿMOl ||MANUAL| p<T AUxj jwWIETsj jgRO SEt| RO(H.DAuj jwac M«n|

The screen as indicated below will be displayed.

PROGRAM OPERATION

I
' DATE DIR PIP EDIT
MULTI
PIP | LIST |CONDENs) [EXTEND!

(TnniTT)fF3l(TTirrFirrafFTlfFFI
/9
 JL

3754-E P-140-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Press function key [F6] (LIST).

The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen and the following is displayed
on the screen.
LIST i_L i

PilOMAU O1' 'IAHW

Pf OViiWlI ft

INDEX DISPLAY PR0CEDU1E

(F?) -> IOCMIIN
(F3) -> FD0:#.MIN
TO DISPLAY OTHER INOEXES. AFTER PRESSING (FI].
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AMD FILE NAME. THEN PRESS [TRITE) KEY.
06FAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME -- w:
*.MIN

>XL
>.
INDEX |
HOI:
INDEX
TOO: COMMAND OVEfWV
INDEX I HISTORY I INSERT I
CHAR
DELETE I CANCEL I
(TT)fFin(Ty)(TT)fFiniTiniTTifFiri

WOGRAM (Fr'tA'lON

1 IS’ (TJ -
L B0X-1.MINH

INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

(F2) -> ®i:*.MIN
(F3) -> FOO:MIIN
TO DISPLAY OTHER INOEXES. AFTER PRESSING (FI],
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME. THEN PRESS [WRITE] KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME ~ -
mil
MM*

>».
>

INDEX |
rioiT 1 RJO: ICOMMAND"! OVEFWV I OUR 1
INDEX I INDEX I HISTORY I INSERT I DELETE I CANCEL
'RITE

fFT)fFT)rFF)rFÿ(Tÿrr6TfF~7TfF~8T
 .L . JL

3754-E P-141-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

PROG OPERATION
LIST BB1:B0X-1.MIH PAGE 1

Oil
Neei see xe
N0O2 ve
N303 20
N004 CPLL 077
NOBS Xll Yll Zll
MBS
012
M120 cee xiee
Ni2i vice
N122 ziee
H123 CALL 077

*XL
»L BOX-l.HIN

DATE DIR PIP EDIT I p,pLTI I LIST IcONDENSl [EXTENDI

rrrirrFifÿTifTTifFÿ(TÿfFÿrF~8~i

(3) Key in a file name through the keyboard following “L i_.

Example: BOX-1.MIN

(4) Press the WRITE key.

WAITE

With the above steps, program data in the specified file is displayed on the screen.

[Supplement] : 1. The list of a file is displayed in units of 12 lines per page.

If the list cannot be displayed on one page, the “=” code which indicates that the
control is waiting for next command input is not displayed on the command line and
the cursor remains as it was. Possible operations and the results are as indicated
below.
a) When the BS key is pressed, the display page will advance by one.
b) When the WRITE key is pressed, the display page will advance continuously up
to the last page. To stop it, press the BS key.
c) When the CANCEL key is pressed, the command is aborted with the display
page unchanged.
 3754-E P-142-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Example: When the list of a file is large

1) Press function key [F6] (LIST) and the WRITE key. This will
display the first page of the list.

2) Press the BS key repeatedly until the required page is obtained.

3) Press the CANCEL key to abort operation.

4) The next function can be started with the display unchanged.

[Supplement] : 2. When a file name has not been entered, the screen will display the list of the file
“A.MIN”. That is, pressing the WRITE key without entering a file name has the same
effect as entry of the file name “A.MIN”.

3. The device name to which the list of a file is output can be specified following the file
name.
Each output device is provided with a code as specified below.
Display screen on the operation pane : PN
Printer (optional) PR
Teletypewriter (optional) TT
Specify the code of the output device folio wing the file name with a delimiter
placed between them. Key in “:”after the output device code.
When an output device code is not specified, the system selects the display screen
on the operation panel as the output device.
Example: L u ,PR: [WRITE]

The list of the file named A. MIN is output to the printer.

Example: L u BOX-1.MIN.TT: [WRITE]

The list of the file named BOX-1.MIN is output to the teletypewriter.

4. The option code “;H” allows the operator to add a comment at the beginning of the list
page. Key in “;H" following the output device.
 3754-E P-143-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Example: L GEAR-1.MIN,TT:;H [WRITE]

When the instructions indicated above are keyed in, the prompt “I" will appear on the
command line, indicating that a comment can be entered.
A comment consisting of a maximum of 60 characters can be entered in through the
keyboard.
When a command has been entered, press the WRITE key. List output will start.

PROG OPERATION LIST

Keyed-in comment
= XL
•L SEPR-l.MIN.TTuH
IHRIN PROCRPH KOUTEI 1

DATE I DIR PIP | EDIT I p,pLTI LIST |coNcens| [EXTENDI

fFT1(TÿfFÿfFÿfFÿfF~6irF~7lfF~8l

List output to the teletypewriter is as shown below. The comment is output to on each
list page.

L BB1 GEAR-1. MIN PAGE1

MAIN PROGRAM GEAR KOUTEI 1
01000
N100 GOO X300 Y300 S250
N101 G56 Z-55 H09 M03
N103 G41 G01 X400 Y200 F100 D11
N104 G03 X500 Y300 I 0 J100
N105 X100 Y300 I-200 JO
 JL

3754-E P-144
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-9. Data Arrangement in Memory

When the program stored in the memory is edited repeatedly, the unusable area in the memory will increase.
This decreases the available capacity of the memory and restricts the number of programs to be stored.
This function is used to arrange data in the memory so that it can be used effectively.
The operating procedure is as indicated below.

(1) Press EDIT AUX.

X
\
| rssm rrrVirsrt nÿn
]
00B§BSS0

RRRRRRR
IMPJIQJJJIÿLUIUJ
sp

®00© d
0©00 E
®0®0 r
0000 7

(3) Press WRITE.

(2) Press function key [F7] (CONDENS).

(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

(2) Press function key [F7] (CONDENS).

The prompt “= CO” will be displayed on the command line.

(3) Press the WRITE key.

Arrangement of data in the memory will start.
After the completion of arrangement, the prompt “=” will appear on the command line.
 3754-E P-145
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-10. Time
The control can count the time by setting the reference time. This function allows the operator to know the
present time.
The operating procedure is as indicated below.
(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

|AUTO j pn«ux|pAIEluj jzERO SElj jramTÿ |MIC M«ij

ft
The screen as indicated below will be displayed.

PROGRAM OPERATION

1 DATE | DIR I PIP | EDIT | rg I LIST |cONDQ«| [EXTENDI

(THlPÿ(T~3l(TÿfF~5irF~6irrTlfF~a1
/?

(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND).

 3754-E P-146
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Press function key [F1] (TIME).

When the indication as shown below has appeared on the screen, the system is ready for time data
entry.
=T
1985. 4. 12 FRIDAY 11:59:21
enter time (H:M:S)I

PROGRAM OPERATION TIME

-EX

1965. 4.12 FRIDAY 11:59:21

t me (H:M:S) !

TIME INIT DELETE IRENAME FREE GUIDE | CEXTEND3

CF~1~)fP~2lfF~3irF~4lfF~5~irF~6lfF~7irF~8l
ft
(4) Key in the present time through the keyboard: hours, minute, and second, each delimited by
Example: 12:4:00
 3754-E P-147
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) Press the WRITE key.

WRIT!

'PROGRAM OPERATION TIME

1995. 4.12 WEDNESDAY 12: 0:50

enter time (H:M:S> !12:4:00
1995. 4.12 WEDNESDAY 12: 4: 0

RUN
TIME | INIT IDELETE |RENAME TREE | GUIDE | C EXTENDI

rrTi(TTi(T3i(Tÿ(T~ÿrF~6irF~7irF~8i

When time data has been entered correctly, the screen displays the set date, day of the week, and time.
If time data has not ben entered correctly, the screen displays “enter time (H:M:S)!” again, requesting
the operator to enter correct data.

[Supplement] : 1. When time data only needs to be checked and does not need to be set, simply press
the WRITE key. The TIME command will terminate.

2. The data setting range is as follows.

Hour 0 through 23
Minute 0 through 59
Second 0 through 59

3. After 23-hour 59-minute 59 second, the time changes to 0-hour 0-minute 0-second
and the date and the day of the week change.

4. The time is counted from 0-hour 0-minute 0-second when the NC is ready after
turning on the power.
 3754-E P-148
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-11. Initializing
This function initializes the storage device such as memory and floppy disk. When this function is activated,
all the data in the storage device will be deleted.
The operating procedure is as indicated below.

(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

PROGRAM OPERATION
n

1
DATE | DIR I PIP I EDIT | PIP | LIST |CONDENs) CEXTEIHDI

rp~ÿ~l CT~2~I fp~T1fF~5~l PF~7~I (~F~8~1

n
(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND).
 ~JL.

3754-E P-149
SECTION 2 OPERATION

PROGRAM OPERATION INIT

-EX
-IN
Initial ize OK (Y/N)
RUN
TIME INIT DELETE |RENAME FREE GUIDE | [EXTEND]

[ F 1 ifFiril F 5 II F 4 lfF~Sll F 6 It F 7 lf~F 8 1

/?
(3) Press function key [F2] (INIT).
(4) Enter the device name, MD1: or FDO:. The default is MD1
(5) Press the WRITE key.
The indication as shown below will appear on the screen, requiring the operator to respond.
= IN

WRITE

Initialize OK? (Y/N)

PROGRAM OPERATION INIT

•EX
-IN
initialize OK (Y/N) !N

RUN
TIME INIT DELETE (RENAME FREE GUIDE |[EXTENDI

rpTirFTirFy)fF7ifFFifFÿrFTirF~8i
 3754-E P-150
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(6) To initialize the device, type Y. To abort operation, type N.

0000000(§)
00000000
000000ÿ0
0000000S
(7) Press the WRITE key.

WRITE

/9J
When Y has been typed and the WRITE key has been pressed, the storage device will be initialized.
When N has been typed and the WRITE key has been pressed, initialization will be aborted.
For the procedure to initialize a floppy disk, refer to SECTION 1, “PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTIONS BY FLOPPY DISKS" in the Special Function Manual No. 1.
 3754-E P-151
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-12. Deletion
This function deletes the specified file in the memory (MD1:) or a floppy disk (FDO:). The operating
procedure is as indicated below.
(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

puro| |MWUAL||LTAUX| jwwcrej jaaosnj jroa.am|pc M«|

The screen as indicated below will be displayed.

PROGRAM OPERATION

MULTI
DATE DIR PIP EDIT PIP LIST CONDENS| [EXTEND]

(TT1fFTIfFT1fFTirFTIfFÿ(TTirF~8l
ft
(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND).
 .JL

3754-E P-152-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

PROGRAM OPERATION

-EX

RUN
TIME INIT DELETE RENAME FREE GUIDE [EXTEND!

fFTi(TTinHnrF~4inHnnnnITTInnr)
ft

(3) Press function key [F3] (DELETE).

The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen and the following is displayed
on the screen.
DELETE i—i DEL

DELETE
QtfjUtftl TE
OEL B

INOEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2] -> MDIl'.NIK
CF3J -> FDOlMIIN
TO OISPLAY OTHER INDEXES.AnER PPESSIHO [FI).
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND Fill NAME. THEM PRESS [TRITE] XEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME - “ MDT :
*.MIN

>XDa
>
I COMMAND I OVBTMV I CHAR T
INOEX I I FDO:
INOEX I HISTORY I INSERT I DELETE I CANCEL

(4) Enter the device name, MD1: or FDO:. The default is MD1
 ..JL

3754-E P-153
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) Press the WRITE key.

WRITE

PROGRAM OPERATION DELETE

•EX
-DEL
A.MIN deleted

RUN
TIME INIT DELETE (RENAME FREE GUIDE I [EXTEND]

I F 1 ifFintF 3 1IF 4ltF 5IIF 6 It F 7](F 8 I

The file A.MIN is deleted and the following message is displayed on the command line.
A.MIN deleted
 3754-E P-154
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : 1. To delete a file other than A. MIN, specify a file name.

The file name extension .MIN can be omitted.
Example:
Can be omitted
ABC.MIN DEL ABC _/
ABC.SUB DEL ABC.SUB

__
2. When the specified file name does not exist in the storage device, the message “no
file” is displayed on the command line.

Symbols “?“and can be used to specify a file name.

3.
“*"
Functions of these symbols are the same as explained in 7-3, “Directory”.
Example:

DEL Files whose file name extension is .MIN are all deleted.
*
DEL *.SUBFiles whose file name extension is .SUB are all deleted.
DEL BOX*.* Files whose main file name begins with BOX
are all deleted.

DEL *.* . Ail files are deleted.

DEL ???.SUB Files whose main file name consists of up to

three characters followed by the extension .SUB are all deleted.

4. Option code for file deleting operation

When the code “;V” is specified following the file name, it is possible to display the file
name on the command line verity whether or not the specified file may be deleted.
Example:

DEL *.*;V [WRITE]

When the WRITE key is pressed, the following message will be
displayed on the command line.
BOX-AI.MIN delete OK (YIN)!
To delete the file, type Y and press the WRITE key.
To abort deletion, type N and press the WRITE key.
Since “*.*” has been entered as the file name, all file names will be
displayed on the command line in sequence.
BOX-A2.MIN delete OK (Y/N)l
For the procedure to delete data in a floppy disk, refer to SECTION 1, “PROGRAM
INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS BY FLOPPY DISKS” in the Special Function Manual
No. 1.
 3754-E P-155
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-13. Rename
This function changes the name of the file stored in the memory. The operating procedure is as indicated
below.

(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

The screen as indicated below will be displayed.

n
PROGRAM OPERATION

I MULTI I
1
DATE | DIR | PIP I EDIT I PIP I LIST |CONDENs) CEXTENDI

(TT~ifFT,ifF~5nfTxirF~5irF~6irFTifF~8~i
ft
(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND).
 ..I.

3754-E P-156-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

PROGRAM OPERATION

•EX

RUN
TIME | INIT (DELETE (RENAME FREE | GUIDE |lEXTEND]

(Fli(F2i(F3IIF4I[F5i(F6I(F7jrF8l

/?
(3) Press function key [F4] (RENAME).
The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen and the following is displayed
on the screen.
RENAME i—i R

HfNAUr OVcMtftlTE

INOEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2) -> MOIIMIIN
(F3J -> FBOIMIIN
TO DISPLAY omen INDEXES. AFTER PRESSING (FI],
INPUT THE DEVICE KANE ANO FILE NAME. THEN PRESS [IBITE] XEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAJIE -- IDI!
*.UIN

>»

Fioii I EDO: IIcOlilAND Ilovswv I CHAR T

INDEX I INDEX I HISTORY
INDEX INSERT I OELfTE I CANCEL

(ÿTirrT)(TTifFTirFTifFÿi~FTirF~8i

(4) First key in the current file name and then key in the new file name with a comma placed
between them.
Example: RI_I SHIL1.SHIL2 The file name is SHIL1.MIN is changed to SHIL2.MIN.
Rÿ SHIL1.SUB,SHIL1,SSB The file name SHIL1.SUB is changed to SHIL1.SSB.
RL_I SHIL1.SUB,SHIL2.SUB The file name SHIL1.SUB is changed to SHIL2.SUB.
 3754-E P-157
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) Press the WRITE key.

WRIT!

This completes file name change operation.

PROGRAM OPERATION RENAME

-XR

-R SHIL1, SHIL2

TIfC INIT DELETE {RENAME FREE | GUIDE |[ EXTEND]

(ÿ*T1fF~2lfF~3]rF~4]fF~5]fF~6'lfF~7]( F 81

[Supplement] : 1. When the current file name specified is not found, the message “no file” is displayed
on the command line and renaming operation terminates.

2. When the new file name specified already exists in the memory, the message “file
exists” is displayed on the command line and renaming operation terminates.

3. Symbols “?”and cannot be used to specify a file name. The error message “file
name error” will be displayed on the screen if specified.
 3754-E P-158
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-14. Protect
This function protects the specified file in the memory (MD1:) or in a floppy disk (FDO:).
When this function is activated, file operations such as editing, deleting, and renaming cannot be conducted.
The operating procedure is as indicated below.

(1) Press the EDIT AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

I'AUTO| |M*NUAL||LTAUX| jwWMEIf ij jgftO SElj jraHOwj|M»C M«nj

The screen as indicated below will be displayed.

PROGRAM OPERATION

MULTI
DATE DIR PIP EDIT PIP LIST |CQNDENS| [EXTEND]

(ÿTiiTÿfFTifFTirrÿfFÿrFÿrFa'i
ft
(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) two times.
 3754-E P-159-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

PROGRAM OPERATION

•EX
•EX

PROTECT MS-DOS C EXTENDI

[FI][F 2) rF31(F4|(F5l(F6i(F7IlF8l

ft
(3) Press function key [F1] (PROTECT).
The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen and the following is displayed
on the screen.
PROTECT L_J PROT

PrfQltCf 0»: I TE.

PROT fl

INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2] -> IDKMIfN
[F3] -> FD0:*.MIN
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES, AFTER PRESSING [FI].
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AMD FILE NAME. THEN PRESS (WRITE) KEY.
DEFAULT OEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME -- KTC
*.MIN

>»WT
>

IIDEX I TNOEX I FDO: OOMWO 0VB1R/

INDEX I HI5T0W I INSERT I
OW)
DELETE CANCEL

(TrnfTT)iTT)iTTirrafFÿrFTirF~8i
 3754-E P-160-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) Enter the device name, file name to be protected, and option code.
Device name: MD1: or FDO:
The default is MD1:.
Option code : ;C, ;V, or ;CV
The option code can be omitted.

(5) Press the WRITE key.

WRITI

/5J
[Supplement] : 1. When the specified file name does not exist in the storage device, the message “no
file” will be displayed on the command line.

2. Symbols “?”and can be used to specify a file name.

Functions of these symbols are the same as explained in 7-3, “Directory”.
Option codes for file protection:
The code “;C" specified following the file name cancels file protection.
The code “;V" specified following the file name displays the following message on the
command line of the display screen to allow the operator to select whether or not the
specified file is protected.
FILE PROTECT OK (Y/N)?
When file protection is desired, type Y and press the WRITE key.
When file protection is not desired, type N and press the WRITE key.
The code “;CV" specified following the file name displays the following message on
the command line of the display screen allow the operator to select whether or not
protection of the specified file is canceled.
FILE PROTECT CANCEL (Y/N)?
When file protection needs to be canceled, type Y and press the WRITE key.
When file protection does not need to be canceled, type N and press the WRITE key.
Example 1: PROT u_. ABC.MIN or PROT I_J MD1: ABC.MIN

This instruction protects the file ABC.MIN registered in the memory.

Example 2: PROT._, BCD.MIN;C or PROTÿ MD1:BCD.M!N;C

This instruction cancels protection of the file BCD.MIN registered in

the memory.
 JL..

3754-E P-161
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Example 3: PROT CDE.MIN;V or PROT MD1:CDE.MIN;V

When the WRITE key is pressed following the above instruction, the
prompt as indicated below will be displayed on the command line.

CED.MIN FILE PROTECT OK (Y/N)?

Type Y and press the WRITE key to protect the file.

Type N and press the WRITE key not to protect the file.

Example 4: PROT ,_i DEF.MIN;CV or PROT UJ MD1:DEF.MIN;CV

When the WRITE key is pressed following the above instruction, the
prompt as indicated below will be displayed on the command line.

DEF.MIN FILE PROTECT CANCEL (Y/N)?

Type Y and press the WRITE key to cancel protection of the specified
file.
Type N and press the WRITE key not to cancel protection of the
specified file.
For the procedure to delete data in a floppy disk, refer to SECTION 1, “PROGRAM
INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS BY FLOPPY DISKS” in the Special Function Manual
No. 1.
 X.

3754-E P-162
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-15. NC Program Input/Output Function Using MS-DOS Format Floppy Disk

The MS-DOS format I/O function enables input and output of NC part programs using MS-DOS format 3.5
inch floppy disks.
(1) Program input and output using this function is possible with the following MS-DOS formats:
- 3.5 inch 2DD floppy disks (640 KB/720 KB)
- 3.5 inch 2HC floppy disks (1.20 MB)
- 3.5 inch 2HD floppy disks (1.23 MB)
- 3.5 inch 2HD floppy disks (1.44 MB)
[Supplement] : 1. “MS-DOS” is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
2. Even if a floppy disk can be read and written to at an MS-DOS-compatible personal
computer, it may not be possible to read and write to the disk using this function if its
format is not a regular one conforming to published MS-DOS literature.
(2) The following subcommands are available under this function.

Item Function Outline

Directory DIR Displays an MS-DOS format directory.
Copying COPY Copies files from MS-DOS format to OSP format and vice versa.
Renaming RENAME Used to change specified file names in the MS-DOS format.
Deletion DELETE Used to delete specified files in the MS-DOS format.
Remaining FREE Indicates the remaining memory capacity in the MS-DOS format.
capacity
File protection PROTECT Prohibits updating the information of specified files in the MS-
DOS format.
MS-DOS Quit QUIT Used to quit MS-DOS.
7-15-1. Specifying MS-DOS File Names
MS-DOS file names are specified in the way shown below.
FDO: \PATH1\PATH2\ACB.MIN
\
Device name Directory Path name
File name
[Supplement] : 1. The reverse slash Y is used as the delimiter between directory names (the Y
following the device name can be omitted).
2. It is not normally necessary to specify a device name when handling OSP files but it is
essential to specify one for MS-DOS files.
3. The total length of the sequence “device name:path-name\file name” must not
exceed 64 characters.
4. The length of the path-name must not exceed 47 characters.
5. The file name consists of a main file name (with a maximum length of 8 characters)
and an extension name (with a maximum length of 3 characters), and a period is
used as a delimiter between the main file name and extension. The file name must
begin with a letter of the alphabet and the characters that follow it can only be
numerals, letters of the alphabet, “.” or
 L

3754-E P-163
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-15-2. MS-DOS Operation Mode

To use the MS-DOS format I/O function, select the MS-DOS operation mode by following the procedure
indicated below.

(1) Press the EDIT AUX mode selection key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

|>AUTO| pw«MEIB)| SElj Manj

(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) twice.

PROGRAM OPERATION

MULTI
!
' DATE DIR PIP EDIT PIP LIST CONDENSl [EXTENDI
fp~nrp~infF3irF'TtrFTnfTTrifT~7~irF~8"i

(3) Press function key [F2] (MS-DOS).

[EXTEND)

(TTi(TÿrraiÿT)rrÿ(TÿrF~TirF~B~i
 3754-E P-164
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-15-3. DIR (directory)

This function is used to display a list of the files and directories saved in an MS-DOS format floppy disk
(FDO:).
The operating procedure is indicated below.

(1) Press function key [F1] (DIR).

“Dl” is displayed on the command line.

-M806
>0t

DIR COPY DELETE QUIT

CFTifFT)(TTifrT)rFÿfF~6ifF'7irpÿi

(2) Enter the device name.

Example 1: The following command displays all the directory names and file names in the
MS-DOS format floppy disk designated as device “FDO:”.
>DI FDO:
Example 2: The following command displays all the directory names and file names in the directory
“PATH” of the disk designated as device “FDO:”.
>DI FD0:PATH (or alternatively, >DI FD0:\PATH)
Example 3: The following command displays all the directory names and file names under the
directory “PATH1” which is under the directory “PATH” of the disk designated as device
“FDO:”.
>DI FD0:PATH\PATH1
Example 4: The following command format displays all the directory names and file names that
start with the character string “FO” in the directory “PATH” of the disk designated as
device “FDO:”.
>DI FD0:PATH\F0*
[Supplement] : The use of the wild cards and “?” is only valid for files; an error will occur if either of
“*”
these symbols is used with a device name or directory name (path name).
 3754-E P-165
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Press the WRITE key.

WRITE

/V

DIR COPY
I DELETE | FREE
rl QU"
I
iT~riiTÿrFÿiÿxirF~ÿfFÿ(TTirF~ri

[Supplement] : 1. A maximum of 12 file names and directory names can be displayed on each screen.
If it is not possible to display all the directory and file names on a single screen, the
symbol “=” (the command prompt) will not be displayed on the command line and the
cursor display will remain unchanged. In this condition:
a) Pressing the BS key will scroll the screen forward one page.

b) Pressing the WRITE key will scroll the display continuously in page units until
the end of the directory is reached (press BS to stop scrolling part way
through).

c) Pressing the CAN key will terminate execution of the command and leave the
currently displayed page displayed.

2. “<DIR>” displayed in the sector column indicates that the entry is a directory.
3. The following options can be specified after the file name. They must be preceded by
a semicolon
;P : Specifies display of the file protection status after the date:
00 : File not write protected
01 : File write protected
 3754-E P-166-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-15-4. COPY (copying)

This function copies files from the MS-DOS format to the OSP format and vice versa.
The operating procedure is indicated below.

-M8D6

Of* COPY I RENAME! DELETE FREE OUT

(TTnfFji(ÿÿ(~FTirrarFÿrF~7ifF~ri

(1) Press function key [F2] (COPY).

OThe screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen and the following is
displayed on the screen.
MS-DOS CONVERTER COPY — CO

CSZMQQm

INDEX DISPLAY PfOCEDUPE

(F2) -> MDlt*.*
in) -> FD0J*.#
TO DISPLAY OTHER INOEXES.AFTFl PRESSING (FI).

--
INPUT TIC DEVICE NAJC AH) FILE NAME. THEN PRESS (WRITE) KEY.
OEFAULT DEVICE NAME
OEFAULT Fill NAME

>XC0

I MDf : Troo! I1 COMMAND IOVERliV I OUR T

INDEX I INDEX I INDEXHISTORY I INSERT I DELETE I CANCEL

iÿTi(Tÿrrar?ÿrF~5irF~6irF7irF¥i
 3754-E P-167-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Enter the device name, path name, and file name of the program to be copied.

a) Use the following command format when copying from MS-DOS format to OSP format:
CO <device name>:<path name + file name or path name> <device name>:<file name>
If a path name is specified as the copying source, all the files (excluding directories) listed in the
directory indicated by that path name will be copied.
b) Use the following command format when copying from OSP format to MS-DOS format:
CO <device name>:<file name> <device name>:<path name + file name or path name>
If a path name is specified as the copying destination, the file (or files) is (are) copied into the
directory indicated by that path name.
Example 1: The following command copies A.MIN in FDO: (MS-DOS) to MD1: (OSP) under
the file name B.MIN.
COÿ FD0:A.MIN MD1:B.MIN
Example 2: The following command copies all files in the directory “PATH” of FDO: (MS-DOS)
to MDI: (OSP).
COt_. FD0:PATH\* MD1:

or..
COu FD0:PATH MD1:
Example 3: The following command copies all FDO: (MS-DOS) files whose main file names
start with the letter C and comprise three characters or less to MDI: (OSP).
COUJ FD0:C??.MIN MD1:
Example 4: The following command copies MAIN files (files without their extension names)
from FDO: (MS-DOS) to MD1: (OSP).
COu FD0:MAIN,MD1:
When this command is used “MIN” is automatically appended as the extension name
of the destination file, so that the file name is MAIN.MIN.
Example 5: The following command copies A.MIN of MD1: (OSP) to FDO: (MS-DOS) under
the name “B.MIN”.
COLJ MD1:A.MIN,FD0:B.MIN
Example 6: The following command copies A.MIN of MD1: (OSP) to FDO (MS-DOS) under the
name “C.MIN” under the directory “PATH”.
COÿ MD1 AMIN,FDO:

Example 7: The following command copies A.MIN of MD1: (OSP) to FDO: (MS-DOS) under
the same file name as it had in the copying source.
COiu MD1 AMIN,FDO:
Example 8: The following command copies all files whose file names start with “A” in MD1:
(OSP) to the directory “PATH” of FDO: (MS-DOS).
COUJ MD1:A*,FD0:PATH
 3754-E P-168
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Press the WRITE key.

WRIT!

[Supplement] : 1. The COPY function can only be used to copy between the OSP format and MS-DOS
format. Attempts to copy from OSP to OSP or from MS-DOS to MS-DOS will result in
an error.

2. This function has no default device name and it is therefore essential to specify the
device name.

3. If no destination file name is specified it is made the same as the source file name.

4. Contiguous OSP format files cannot be overwritten. If an attempt is made to do this

the message “file attribute unsame” is displayed.

5. If the specified destination file name already exists, the message “file exist
overwrite? (Y/N)” will be displayed. To overwrite the file, enter “Y”; to abort the writing
operation, enter “N”.

6. If the copied file name contains any characters other than those listed below, these
characters will all be replaced by question marks:
space, !, ”, #, $, %, &, ', (, ), +, /, 0-9, @ , A-Z, [, \, ], A, a-z, [, I, ], -

A C) Copying from OSP format to MS-DOS format is possible for ASCII data files but if this
CAUTION
-
:
operation is attempted with a binary data file the message “file attribute unsame” is
displayed and the copying operation is terminated.
Both ASCII data files and binary data files can be copied from MS-DOS format to OSP format,
but binary data files may not be copied accurately.
(2) When copying from MS-DOS format to OSP format, if the MS-DOS file has no extension
name, “MIN” is automatically appended to the OSP file name as a default. Similarly, when
copying from OSP format to MS-DOS format, the extension name for the MS-DOS file will be
“MIN” if no extension name is specified.
(3) The following option can be specified. It must be preceded by a semicolon
;V Specifies use of the following request for confirmation for each of the files specified for
copying:
copy OK? (Y/N)
To copy the file, enter “Y”; to abort the copying operation, enter “N”.
 JL

3754-E P-169-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-15-5. RENAME (renaming)

This function is used to change the name of an MS-DOS format file. The operating procedure is indicated
below.

om oonr DELETE QUIT

ITT1fFT1(TT)(TTirF31ITÿrFTlfFnB~l

(1) Press function key [F3] (RENAME).

The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen andthe following is displayed
on the screen.
MS-DOS CONVERTER LJ: RENAME t_i R

INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2) -> m\:*.*
[F3J -> no:*.*
TO DISPLAY OTHER INOEXES.AFTER PRESSING [PI).
IffVT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME.THEN PRESS [NRITE] KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME
-- •.*

>XR

INDEX I I Rmkx IHSSTOS HSm Iow OELETE I CANCa

fFTi(T2i(TTifOirrÿrrÿrÿ
 ,,L

3754-E P-170-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Enter the file name (including the device name and path name) of the MS-DOS format file whose
name is to be changed and the file name (not including the device name and path name) that it is to
be changed to.
Example: The following command changes the file name FD0:PATH\PATH1\FILE to the file name
FD0:PATH\PATH1:FILE1.
Ru FDO:PATH\PATH1\FILE, FILE1

(3) Press the WRITE key.

WRITE

/V
[Supplement] : 1. If the specified file (current file name) does not exist in the floppy disk, the message
“no file” is displayed on the console lines and the renaming operation is terminated.

2. If a file with the same name as that specified for the file after the change already exists
in the floppy disk, the message “file exist” is displayed on the console lines and the
renaming operation is terminated.

The wild cards and “?” cannot be used in the file names (their use will cause an
3.
error). “*”
4. Specify only the file name (with no device name or path name) for the file name after
the change. An error will occur if a device name or path name is specified.
5. If the specified file is a directory, the message “directory” is displayed on the console
lines and the renaming operation is terminated.
 3754-E P-171-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-15-6. DELETE (delete)

This function is used to delete MS-DOS format files.
The operating procedure is indicated below.

DIR COPY DELETE FREE ourr

(TTiiÿÿiTTi(TÿrÿrF~6'irT7irF~8i

(1) Press function key [F4] (DELETE).

The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen and the following is displayed
on the screen.
MS-DOS CONVERTER :DELETE DELH

OB.

INDEX OISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2] -> IBi:*.*
[F3] -> TO:*.*
TO DUPLAY OTHER IIBEXES, AFTER PRESSIHO [FI).
INPUT TT€ DEVICE NAME AND FILE HAME.TTCN PRESS [WRITE] KEY,

DEFAULT FILE NAME

--
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
*.*

>XDEL
>

INDEX

iTTirrÿiTTifFTirrsirrrirFTifra
 3754-E P-172-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Enter the file name (including the device name and path name) of the MS-DOS format file that is to
be deleted.
Example 1: The following command deletes the file FILE.MIN in device “FDO:”.
DELi_i FDO:FILE.MIN
Example 2: The following command deletes the file FILE2.MIN in the directory “PATH” of device
“FDO:”.
DELu FD0:PATH\FILE2.MIN
Example 3: The following commands delete all files in the directory “PATH” of device “FDO:”.
DELI_I FD0:PATH\*.*

or
DELLÿ F0:PATH
In this case, because a directory has been specified as the file name to be deleted, all the
files contained in that directory (“PATH”), except directories, will be deleted.
In order to make this clear, the request for confirmation “delete OK? (Y/N)” is displayed on
the console lines.

(3) Press the WRITE key.

WRITE

[Supplement] : 1. The wild cards and “?” can be used in the file name (wild cards cannot be used in
path names).

2. If no option is specified deletion is executed unconditionally (unless it is a path name

that is specified for deletion).

3. Directories cannot be deleted.

4. Files protected by the file protection function cannot be deleted.

5. The following option can be specified. It must be preceded by a semicolon

;V Specifies the use of a request for confirmation when an attempt is made to
delete a file.
To delete the file, enter “Y"; to abort the deleting operation, enter “N”.
 3754-E P-173
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-15-7. FREE (free)

This function displays the available capacity in an MS-DOS format floppy disk.
The operating procedure is indicated below.

>F*

COPY DELETE QUIT

fFT1fF?1fF3TrFTlfFTlfF~6irF~7lfF~8l

(1) Press function key [F5] (FREE).

“FR” is displayed on the command line.
(2) Enter the device name.
Example: The following command displays the available capacity of device “FDO:”.
>FRt_i FDO:

(3) Press the WRITE key.

WRIT!

/9J
[Supplement] : Never specify any more than a device name in the command.
 3754-E P-174-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-15-8. PROTECT (protect)

This function establishes, and cancels, write protection for MS-DOS files (it is equivalent to the ATTRIB
function in MS-DOS.)
When a file is protected it cannot be renamed, deleted, or overwritten by copying.
The operating procedure is indicated below.

HR COPY MELETE ourr

fF~nrpÿf?~sniTTifFTnnnnrFÿnHri

(1) Press function key [F6] (PROTECT).

The screen changes to the directory selection-based file operation screen andthe following is displayed
on the screen.
MS-DOS CONVERTER LJ: PROTECT i — PROT H

FT
INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE
[F2] ->
(F3] -> FDO:*.*
TO DISPLAY OTHER INOEXES.AFTER PRESSING IF1],

-- ••
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME. THEN PRESS (WITE) KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME

>XPR0T

IIOEX CANCEL

(TT)(TTl(TT)(TXirFÿrrÿ(TT)fF~ri
 3754-E P-175-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Enter the file name (including the device name and path name).
Example 1: The following command protects the file FILE.MIN in device “FDO:”.
PROT FDO:FILE.MIN
Example 2: The following command protects all files with the extension name MIN in device
“FDO:”.
PROT FD0:*.MIN
Example 3: The following command cancels protection for the file FILE.MIN in device “FDO:".
PROT FDO:FILE.MIN;C
Example 4: The following command protects all files in the directory “PATH” of device “FDO:”.
PROT FD0:PATH\*.*

(3) Press the WRITE key.

WRIT!

/9J
[Supplement] : 1. The wild cards and “?” can be used in file names.

2. If the specified file is a directory, the message “directory” is displayed on the console
lines and the file protection operation is terminated.

3. If the option V (;V) is not specified, files will be protected (or have their protection
canceled) unconditionally.

4. The following options can be specified. They must be preceded by a semicolon

;C Cancels file protection.
;V Specifies use of a request for confirmation of whether or not the file may be
protected (or have its protection canceled).
If the file may be protected or file protection may be canceled, enter “Y”; to abort
the file protection or protection cancellation operation, enter “N”.
 3754-E P-176
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-15-9. Quitting MS-DOS

This function quits the MS-DOS operation mode.
(1) Press function key [F7] (QUIT).
“PROT is displayed on the command line.

>Q

DIR COPY RENAME DELETE FREE PROTECT QUTT

(TTTfFÿrrTiiTinrrai?ÿrFÿfF~ri

7-15-10. Character Codes

(1) Carriage Return Character

In MS-DOS the carriage return character comprises two bytes for CR and LF ($0D, $0A).
In OSP there is only LF ($0A).
The OSP converts carriage return characters internally.

(2) File End Character

In MS-DOS the character AZ ($1A) that indicates the end of a file is normally appended at the end of
each file. There are cases in which this character is not appended.
If this character appears part way through a file, all the data following it is ignored.

(3) Treatment of Non-ASCII Characters etc. by OSP

Some codes that are not used in ASCII (most significant bit = 1) are used for European languages. The
OSP cannot handle non-ASCII codes like these. When a file is read into the OSP, any non-ASCII codes
that it contains (including control codes other than the carriage return code) are replaced by question
marks “?”.
In addition, since the file end character may appear as the second byte of a two-byte character, the
OSP cannot determine whether it is the file end character or a second byte. The file end character is
therefore ignored.
 3754-E P-177
SECTION 2 OPERATION

7-15-11. Miscellaneous Supplements

(1) In the MS-DOS conversion mode, file operations executed in the background, such as schedule
program selection and external program selection, are suspended. When this happens, the
following message is displayed on the alarm line:
“Alarm W61! Waiting prog selection during prog operation”

(2) If the destination file name in a copying operation already exists, the existing file is normally
overwritten. However, if for some reason the copying operation cannot be completed normally and
the copy of the source file cannot be created, this will mean that the existing file (which was being
overwritten) is deleted. If this happens, the error message indicating the cause of the copying
failure is displayed, then the following message is displayed on the console lines:
“<deleted file name> deleted”
Note, however, that - depending on the timing of the deletion of the existing file and the creation of the
new one - this message can sometimes be displayed even when the file is successfully overwritten.
(3) When copying a file from the MS-DOS format to the OSP format, if the file name specified in the
OSP format is the same as that of a program that is currently selected for automatic operation, and
the program selection method was B, S, or M, an error will occur.
Similarly, an error will also occur if a file being processed by the schedule program automatic update
function is specified.

(4) The floppy disk used with the MS-DOS format I/O function must be MS-DOS formatted.
An error will occur if a floppy disk that is not MS-DOS formatted is used. (But note that, for copying,
either the source or destination must be OSP format.)

(5) Specifications such as “*A.MIN”, where the wild card is used as the first character, are treated in
the same way as “*.MIN”.
If a directory is specified when using the DIR, COPY, or DELETE function, all the files contained in that
directory will be subject to the specified operation. If a directory is specified for the RENAME or
PROTECT function the message “directory” will be displayed on the console lines andthe operation will
be aborted because it is only possible to rename or protect one file at a time.

(6) Meaning of the wild card under different functions

DIR : Both and specify all file names with and without extension names.
DELETE : specifies file names without extension names and specifies file names with
“*”
extension names only.
PROTECT : specifies file names without extension names and specifies file names with
extension names only.
COPY : specifies file names without extension names and specifies file names with
extension names only.
 ..JL,

3754-E P-178
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8. TAPE PUNCH INTERFACE

(1) An RS-232C serial interface is provided to allow connection of a tape punch.
Connecting a peripheral device such as a tape reader or tape punch that also has an RS-232C serial
interface to this RS-232C interface enables bulk transfer of NC part program data.

(2) The interface features a special-purpose connector on the puncher panel and must be connected to
another interface that is compatible with this connector.

(3) There are two methods for data transfer using RS232C - the normal BTR (behind tape reader)
method and a method using DC code control - and the method for connection to the peripheral
device differs according to which of these is used.

(4) With the OSP, once connectable punch equipment has been selected, the connecting cable can
also be selected, and, since the transfer method is pre-determined, the equipment is ready for data
input and output immediately. However, when other devices are connected it is necessary to match
the RS-232C interface signals to ensure that communication between the OSP and peripheral
device is possible.

(5) Optionally, the number of RS-232C channels can be expanded to a maximum of four.

8-1. Parameter Settings

Set the following parameters before connecting a peripheral device.
After setting the parameters, press function key [F7] (BACKUP) and on completion of the backup operation
switch the power off and then back on again.
The old parameter settings will remain valid if the power is not switched off and back on.
(1) NC optional parameter (bit) No.1

\ Bit No.
ParameteA bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bitO
No.
Special Special Tape Tape Tape Tape TV Automatic Tape
tape codes tape code rewind read delimiter check tape code coding
1 verify code: recognition system
ignored alarm
% (ER)

a) bitO Tape coding system

= 1 : Tape code set to ISO code (Initial value = 1)

= 0 : Tape code set to EIA code
b) bit 1 Automatic tape code recognition

= 1 : Tape code automatically recognized (Initial value = 1)

= 0 : Tape code not automatically recognized

 3754-E P-179
SECTION 2 OPERATION

The codes used for tape punching and tape verification depend on the combination of the settings
made for bit 0 and bit 1.

bit 1 bitO Operating Conditions

1 1 In “READ” and “VERIFY” operations, EIA and ISO tape codes are auto¬
matically recognized.
In “PUNCH” operations, program data is punched in the ISO code.
1 0 In “VERIFY” operations, EIA and ISO codes are automatically recog¬
nized.
In “PUNCH” operations, program data is punched in the EIA code.
0 1 In “VERIFY” operations, the control assumes that the coding system is
ISO.
(If the tape code is not ISO, an error occurs.)
In “PUNCH” operations, program data is punched in the ISO code.
0 0 In “VERIFY” operations, the control assumes that the coding system is
EIA.
(If the tape code is not EIA, an error occurs.)
In “PUNCH” operations, program data is punched in the EIA code.
bit 2 Tape TV check
The tape TV check is a check on the number of characters of tape data in each block of the
program.
It is checked that the number of codes from the code following one LF (EOB) to the next LF (EOB) is
an even number.

bit 2 Operating Conditions

0 In “READ” operations, no TV check is performed.
In “PUNCH" operations, the number of characters per block is not adjusted.
1 In “READ” operations, it is checked if the number of characters in each block is
an even number; if it is an odd number, an alarm occurs.
In “PUNCH” operations, a space is added if necessary to make the number of
characters in one block an even number.
(Initial value = 0)
d) bit 3 Tape delimiter code %/ER
Sets whether or not the %/ER code is used instead of tape feed to mark the end of program
information on the tape.

bit 3 Operating Conditions

0 Tape feed is taken to indicate the end of program data.
1 The % (ER) code is taken to indicate the end of program data.
(Initial value = 0)

[Supplement] : The data up until the second appearance of an CR, and LF or EOB on the tape is ignored.
 3754-E P-180
SECTION 2 OPERATION

e) bit 4 Tape reading verification

Sets whether or not the program information is automatically verified when a tape is read.

bit 4 Operating Conditions

0 Verification is not performed on completion of a “READ” operation.
1 Verification is performed on completion of a “READ” operation.
(Initial value = 0)

[Supplement] : File names are not verified.

f) bit 5 Tape rewind

Sets whether or not the tape is rewound after reading (if verification is not performed).

bit 5 Operating Conditions

0 Operation stops after the tape has been read.
1 The tape is rewound after it has been read.
(Initial value = 0)
g) bit 6 Special code alarm
Sets whether or not special codes ($20 to $5F, HT) trigger an alarm.
h) bit 7 Special code store
Sets whether or not special codes are stored.

bit 7 bit 6 Operating Conditions

1 An alarm occurs when a special code is read.
*1 0 Special codes are read but not stored.
0 0 Special codes are read normally.
(Initial values: bit 6 = 1, bit 7 = 0)

(2) NC optional parameters (bit) No. 8, 13, 14, 21, 22

Used to set the RS232C data handled by the channels used.

NC optional
parameter Channel bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bitO
(bit) No.
No. 8 CNO File DC Standard 8-bit Even/ Parity Ready 1-bit/
CN1 name code DC code JIS/ odd check signal 2-bit
No. 13
read/not control control 7-bit JIS parity performed/ setting stop bit
No. 14 CN2 read TYPE 2 not
No. 21 CN3 performed
Initial
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
value
 3754-E P-181
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Explanation of settings for parameter (bit) Nos. 8, 13, 14, 21, 22

a) bit 0 RS232C stop bit check
= 0 : 2 stop bits
= 1:1stop bit
b) bit 1 Determines whether or not the RS232C interface uses the “EXT-INT” signal as the
ready signal.
= 0 : The “EXT-INT signal is used as the ready signal.

= 1 : The “EXT-INT signal is not used as the ready signal.

c) bit 2 RS232C parity check (determines whether or not a parity bit is appended to 8-bit
data)
= 0 : Parity check not performed
= 1 : Parity check performed
d) bit 3 RS232C even/odd parity
= 0 : Odd parity
= 1 : Even parity
e) bit 4 RS232C 8-bit/7-bit JIS
= 0 : 7-bit JIS
= 1 : 8-bit JIS
f) bits 5, 6 Specify the DC code control conditions.

bit 6 bit 5 Operating Conditions

0 0 No DC code control
1 0 No DC code control
0 1 Standard DC code control
1 1 DC code control TYPE 2
g) bit 7 Required file name output in DNC-A mode (special specification)
= 0 : Required file name not output
= 1 : Required file name output
(3) NC optional parameter (bit) No. 12
a) bit 2 Specifies whether or not the file name is punched out.

bit 2 Operating Conditions

0 The file name is punched out.
1 The file name is not punched out.
(Initial value = 0)
 3754-E P-182
SECTION 2 OPERATION

b) bit 3 Specifies the end of record code when punching in the ISO coding system.
bit 3 Operating Conditions
0 CR, LF is output.
1 Only LF is output.
(Initial value = 0)
c) bit 4 Specifies the code used for tape feed during punching.
bit 4 Operating Conditions
0 The NULL code is output.
1 The SPACE code is output.
(Initial value = 0)
d) bit 5 Specifies whether or not feed holes are punched during tape punching.
bit 5 Operating Conditions
0 Feed holes are punched.
1 Feed holes are not punched.
(Initial value = 0)
(4) NC optional parameters (bit) No. 27 to 31, 49 to 51
a) These parameters are used to set special EIA codes.

Parameter No. bit 7 | bit 6 | bit 5 | bit 4 | bit 3 | bit 2 | bit 1 | bit 0
No. 27 Sets the punch holes for the EIA code that represents
No. 28 Sets the punch holes for the EIA code that represents
No. 29 Sets the punch holes for the EIA code that represents "[”.
No. 30 Sets the punch holes for the EIA code that represents "]”.
No. 31 Sets the punch holes for the EIA code that represents
No. 49 Sets the punch holes for the EIA code that represents “F.
No. 50 Specifies an irregular code.
No. 51 Specifies the regular code (ISO) corresponding to the irregular code.
Initial
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
value

b) In both the EIA and ISO coding systems, it is possible to have one code treated as another in
program reading and program punching.
c) Set a code which is to be treated as another code (i.e. an irregular code) for optional parameter
(bit) No. 50 and the regular code that corresponds to this irregular code for optional parameter
(bit) No. 51.
The regular code must be set in the ISO coding system.
1) If an irregular code is encountered during reading it is read as the corresponding regular
code.
2) If the regular code corresponding to an irregular code occurs during punching, the irregular
code is punched.
 JL

3754-E P-183-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) NC optional parameters (word) No. 1, No. 2

Parameter Contents Factory Set Setting

Item
No. Initial Value Range
1 Tape feed For punchout in the PIP holes in (trans¬ 600 1 to 10000
holes in fer) mode, tape feed hole areas are
punching punched out before and after program
punch out.
The number of feed holes is set by this
parameter. _
2 Defaults of A file of machining programs which is too 180 m 1 to 300 m
tape long to be stored in a roll of paper tape is (590 ft) (3.3 to 984 ft)
lengths in divided into smaller files to be punched
divided out. The lengths of the divisions are set
punching by this parameter. The divisions are
closed at the breaks of each block, so
that the actual tape length is slightly dif¬
ferent from the setting. A divided punch¬
out gives the beginning of each tape part
a file name. Note that the setting does
not include the lengths corresponding to
the file name and feed hole.

(6) NC optional parameters (word) No. 6, 39, 40, 41, 42

Set the baud rates for channels CNO: to CN3:.

NC Optional
Parameter Channel Contents Initial Value
(word) No.
No. 6 CNO Any of the following baud rates can be set: 110, 150,
No. 39 CN1 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
600 baud
No. 40 CN2
No. 41 CN3

(7) NC optional parameters (word) No. 34, 35, 36, 37, 38

Set the ready completion waiting times for channels CNO: to CN3:.

NC Optional Setting Range

Parameter Channel Operation Initial Value
(Unit: Seconds)
(word) No.
No. 34 CNO This is the waiting time between output
of DC1 (tape reader start) or the
cessation of data reception and
No. 35 CN1 reception of data; or the waiting time
1 to 9999 (when CTS and DSR are ON) until the 10 seconds
No. 36 CN2 RS232C ready completed status
comes into effect. If there is no
CN3
response within this time an alarm
No. 37 occurs. _
 3754-E P-184-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(8) NC optional parameter (word) No. 45

Used to select the I/O channel for data transfer.

Setting for No. 45 Peripheral Device Initial Value

0 CNO : (TT: ) [RS232C]
1 CN1 [RS232C] 0
2 CN2 [RS232C] (This selects CNO:)
3 CN3 [RS232C]
8-2. Operating Procedure
Data is input from and output to peripheral devices using the functions available in the PIP (transfer) mode,
which is accessed from the PROG OPERATION mode.
(1) The commands for reading, verifying, and punching NC programs (files) are expressed in the
following format:
ccommand name> cinput device hame>:<input NC program name>, <output device
name>:<output NC program name> [WRITE]
The command name is specified by using the function keys in the PIP mode.
Commands: R(Read)
V (Verify)
P (Punch)
(2) The commands for printing an NC program (file) or directory are expressed in the following format:
ccommand name> cinput device name>:cinput NC program name>, coutput device
name>:[WRITE]
The command name is specified by using the function keys.
Commands : L (List)
Dl (Directory)
(3) Classification of peripheral devices
Sector devices
MD1: -* User memory
FDO: -* 3.5 inch floppy disk
FD1: -* 3.5 inch or 8 inch floppy disk*
Tape reading devices
TR: -* Standard tape reader
CNO: -* Tape reader connected at RS232C channel 0*
CN1: -*• Tape reader connected at RS232C channel 1*
CN2: -* Tape reader connected at RS232C channel 2*
CN3: -* Tape reader connected at RS232C channel 3*
“*” indicates an option.
 JL.

3754-E P-185-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Tape punching devices

CNO: -* Tape punch connected at RS232C channel 0*
CN1:
CN2:
—
-»
Tape punch connected at RS232C channel 1*
Tape punch connected at RS232C channel 2*
CN3: -*• Tape punch connected at RS232C channel 3*
Printing devices
CN: -» Console
PN: -* Operation panel (Display screen)
CNO: -*• Printer connected at RS232C channel 0*
CN1: -* Printer connected at RS232C channel 1*
CN2: -* Printer connected at RS232C channel 2*
CN3: -* Printer connected at RS232C channel 3*
indicates an option.
a) FDO: is a 3.5 inch floppy disk and FD1: is an 8 inch floppy disk.
b) CNO: can also be used as device name TT:.
c) The input device names and output device names that can be specified are fixed for each
command, as shown in the table below.

PERMISSIBLE INPUT DE¬ PERMISSIBLE OUTPUT DE¬

COMMAND NAME
VICES VICES
R : READ
TAPE READING DEVICES SECTOR DEVICES
V : VERIFY TAPE READING DEVICES SECTOR DEVICES
P : PUNCH SECTOR DEVICES TAPE PUNCHING DEVICES
L : LIST SECTOR DEVICES PRINTING DEVICES
Dl : DIR SECTOR DEVICES PRINTING DEVICES
SECTOR DEVICES PRINTING DEVICES
FR: FREE
d) If no device name is specified, the following selections are made automatically:
For sector devices MD1:
For tape reading devices TR: (This selection can be changed by setting NC
optional parameter (word) No. 57.)
For tape punching devices CNO: (This selection can be changed by setting NC
optional parameter (word) No. 45.)
For printing devices PN:
e) If no output NC program name is specified, the same name as the input NC program name is
automatically assigned.

f) If no input NC program name is specified, the name “A.MIN” will be automatically assigned
unless a program name is designated on the tape, in which case that name will be used.
 i.

3754-E P-186-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) The operating procedure is indicated below.

a) Press the EDIT AUX mode selection key to display the PROG OPERATION screen.

j |m»NUAl| BMT AUXJ 3Et| IMwj

b) Press function key [F3] (PIP); the commands assigned to the function keys will change.

PROGRAM WCRATION

MULTI
DATE DIR PIP EDIT PIP LIST | CONDENSI [EXTEND]

(T"T]lTTn(TÿfF"T)(T~infF~6T(~F"7l(T~8T

c) READ, PUNCH, or VERIFY can now be selected by pressing function keys [F1] through [F3].

PROGRAM OPERATION TRANSFER

-PIP
2_
I FAST I FAST I PIP
READ PUNCH (VERIFY COPY |FORWARD| REWIND! QUIT |\ [EXTEND]

fFTif?ÿrFTifFÿfTTirFÿrF~7if?~8i

[Supplement] : Function key [F4] (COPY) can only be used if a floppy disk drive (option) is installed.
 3754-E P-187-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

1) To read
While in the PIP mode, press function key [F1] (READ) and then specify the device name.
When the following command is given, the tape reader at CNO: starts reading the tape:
R CNO: [WRITE]
The RS232C interface allows use of up to four channels (CNO: through CN4:) and which of
these channels are used is determined according to the specification.
When using the tape reader provided as an accessory, the tape is rewound and the program
verified if bit 4 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 1 is set to “1", or if the option “V" is specified,
unless one of the channels CNO: through CN3: is set, in which case verification is not executed
in this way.
The VERIFY command is given in the same way as the READ command; first press function
key [F3] (VERIFY) and then specify the device name to execute verification:
When the following command is given, the tape reader at CNO: starts verifying the tape:
V CNO: [WRITE]
In the case of both READ and VERIFY, if no device name is specified the device name is
automatically selected in accordance with the setting for NC optional parameter (word) No. 57
(“designation of read device”).

2) To punch
Press function key [F2] (PUCH) and then key in the NC program name (file name) and the
output device name.
When the following command is given, the device connected at CN1: punches out the NC
program (file) LAP1.MIN:
P LAP1.CN1: [WRITE]
If no device name is specified, the device name will be automatically selected in accordance
with the setting for NC optional parameter (word) No. 45 (“designation of punch device").
3) To print
Print-outs can be executed at RS232C-compatible devices by specifying the device name
after the relevant command.
The following commands would be used to print out a list and a directory, respectively, at the
device connected at CN2:
LLAP1,CN2: [WRITE]
DI.CN2: [WRITE]
If no device name is specified, the list/directory is output to the display screen in the operation
panel.
 3754-E P-188
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-3. Tape Format

8-3-1. Input Format
(1) ISO Coding System

|—Tape file name-*-j J- d) Program section

$Flle name
St O Program name C L
R F K Program end

holerT*] block—] !“ÿ Program end block

—
T
—Feed Program start Feed holes
e)
b) Feed holes/

Program start Tape end

c) Tape start

Fig. 2-23 Input Format (ISO Coding System)

(2) EIA Coding System

d) Program section

E $Flle name
~~i|| O Program name
1 Program end

— Feed
a)
b) Feed holes.
H
start block
J» Program end block Feed holes
—-
Tape end
c) Tape start

Fig. 2-24 Input Format (EIA Coding System)

a) Feed holes (In ISO coding: NUL or SPACE, in EIA coding: BLANK or SPACE)

b) Input the file name after the “$” symbol.

If no file name is specified, the same file name as that specified for the output NC program name will
be automatically selected. If no output NC program name is specified, the name set will be “A.MIN”.

c) Feed holes

d) Start and end the program section with the % (ER) code.

e) Always include M02 or M30, or END, or RTS, in the program end block.

[Supplement] : Codes that cannot be set in the EIA coding system can be replaced by codes that can be
set so that they can be read. For details, see 8-3-3.
 3754-E P-189
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-3-2. Output Format

(1) ISO Code

FFeed holes
$FII® name

File name
*
Feed holes
CL
R F
O Program nami
C L
R F

Part program
I C L
R F

Feed holes

a) b) c) d) e) 0

Fig. 2-25 Output Format (ISO Code)

(2) EIA Code

Feed holes
SFIIe name

File name Feed holes

O Program name
§
Part program
« I Feed holes

a) b) c) d) e) 0

Fig. 2-26 Output Format (EIA Code) (1)

a) 600 tape feed holes are punched in the tape leader section.
The number of feed holes to be punched out can range, as needed, from 1 to 10000 with a
parameter.
For details, consult Section3, “Parameters”.

b) The file name is punched out following the “$” code. (Program data is punched out in the ISO
coding system.)

c) 50 tape feed holes are punched out.

The number of the tape feed holes cannot be changed.

d) Either of the following is punched out.

%, CR, and LF
ER and EOB

e) The part program data is punched out following the program name (number).
f) The same number of tape feed holes as in a) are punched out in the tape trailing section.

[Supplement] : 1.
When the program data is punched out in the EIA code, the presence of a code not
available in the EIA coding system causes an error. Tape punching-out halts and an
error message is given on the CRT.
When the tape delimiting code is the “%” (ER) code, i.e., when bit 3 of parameter No.
1 of NC optional parameter (bit) is 1, the “%” code or “ER” is punched out before feed
holes.
 3754-E P-190
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : 2. The part program is split and punched out, if it si too long to be contained in one paper
tape roll. Paper tape length may be changed from 1 to 300 meters (3 to 984 feed)
using the NC optional parameter (word) No. 2.
As the format, the file name is also punched out, for the second tape and so on. Since
the tape ends with “CR” or “LF”, actual tape length is somewhat difference from the
tape length set using the parameter.
When designating paper tape punch out operation onmore than one paper taper roll,
specify option D in the following format:
P I_J <file-name>, <device-name>:;D

° * = SA.MIN
J %
®®°**** \\ \
\
Feed
1st tape

File | Feed
Feed holes name | holes Tape length for parameter setting holes

2nd tape
' 0 0 C SA.MIN S
•»
0

Machining program

Fig. 2-27 Output Format (EIA Code) (2)

8-3-3. EIA Special Codes
(1) There are some characters, such as “=” and that are not represented by codes in the EIA
coding system. To make it possible to use these characters when creating an EIA program tape,
other characters are sometimes temporarily substituted for them.
(2) When a program tape created in this way is read into the NC, the substituted characters must be
converted back to and by using editing functions.
(3) This troublesome procedure is made easier by setting EIA special codes for the characters for
which substitution is necessary in advance; the control then automatically substitutes the
appropriate characters when a program is input from or output to tape.
a) Setting the EIA special codes
1) Special codes can be set for the following 6 characters:
= *[]$#
2) Special codes are set as bit patterns in NC optional parameters (bit) No. 27 through 31
and No. 49.
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 27 Set the EIA code pattern that substitutes for “=”.
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 28 Set the EIA code pattern that substitutes for
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 29 Set the EIA code pattern that substitutes for “[”•
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 30 Set the EIA code pattern that substitutes for “]”•
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 31 Set the EIA code pattern that substitutes for “$”.
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 49 Set the EIA code pattern that substitutes for “#”.
 3754-E P-191
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Example: Suppose the puncher key “[ ]” is determined for punching the “=” code, and that
the arrangement of punched holes by this key operation is as below.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Channel

o o o o o

Feedholes

Set this arrangement of punched holes by a “1” and a “0”, where “1” indicating a
punched hole and “0” a position not punched. Setting will be as below:
01011011
Set this at the No. 27 of NC optional parameter (bit). Repeating the same
operations, set all the codes used on the OSP7000M.

[Supplement] : 1. When inputting a program in the ElA coding system, if the special code “$” is input at
the head of the program, the character string immediately following the “$” is read as
the file name (in EIA codes) for the program.

2. When outputting a program using the EIA coding system, if the “$” special code is set
the file name will be punched out in EIA codes. If the “$” special code is not set, the
file name will be punched out in ISO codes.

3. There is no check to determine whether or not the bit patterns assigned to special
codes already represent characters in the EIA coding system.
Example: If the special code for the character “=” is set as 01100001 (the EIA
code for “A”) and “A=B” is output for punching, what will actually be
punched is “AAB”. When the tape is read, the data will be interpreted
as “==B”.

4. Special codes are only converted when commands are executed in the PIP mode.
They are not converted in the DNC mode.
 .JL.

3754-E P-192
SECTION OPERATION
2

8-4. Specifications
8-4-1. RS232C Interface
(1) Communication Method
Start-stop synchronization
This is a method in which a pre-determined signal is sent at the beginning and end of a character.
The data for each character comprises the following bits (see Fig. 8-6): (A) start bit (1 bit), (B)
information bits (8 bits), (C) parity bit (1 bit), (D) stop bit (2 bits).

LSB MSB

n a)
1 2 3 4

b)
5 6 7 8

c)
T

d)
O

Fig. 2-28 Bit Configuration

(2) Baud Rate (BPS - baud)

110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

(3) Data Configuration

Start bit 1 bit
Data bits 8 bits
Parity bit : 1 bit or absent (selected by parameter setting)
Stop bits 1 bit or 2 bits (selected by parameter setting)

(4) Parity Check (character parity)

Odd/even parity or no parity check (selected by parameter setting)
(5) Max. Data Transmission Distance
RS232C Cable length up to 15 m
RS422 Cable length up to 1200 m (RS232C-RS422 converter used)
Fiber-optic cable Cable length is up to 2000 m (RS232C-optical converter used)

(6) RS232C Signal Levels

+ 25 V — Binary ... 0
High Signal status Spacing

__
Control signal .... ON
+3V

0V

Low
+3 V

-25 V
Fig. 2-29 RS232C Signal Levels
Binary ... 1
Signal status
Control signal
.....
Marking
OFF
 3754-E P-193
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(7) Signal Descriptions

Pin No. Signal Direction Details

(DB25) Name
1 FG Protective grounding
2 TXD Output Send data
Data line from the OSP to peripheral devices.
3 RXD Input Send data
Data line from peripheral device to the OSP.
4 RTS Output Request to send
Comes ON when data transmission or reception starts.
Thereafter, it is normally ON.
5 CTS Input Clear to send
When this signal is OFF, data is not output from the OSP.
Used for BUSY/READY control.
If this signal is not used, connect the RTS signal at the
NC.
6 DSR Input Data set ready
Indicates that the peripheral device is in the communica¬
tion enabled status.
If this signal goes OFF during data communication, an
error will occur at the OSP.
This signal cannot be used to execute BUSY/READY
control.
If this signal is not used, connect it to DTR at the OSP
side.
7 SG Connection for signals
9 RG1 Output Data request (register 1)
This signal is used to execute receive BUSY control at
the OSP side.
It comes ON when the OSP is in the reception enabled
status and data transfer from a peripheral device is re¬
quested.
It goes OFF on reception of a start bit from the peripheral
device (it goes OFF once per character).
RG1 High
(output) Low

RxD / /
(input)
11 °ata
1 1 IB f~ High
Low

Start bit Stop bit

10 RG2 Output Register 2
Presently not used.
11 SG Grounding for signal
12 SG Grounding for signal
 3754-E P-194
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Pin No. Signal

Direction Details
(DB25) Name
13 SG Grounding for signal
20 DTR Output Data terminal ready
This signal comes ON when the OSP is ready for opera¬
tion.
If data is transferred to the OSP while this signal is OFF,
it will not be read by the OSP.
23 EX-INT Input External interrupt
This signal is used for BUSY/READY control at the pe¬
ripheral device side.
When this signal is used, the following applies for transfer
of each character:
(1) When the signal is OFF, the OSP cannot start data
transfer.
(2) When data transfer starts, this signal temporarily goes
OFF; when it comes ON again the next data is trans¬
ferred. (It goes through the sequence ON, OFF, and
ON for each character).

EX-INT
(output)
/
u /
High
L_ Low
High
Tx D
(input) ISf Data] [ Low

Start bit Stop bit

The EXT-INT signal cannot be used for a peripheral device
which has a buffer, meaning that the ready signal does not
switch ON/OFF for every character. For this type of device,
use the CTS signal. _
 -L-

3754-E P-195
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Connector Layout

OSP side DB25S connector (female)

39.01

11 Y~
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
ooooooooooooo
8.34
oooooooooooo
V 14 16 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26

47.04

DB25S (female)

1 2 3 4 6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
/
FG TXD RXD RTS CTS DSR SG CD RG1
Peripheral
device
14 16 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26
EX-
DTR INT

Connector (JAE) DB-25S (female) (standard shell)

Lock (JAE) D20418-J (hexagonal)

Fig. 2-30 Connector Layout

 3754-E P-196
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-5. Connection to Peripheral Devices

If the peripheral device is to be connectedvia a FACIT4070 parallel interface, all that is required is to select a
cable that matches the connector pin layout at the NC side; punching can start immediately after the
connection of a peripheral device. However, if an RS232C interface is used, since the signals used vary
according to the peripheral device used, a special-purpose cable is required to connect the relevant signals.
A typical example is shown below.

8-5-1. BTR System (No DC Codes)

Example 1:

NC FG FG Peripheral device

TXD RD

RXD
4 SD

RTS cs
CTS
4 I/O BUSY/

DSR1
4 I/O ALARM/

SG SG

RG1 READER START

DTR DR

Fig. 2-31 Connection for BTR System (No DC Codes) (1)

[Supplement] : Since no EXT-INT signal is used in this example, bit 1 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 8
(No. 13, 14, 21, 22) (Ready signals of CNO: to CN4:) should be set to “1” in advance.
 3754-E P-197
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(1) Timing Chart for READ

CEHII33
High
Ready
DSR
Low

High
Data request
RG1
Low

Receive data
\/ \/
RXD 1

t 8 bits
Start bit L
Fig. 2-32 Timing Chart for READ [BTR System (No DC Codes)]
Stop bit

a) Data request signal RG1 is output from the NC.

b) On receiving this signal, the peripheral device transfers serial data.

c) The data request signal is forcibly set to the “Low” status in the interface circuit by the start bit
in the received data.

(2) Timing Chart for PUNCH and LIST

High
Ready
DSR
Low

High
Clear to send
CTS
Low

\
Send data
TXD 1
Character
Since CTS Since CTS has
has gone OFF, come ON again,
data transfer is data transfer is
suspended recommenced
here. here.
Fig. 2-33 Timing Chart for PUNCH and LIST [BTR System (No DC Codes)]
 3754-E P-198
SECTION 2 OPERATION

a) While CTS is OFF, no data is sent from the NC.

b) If CTS goes OFF during data transfer, data transfer is suspended within two characters from
that point.
c) When CTS comes ON again, data transfer is recommenced.
Example 2:

NC FG FG Peripheral device

TXD
> RD

RXD 4 SD

RTS RS

CTS 4 CS

DSR1 4 ER

SG SG

RG1 READER START

DTRi
> DR

EX-IN' 4 DATA BUSY/

Fig. 2-34 Connection for BTR System (No DC Codes) (2)

[Supplement] : Since an EXT-INT signal is used in this example, bit 1 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 8
(No. 13, 14, 21, 22) (Ready signals of CNO: to CN4:) should be set to “0” in advance.

(3) The timing chart for READ is the same as that shown in Example 1.
 3754-E P-199
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) Timing Chart for PUNCH

Peripheral
device
High

Ready
DSR
Low

High
External interrupt
EX-INT L Low

\ / \
Send data
TXD I I
Fig. 2-35 Timing Chart for PUNCH [BTR System (No DC Codes)]

a) When the external interrupt signal EXT-INT comes ON, data is sent from the NC.

b) On reading the stop bit, the peripheral device forcibly sets the external interrupt signal to “Low”.
It is essential that the external interrupt signal be set to “Low” temporarily.

c) On completion of processing, the peripheral device switches the EXT-INT signal ON again.

8-5-2. DC Code Control

When DC code control is effective, the NC outputs DC control codes to control data transfer.
The user can select whether or not DC code control is performed by parameter setting.
The available DC control codes are DC1 through DC4, as shown below.
“DC” is the abbreviation for “device control”, and these device control characters serve to start peripheral
devices. 87654821

DC1 : Tape reader start

o• o
DC2 : Tape punch start
o •o
O 0*00
DC3 : Tape reader stop
o »o
DC4 : Tape punch stop
[Supplement] : 1. Since DC control codes are automatically generated from the NC, the user does not
have to write them into programs.

2. The control codes used are the ones shown above, regardless of whether the ISO or
EIA coding system is used.

3. The NC unit cannot be controlled by control codes sent from the peripheral device.
 3754-E P-200
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Example 1:

NC
FG
6 "O FG Peripheral device

t=$
TXD <") RD

RXD -Q SD
RTS O CS

CTS I/O BUSY/

DSR

SG
< L I/O ALARM/

DTR
9--<? DR

Fig. 2-36 Connection for DC Code Control

[Supplement] : Since no EXT-INT signal is used in this example, bit 1 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 8
(No.13, 14, 21, 22) (Ready signals of CNO: to CN4:) should be set to “1” in advance.
(1) Timing Chart for READ

NC Peripheral
device

Ready
DSR

D D D D
Send data C C C C
TXD 1 3 1 3

\ \
\ \ \
\ \ \

Receive data Data

Data
RXD

Within 100 characters Within 100 characters

Fig. 2-37 Timing chart for READ (DC Code Control)

 3754-E P-201
SECTION 2 OPERATION

a) The NC sends the DC1 code.

b) On receiving the DC1 code, the peripheral device starts transferring data to the NC.

c) After reading the program name, the NC sends the DC3 code.

d) On receiving the DC3 code, the peripheral device suspends transfer of data to the NC. Data
transfer stops within 100 characters after transmission of the DC3 code.

e) When processing at the NC is completed, the NC sends the DC1 code again.

f) On receiving the DC1 code, the peripheral device starts transferring the data immediately
following the data sent in the last transfer operation.

g) The NC sends a DC3 code and a DC1 code during reading of each 256-character section of
the NC program (equivalent to a tape length of 0.65 m).

h) The peripheral device sends the end of record code and data transfer is terminated.

i) On completion of data reading, the NC sends the DC3 code.

(2) Timing Chart for PUNCH

Q~|j§r[l
Ready
DSR

D D
Send data
C Data Data C
TXD 4
2

/ /
Clear to send
CTS

Fig. 2-38 Timing Chart for PUNCH (DC Code Control)

a) The NC sends the DC2 code.

b) If the CTS signal is ON, the data to be transferred is sent immediately following the DC2 code.

c) When the CTS signal goes OFF, data transfer is suspended.

When the CTS signal comes ON again, the NC starts transferring the data following the previous
transfer data.
d) When data transfer is completed, the NC sends the DC4 code.
 3754-E P-202
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-5-3. DC Code Control TYPE2

In the standard DC code control described in 8-5-2, DC codes can only be output from the NC. In TYPE2
control however, DC codes can also be output from the peripheral device.
When this type of control is used, the NC uses the four control codes DC1, DC2, DC3 and DC4, and the host
computer side uses two: DC1 and DC3.

DC Code NC Host Computer

DC1 Enables data reading: Enables data reading:
(1) Starts data reading. (1) Responds to DC2.
(2) Cancels temporary stops. (2) Cancels temporary stops.
DC2 Sent to the peripheral device at the begin¬
ning of a data transfer operation as a data
reading request. _
DC3 Requests temporary stoppage of data Requests temporary stoppage of data
transfer from the peripheral device. transfer from the NC.
DC4 Terminates data transfer.
To make TYPE2 control effective, set “1” for both the standard DC code control bit and the DC code control
TYPE2 bit in the NC optional parameter (bit) for the relevant channel.
Example 1:

NC Peripheral device
FG FG

TXD RD

RXD 4 SD

RTS RS

CTS CS

DSR DTR

DTR DR

SG SG

Fig. 2-39 Connection for DC Code Control TYPE2

 3754-E P-203
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(1) Timing Chart for READ

FH Peripheral
device

1
D D [D]
Send data c c C
TXD 1 3 3

\ \

Receive data Data Data

RXD

t1

Within 100 characters Within 100 characters

Fig. 2-40 Timing Chart for READ (DC Code Control TYPE2)

a) The NC sends the DC1 code.

b) On receiving the DC1 code, the peripheral device starts transferring data to the NC.

c) After reading the program name, the NC unit sends the DC3 code.

d) On receiving the DC3 code, the peripheral device suspends transfer of data to the NC. Data
transfer stops within 100 characters after transmission of the DC3 code.

e) When processing at the NC is completed, the NC sends the DC1 code again.

f) On receiving the DC1 code, the peripheral device starts transferring the data immediately
following the data sent in the last transfer operation.

g) The NC sends a DC3 code and a DC1 code during reading of each 256-character section of
the NC program (equivalent to a tape length of 0.65 m).

h) The peripheral device sends the end of record code and data transfer is terminated.

i) On completion of data reading, the NC sends the DC3 code.

 3754-E P-204
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Timing chart for PUNCH

0-[ Peripheral

Send data
TXD
1 Data Data
I
/ / /
Receive data
RXD 1 1I
t2 t3

Within 2 characters

Fig. 2-41 Timing Chart for PUNCH (DC Code Control TYPE2)

a) The NC sends the DC2 code.

b) On receiving the DC2 code, the peripheral device sends the DC1 code to the NC.
c) On reading the DC1 code, the NC starts transferring data to the peripheral device.

d) If reception processing for the data transfer cannot keep pace with data reception, the
peripheral device sends the DC3 code.

e) The NC stops data transfer within 2 characters after receiving the DC3 code.

f) After completing the processing backlog, the peripheral device sends the DC1 code again.

g) On receiving the DC1 code, the NC starts transferring the data immediately following the data
sent in the last transfer operation.

h) The NC sends the end of record code at the beginning of the transfer data and the DC4 code
when data transfer is completed.

[Supplement] : If the times t1, t2 and t3 overrun the set values for the ready completion waiting times for
the RS-232C channels set in the NC optional parameters (word), an RS232C device
reading error occurs.
 3754-E P-205
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-5-4. Slave Station Function

If an attempt is made to transfer data between two OSPs, it is normally impossible because both of the OSPs
function as master stations. The slave station function allows communication between two OSPs by making
one of them a slave station.
In the slave station mode, an OSP operates in the same way as a tape reader/punch.

OSP master station OSP slave station

Master station (not OSP) OSP slave station

Example: Example connection to a peripheral device when using the slave station function

NC Peripheral device
FG FG
Slave station Master station

TXD RD

RXD 4 SD

RTS RS

CTS CS

DSR
4 ER

SG SG

RG1 DR

DTR
*• EX-INT

EX-II 4 DATA BUSY/

Fig. 2-42 Example Connection (1)

[Supplement] : Since an EXT-INT signal is used in this example, bit 1 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 8
(No. 13, 14, 21, 22) (Ready signals of CNO: to CN4:) should be set to “0” in advance.

a) The timing chart for READ is the same as the one shown in 8-5-1 (Example 1).

b) The timing chart for PUNCH is the same as the one shown in 8-5-1 (Example 2).

c) When reading, the tape feed data following the program section is ignored.
When punching, the tape feed data following the program section is not punched out.
 3754-E P-206
SECTION 2 OPERATION

d) Notwithstanding c) above, if the end of record code is NULL, one character of NULL data is
punched out.
Example: Example connection to a peripheral device when using the slave station function and DC
code control

NC
Slave station FG
6 FG
Peripheral device
Master station

TXD A RD

RXD Q- SD

RTS CS

CTS I/O BUSY/

DSR I/O ALARM/

SG SG

DTR DR

Fig. 2-43 Example Connection (2)

[Supplement] : Since no EXT-INT signal is used in this example, bit 1 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 8
(No. 13, 14, 21, 22) (Ready signals of CNO: to CN4:) should be set to “1" in advance.

(1) Timing Chart for READ

Slave station Peripheral

(NC) device

RXD DC2 Data Data DC4

RTS

Fig. 2-44 Timing Chart for READ (Slave Station Function)

 X

3754-E P-207
SECTION 2 OPERATION

a) When reading operation is executed at the NC, the RTS signal is switched ON.

b) The peripheral device outputs the DC2 code.

c) On reading the DC2 code, the NC starts data input processing.

d) When the NC needs to stop reading temporarily to execute processing, it switches the RTS
signal OFF. When this signal goes OFF, the peripheral device suspends data transfer to the
NC.

e) On completing the backlog of processing, the NC unit switches the RTS signal back ON.
When the RTS signal comes ON, the peripheral device recommences data transfer to the NC.

f) The peripheral device outputs the DC4 code to terminate data transfer.

g) On reading the DC4 code, the NC switches the RTS signal OFF, terminating data reading.

(2) Timing Chart for PUNCH

Slave station
(NC)

Receive data DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3

RXD

Send data Data Data

TXD

Request to send
RTS

Clear to send
CTS

Fig. 2-45 Timing Chart for PUNCH (Slave Station Function)

a) On reading the DC1 code sent from the peripheral device, the NC executes punch processing
of the data.

b) On reading the DC3 code sent from the peripheral device, the NC suspends punch processing.
c) On reading a DC1 code sent from the peripheral device again, the NC recommences punch
processing.

d) When all the data has been punched, the NC terminates punch processing on reception of the
DC3 code from the peripheral device.
 3754-E P-208
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Example: Example connection between OSPs using the slave station function

Communication between two OSPs is executed by making one the master station and the
other the slave station.

OSP DB25 OSP DB25

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 2 TXD
RTS 4 5 CTS
CTS 5 4 RTS
DSR 6 20 DTR
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9
DTR 20 6 DSR
EX-INT 23 11

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional
parameter
Condition File name DC code Standard 8-bit * Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate “0" or “1" can be set.

parameter
(word) No. 6 2400 * indicates either
(1) For the parameters indicated above, set the same values for the two OSPs.

(2) Set the channel used for the peripheral device by setting NC optional parameter (word) No. 45
(designation of punch device) and NC optional parameter (word) No. 57 (designation of read
device) in advance.

(3) Bits 0 to 4 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 40 are used to select master or slave status for each
channel: set one of the two OSPs as the master station (set “0”) and the other as the slave station
(sen”).

(4) On completion of the steps above, communication between the two OSPs will be possible.
 -L

3754-E P-209
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6. Example Punch Connections

The following connection examples assume that the punching device is connected at CNO: (FRP board).

(1) FACIT FACIT 4070

(2) FACIT FACIT N1000

(3) KYORITSUSHA All punch models

(4) KYORITSUSHA Accumulator D60

(5) CITIZEN Protyper 7652NC

(6) CITIZEN CRP-2500

(7) CASIO 650NC, 750NC

(8) JBN PR30

(9) NEC DATA TERMINALS NDT-9501

(10) TANAKA BUSINESS MACHINES PT30RS

(11) TANAKA BUSINESS MACHINES PT30RP

(12) FANUC PPR

(13) MIKUNI TOKUSHU KIKI CF30, CF10

(14)TAKAHASHI DENKI HFD-35

(15) ANRITSU DPT610A
(16) ACC SYSTEM PT-PR

[Supplement] : The specifications of these punches are subject to change without prior notice. Be aware
that such changes may make it impossible to punch out data using the connection
examples that follow.
These connection examples are applicable at the time of writing (March, 1986).
 X-

3754-E P-210
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-1. FACIT 4070

OSP DB25 FACIT4070 DB25P (slide lock)

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RD
RXD 3
RTS 4
CTS 5
DSR 6 20 DTR
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9
DTR 20
EX-INT 23

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Optional
Condition File name DC code Standard 8-bit* Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
parameter set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate

parameter
(word) No. 6 600 * indicates either “0” or “1” can be set.
Punch Switch Settings

f~S5l DB25 connector •S1 SER (SER, PAR, SERIAL WITH ERROR CODE)
• S2 No. 1 ON, others OFF
[]§ Component side
•S3 No. 6 ON, others OFF
•S4 No. 4 ON, others OFF
•S5 All OFF
3-notch switch

RS232C interface
 3754-E P-211
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-2. FACIT N1000

OSP DB25 FACIT N1000

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 2 TXD
RTS 4 5 CTS
CTS 5 4 RTS
DSR 6 20 DTR
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9
DTR 20 6 DSR
EX-INT 23

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional
parameter
Condition File name DC code Standard *
8-bit Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate

either “0” or “1” can be set.
parameter
(word) No. 6 2400 * indicates
46 Set bit 3 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 1 to “1”
(tape delimiting code: %).
FACIT N1000 Parameter Settings:
Parameter
1-1 RS232C (input port) 2-1 2400 (baud rate)
1-2 RS232C (output port) 2-2 7 (word length)
1-3 ASC (input code) 2-3 2 (stop bit)
1-4 ASC (output code) 2-4 EVEN (even parity)
1-5 ON (file marker on input) 2-5 NC (DC1/DC3 control executed)
1-6 DC (end of record code)
1-7 OFF (file marker on output)
1-8 OFF (TV check)
 3754-E P-212
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-3. KYORITSUSHA - ALL Models (Tape Punch)

OSP Kyoritsu punch DB25P (slide lock)

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1
TXD 2 10 RD
RXD 3 1 SD
RTS 4
CTS 5
DSR 6 2 DTR
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9 11 DSR
DTR 20 12 CTS
EX-INT 23 5 RS

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional
parameter
Condition File name DC code Standard 8-bit * Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

indicates either “0” or “1” can be set.

NC optional
parameter
Baud Rate
*
46 Set bit 3 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 1 to “1"
(word) No. 6 2400
(tape delimiting code: %).

Left Right
Punch Switch Settings (for KRP8250) No. Functions No. Baud Rates
0 DC codes used 0 Not used
Left Right
1 Not used 1 110
0 5 2 ISO/EIA 2 300
3 ISO/ASK II 3 600
4 No DC codes 4 1200
5 Not used 5 2400
6 Not used 6 4800
7 Local test 7 Not used
8 Stop bit: 1 8 Not used
9 Not used 9 Not used
 ,x

3754-E P-213
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-4. KYORITSUSHA - Accumulator D60

OSP D60 DB25P (screw lock type)

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1
TXD 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 2 TDX
RTS 4
CTS 5
DSR 6 6 DTR
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9 5 CTS
DTR 20 8 DSR
EX-INT 23 4 RTS

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional
parameter
Condition File name DC code Standard *
8-bit Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate

parameter
(word) No. 6 2400 * indicates either “0” or “1” can be set.
 X

3754-E P-214
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-5. CITIZEN - 7652NC

OSP DB25 7652NC DB25 (screw lock type)

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RD
RXD 3 2 SD
RTS 4 4 RS
CTS 5 5 CS
DSR 6 20 ER
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9 18 READERSTART
DTR 20 6 DR
EX-INT 23 11 DATA BUSY/

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional Condition File name DC code Standard 8-bit* Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
parameter set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate

parameter
(word) No. 6 2400 * indicates either “0” or “1” can be set.
7652NC Switch Settings (Open the Punch’s Rear Door to Set the Switches.)
S1-8
S1, S2, S4, S5, S9, S10, S12, S13, S15 -» ON
S9-16 S3, S6, S7, S8, S11.S14, S16, -» OFF
S17 to S36 all OFF
 .2L

3754-E P-215
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-6. CITIZEN - CRP-2500

OSP DB25 CRP-2500

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RD
RXD 3 2 SD
RTS 4 5 CS
CTS 5 4 RS
DSR 6 20 ER
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9
DTR 20 6 DR
EX-INT 23

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional Condition File name DC code Standard 8-bit* Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
parameter set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate

parameter
(word) No. 6 2400
* indicates either “0” or “1” can be set.
Punch DIP Switch Settings
DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON ON i i m i i i M
OFF mmmwMMW, OFF mwmmmm
Data length: 8
t
No parity check 2400 baud
"" V""
Spares

No parity— Parity: even

Stop bits: 2
— DC codes not output from reader
DC control effective
— - DC codes not punched
*— Reader does not stop
even if it reads “%” (“ER”)
 3754-E P-216
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-7. CASIO - 650NC, 750NC

OSP DB25 650NC, 750NC DB25 (screw lock type)

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RD
RXD 3 2 SD
RTS 4
CTS 5 8 CD
DSR 6 20 ER
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9 5 CS
DTR 20 6 DR
EX-INT 23 4 RS

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional Condition File name DC code Standard 8-bit* Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
parameter set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate

parameter
(word) No. 6 300
* indicates either “0” or “1” can be set.
650NC Switch Settings
(Switch Name) (23 Switch Position)
Spec 10C SW1, SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW9, SW10 —» ON
SW6, SW7, SW8 OFF
Level 1B SW1 to SW4 all ON
Baud rate 11G Set the slide switch to “300”.
 X.

3754-E P-217
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-8. JBM - PR30

OSP DB25 JBM PP30 DB25 (screw lock type)

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1
TXD 2 9 RD
RXD 3 14 SD
RTS 4 15 CTS
CTS 5 13 RTS
DSR 6 24 P.ON
SG 7 25 GND
CD 8
RG1 9
DTR 20
EX-INT 23

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional
Condition File name DC code Standard 8-bit* Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
parameter set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate

indicates either “0” or “1" can be set.
parameter
(word) No. 6 2400 ** The punch can be used regardless of whether DC code control is
performed or not, but when using the tape reader supplied as an
PR-30 Switch Settings accessory to the punch, DC code control must be effective.
(DIP Switch Settings)
Note : JBM punches that do not have x inscribed on
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
their name plates are for use with parallel data only and
ON
cannot be used for RS232C applications.
'//
OFF '#A.
2400 baud
t
Stop bit: 1

No. 3 ON, all others OFF

 .X

3754-E P-218
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-9. NEC DATA TERMINALS - NDT-9501

OSP DB25 NDT-9501

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RD
RXD 3 2 SD
RTS 4 5 CS
CTS 5 4 RS
DSR 6 6 DR
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9
DTR 20
EX-INT 23

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional Condition File name DC code Standard 8-bit* Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
parameter set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate either “0” or “1” can be set.

parameter
(word) No. 6 2400
*Setindicates
bit 3 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 1 to “1”
(tape delimiting code: %).

NDT-9501 Settings

- Coding system : ISO (standard for OSP)

- Baud rate : 2400 BPS (standard for OSP)

The JBM data collector DC1 is the same device as the NDT-9501.
Note: Since the NDT-9501ignores data until the first % code is received, the file name is not recorded
when data including a file name is sent from the OSP. Consequently, when data is sent from the
NDT-9501 to the OSP, it does not include a file name.
 1

3754-E P-219
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-10. TANAKA BUSINESS MACHINES - PT-30RS

OSP DB25 TCM PT-30RS DS25P (screw lock type)

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RD
RXD 3 2 SD
RTS 4 5 CS
CTS 5
DSR 6 20 ER
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9
DTR 20
EX-INT 23 4 RS

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional Condition File name DC code Standard 8-bit* Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
parameter set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate * Punching (printing): possible regardless of whether or not

parameter DC code control is effective.
(word) No. 6 2400
Reader: Can only be used if DC code control is effective.
indicates either “0” or “1” can be set.
Punch Switch Settings *
4 Pin SW

T
2400 baud
 3754-E P-220
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-11. TANAKA BUSINESS MACHINES - PT-30RP

OSP DB25 TBM PT-30RP DS25P (screw lock type)

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RD
RXD 3 2 SD
RTS 4 5 CS
CTS 5 4 RS
DSR 6 20 ER
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9
DTR 20
EX-INT 23

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional Condition File name DC code Standard 8-bit* Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
parameter set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate

parameter * Punching (printing): possible regardless of whether or not DC code
(word) No. 6 2400 control is effective.
Reader: Can only be used if DC code control is effective.
Punch Switch Settings indicates either “0” or “1” can be set.
* PT-30R
6-pole DIP SW
PT-30P
1 2 3 4 5 6 Printing out with these models is possible
PT-30RP
ON
OFF
i M i i n PT-30M INI
using the same connection.
R : Punch, reader
f P : Punch, printer
2400 baud - PR: Punch, printer, reader

No. 2 ON, all others OFF

 4i~

3754-E P-221
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-12. FANUC-PPR

OSP DB25 PPR DB25S (screw lock type)

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 2 RD
RXD 3 3 SD
RTS 4 4 CS
CTS 5 5 I/O BUSY
DSR 6 6 I/O ALARM
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8 8
RG1 9
DTR 20 20 DR
EX-INT 23

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional
parameter
Condition File name DC code Standard *
8-bit Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional Baud Rate Note: indicates either “O’ or “1” can be set.
parameter
4800
*
* If the bit for standard DC code control is not set to “1", press
(word) No. 6
the |PTP| key at the FANUC PPR.

* The punch can be used regardless of whether DC code control is

performed or not, but when using the tape reader supplied as an
accessory to the punch, DC code control must be effective.
 ..L.

3754-E P-222
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-13. MIKUNI TOKUSHU KIKI - CF30, CF10

OSP DB25 CF30, CF10 DB25S

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RD
RXD 3 2 SD
RTS 4 5 CS
CTS 5 4 RS
DSR 6 20 ER
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8 8 CD
RG1 9
DTR 20
EX-INT 23

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional
parameter
Condition File name DC code Standard *
8-bit Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional
parameter
Baud Rate
4800
Note:
* indicates either “0" or “I" can be set.
(word) No. 6

Optional Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
parameter
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Tape*
(bit) No. 1
Condition Special Special Tape Tape Tape TV Automatic Tape
set tape tape code rewind read delimiter check tape code coding
codes alarm verify code: % recognition system
ignored (ER)

NC optional RS232C
parameter
(word) No. 34
Busy Time
60
Note:
* indicates either “0" or “1* can be set.
(seconds)
 • X

3754-E P-223
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-14. TAKAHASHI DENKI - HFD-35

OSP DB25 HFD-35

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RD
RXD 3 2 SD
RTS 4 5 CS
CTS 5 4 RS
DSR 6 20 ER
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8 8 CD
RG1 9
DTR 20
EX-INT 23

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Optional
parameter
Condition File name DC code Standard *
8-bit Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional
parameter
Baud Rate

2400
Note:
* indicates either “0" or “I" can be set.
(word) No. 6

Optional Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
parameter
Data 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
(bit) No. 1
Condition Special Special Tape Tape* Tape Tape TV Automatic Tape
set tape tape code rewind read delimiter check tape code coding
codes alarm verify code: % recognition system
ignored (ER)

* indicates either “0" or “1 can be set.

Note: *
 ,JL

3754-E P-224
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-15. ANRITSU - DPT61OA

OSP DB25 DPT 61OA

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1 1 FG
TXD 2 3 RD
RXD 3 2 SD
RTS 4 5 CS
CTS 5 4 RS
DSR 6 20 ER
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9
DTR 20 6 DS
EX-INT 23

NC Parameters OSP
Optional Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
parameter 1
Data 0 0 0 0 1 0
8-bit*
(bit) No. 8
Condition File name DC code Standard Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional
parameter
Baud Rate Note:
* indicates either “0" or “1” can be set.
(word) No. 6 2400

Punch Settings
DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2
3 4 5 6
Vi j6i
1 2 7 8
ON l I I I I I M I ON WM
OFF OFF wmmmmm
J
Serial IF DC code control
Baud rate
2400
J L Stop bit: 2 bits

DIP switch 3 No parity bit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF MMMBBmm,
 JL. .1.

3754-E P-225
SECTION 2 OPERATION

8-6-16. ACC SYSTEM - PT-PR

OSP DB25 PT-PR

Signal Name Pin No. Pin No. Signal Name
FG 1
TXD 2 3 RD
RXD 3 2 SD
RTS 4
CTS 5 4 RS
DSR 6 20 ER
SG 7 7 SG
CD 8
RG1 9 5 CS
DTR 20 6 DSR
EX-INT 23

NC Parameters OSP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 1 0
8-bit*
Data
Optional Condition File name DC code Standard Even/odd Parity Ready 1-bit/2-bit
parameter set read/not control DC code JIS/7-bit parity check signal stop bit
(bit) No. 8 read TYPE 2 control JIS performed/ setting
not
performed

NC optional
parameter
Baud Rate Note:
* indicates either “0” or “1" can be set.
(word) No. 6 600
 3754-E P-226-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

9. OSP FORMAT I/O FUNCTION

Conventionally, NC part programs are stored on paper tape; this function makes storage possible on floppy
disks instead. Either 3.5 inch or 8 inch floppy disks can be used (Note 1).
See 9-3-3 for details on physical formats and logical formats.
Note that the floppy disk drive for 8-inch floppy disks is an option.

9-1. Floppy Disk Drive

(1) Built-in Type 3.5 Inch Floppy Disk Drive

Lamp

Release button
Press this button to re¬
move a floppy disk from
the drive.

Fig. 2-46 Built-in Type 3.5 Inch Floppy Disk Drive

One of the device names - FDO: or FD1: - is indicated on the floppy disk drive unit; use the unit in
accordance with this indication.
a) Installing a floppy disk
Insert the floppy disk into the drive while it is oriented as shown above. Make sure that it clicks
home properly.
b) Removing a floppy disk
Press the release button to remove a disk.
[Supplement] : 1. The lamp on the drive is lit only while disk reading or writing is in progress.
2. The lamp does not light to indicate that a floppy disk is installed.
 X

3754-E P-227-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Portable 3.5 inch Floppy Disk Drive Unit (Option)

OSP floppy disk drive interface Portable 3.5 Inch

floppy disk drive unit

Connecting cable

TO ill

Lamp

B
a
Release button
Press this button to remove a floppy disk.

Fig. 2-47 Portable 3.5 Inch Floppy Disk Drive Unit (Option)

One of the device names - FDO: or FD1: - is indicated on the floppy disk drive unit; use the unit in
accordance with this indication.
 ..A

3754-E P-228-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

a) Installing a floppy disk

Insert the floppy disk Into the drive while it is oriented as shown in the figure on the previous page;
make sure that it clicks home properly.
b) Removing a floppy disk
Press the release button to remove a disk.

ACMION : (1) Always switch off the power before connecting the cable to the OSP floppy disk drive
interface or disconnecting it.
(2) The lamp on the drive is lit only while disk reading or writing is in progress; it does not light to
indicate that a floppy disk is installed.
(3) Portable 8-inch Floppy Disk Drive Unit (Option)
OSP floppy disk drive interface Portable 8-inch
floppy disk drive unit

Connecting cable

]R HI

Lamp-sÿ
"'O
O

a)

/I

b]

Fig. 2-48 Portable 8-inch Floppy Disk Drive Unit (Option)

One of the device names - FDO: or FD1: - is indicated on the floppy disk drive unit; use the unit in
accordance with this indication.
 3754-E P-229
SECTION 2 OPERATION

a) Installing a floppy disk

Press the part marked (B) in the figure above and insert the disk while it is oriented as shown above.
After installing the disk, slide the cover to the left by pressing against part (A).

b) Removing a floppy disk

Press part (B).

Always switch off the power before connecting the cable to the OSP floppy disk drive
A
-
CAUTION :
interface or disconnecting it.
(2) The lamp on the drive lights to indicate that a floppy disk has been installed correctly.

9-2. Operation Overview

(1) The “floppy disk I/O function” means operations (A) (B) (C) and (D) in the illustration below.

(2) Operation (F) is only applicable when the optional tape punch specification is used.

(3) Operations (G) and (H) are applicable in standard specifications.

OSP

I
j
Tape punch/printer i
(option) Tape reader

(F) (E) \
(C) (B)\ (A)
Memory
Floppy disk
(D)
(G)
j | (H)

Editing buffer

Fig. 2-49 Operation Overview

 3754-E P-230
SECTION 2 OPERATION

a) A part program on paper tape can be read directly into a floppy disk by using the READ
command in the PIP (transfer) mode, which is accessed from the PROG OPERATION mode.
b) A part program can be output from the floppy disk to the tape punch or printer in the following
manner:
1) A part program stored in a floppy disk can be output directly to a tape punch to punch out
a paper tape by using the PUNCH command in the PIP mode of the PROG OPERATION
mode.

2) Similarly, a part program stored in a floppy disk can be output directly to a printer to create
a process sheet by using the LIST command.
3) The file names of part programs stored in a floppy disk can be output directly to a printer to
create a directory of file names by using the DIR command.

c) Part programs stored in the memory of the NC can be copied to a floppy disk by using the
COPY command in the PIP mode of the PROG OPERATION mode.
d) Part programs stored in a floppy disk can be copied to the memory of the NC by using the
COPY command in the PIP mode of the PROG OPERATION mode.
e) A part program can be output from the NC memory to the tape punch or printer in the following
manner:
1) Part programs stored in the NC memory can be output to a tape punch to record them on
paper tape by using the PUNCH command in the PIP mode of the PROG OPERATION
mode.

2) Similarly, part programs stored in the NC memory can be output directly to a printer to
create process lists by using the LIST command.

3) The file names of part programs stored in the NC memory can be output directly to a
printer to create a directory of file names by using the DIR command.

f) A part program on paper tape can be read directly into the NC memory by using the READ
command in the PIP mode of the PROG OPERATION mode.

g) Part programs can be transferred from the NC memory to a buffer area for program editing or
execution in the following manner:
1) Part programs stored in the NC memory can be transferred to the buffer area for editing by
using the EDIT command in the PIP mode of the PROG OPERATION mode.

2) A part program stored in the NC memory can be transferred to the buffer area for program
execution by using the PROGRAM SELECT command in the AUTO mode.
h) A part program in the editing buffer can be returned to the NC memory by using the EDIT
command in the PROG OPERATION mode.
 A

3754-E P-231-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

9-2-1. Operation Commands

(1) The operation commands are used to transfer data in an input device to an output device.
Peripheral
Device Sector Device Tape Reading Tape Punching Printing Device
Device Device
Command
F2 DIR Input Output
F1 READ Output Input
F2 PUNCH Input Output
F3 PIP Output
F3 VERIFY Input
Input
F4 COPY Input Output
F5 FREE Input Output
F6 LIST Input Output
F2 INIT Output
F3 DELETE Output
F4 RENAME Output
F1 PROTECT Output
(2) Peripheral device classification and abbreviations
Sector devices
MD1: -* User memory
FDO: -*• 3.5 inch floppy disk
FD1: -* 3.5 inch or 8 inch floppy disk*
Tape reading devices
TR: -* Standard tape reader
CNO: -+ Tape reader connected at RS232C channel 0*
CN1: -» Tape reader connected at RS232C channel 1*
CN2: -* Tape reader connected at RS232C channel 2*
CN3: -* Tape reader connected at RS232C channel 3*
Tape punching devices
CNO: -ÿ Tape punch connected at RS232C channel 0*
CN1: -* Tape punch connected at RS232C channel 1*
CN2: -* Tape punch connected at RS232C channel 2*
CN3: -*• Tape punch connected at RS232C channel 3*
Printing devices
CN: -» Console
PN: -» Operation panel display screen
CNO: -* Printer connected at RS232C channel 0*
CN1: -*ÿ
Printer connected at RS232C channel 1*
CN2: -* Printer connected at RS232C channel 2*
CN3: -* Printer connected at RS232C channel 3*
"" indicates an option.
 JL

3754-E P-232
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) The default devices are indicated below.

For sector devices MD1:
Tape reading devices TR: (This automatic selection can be changed by
setting NC optional parameter (word) No.57.)
Tape punching devices CNO (This automatic selection can be changed by
setting NC optional parameter (word) No.45.)
Printing devices PN: (a) The default device for a tape reading device or
tape punching device can be changed by
changing the parameter settings.
(b) If the output NC program name is not specified,
the input program name is assigned to the
output program.
(c) If the input NC program name is not specified,
the name assigned will be A.MIN unless an NC
program name is specified on the tape, in
which case that name will be used.
9-2-2. Types of Floppy Disk
(1) 3.5 Inch Floppy Disks
Type Recommended Maker Format for OSP
2DD 9 sectors/track
80 track 512 bytes/sector
TDK
135 TPI
3M
2HD 18 sectors/track
Hitachi Maxell
80 track 512 bytes/sector
135 TPI
(2) 8 Inch Floppy Disks
IBM P/N2305830 Single-sided, single-density
(Hitachi Maxell FD1-128) 77 cylinders/disk
(IBM DISKETTE 1) 1 track/cylinder
26 sectors/track
128 bytes/sector
IBM P/N2736700 Double-sided, single-density
(Hitachi Maxell FD2-256) 77 cylinders/disk
(IBM DISKETTE 2) 2 tracks/cylinder
15 sectors/track
256 bytes/sector
IBM P/N1766872 Double-sided, double-density
(Hitachi Maxell FD2-256D) 77 cylinders/disk
(IBM DISKETTE2D) 2 tracks/cylinder
26 sectors/track
256 bytes/sector
 3754-E P-233
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Supplement

a) Since the OSP creates files in the OSP format (a file management system exclusive to OSP),
it cannot write to or read floppy disks containing files created in the IBM format on another
computer.

b) New floppy disks must be initialized before they can be used.

c) To enable the OSP to read an IBM format (logical format) floppy disk, select the IBM format
floppy disk I/O function (option). A separate option (IBM format) is also required to handle
“multi-volume” files that occupy two or more floppy disks. (For 8-inch floppy disks only)
d) The storage capacity of each type of floppy disk, expressed in terms of the equivalent tape
length, is indicated in the table below.

Floppy Disk 3.5 Inch 8 Inch

Type 2DD 3HD/2HC FD1-128 FD2-256 FD2-256D
Storage Capacity 1840 3770 650 1470 2550
(tape length) [m]

(4) Cautions on Handling Floppy Disks

Do not touch the ma9netic surfaces of the disk or wipe them with anything.
CAUTION ' ’

- Keep disks away from magnets.

- Do not write on floppy disks with pencils or ball point pens (use felt-tip pens).
- Do not apply pressure to disks by gripping them with clips, etc.
- When storing a disk, always put it back into its cover and keep it in its box.
- Do not leave disks in places where they are exposed to direct sunlight or heat.

9-2-3. Sector Devices

The assignment of sector device names is determined by the specifications, as shown below.
Sector device 3.5 Inch Floppy 8 Inch Floppy Both 3.5 Inch and 8 Inch
Specification Disks Only Disks Only Floppy Disks
FD0: O O O 3.5 inch floppy disk
FD1: Q 8 inch floppy disk
Whether the floppy disk drive is assigned drive name FD0: or FD1: is indicated on the disk drive in the case of
built-in type. For the portable type, the indication is given on the floppy disk drive interface.
 3754-E P-234
SECTION 2 OPERATION

9-3. Guide to Operations

In the explanations that follow, the 3.5 inch floppy disks are identified as sector device “FDO:”, 8 inch floppy
disks are identified as sector device “FD1 and where no distinction needs to be made between 3.5 inch and
8 inch disks, the disk is identified as sector device “FDO:”. Determine whether the floppy disk actually used is
FDO: or FD1: by checking the indication on the floppy disk drive or floppy disk drive interface.
9-3-1. Initialization of Floppy Disks
New floppy disks and floppy disks which have not been initialized in the OSP format must beinitialized before
they can be used with the OSP.
Disks which have already been initialized in the OSP format can be initialized again in order to delete all the
part programs stored on them.
3.5 Inch Floppy Disks

(1) Operating Procedure

a) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

b) Press function key [F8] ([EXTEND]).

c) Press function key [F2] (INIT).

d) =IN I_I FDO: [WRITE] The underlined sections are to be keyed in by the operator.

If no device name is specified, the memory is initialized.

This gap indicates that a space ([SP]) is required.
e) “initialize OK (Y/N)!” will be displayed.
Enter the following:
!Y [WRITE]
f) “formatting (Y/N)!” will be displayed.
Enter the following:
IY [WRITE]

g) “format(2DD-720K=0,2HD-1,44M=1)I” will be displayed.

Enter “0” or “1” depending on whether the floppy disk type is 2DD or 2HD.
For a 2HD disk, enter:
11 [WRITE]
The floppy disk will be initialized and the initialization command will be terminated.
In the case of a disk that has already been initialized in the OSP format, enter “N” at step f). After
initialization of the disk, the message shown below will be displayed and the initialization command
will be terminated.
FDO:OSP format (2HD-1.44M) (for 2HD)
 JL,

3754-E P-235
SECTION OPERATION
2

8 Inch Floppy Disks

(1) Operating Procedure

a) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

b) Press function key [F8] ([EXTEND]).

c) Press function key [F2] (INIT).
d) =IN I_I FD1: [WRITE] The underlined sections are to be keyed in by the operator.

If no device name is specified, the memory is initialized.

This gap indicates that a space ([SP]) is required.

e) FD1:OSP format (FD2-256D)

I
Floppy disk type (Double-sided, double-density)
initialize OK(Y/N) ! Y [WRITE]

[Supplement] : 1. If the disk to be initialized is a new one which has never been initialized in the OSP
format, it is usually written in the IBM format, in which case the following message is
displayed at step e) above:
FD1:IBM format(FD2-256D)
initialize OK(Y/N)l
Enter the following response to initialize the disk in the OSP format:
I Y [WRITE]

2. If the optional IBM format floppy disk I/O function is being used, the procedure from
step e) onward will be as follows:

a) FD1:OSP format(FD2-256D)
initialize OK(Y/N)l
If “Y [WRITE]” is entered in response, the following message will be displayed.
b) type (0SP=0,IBM=l)
Enter the following to initialize the disk in the OSP format:
I O [WRITE]
 •JL

3754-E P-236-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : 3. When a floppy disk is initialized, its type (FD1-128, FD2-256, FD2-256D) is
automatically recognized on reading its data. However, if the data has been
destroyed, the following message will be displayed at step e) above and it will not be
possible to initialize the disk:
FD1: ???format (FD?-???)
405 floppy disc initialization ERROR
If an attempt is made to initialize a floppy disk that has been initialized in the IBM
format by an OSP5000M at an OSP500M-G/OSP5000M-G/OSP5020M, the
following message will be displayed at step e) above and it will not be possible to
initialize the disk:
FD1: IBM format (FD?-???)
405 floppy disc initialization ERROR
(The same thing will happen with a disk that has been used in an automatic
programming device that uses its own format, distinct from the IBM and OSP
formats.)
In this case the disk can be initialized by specifying its type using the option code “;F”.
Example: To specify a double-sided, double-density disk (FD2-256D):
= IN FD1:;F [WRITE]
initialize OK(Y/N)l Y [WRITE]
formatting (Y/N)l N [WRITE]
format (FD2-128=0,FD2-256=1,FD2-256D=2,FD1-128=3)1 2
[WRITE]
(Do not use the FD2-128 type since it requires special formatting.)
4. If the floppy disk’s formatting data (index data) is destroyed, the error “330 floppy disk
read/write ERROR” occurs and initialization is not possible.
(Possible reasons for this error include exposure of the disk to magnetism, damage
to the floppy disk, and use of the disk in a device with different formatting.)
If this happens, use the ;F option code and input the following to initialize the disk:
formatting (Y/N)l Y [WRITE]
(Note that floppy disks are consumables and that an age-related defect in the floppy
disk itself will mean that it cannot be initialized.)
Once a disk has been formatted, it cannot be guaranteed that it can be read and
written to at any floppy disk drive unit other than the one at which it was formatted; do
not use the disk in other disk drives unnecessarily.
9-3-2. Deleting Specified Files
The following procedure is used to delete files stored in a floppy disk by specifying their file names.
(1) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.
(2) Press function key [F8] ([EXTEND]). =EX
(3) Press function key [F3] (DELETE). =XDEL
(4) DEL FD0:ABC.MIN [WRITE]
FD0:ABC.MIN deleted
This deletes the file ABC.MIN that was stored in the disk.
 -X.

3754-E P-237-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

9-3-3. Renaming Files

The following procedure is used to change the names of files.

(1) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

(2) Press function key [F8] ([EXTEND]). =EX

(3) Press function key [F4] (RENAME). =XR

(4) R FDO:ABC.MIN,DEF.MIN [WRITE]

This changes the name of the file ABC.MIN stored in the disk to DEF.MIN. The data contained in the file
remains completely unchanged.
9-3-4. Floppy Disk Directory
The following procedure is used to display or print out a list of file names of all the files in the floppy disk.

(1) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

(2) Press function key [F2] (DIR). =DI

(3) =DI FD0:,CN0: [WRITE]

- If no output device name is specified, “PN:” (display screen in the operation panel) is
automatically selected.
When the command above is executed, a list of the files in the floppy disk is printed out at the printer
connected to channel 0 of the NC unit (the printer is an option).
The following option can be used:
;P Specifies display of the file protection status.

9-3-5. Free Area in Floppy Disk

The following procedure is used to check the size of the free area in a floppy disk.

(1) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

(2) Press function key [F5] (FREE). =FR

(3) =FR FD0:,CN0: [WRITE]

If no output device name is specified, “PN:” (display screen in the operation panel) is automatically
selected and the free area size is displayed on the operation panel display screen.
When the command above is executed, the free area size of the floppy disk is printed out at a printer (the
printer is an option).
The following option can be used:
;C Specifies a search for contiguous free area.
=FR FD0:,CN0: £ [WRITE]
 3754-E P-238-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

9-3-6. List of the Specified File

The following procedure is used to display the list of the specified file on the operation panel display screen,
or print out the list at a printer.
(1) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

(2) Press function key [F6] (LIST). =XL

(3) L FDO:ABC.MIN,PN: [WRITE]

- If no output device name is specified, “PN:" (display screen in the operation panel) is
automatically selected and the list of the specified file is displayed on the operation
panel display screen.
When the command above is executed, the list of the specified file is printed out at a printer (the printer is
an option).
9-3-7. Reading from a Tape Reader
The following procedure is used to read a part program on paper tape from a tape reader into a floppy disk.
(1) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

(2) Set the part program tape in the tape reader.

(3) Press function key [F3] (PIP) to enable peripheral I/O operations. =PIP
>
(4) Press function key [F1] (READ). >XR

(5) R,FDO:ABC.MIN [WRITE]

When this command is executed, the part program on paper tape is read from the tape reader into the
floppy disk with the file name ABC.MIN appended to it.
The following options can be used:
Option Code Meaning
E Designates the EIA code.
I Designates the ISO code.
V Designates verification.
A Appended to the specified file.

C
error and reading continues. _
If a reading error occurs, “I" is used to mark the location of the
 -L.

3754-E P-239-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

9-3-8. Punching Out the Specified File

The following procedure is used to punch out the data of the specified file onto paper tape.
(1) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.
(2) Press function key [F3J (PIP) to enable peripheral I/O operations. =PIP
>
(3) Press function key [F2] (PUNCH). >XP
(4) P FDO:ABC.MIN,PP: [WRITE]

- If no output device name is specified, the data is output to the default device specified in
the parameters.
When the command above is executed, the entire contents of the file ABC.MIN are punched out at the
tape punch (the tape punch is an option).
The following options can be used:
Option Code Meaning
;E Designates the EIA code.
;l Designates the ISO code.
9-3-9. Verifying Programs Punched to Paper Tape
The following procedure is used to check that a part program punched to paper tape matches a part program
in a floppy disk.
(1) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.
(2) Set the part program tape in the tape reader.
(3) Press function key [F3] (PIP) to enable peripheral I/O operations. =PIP
>
(4) Press function key [F3] (VERIFY). >XV
(5) V,FDO:ABC.MIN [WRITE]
When the command above is executed, it is checked that the program data punched on paper tape
matches the program data stored in the floppy disk under the file name ABC.MIN.
The tape reader device name (TR:) can be omitted.
Verification ends with the following display on the display screen:
end of tape
end of file
all same data
If there is a data mismatch, the location in the data at which the mismatch has been detected is
displayed blinking and verification is temporarily stopped.
The following options can be used:
Option Code Meaning
;E Designates the EIA code.
;I Designates the ISO code.
 3754-E P-240-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

9-3-10. Saving Program Stored in Memory to Floppy Disk

The following procedure is used to save the program of the specified file to a floppy disk.

(1) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

(2) Press function key [F3] (PIP) to enable peripheral I/O operations. =PIP
>
(3) Press function key [F4] (COPY). >XCO
(4) CO ABC.MIN.FDO: [WRITE]
This transfers the data of the file ABC.MIN stored in the memory to the floppy disk under the same file
name.
The following options can be used:
Option Code Meaning
E Designates the EIA code.
I Designates the ISO code.
A Appended to the specified file.
V Specifies output of a Y/N message to request confirmation.

9-3-11. Transferring Programs from Floppy Disk to Memory

The following procedure is used to transfer the program of the specified file saved in a floppy disk to the
memory.

(1) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

(2) Press function key [F3] (PIP) to enable peripheral I/O operations. =PIP
>
(3) Press function key [F4] (COPY). >xco
(4) CO FD0:ABC.MIN.[WRITE]
This transfers the data of the file ABC.MIN saved in the floppy disk to the memory under the same file
name.
The following options can be used:
Option Code Meaning
E Designates the EIA code.
I Designates the ISO code.
A Appended to the specified file.
V Specifies output of a Y/N message to request confirmation.
 JL

3754-E P-241-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

9-3-12. Protecting Floppy Disk Files

The following procedure is used to prohibit overwriting, modification and deletion of floppy disk files, or to
cancel this prohibition.

(1) Press the EDIT/AUX key to select the PROG OPERATION mode.

(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) twice.

(3) Press function key [F5] (PROTECT).

(4) PROT FD0:A.MIN [WRITE]

“77A.MIN protected” will be displayed, indicating that file A.MIN in the floppy disk is now protected.
Thereafter, the message “77A.MIN write protected??" will be displayed and the attempted operation
prohibited in the following cases:

a) When the output file name specified for an [F1] (READ) operation is FD0:A.MIN

b) When the output file name specified for an [F4] (COPY) operation is FD0:A.MIN.
c) When the output file name specified for an [F4] (EDIT) operation is FD0:A.MIN.

d) When the output file name specified for an [F3] (DELETE) operation is FD0:A.MIN.

e) When the output file name specified for an [F4] (RENAME) operation is FD0:A.MIN.
The following options can be used:
Option Code Meaning
;C Cancels protection of the specified file.
;V Specifies output of a Y/N message to request confirmation.
 .1.

3754-E P-242-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10. DIRECTORY-SELECTION-BASED FILE OPERATION FUNCTION

Operations such as writing files (part programs, etc.) to the NC and outputting files from the NC to floppy
disks are collectively called “file processing”. In order to execute a file processing operation, a command that
describes the details of the intended processing must be created and the createdcommand must be given to
the NC.

10-1. File Processing

10-1-1. Procedure for Executing File Processing

(1) Calling Up the Command Creation Screen

Press one of the file processing function keys - for example COPY or READ - to display the command
creation screen.
(2) Creating the Command
Create and edit the command on the command creation screen. Since the first part of the command
(which specifies the command function) is entered automatically, the user has only to input the file
name(s) and option codes.

(3) Executing the Command

With the command creation screen still displayed, press the WRITE key.
The created command is given to the NC and executed.
Any screen _

V l MO PlTT vTTlTÿ i«, i TlTT

Command creation screen 1 ll WWITT"

INDEX M»IAV mea HOC O'** mew

tra) -> an:*.** Ml ~> 101S*.MIN
IFJ1 -> fnl -> *O:MII«
TO OIOPUT one* iNooa.vnp PWMINO (FI). TO M0*AV OTO MOEKS.tfTO flCMINB (FlJ.

-- --
IJPVT me (XVICS MNE MO FILE WOE. TO mu [NNIIEJ CET. INPUT TX£ DEVICE NMC MO fill MH.1W "C»
Otnuj DEVICE mm «: DVWLT orvia me *i:
OEFMJLT FILE MIC MIN QEFMJLT FILE RMC •.KIN

i (2)
i
Fig. 2-50 Procedure for Executing File Processing
 3754-E P-243-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-1-2. Method for Creating Commands

(1) To delete the File “PROGRAM.MIN”:

The procedure used for deleting the file by directly entering the file name

a) Press function key [F3] (DELETE) in the PROG OPERATION mode.

The command creation screen will be displayed.
“DEL”, which indicates the DELETE function, will automatically appear on the command line.
DEL

b) Key in the file name “PROGRAM.MIN”.

DEL PROGRAM.MINH
c) The command is now completed; press the WRITE key.
The created command “DEL PROGRAM.MIN” will be given to the NC and the file
“PROGRAM.MIN" will be deleted.

(2) Copying the file "PROGRAM.MIN” from a Floppy Disk to the NC Memory under the file name
“S01.MIN”:
The procedure used for copying the file by selecting the file name from the directory

a) Press function key [F4] (COPY) in the PROG OPERATION mode.

The command creation screen will be displayed.
“CO”, which indicates the COPY function, will automatically appear on the command line.
co m
b) Enter the device name “FDO:” and the file name “PROGRAM.MIN”.
Do this either by keying in “FDO:” and “PROGRAM.MIN” or by displaying the directory for device
“FDO:" and selecting the file name “PROGRAM.MIN” from it.
For details on selecting files from directories, see 10-4, “Selecting Files From Directories (OSP
Format) or 10-5, “Selecting Files From Directories (MS-DOS Format)”.
CO FDO:PROGRAM.MIN ®

c) Key in the rest of the command “, S01.MIN”.

CO FD0:PROGRAM.MIN,S01.MIN §1

d) The command is now completed; press the WRITE key to execute it.
The created command, “CO FD0:PROGRAM.MIN,S01.MIN” will be given to the NC and file
“PROGRAM.MIN” in the floppy disk will be copied to the memory under the file name “S01.MIN”.
 3754-E P-244-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Copying the file “S01.MIN” in the NC Memory to a Floppy Disk under the file name
“PROGRAM.MIN”:
The procedure used for copying the file by selecting the file name from the directory

a) Press function key [F4] (COPY) in the PROG OPERATION mode.

The command creation screen will be displayed. “CO", which indicates the COPY function, will
automatically appear on the command line.
co m
b) Key in the file name “S01.MIN" and a comma “,”.

c) Enter the device name “FDO:” and the file name “PROGRAM.MIN”.
Do this either by keying in “FDO:" and “PROGRAM.MIN” or by displaying the directory for device
“FDO:” and selecting the file name “PROGRAM.MIN” from it.
For details on selecting files from directories, see 10-4, “Selecting Files From Directories (OSP
Format) or 10-5, “Selecting Files From Directories (MS-DOS Format)”.
CO S01.MIN,FDO:PROGRAM.MIN iH

d) The command is now completed: press the WRITE key to execute it.
The created command, “CO S01.MIN,FD0:PROGRAM.MIN” will be given to the NC and file
“S01.MIN" will be copied to the floppy disk under the file name “PROGRAM.MIN”.

(4) If Input Error is Found:

If an error is found in the created command, move the edit pointer to the location of the error and correct
the character.

a) Assume that the following erroneous command has been keyed in instead of “CO
PROGRAM.MIN,S01.MIN” due to a typing error:
CO PROGSAM.MIN,S01.MIN§1
b) Using the cursor keys, move the edit pointer # to the character to be corrected, “S".
CO PROGSAM.MIN,S01.MINH

c) Key in “R”.
For details on editing commands, see 15-2, “Creating and Editing Commands”.
CO PROGRHM.MIN,S01.MINH

d) The command has now been corrected; press the WRITE key to execute it.
 3754-E P-245-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) Executing a Command Similar to the Command Previously Executed:

When executing the command “CO PROGRAM.MIN,FD0:S02.MIN" after the execution of the similar
command “CO PROGRAM.MIN,FD0:S01.MIN”, the new command can be created following the
procedure indicated below using the previously executed command.
Create the required command by editing the previous command.

a) Press function key [F4] (COPY) in the PROG OPERATION mode.

The command creation screen will be displayed.
“CO”, which indicates the COPY function, will automatically appear on the command line.
CO U

b) Key in the file name “PROGRAM.MIN” and a comma

CO PROGRAM.MIN,H

c) Enter the device name “FDO:” and the file name “S01.MIN”.
Do this either by keying in “FDO:” and “S01.MIN” or by displaying the directory for device “FDO:” and
selecting the file name “S01.MIN” from it.
For details on selecting files from directories, see 10-4, “Selecting Files From Directories (OSP
Format) or 10-5, “Selecting Files From Directories (MS-DOS Format)”.
CO PROGRAM.MIN,FD0:S01.MINH
d) The command is now completed: press the WRITE key to execute it.
The created command, “CO PROGRAM.MIN,FD0:S01.MIN” will be given to the NC and file
“PROGRAM.MIN” will be copied to the floppy disk under the file name “S01.MIN”.
e) Press function key [F4] (COPY) in the PROG OPERATION mode once more.
CO n
f) Read the previous command.
For details on how to do this, refer to 10-3, “Use of the Previous Command”.
CO PROGRAM.MIN,FD0:S01.MINH

g) Using the cursor keys, move the edit pointer “g to the character to be changed, “1”.
CO PROGRAM.MIN,FDO:SO||MIN HI
h) Key in “2”.
CO PROGRAM.MIN,FD0:SQ8iLMINH

i) The command is now completed; press the WRITE key to execute it.
The created command, “CO PROGRAM.MIN,FD0:S02.MIN” will be given to the NC and file
“PROGRAM.MIN” will be copied to the floppy disk under the file name “S02.MIN”.
 £

3754-E P-246-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-1-3. Command Execution

(1) To Execute a Command
To execute the command that is currently displayed in lines 4 to 7 of the command creation screen,
press the WRITE key. The screen will revert to its original condition and the command will be executed.
The created command will be saved as the “command history”.

(2) To Abort Execution of a Command

To abort execution of the command currently displayed in lines 4 to 7 of the command creation screen,
press [F7] (CANCEL). The screen will revert to its original condition and the command will not be
executed.
The created command will not be saved as the “command history”.
Command creation screen

?mwi.uiN,R4:g

i«x DISPLAY menu*

—
W) -> an:*.«IN
(F3) > TO:* Ml*
TO DISPLAY (JTHW INDEXES, AFTER FfCUING I
INPVT TOE DEVICE MMC AM) FILE NAME.THEN mtS [WITEJ KEY.
DffAULT DEVICE NAME » WK
DEFAULT FILE NAME • *.MI*

Original screen

% Command Is executed

T»*srm

f
Command Is not executed

V HEAD I PUNCH I Z, I
Fig. 2-51 Command Creation Screen
 .X

3754-E P-247-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-1-4. Operation Transition

Use the file processing function keys (copy, delete, etc.)

f AUTO Operation
f Program Operation
MacMan

>ÿ

INDEX Displays ISO" at the console line.

EII Following the ISO character string, enter the
device name then press the WRITE key.
-ÿ Command Creation
Screen
I F 2 l MD1: INDEX Displays MD1: Directories.
[TT1 FDO: INDEX Displays FDO: directions.
| F 4 l COMMAND HISTORY . . Displays the command log.
ITT] OVERWR/INSERT Switches the oommand editing mode.
[771 CHART DELETE .. Deletes the character Indicated by the edit pointer.
|FT) CANCEL
{ | WRITE ~|
'
Cancels the created command.
Executes the created command.

When the device is OSP formatted:

|T~6~1 RETURN For device name selection only.
Directory Selection [77] CANCEL Cancels the selection.
Screen For selection of device name and file name indicated by cursor.
I WRITE ~1
I CAN | Same as [F7] (CANCEL).
When the device Is MS-DOS formatted:
(F 6| RETURN For selection of device name and current directory only.
[771 CANCEL Cancels the selection.
| WRITE | If cursor is at the device name, a directory change occures.
If cursor Is at the file name, selection of the device name,
current directory name, or file name occurs.

1 CAN Same as [F7] (CANCEL).

[771 CANCEL Cancels the selection.

[ WRITE 1 Selects the command Indicated by the cursor.
Command History I CAN Same as [F7] (CANCEL).
Screen
 3754-E P-248-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-2. Creating and Editing Commands

10-2-1. Command Creation Screen
Lines 4 to 7 :The command is created and edited here.
Characters keyed in are entered at the position of the edit pointer. When a character is
entered, the edit pointer moves to the next character space.
The downward-pointing arrow “J” indicates the end of the command. Up to 255
characters can be entered.
The character string being entered to create a command can be modified by moving the
edit pointer with the cursor keys.
When the WRITE key is pressed the currently displayed command is executed
regardless of the position of the edit pointer.
Lines 9 to 15 : The procedure for displaying directories is shown below.
To display a directory, press one of the following function keys:
[F1] (INDEX), [F2] (MD1: INDEX), [F3] (FDO: INDEX)
[F2]
-MD1: *.MIN
If the [F2] (MD1: INDEX) key is pressed, the directory of MD1 related files
(machining programs) with an extend name of “MIN” will be displayed.
[F3]
-FDO: *.MIN
If the [F3] (FDO: INDEX) key is pressed, the directory of the “FDO” floppy disk
files (machining programs) with an extend name of “MIN” will be displayed.

Command created
\ EDIT POINTER \
and edited here EDIT MODE

INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE

[F2] -> MD1 :*.MIN
[F3] -> FD0:*.IIIN
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES, AFTER PRESSING [Ft],
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME, THEN PRESS [WRITE] KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME = MD1:
DEFAULT FILE NAME = \UIN

1
I MDi: I FDO; I COMMAND lOVERNR/ I CHAR I
\IN0EX I I
INDEX INDEX I HISTORY I INSERT I DELETE I CANCEL

Fig. 2-52 Command Creation Screen

 3754-E P-249-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-2-2. Operation of the Edit Pointer

(1) Moving the Edit Pointer to the Right

The edit pointer will move one space to the right every time the right cursor key is pressed.
When the edit pointer is at the right end of a line, pressing the right cursor key will cause it to move to the
left end of the next line, unless it is on the final (7th) line, in which case it will not move.

(2) Moving the Edit Pointer to the Left

The edit pointer will move one space to the left every time the left cursor key is pressed.
When the edit pointer is at the left end of a line, pressing the left cursor key will cause it to move to the
right end of the next line, unless it is on the uppermost (4th) line, in which case it will not move.

(3) Moving the Edit Pointer Downward

The edit pointer will move one line downward every time the “down” cursor key is pressed, unless it is on
the final (7th) line, in which case it will not move.

(4) Moving the Edit Pointer Upward

The edit pointer will move one line upward every time the “up” cursor key is pressed, unless it is on the
uppermost (4th) line, in which case it will not move.

CO FDO:PfiOCRSM.UIN,FDl: J
\ EDIT POINTER

4*

CO FDO:PflOGnA[&.MIN.F01: l

#.
CO F00:Pfi0GRAH.MIN,FO1: 1

Fig. 2-53 Operation of Edit Pointer

 JL

3754-E P-250-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-2-3. Editing Modes

Lines 4 to 7 of the command creation screen have two editing modes (overwrite and insert).
Immediately after displaying the command creation screen, the overwrite mode will be effective.

(1) Overwrite Mode

The overwrite mode is used to fix the command displayed in lines 4 to 7 of the command creation screen
in order to overwrite a character or characters in the command.
In the example shown below, “1” is entered at the position of the edit pointer and the edit pointer moves
to the position of the next character Note that in this case none of the characters has moved.
OVERWRITE MODE
/
CO FDfPflOGfUU.IIINl
\ EDIT POINTER

|PROGRAM. MIN 1
CO FDI

Fig. 2-54 Editing Modes (Overwrite Mode)

(2) Insert Mode

The insert mode is used to insert additional characters into the command displayed in lines 4 to 7 of the
command creation screen; the characters already entered move to accommodate each new character
entered from the keyboard.
In the example shown below, the character string to the right of the edit pointer - “AM.MIN” - moves to
the right to accommodate the character “R” as it is inserted at the left of the edit pointer.
INSERT MODE
/
CO FDO:PTOGgM.MIN 1
\ EDIT POINTER

CO FDO:PROGRBU.IIINi

Fig. 2-55 Editing Modes (Insert Mode)

 3754-E P-251-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Switching between Editing Modes

To change the editing mode, press function key [F5] (OVERWR/INSERT). If the overwrite mode is
currently effective the insert mode will become effective, and if the insert mode is currently effective the
overwrite mode will become effective.
The current mode is displayed at the command creation screen at the right end of the 3rd line.

( 1
j®T /
OVERWRITE MODE : INSERT MODE
/

[FJ]
[F3J
-> Km*.MIN
-> no:*.MIN
TO 01SPLAY OTHER INOCXES. AFTER PRESSING [FI],
Hii'SKE!
TO 01SPLAY OTO INOEKS..AFTER CFIJ.
INPUT TX DEVICE NAME HO FILE KAMI. MM PRESS [MITE] KEY. N PRESS [WRITE] KEY.

--
INPUT THE XVICE NAME AND) FILE
OEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME
»I :
*.MIN
-
DEFAULT FILE NAME *.MIM

s
I “lOExl I SirSS I ICp£gTE 1 CANCEL I j V IHEX 1 “jlcCX 1 I HISTcS IÿISST 1 <QaETf 1 CAMCEtT

Fig. 2-56 Switching between Editing Modes

10-2-4. Deleting Characters

(1) Function Key [F6] (CHAR DELETE)

Use of this key deletes a single character at the position of the edit pointer, whereupon the character
string to the right of the deleted character shifts one place to the left to close the space. The edit pointer
remains at the same position.
In the example shown below, the character “A” located by the edit pointer is deleted and the character
string “PROGRAM.MIN” to the right of the edit pointer moves one place to the left to close the space.

CO FOOg:PROGRAM. KIN i
\ EDIT POINTER
F6 (CHAR DELETE)

CO FOO|PROGRAM.MINl

Fig. 2-57 Deleting Characters (Function Key [F6])

 3754-E P-252-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) BS Key (Backspace Key)

Use of this key deletes a single character to the left of the edit pointer and causes the character string
that starts at the position of the edit pointer to move one place to the left to close the space.
In the example shown below the character “A” to the left of the edit pointer is deleted and the character
string “:PROGRAM.MIN” that starts at the position of the edit pointer shifts one place to the left.

CO FDO*BPflOGRMI.MINi
\ EDIT POINTER

BS

CO R)0|PROGRAM. UIN I

Fig. 2-58 Deleting Characters (BS Key)

10-2-5. Notes on Creating and Editing Commands

(1) Maximum Command Length
The downward-pointing arrow symbol T signifies the end of the command and the maximum
command length of 255 characters is reached when this symbol is at the right end of the seventh line.
When the “insert” editing mode is effective, it is not possible to key in a character at any position when
this limit has been reached.
 3754-E P-253-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Automatic Space Insertion

When a character is keyed in while the edit pointer is located to the right of the downward-pointing arrow
spaces are automatically inserted up to the position where that character is keyed in.
When the BS key is pressed while the edit pointer is located to the right of the downward-pointing arrow
“1", the edit pointer moves to the position of the downward-pointing arrow.

CO FDOrPflOGRAM.MIN, 1
''EDIT POINTER

CO FOO:PflOGRMI.MIN.
AO

BS
BS

CO FDO:PfnGRMI.MIN.

CO FOO:PnOGRAM.MIN.|J

Fig. 2-59 Automatic Space Insertion

 :.X.

3754-E P-254-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-3. Use of the Command History

The last 5 commands which have been used are stored as the “command log”. Previously created
commands can therefore by used again by selecting them from the command log. They can also be revised
before they are used.

(1) At the command creation screen, press function key [F4] (COMMAND HISTORY) to switch to the
command history screen.
(2) Use the cursor control keys to move the cursor to the desired command.

(3) Press the WRITE key.

The system will return to the Command Selection screen, and the selected command will be read into
lines 4 to 7. To execute the command as it is, press the WRITE key.
If reading to the command selection screen is not required, press the [F7] (CANCEL) key at the
sommand history screen. The system will return to the command selection screen without reading the
selected command.

rwoflMM iPRpomt OPEWATT

SfeÿFliSSBSBEiiil
EDIT POINTER POINTER
INDEX DISPLAY PROCHARE INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE
(F2J
[Si
TO DISPLAY 0T>«R INDEXES, AFTER PRESSING ItFU. TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES, AFTW PRESSING inI.
»
--
INPUT THE IDEVICE NAME AM) FILE NAME. THEN PRESS (MUTE] KEY. INPUT K DEVICE NAME AMO FILE NAME. THENI PRESS IWITEJ KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE MAC 101:
DEFAULT FILE NAME *.M!N
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME
-- MDl:

I» IOi: [ no: f COMMANO |OV0NNV

I(CSX I INOEX HISTORY « --
HISTORY
*
0001p]0000
1
w OVBMRITf i
w
:PROWAM.MIN.R)1:

_
GO FDOlTfy.MIN, PROGRAM.NIN
PS IOI:W08¥M.MIN,00001, IDI5PR0GRAM.SUBJSA XURSOR PS IOi:PROGRAILNIN.OOOOI.M)i:PROOmSUB:SA
CO PO0:Wll£l2aOMMFIU001.DIPRFtLE-O3.OIN«ESSAGEl m
PROT IDirTEST.MtNTC
CO RJO:WrILE120.0IRVFlLl001.0MNflLE-W.OIRVMESSAOE.TTtT
[PROT IOI.‘TEST.MIMIC ''CURSOR

(2)
)
Fig. 2-60 Use of the Command History
 3754-E P-255-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-4. Selecting Files From Directories (OSP Format)

10-4-1. Procedure for Selecting Files from Directories

(1) At the Command Creation screen, press one of the following function keys:
[F1] (INDEX), [F2] (MD1: INDEX), [F3] (FD0:INDEX)
If function key [F1] (INDEX) is pressed, “ISO” will be displayed at the console line. Following the “ISO”
character string, enter the desired device name and file name, then press the WRITE key.

(2) At the directory selection screen, use the cursor keys to locate the cursor at the file name of the file
to be selected.

(3) Press the WRITE key.

The display will return to the command creation screen andthe device name and file name selected with
the cursor are entered at the position of the edit pointer.

Command creation screen Command creation screen

Iraoowt TRANSFER

*
:poor.MINI

EDIT POINTER ' 'EDIT POINTER

INTO DISMAY mWDU* INOEX DISPLAY FWCQXPE
[P2J -> MD1:*.MIN
ES =>!£:::
TO Ol»LAY OTHER INDEXES. iAFTER PRESSING I[Fll.
(F3] -> «:•MIN
70 OISPUY OTHER IMCEM3.AFTW PRESSING ![FlJ.

--
INPUT TTC DEVICE NAME AWI FILE NAME. WEN PRESS WRITE] KEY. INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AW FILE NAME. THENI PRESS [WtTE] KEY.

.T FILE NAME--
DEFAULT OEVICE NAIE ID OEFWLT DEVICE NAME mi:
DEFAULT FILE NAME *.MIN

I "«» I 'WGB 1 e'lewiS I ’"SStr I <MLntT amXL V HOK

Directory selection screen

IPHXHAM

if
fflfUMraL CURSOR
/
£:
wet. m«
MCB.HI*
S'! ««.»!«

MM. £
POlfi.WIN
POU.MIN

Fig. 2-61 Selecting a File from Directory

 L.

3754-E P-256-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-4-2. Directory Selection Screen

If the selected device is OSP format, the directory selection screen will take the form shown below.
For its appearance when the selected device is MS-DOS format, refer to 10-5, “Selecting Files from
Directories (MS-DOS Format)”.
Lines 4 to 7 : The command being created is displayed here.
The selected file name is entered at the position of the edit pointer. The edit pointer cannot
be moved by pressing the cursor keys.
Line 9 The device name for the displayed directory is displayed here.
Lines 12 to 20 : The directory is displayed here.
Move the cursor to the file name to be selected by using the cursor keys.
If no file name is displayed, it means that the selected device does not contain files.
Up to 18 file names are displayed on each screen. If there are more than 18 registered
files in a directory, the page up/down keys can be used to display other pages.

(\
The command being COB
created is displayed \ EDIT POINTER
here.
The device name of FDO:
CURSOR
directory is
displayed here. r P002.MIN
P003.UIN P004.MIN
P005.UIN P006.MIN
The directory is P007.MIN P008.UIN
P009.MIN P010.MIN
displayed here. P011.MIN P012.MIN
P013.MIN P014.MIN
P015.MIN P016.MIN
P017.MIN P018.MIN

RETURN I CANCEL

Fig. 2-62 Directory Selection Screen

10-4-3. Cursor and Page Operations

(1) Moving the Cursor to the Right

Each time the “right” cursor key is pressed, the cursor moves to the file name which is adjacent and to
the right, or below and to the left, with respect to the current cursor position. If the cursor is located at the
final file name in the directory, it moves to the first file name in the directory.

(2) Moving the Cursor to the Left

Each time the “left” cursor key is pressed, the cursor moves to the file name which is adjacent and to the
left, or above and to the right, with respect to the current cursor position. If the cursor is located at the
first file name in the directory, it moves to the final file name in the directory.
 3754-E P-257-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Moving the Cursor Downward

Each time the “down" cursor key is pressed, the cursor moves to the file name directly below the current
position. If the cursor is located at the final file name in the directory, it moves to the first file name in the
directory.

(4) Moving the Cursor Upward

Each time the “up” cursor key is pressed, the cursor moves to the file name directly above the current
position. If the cursor is located at the first file name in the directory, it moves to the final file name in the
directory.

(5) Changing Pages

Up to 18 file names cam be displayed on the directory selection screen. If there are more than 18 files
registered in the directory, other pages can be displayed by pressing the page up/down keys.

CURSOR CURSOR

P007.MMI ss:
PQ23.VIN
POTS.MlIt
POT7.MIN
3»
SI
POOMW POT9.M1N
P011.M1N
POO.MIN
I
1 I I I DJ I I I I CTJ
l )
Fig. 2-63 Cursor and Page Operations
 3754-E P-258-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-4-4. Function Keys [F6] (RETURN), [F7] (CANCEL) and Cancel Key
When function key [F6] (RETURN) key is pressed, the commandcreation screen is displayed andthe device
name only is entered at the position of the edit pointer. The file name that was at the cursor position is not
entered.
When function key [F7] (CANCEL) or the Cancel key is pressed, the command creation screen is displayed
and neither the device name nor the file name at the cursor position are entered on it.

Directory selection screen Command creation screen

I aatitam QPCNATiai" I PROGRAM OPERATION msez
on COPY
co PROCRAM.MI*.§ CO PROGRAM. MIN.g
\ EDIT POINTER
<w ret i ON PAGE
INDEX DISPUY PROCEDURE
[F2J NOI:\MIN
[F3] -> FD0:*.IIIN
POOL MIN PC02.MIN TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES. AFTO PRESSING (FI).
P001MIN P004.MIN INfVT THE DEVICE MJC MO FILE NAME, THEN PRESS (WITH) RET.

--
P005.MIN P008.MIN CURSOR
POOC.MIN
DEFAULT OEVICE WANE tOl:
P007.MIN
TOM. NIN PQlO.MIN / 0EFA1A.T FILE NAME #.MIN
POT I.MIN
P0I1MIN P014.MIN
P0I9.MIN MIC. MIN
PQ17.MIN POTC.HIN

I CANCEL 1 IDl: I FDO: ] COMMMO loVBWV | OUR

» HISTORY I
T
RETW V INDEX I INDEX I INDEX INSERT I DELETE I CANCEL

F7 OR
s )
ImOCRAM OPERATION

mmviT.
COPROOAAM.MIN.TO:B
\ EDIT POINTER
INOEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE
[F2] -> iot:•.MIN
[F3J -> FDO:•MIN
F

*
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES. AFTB* PRESSING (Fl).

--
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME. THEN PRESS (WRITE) KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME lOK
DEFAULT FILE NAME *.MIN

T1 an [ FDO: I COMMMO |oVEJWV I OMR |

INDEX I INOEX 1 HISTORY < INSERT I DELETE CANCEL
\IWEX_

momiM.ygmica _ TRANSFER
~
.. ...... M
CO PROGRAM. MIN. Fo6:POl 2. MINfl
\ EDIT POINTER
INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE
[F21 -> »l:*.MIN
IF3) -> POO:-. MIN
Runs TO OISPLAY OTHOt INDEXES. ArTER PRESSING [Fl).
INPUT THE DEVICE NAME MO FILE NAME. THEN PRESS [WITc] KEY.
DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
DEFAULT FILE NAME
--
IOC
*.MtN

IWEX I
I ioi: 1 FDO: fooiiiwo I ovgwv [ owt I T
INDEX I HOP I HISTORY I INSERT » DELETE I CANCEL >
V

Fig. 2-64 Function Keys [F6] (RETURN), [F7] (CANCEL) and Cancel Key
 3754-E P-259-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-4-5. Effects of the Editing Modes

(1) Overwrite Mode

In the overwrite mode, the positions of characters in the character string are fixed and the file name
selected from the directory is written over the part of the character string that starts at the position of the
edit pointer.

(2) Insert Mode

In the insert mode, the part of the character string that starts at the position of the edit cursor shifts to the
right as the file name selected from the directory is inserted to the left of the edit pointer.
If the command length is caused to exceed 255 characters by adding the file name, the 256th and
subsequent characters are deleted.

Directory selection screen Command creation screen

'SWÿi —
V EDIT POINTER
CO FWWIZ.MIN

' 'EDIT POINTER OVERWRITE MODE

INOG OISPUY PROCBMt

CF21 ->
[FJ] -> TO:*.MIN
POOI.NIN P002.NIN SPUY OTHER INDEXES, AFTER PRESSING [FI].
;

--
P003.MIN P004.MIN THE DEVICE HA* A» FILE WNE.THEH PRESS [WITE] KEY.
PCM.MIN
POM. MIN
POM. KIN
CURSOR DEFAULT!DEVICE NAME (OK
P007.MIN
PQQ9.MIN PQ1Q.MIN / DEFAULT FILE NAME ».MIA
P0I1.MIN

Ei
V INOEX hUÿJsalOVEWP/ II INSERT
CHAR
OELETE I

l J
Directory selection screen Command creation screen

\Mmvaxn lPfjOgy\N TRAIBffR

.MINf»ROMAM.Miirr
' 'EDIT POINTER INSERT MODE
POINTER
INOG OISPUY PROCEDURE
(F2J -> MDt:*.MIN
[F3] -> FDO:* MIN
PCM.MIN

II
TO DISPUY INDEXES. AFTER PRESSING [FI].
P004.MIN INPtH THE DEVICE NAIE AM) FILE NAME, THEN PRESS [«ITE] KEY.
POOS.MIN CURSOR XFMJLTOEVI
POM.MIN /
0. MIN / T FILE

II ill
i )
Fig. 2-65 Effects of the Editing Modes
 ...L:

3754-E P-260-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-4-6. Method for Displaying Directories

(1) NC Memory’s “md1 Directory Display:

Press function key [F2] (MD1: INDEX).
The directory content can be specified by using the following input procedure.

[F2]->MD1:*.MIN
When function key [F2] (MD1: INDEX) is pressed, the directory of all NC memory “MDI:” files
having extend names of “MIN” (machining program) will be displayed.

[F2j->MD1:*.SDF
When function key [F2] (MD1: INDEX) is pressed, the directory of all NC memory “MD1:” files
having extend names of “SDP (schedule program) will be displayed.

[F2]->MD1:*.*
When function key [F2] (MD1: INDEX) is pressed, the directory of all NC memory “MD1 files will
be displayed.

(2) “FDO:” Directory Display

Press function key [F3] (FDO: INDEX).
The directory content can be specified by using the following input procedure.
[F3] -> FD0:*.MIN
When function key [F3] (FDO: INDEX) is pressed, the directory of all “FDO:” floppy disk files having
extend names of “MIN" (machining program) will be displayed.

[F3] -> FD0:*.SDF

When function key [F3] (FDO: INDEX) is pressed, the directory of all “FDO:” floppy disk files having
extend names of “SDP (schedule program) will be displayed.

[F3] -> FDO:*.*

When function key [F3] (FDO: INDEX) is pressed, the directory of all “FDO:” floppy disk files will be
displayed.
 3754-E P-261-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Other Directory Displays

When function key [F1] (INDEX) is pressed, “ISO" will be displayed at the console line. Following the
“ISO” character string, enter the desired file name and device name, then press the WRITE key.
The directory display procedures shown below apply when OSP formatted floppy disk is used at the
floppy disk drive unit.

>ISO MD1: [WRITE]

The “MD1 and default file name directory will be displayed.
For details regarding default file names, refer to the “method for displaying directories”.

> ISO FDO: [WRITE]

The “FDO:” and default file name directory will be displayed.

I > ISO FD*: [WRITE]

The message “ERROR IN SPECIFIED DEVICE NAME” will be displayed at the console line and
the system will return to the Directory Selection Screen.
Wildcard symbols such as and “?” cannot be used when designating device names.

I > ISO FDO: *.* [WRITE]

The directory of all “FDO:" floppy disk files is displayed.
The result is the same for the following file name designations:
“.”

> ISO FDO: *.MIN [WRITE]

The directory of all “FDO:" floppy disk files with the extension namesf “MIN” is displayed.

[> ISO FDO: ???.MIN [WRITE]

The directory of all “FDO:” floppy disk files with main file name whose consists of three or fewer
alphanumeric characters and whose extension name is “MIN” is displayed.

> ISO FDO: ABC.* [WRITE]

The directory of all “FDO:” floppy disk files whose main file name is “ABC” is displayed.
The same would happen if the specified file name were “ABC” or “ABC.".
| > ISO FDO: ABC.?? [WRITET
The directory of all “FDO:” floppy disk files whose main file name is “ABC” and whose extension
name consists of no more than two alphanumeric characters is displayed.

I > ISO FDO: MS*.TXT [WRITE]

The directory of all “FDO:” floppy disk files whose main file name starts with “MS” and whose
extension name is “TXT" is displayed.
 X:

3754-E P-262-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

> ISO FDO: MS77.TXT [WRITE]

The directory of all “FDO:” floppy disk files whose main file name starts with “MS” and comprises a
total of no more than 4 alphanumeric characters, and whose extension name is “TXT” is displayed.

> ISO FDO: ABC.MIN [WRITE]

The “FDO:” floppy disk file name of “ABC.MIN” will be displayed if it exists.

>ISO FDO: 123.* [WRITE]

> ISO FDO: ABCDEFG0123456789.* [WRITE]

The message “ERROR IN SPECIFIED FILE NAME.” is displayed.
In the OSP format, main file names must start with a letter of the alphabet andconsist of a total of no
more than 16 alphanumeric characters.

> ISO FDO: *.123 [WRITE]

> ISO FDO: *-ABCD [WRITE]
The message “ERROR IN SPECIFIED FILE NAME.” is displayed.
In the OSP format, extension names must start with a letter of the alphabet and consist of a total of
no more than 3 alphanumeric characters.

> ISO FDO: \ABC\*.* [WRITE]

If a path name is specified although the device to be selected is OSP format, the message “PATH
NAME CANNOT BE SPECIFIED IN THIS DEVICE." will be displayed on the console line.
 £

3754-E P-263-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-5. Selecting Files From Directories (MS-DOS Format)

When working with the MS-DOS format - for example in the machining management mode - it is possible to
display the directories of MS-DOS format floppy disks.

10-5-1. Procedure for Selecting Files from Directories

(1) At the Command Creation Screen, press one of the following function keys: [F1] (INDEX), [F2]
(MD1: INDEX), [F3] (FDO: INDEX).
If function key [F1] (INDEX) is pressed, “ISO” will be displayed at the console line. Following the “ISO”
character string, enter the desired device name, path name, and file name, then press the WRITE key.
(2) At the directory selection screen, use the cursor keys to locate the cursor at the file name of the file
to be selected.

(3) Press the WRITE key.

The display will return to the command creation screen and the device name, current directory name,
and file name selected with the cursor, are entered on it at the position of the edit pointer.

Command creation screen Command creation screen

•EDIT POINTER EDIT POINTER

INDEX DISPLAY PROCEDURE
IF?) -> »!:•.•
IF?) -> TO:*.*
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES, AFTER PfCSSING (FI], TO DISPLAY OTTCR INDEXES.AFTER PRESSING (FI].

--
AM) FILE WME.TWN PTCSS (TRITE] KEY.

--
imn THE DEVICE NAME AND FILE NAME, THEN PRESS (SRITE] KEY. INPUT THE DEVICE NAME
OffAULT DEVICE NAME DEFAULT DEVICE NAME
OffAULT FILE NAME •.* OffAULT FILE NAME

V imp iTUTSJSShglttJ V '«» weir 1 ‘BUTC 1 coca

0llpp]00000 II
1
Directory selection screen

DEVICE FORMAT
''EDIT POINTER /
m ns*
PARENT DINE

J?®
MOI.OMX AOCB.DIRN
A0O3.Din\ AOW.OIRX
AOCB.DIRX POOt.NIN
PODB.MIN HXa.NIN
KM.MIN P006.NIN CURSOR
POCE.MIN P007.NIN
/
POOS. MIN
M

Fig. 2-66 Procedure for Selecting Files from Directories

 I-

3754-E P-264-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-5-2. Directory Selection Screen (for MS-DOS Format Devices)

Lines 4 to 7 The command being created is displayed here.
The selected file name is entered at the position of the edit pointer. The edit pointer
cannot be moved by pressing the cursor keys.
Line 8 If the device is MS-DOS format, “MS-DOS” is displayed here.
Line 9 The device name for the displayed directory, and the current directory name, are
displayed here.
Line 11 Normally, “PARENT DIRECTORY” is displayed here.
To change the directory to the parent directory, locate the cursor at “PARENT
DIRECTORY” and press the [WRITE] key.
Lines 12 to 20 : The directory is displayed here.
File names and directory names are displayed (Y is appended at the end of directory
names).
If no file name is displayed, it means that the selected device does not contain files.
When the cursor is located at a file name and the WRITE key pressed, the selected file
name is entered at the position of the edit pointer.
When the cursor is located at a directory name and the WRITE key pressed, the directory
changes to the selected directory.

The Command being SI DEVICE FORMAT

created is displayed \ EDIT POINTER
here. /
The device name of FDO:\ABC.DIR\
the directory and
the current directory A001.DIR\ A002.DIR\
are displayed here. A003.DIRX
A005.DIR\
\CURSOR A004.DIR\
P001.MIN
P002.MIN P003.MIN
The directory is P004.HIN P005.MIN
displayed here. P006.MIN P007.UIN
P008.MIN P009.MIN
P010.MIN P011.MIN
P012.MIN P013.UIN

RETURN I CANCEL

Fig. 2-67 Directory Selection Screen (for MS-DOS Format Devices)

 3754-E P-265-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-5-3. Changing the Directory

The directory can be changed by locating the cursor at the required directory name and pressing the WRITE
key.
If the cursor is located at “PARENT DIRECTORY” and the WRITE key pressed, the directory changes to the
parent directory.

Iwoom OPBUTION C-flg-ayffT-

| igy flyganiTP

CURRENT DIRECTORY
/. m safer ION MS-OOS PAGE

«K.0I«\ \ K00t.0IR\
4
CURSOR

i.
RPWR I CANCEL

A tfS-OOS COWOT- MS-OOS CCHVStT

ttr-
CURRENT DIRECTORY
:nyY OVEMHIT* ~H
w cmimrg*

CURRENT DIRECTORY
:conr .jygyire

/ RAGE 1
/. (INDEX ggflS MS-DOS PAGE

PARENT DIRECTCW
XOOl.DlNS |AOOI.OIR\ V A002.0IR\
«tt.DIR\ A0O3.DIRN \ AOOA.OIRN
\ A0Q5.0I«\ CURSOR POOI.MIH
CURSOR POM.MIN P003.MIN
P006.MIN
P004.NIN
POOS. MIN P007.MIN
[POOS.MIN
P010.MIN
|PQ1?.MIM _ P009.HIN
pon.MiN
PQ13.MIH

T RETtfW ! CANCEL RETUW 1 CANCEL

l >
Fig. 2-68 Changing the Directory
 3754-E P-266-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-5-4. Function Keys [F6] (RETURN), [F7] (CANCEL) and Cancel Key
When function key [F6] (RETURN) is pressed, the command creation screen is displayed and the device
name only is entered at the position of the edit pointer. The file name that was at the cursor position is not
entered.
When function key [F7] (CANCEL) or the Cancel key is pressed, the command creation screen is displayed
and neither the device name nor the file name at the cursor position are entered on it.

Directory selection screen Command creation screen

-QVWHtTe
CO PROMKIM

EDIT POINTER EDIT POINTER

m NA*.DIR\
INOEX DISPLAY PWCHMt

PARBIT DIRECTORY S3:> as

A001.DIR\ A002.0H\ TO DISPLAY 07>€R INOEXEES. AFTER PRESSING {FIJ.
AOOlOIRN AOX.OH\ INPUT THE DEVICE NAME ,MO FILE MANE. 1>€N PRESS CfRITE] K-Y.
Afl0S.0IR\
Fon.mii
PC04.MM
DEFAULT DEVICE KMC
DEFAULT HIERAIC- •.*
-
P006.MIK
\URSOR
NEW* IWEX I
TIOKINDEX II FDO: I
COWAN) IOVOTW/
l«EX 1 HISTORY I CANCEL

[771 OR S )
[PROGRAM OPgATt

MS-QOS COÿERTER :COPY OVEMRITE

00 PROCPAM.MIN.«:\A0C.DIR SB

EDIT POINTER
INDEX DlfftAY PROCEDURE

9 TO OISPLAY 0TVCR INDEXES.AFTER PRESSING I[FJj.

OEFAULT DEVICE NAME

DEFAULX FILE NAIC *
-
INPUT THE DEVICE MAC ANDD FILE NAME.1XN PRESS [WITf] KEY.

IPROGRAM QpgUTloir MS-3QS CCNVBTr

OVERWRITE
raasStiSk MRXPOOJ.NINB
DIT POINTER

% INOEX DISPLAY PROCSIURE

[F2I
Ml ->
**>
S£
TO DISPLAY OTHER INDEXES.!AFTER PRESSING [FI].
THE DEVICE NAME AMD
DEFAULT
DEFAULT SET--...
MAC. THEN PRESS [WITH] tlY.

l *&, l TS« lass i OVEWfl/

TffiJ CANCEL

Fig. 2-69 Function Key [F6] (RETURN), [F7] (CANCEL) and Cancel Key
 3754-E P-267-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

10-5-5. Method for Displaying Directories

The examples presented below are applicable when an MS-DOS format floppy disk is set in device “FDO:”.
For the details when an OSP format floppy disk is set in device “FDO:”, see 10-4, “Selecting Files From
Directories (OSP Format)”.

(1) When no device name, path name, or file name is specified before pressing the [WRITE] key
(When the [WRITE] key is pressed immediately after pressing function key [F1] (INDEX):

>ISO
Normally, the directory for device “MDI:” is displayed.
However, in the machining management mode, the directory corresponding to the default device
name and default path name specified in the environment settings is displayed.
(2) When a device name is entered before pressing the [WRITE] key
(When the device name and WRITE are entered after pressing the [F1] (INDEX) function key)

>ISO FDO:
If device “FDO:” is MS-DOS format, generally, the directories under its root directory are displayed.
However, in the machining management mode, the directory corresponding to the default device
name specified in the environment settings is displayed.
If device “FDO:” is not MS-DOS format, an error message is displayed on the console line and the
display returns to the directory selection screen.

(3) When a path name is entered before pressing the [WRITE] key
(When the path name and WRITE are entered after pressing the [F1] (INDEX) function key)

>ISO FD0:\ABC\ (Absolute path designation)

If device “FDO:” is MS-DOS format, the directory under path “\ABC\” of device “FDO:” is displayed.
If the path “\ABC\” does not exist in the device, the message “SPECIFIED PATH DOESN’T EXIST.”
is displayed on the console line.
If the device is not MS-DOS format, the message “PATH NAME CANNOT BE SPECIFIED IN THIS
DEVICE.” is displayed on the console line.
>ISO FD0:ABC\ (Relative path designation)
If device “FDO:” is MS-DOS format, generally, the directory under path “\ABC\” of device “FDO:” is
displayed.
However, in the machining management mode, the directory is displayed under the specified path
which is regarded as the subdirectory of the default path name set in the environment settings.

>ISO FD0:\*.*\
The message “ERROR IN SPECIFIED PATH NAME.” is displayed on the console line.
The wild cards and “?” cannot be used in any of the directory names that make up a path name.
 3754-E P-268-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

>ISO FD0:\ABC.1234\
>ISO FD0:\123456789.ABC
The message “ERROR IN SPECIFIED PATH NAME.” is displayed on the console line.
The following restrictions apply to the directory names that make up path names: the main directory
name must comprise no more than eight alphanumeric characters and the extension must
comprise no more than three alphanumeric characters.

(4) When the [WRITE] key is pressed after entering a file name:
(When the file name and WRITE are entered after pressing the [F1] (INDEX) function key)

>ISO FD0:\ABC\*.*
If device “FDO:” is MS-DOS format, a directory of all files in the path AABC\” of device “FDO:” is
displayed.

>ISO FDO:\ABC\*.MIN
If device “FDO:” is MS-DOS format, a directory of all files in path “\ABC\” of device “FDO:” whose
extension name is “MIN” is displayed.

>ISO FDO:\ABC\ABC.*
If device “FDO:” is MS-DOS format, a directory of all files in path “\ABC\” of device “FD0:“ whose
main file name is ”ABC” is displayed.
>ISO FDO:\ABC\MS*.TXT
If device “FDO:” is MS-DOS format, a directory of all files in path “\ABC\” of device “FDO:” whose
main file name starts with “MS” and whose extension name is “TXT is displayed.

>ISO FDO:\ABC\MS??.TXT
If device “FDO:” is MS-DOS format, a directory of all files in path “\ABC\” of device “FDO:” whose
main file name starts with “MS” and comprises no more than four alphanumeric characters, and
whose extension name is “TXT is displayed.

>ISO FD0:\ABC\123456789.ABC
>ISO FD0:\ABC\ABC.1234
The message “ERROR IN SPECIFIED PATH NAME.” is displayed on the console line.
If a path name is specified, the format is taken to be MS-DOS and therefore the main file name must
consist of no more than eight alphanumeric characters and the extension name must consist of no
more than three alphanumeric characters.
(5) When function key is pressed:
(when F3 (FDO: DIR) is pressed)
Directories contained in the route directory for the FDO: device will be displayed. In the “machining
management” mode, this directory display will occur in accordance with the “default path name”
designated by the environment setting.
 3754-E P-269-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11. PANEL DISPLAY SCREEN

11-1. Status Display

NC STATUS
1
RUN S™ UMIT |ALARM|

These lamps indicate the NC operation status.

Lamp Name Function

RUN This lamp lights when NC is computing the axis position.
S.T.M This lamp lights while S (spindle function), T (tool function), and/or M
(miscellaneous function) is being executed. _
SLIDE HOLD This lamp lights when the SLIDE HOLD button on the machine opera¬
tion panel is pressed. _
PROGRAM STOP This lamp lights when the program stop or the optional stop command is
executed, and flickers during dwell operation. _
LIMIT This lamp lights when an axis reaches a soft-limit position.
ALARM This lamp lights when an alarm comes on.
This lamp does not light when a warning message comes from an op¬
eration mistake. _
 3754-E P-270-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-2. Actual Position Display

When function key [F2] (ACTUAL POSIT.) is pressed, the actual position information page is displayed on
the display screen. The actual position data are displayed in the following three pages and a RELATIVE ACT
POSIT screen. To advance or reverse the pages, press the PAGE keys.

(1) Page 1 (Four-fold Extension Indication)

Main program name currently selected
File name currently selected Last sequence name executed in main program
Block counter

V
AUTO OP E R A T I ON TSTS.niri \ OTSTC1 N 13 IS

X 39.500 0 TST9

Y 185.850 IS CO 33

Z -1100.000 F 0.0 H 0

S 0 D 0
A-Mtd

= PO
PROGRAM! ACTUAL I PART I BLOCK X [ CHECK I
SELECT |POSIT. |PROGRAM) DATA |VARCH| DATA | t EXTEND]

f F 1 lfF~2l[ F 3 )[ F 4 ](~F~£ft[ F 6 II F 71IF 81

Running method currently selected

Fig. 2-70 Actual Position Display (Four-fold Extension Indication)

Note: The symbol “-"appears before axis address on which the mirror image function is active.
 3754-E P-271
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Page 1 (Sixteen-fold Extension Indication)

Last sequence name executed

Main program name currently selected
in main program
File name currently selected
Block counter
X\
AUTO OPER ATI 0 N TST9.MIN
I 0TST9 N13 16

X 39 500 .
I 185.350
”7
-1100.000
CO 33 0 TST9 F 0.0
N S 0
= PR
= PO
= PO

PROGRAM! ACTUAL I PART [ BLOCK I I CHECK I

SELECT |POSIT. |PROGRAM] DATA | SEARCH DATA | C EXTEND]
iTÿrrair~TirFXi(TTirF'6~irTTirF~F)

Fig. 2-71 Actual Position Display 1 - (Sixteen-fold Extension Indication)

X X-axis actual position on active block

Y : Y-axis actual position on active block
Z Z-axis actual position on active block
CO Work coordinate system number
O Currently active program name
N Currently active sequence name
F Actual feedrate (overridden programmed F value)
S : Actual spindle speed (overridden programmed S value)
H Tool length offset number
D Cutter radius compensation number
Change-over of Four-fold extension and Sixteen-fold extension can be carried out on the NC optional
parameter (bit) No. 4, bit 6.
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 4, bit 6:
0 Four-fold extension
1 Sixteen-fold extension
 3754-E P-272
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Page 2

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN N 1

ACTUAL POSITION LOAD DISPLAY lim

0 100 200 (X)

x 0.000 T i r
y 0.000 Spindle 0*

Z 0.000
w
Co 0 0 Oil
0.000 X 0%

Y 0%
F 0.0 N
S 0 GEAR z 0%
H» 0 TOUCH SENSOR
D- 0 TOUCH PROBE w 0*

PROGRAM ACTUAL 1 PART

I
BLOCK
SELECT |POSIT. PROGRAfl| DATA I SEARCH! OCCK
DATA [EXTENDI

nniiT~FirFÿ(TÿiT~ÿiTÿfFÿrr8'i

Fig. 2-72 Actual Position Display (2)

X X-axis actual position on active block

Y Y-axis actual position on active block
Z Z-axis actual position on active block
CO : Work coordinate number
O Currently active program name
N Currently active sequence name
F Actual feedrate (overridden programmed F value)
S Actual spindle speed (overridden programmed S value)
H Tool length offset number
D Cutter radius compensation number
GEAR : Spindle drive gear conditions (release, low, middle, high)
TOUCH SENSOR : Touch sensor status; Reverse display with touch sensor ON
TOUCH PROBE Touch probe status; Reverse display with touch probe ON
S (Spindle) Spindle load condition (indicated by graph and percent values)
 3754-E P-273
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) Page 3

AUTO 0PER AT I ON TST9.MIN 0TST9 N 13 16

ACTUAL POSITION lmm

X V z
LOCAL COORDINATES 39.500 1B5.850 -1100.000
WORK COORDS (APA) 39.500 105.850 -1100.000
WORK COORDS 39.500 185.050 -1100.000
MACHIlt COORDS 39.500 185. 050 -1100.000
FEEDBACK COORDS 2639.500 26B5.S5B 1400.000
TARGET VALUE 39.500 105.050 -1100.000
DISTANCE REMAINING 0.000 0.000 0.000

MANUAL SHIFT ACTUL 0.000 0.000 0.000

MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL 0.000 0.000 0.000

A-Mtd b

-PO

[ACTUAL IPART
SELECT |POSIT.
BLOCK
DATA | SEARCH! CHECK
DATA C EXTEND)

fTHllTTir?ÿ(TT>IT5l(T‘FirFT)(T'8l

Fig. 2-73 Actual Position Display (3)

LOCAL COORDINATES Distance referenced to the origin of the local coordinate system
WORK COORDS (APA) Distance referenced to the origin of the work coordinate system
WORK COORDS Distance referenced to the origin of the work coordinate system
MACHINE COORDS Distance referenced to the machine origin
FEEDBACK COORDS Output (numerical value) from the position encoder
TARGET VALUE Target value
DISTANCE REMAINING Distance remaining to the target point (commanded point)
MANUAL SHIFT ACTUL : Axis manual shift amount (current operation)
MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL : Axis manual shift amount (total)
 JL

3754-E P-274
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-2-1. RELATIVE ACT POSIT Screen

The RELATIVE ACT POSIT screen looks like as follows.

AUTO OPERATION D3-CIR.MIN 0 M 2

RELATIVE ACT POSIT lmm

X 2287.999 fl 349.999

-Y 1540. 189

Z 2287.989

A-Wtd
-EX
-D<
-EX

C EXTENDI

rrrifFTI(TTllTTl(TWFTlfFT)CFlD

(3) Relative Actual Position Data

(1) Axis Name

(2) Mirror Image Effective

Fig. 2-74 Relative Act Posit Screen

a) Axis name
Indicates a basic axis name (X, Y, or Z) or an additional axis name (A, B, C, etc.).
An additional axis name is displayed only when an additional axis has been selected.
b) Mirror image effective
When mirror image is effective, a minus sign is placed preceding the axis name.
When mirror image is not effective, no sign is placed.
c) Relative actual position data
Relative actual position data calculated using the following equation is displayed in the selected
unit system.
Relative actual position data of an additional axis is displayed only when an additional axis is
selected.
Relative actual position data = (coordinate value output from the encoder [Supplement] : 1)
_
- (Reference position [Supplement] : 2) (Tool length offset value)
- (Machine zero point)
[Supplement] : 1. Whether or not the manual shift amount is added can be set at NC optional parameter
(bit) No. 5, bit 7.
2. The reference position is the zero point (in the machine coordinate system) for the
relative actual position. For the procedure to set the reference position, refer to (1)
“Reference Position Setting”.
 .1.

3754-E P-275
SECTION 2 OPERATION

d) Reference position
The reference position is the zero point in the machine coordinate system andis used to display the
relative actual position, or, in their words, the zero point in the relative coordinate system. The
reference position is calculated form the equation below and displayed for each axis in the selected
unit system.
Relative actual position data of an additional axis is displayed only when an additional axis is
selected.
Reference position = (output from position encoder [Supplement] : 1)
_ (actual position value
[Supplement] : 2)
- (tool length offset value) - (machine zero point)
[Supplement] : 1. Like the actual position display, it is possible to select whether or not the manual shift
amount is included in the output form the position encoder by setting data at NC
optional parameter (bit) No. 5, bit 7.

2. Where the actual position is set in the coordinate system is input. Refer to (1)
“Reference Position Setting”.

(1) Reference Position Setting

The reference position is the zero point (in the machine coordinate system) which is used to display the
relative actual position, or, in other words, the zero point in the relative coordinate system. The
reference position can be obtained by setting the coordinate value of the actual position.
The reference position can be set in two different manners : by setting the actual position at “0” and by
setting the actual position at a desired position.
To set the reference position, press function key [F8] (EXTEND) in the automatic, MDI, or manual
operation mode repeatedly until functions “RELATI. ZEROSET" and “RELATI. PRESET are assigned
to function keys [F2] and [F3], respectively.

RELATI.IRQ-ATI.I
ZEROSET| PRESET| [EXTEND!

Fig. 2-75 Reference Position Setting

 3754-E P-276-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

a) Setting the actual position at “0”

Follow the procedure below when setting the actual position at “0” in the relative coordinate system.

1) Press function key [F2]

•CX
(RELATI. ZEROSET) in the
automatic, MDI, or manual
operation mode. i
nÿrrrirrnrrr\nÿrrÿrrT)nÿ8)
i .EXTEND)

The prompt “= RPZS” will be

displayed on the consoleline of
the display screen.
/?
2) Key in axis address(es) for o
which “0” is set through the
keyboard. When no axis
address has been keyed in, [3B[ZIE)[B[ZlE]@
“0” is set for all axes.
Example: To set “0” for X 00[Q £10000
and Z axes

= RPZS
s w Lx
f
Key in axis addresses o
•CX

l«n.wi.ina«Ti.|
WESCTJ i i r ««TOO)

o
 3754-E P-277
SECTION 2 OPERATION

3) Press the WRITE key.

WRIT!

AUTO OPERATION OKIR.MN O N 2

RELPT1VE ACT POSIT 1~

X 0.000 ft 349.999

Y 1540.189

Z 0.000

-EX

-RP2S XZ

|RELRTI.|RELATI.|
|f
I
IZEROSCq PRESET] | CEXTOCJ

ITÿfF?inÿrFÿfFÿ(TT)rFT)fFT)

The reference position with which the actual position of the designated axis is “0” is obtained
and relative actual position data of the designated axis will change to “0”.
 3754-E P-278-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

b) Setting the actual position at a desired position

Follow the procedure below when setting the actual position at a desired position in the relative
coordinate system.

1) Press function key [F3]

(RELATI. PRESET) in the
•cx
automatic, MDI, or manual •ex
operation mode. .
Ja»oscT|JRELAT
jPCLAf1 I|
ncscij I l< CXTOCJ

The prompt “= RPPS” will be CFT]CFTÿfPTlfFTIfF~5lf?~6lfTTirF~8l

displayed on the console line of
the display screen. ft
o
2) Key in axis address(es) and
numerical value for which the
actual position is set at a
00000000
desired position through the 00000000
keyboard. When no axis
address has been keyed in, 0000S 30@
the actual position is set at a
BS
desired position for each axis.
Example 1: To set the actual ©Gy© CAN

position of X and
Z axes at 200
1/ÿ2
©
and 300,
respectively
©@ ©o
= RPPS X200Z300 o
Key in axis •CX
-cx
addresses and
numerical values. T
nÿrrÿnÿnrTirF~5irrgiiTT)fFTi
.DOOCJ

Example 2: To set the actual

position of all
axes at 100
o
= RPPS 100

Key in a numerical
value without
specifying axis
addresses.
 3754-E P-279
SECTION 2 OPERATION

3) Press the WRITE key.

WRIT!

AUTO OPERATION 03-CIR.him 0 N 2

RELATIVE ACT POSIT imm

X 200.000 ft 349.999

Y 1540.189

Z 300.000

A-Mtd
-EX
-EX
•RPPS X200Z300

sa RELftTI.
PRESET T I
IEXTOCJ

fTTIfrri(TTllTTI(Tÿ(Tÿ(TTirFS1

The reference position with which the actual position of the designated axis is a desired position is
obtained and relative actual position data of the designated axis will change to a desired position.

[Supplement] : Pressing the WRITE key without keying in address(es) and numerical value(s) does not
set anything.

c) Data setting range and restrictions

1) Data is input in the unit system (metric or inch) employed for machine operation and the
decimal point position is fixed. For example, when “1” has been input while the 0.001 mm
unit system is selected, it is recognized as 1 mm. The same rule also applies to the inch
system.

2) Data can be set within the following range.

For linear axes: -99999.999 mm to +99999.999 mm
(When the inch system is selected, the entered value is converted into a
metric value and checked if it is within the above range.)
For rotary axes: -99999.999° to +99999-999° (for the 0.001 ° unit system)
-9999.9999° to +9999-9999° (for the 0.0001° unit system)
 3754-E P-280-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Supplements

a) Data is input in the unit system (metric or inch) employed for machine operation and the
decimal point position is fixed. (For example, when “1 n has been input while the 0.001 mm
unit system is selected, it is recognized as 1 mm.)
b) When changing the reference position of all axes including rotary axes, the entered value is
interpreted as length and degree.

c) The reference position cannot be set for an indexable axis. In this case, the actual position
data is displayed on the RELATIVE ACT POSIT screen.
However, when axis designation was not made with reference position setting, “0" is set at the
indexable axis, causing no error.
d) When the power is turned off, reference position data becomes “0” since it is not backed up by
turning off of the power. (The machine zero point is employed as the reference position.)
However, when actual position data in the work coordinate system is rounded (parameter (bit) No.
2 bit 1 is ON) with the multi-turn rotary table specification, reference position data is calculated in
reverse order. Therefore, when the work zero point is other than “0”, a value other than “0” is set as
reference position data.

e) Work coordinate values do not change when the reference position has been changed.

0 When the relative actual position value is smaller than -99999.999 mm (-9999.9999 inch for
the inch system), “- OVERFLOW” will be displayed on the display screen.
When the relative actual position value is larger than +99999.999 mm (+9999.9999 inch for the inch
system), “+ OVERFLOW” will be displayed on the display screen.

g) The display of the relative actual position of a rotary axis (rotary table) varies depending on the
rotary axis specification.

1) Rotary table and indexable axis specification

The relative actual position is displayed within 0° and 360°. The reference position is also
displayed within 0° and 360°.

2) Rotary axis with limits and multi-turn rotary table

The relative actual position obtained using the equation on page 23 is displayed as it is. With
the multi-turn rotary table, whether or not relative actual position data is expressed within 0°
and 360° when the NC is reset can be set at NC optional parameter No. 2, bit 1.
When the additional axis is removed with the removable axis specification, “- OVERFLOW" will be
displayed as relative actual position data.
 3754-E P-281
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-3. Program Display

When function key [F3] (PART PROGRAM) is pressed, the program information pages are accessed. There
are three types of program information display pages such as schedule program, main program and MDI
program. The display page can be changed by pressing the PAGE key.

(1) Schedule Program

AUTO OPERATION N13 16

PROGRAM "SCHEDULE* 1mm

>N001 VSET VC1-1 DIS X 0.000

N002 PSELECT GEAR. MIN,I0100 0-10 Y 0.000
H003 PSELECT SHAFT .MIN 2 0.000
N004 PSELECT WHEEL. MIN
END
Co
0 F 0.0
S 0
H- 0 0.000
D- 0 0.000

X Y Z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 39.500 105.050 -1100.000
-EX
-EX

PROGRAM
SELECT | an EXTENDI

nninÿiT~rinr4ifTTiiTÿiTTniT~8i

Fig. 2-76 Schedule Program Screen

(2) Current Main Program

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0

CURRENT MAIN PROGRAM

* *
>C15H5 DIS X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 0.000
G0K100Y100 0.000
CALL 0100
Co S
GALL 0100 0 F 0.0
K30 S 0
H- 1 0.000
D- 0 0.000
SPINDLE LOAD 0K
X Y 2
ACT POSIT (WORK) 0.000 0.000 0.000
A-Mtd

-PSA

PROGRAM ACTUAL | PART T BLOCK | OCCX

I
SELECT! POSIT.|PROGRAM! DATA SEARCH DATA «EXTENDS
ITT]fFTlfF31fTTirF~5llT~§irFTirF~8l

» : Block just read into the buffer

f : Block being executed.
Fig. 2-77 Current Main Program Screen
 ...L

3754-E P-282
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Read Main Program

AUTO OPERATION d-NIN 0 N 1

PROGRAM •READ MAIN PROGRAM* lmm

>G15H5 DIS X 0.000

C56X0Y0Z500H1 Y 0.000
S1000M3 Z 0.000
G8X100Y100 N 0.000
CALL 0100
Gaeeevise Co 5
CALL 0100 0 F 0.0
H30 N S 0
H- 1 0.000
D- 0 0.000
SPINDLE LOAD 0*
X Y Z w
ACT POSIT (WORK) 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
A-Mtd

“PSA

PROGRAM ACTUAL PART BLOCK CHECK

SELECT POSIT. DATA SEARCH DATA C EXTENDI

rrrinÿ(TTi(TTirFTiiT'rirFTirF~8i

Fig. 2-78 Read Main Program Screen

(4) MDI Program

AUTO OPERATION TST9.MIN 0TST9 N 1

PROGRAM •MDI PROGRAm lmm

•CURRENT* DIS X 0.000

CS0G0X0YOZ0 Y 0.000
RTMDI Z 0.000

Co 1
•BUFFER* 0 TST9 F 0.0
N S 0
H* 0 0.000
D* 0 0.000

X Y Z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 0.000 0.000 -1100.000
A-Mtd

•IN
PROGRAMl ACTUAL PART BLOCK CHECK
SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM! DATA SEARCH DATA [EXTEND]

frÿ(TTiiTTirFTirFTirrFi(T7irF8~i

Fig. 2-79 MDI Program Screen

 •JE.

3754-E P-283
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-4. Block Display

Function key [F4] (BLOCK DATA) accesses the block data pages.
Under the heading of BLOCK DATA, four pages of block data display are available: CURRENT, BUFFER,
SECOND BUFFER, and THIRD BUFFER.
These pages are selectable by pressing the PAGE key.

(1) Display of One Block Data Currently Executed

AUTO OPERATION TST9.WN 0TST9 N3 3

BLOCK DATA CURRENT lim

G01 M15 X 2000.000 S 0 Sr 0

G17 HI15 Y 2000. 000 Tc 0 So 0
C23 H131 2 -1100.000 Tn 0
C53 Ml 35 H 0 Fm 0.000
G90 H137 H 0 Fr 0.000
C94 Ml 39 D 0
HI33 I 0.1 Pr 0
J 0.1 Ps 0
K 0.000 tip 8 Nr 0
r No
Fd He Cr 0
Ft Co 0
FI BC 3
A-Mtd EMPTY
-BL
•PA
•BL

PROGRAM! ACTUAL
I
SELECT POSIT.
PART
IPROGRAM)
BLOCK
DATA I se*»j OCCK
DATA CDOENDJ

fTTirr?inÿlTT)fTT1(TT1ITT)(TTI

Fig. 2-80 Display of One Block Date Currently Executed

(2) Display of One Block Data in Buffer (to be Executed Next).

AUTO OPERATION TSTO.HIN 0TST9 N3 3

BLOCK DATA BUFFER lim

G01 H15 X 2000.000 S 0 Sr 0

G17 HI15 Y 2000. 000 Te 0 So 0
C23 Ml31 2 -1100.000 Tn 0
C53 HI35 H 0 Fm 0.000
G90 M137 H 0 Fr 0.000
G94 H139 D
Ml 33 I 0.000 Pr 0
J 0.000 Pw 0
K 0.000 tip 0 N* 0
F Ns
Fd He Cr 0
Ft Co 0
FI BC 3
A-Ntd EMPTY
•BL
J>R
•BL

|,B0STSE4 DATA T—I

SELECT j POSIT.
BLOCK CHECK
DATA CEXTEMD3

fF1HF2llF3l(F4 )fF~6*)[ F 6 II P 7 l(~F~8l

Fig. 2-81 Display of One Block Data in Buffer (to be Executed Next)
 .1

3754-E P-284
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Display of One Block Data in Second Buffer

AUTO OPERATION TST9.MIN 0TST9 N3 3

BLOCK DATA SECOND BUFFER lim

001 H15 X S 0 Sr e
617 HI15 Y Tc 0 So e
623 M131 Z -1100.1 Tn e
653 M135 e Fm 0.000
690 H137 H 0 Fr 0.000
694 Ml39 D 0
Ml33 I 0. Pr 0
J
K
r
S: F* 0
Pc
(*ÿ
0
0

Fd
Ft
t 000
0
He
N*
Cr
Ce
0
0
FI 3
A-Mtd EhPTY
-BL
•PH
•BL

PROGRAM! ACTUAL PART

SELECT |POSIT. | PROGRAM!
BLOCK
DATA I SEARCH! OCCK
DATA CEXTENDI

rrrin;TiiTÿ(TTirFTi(T~6ir?~TirF~8i

Fig. 2-82 Display of One Block Data in Second Buffer

(4) Display of One Block Data in Third Buffer

AUTO .OPERATION A.MIN 0 N

BLOCK DATA THIRD BUFFER

600 M15 X 0.000 S 0 0

Y
617
623
653
M115
M131
Ml35
Z
0.000
0.000
0.000
?:
M
B

0
So

Fm 0.000
0

690 M137 H 0 Fr-KNERFLOM

694 M139 D 0
M133 I 0.000 0
0.000 Pc 0
K 0.000 0 0

Fd
F
0.000
*
He 5
Nr
N*
Cr 0
Ft a Ce 0
FI BC
A-Mtd EfFTY

PROGRAMl ACTUAL I PART | BLOCK I OCCK I

SELECT! POSIT.|
PROGRAM! DATA |SEARCH DATA |CEXTENDI

rrTiirÿfT3irr~4~irF~5ÿ(T~g~irF7~i(~F~8i

Fig. 2-83 Display of One Block Data in Third Buffer

 1. JL

3754-E P-285
SECTION 2 OPERATION

X X-axis command value

Y Y-axis command value
Z Z-axis command value
I I command value
J J command value
K K command value
F Feedrate command value
Fd Feedrate command value (0.001 mm/6.4 ms)
Ft Feedrate (F1-digit command)
F1 Feedrate (F1-digit command)
S Spindle speed command value
Sr Actual spindle speed
So Spindle speed command value (overridden)
Tc Active tool number
Tn Next tool number
M M command value
H Tool length offset number
D Cutter radius compensation number
Fm : Actual feedrate (mm/min)
Fr Actual feedrate (mm/rev)
Pr Main program repeat count by schedule operation
Pe Main program execution count by schedule operation
Np Hole number in coordinate calculation
Nr Hole number for restart
Ns Sequence specified by the sequence stop
He : Work coordinate system number
Cr Number of subprogram to be repeated
Ce Number of subprogram actually repeated
BC : Block counter
EMPTY : No data in buffer
(EXIST : Data existing in buffer)
 -X-

3754-E P-286
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-5. ATC Tool Setting Data Display (Memory-Random ATC Specification)

Pressing function key [F8] (EXTEND) changes the key guidance display. Function key [F3] (TOOL
DISPLAY) allows the ATC tool setting page to be accessed. In this mode, there are two pages such as *ATC
TOOL SET (TOOL REF)* and *ATC TOOL SET (POT REF)*. Function key [F3] (TOOL DISPLAY)
switches the display from one page to another.
(1) ATC Tool Set (Tool Reference)

MDI OPERATION TST9.MN 0TST9 H

*ATC TOOL SET (TOOL RED*

TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL POT

NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO.
001 3 Oil NR 021 NR 031 NR SPCY POT NR
002 4 012 NR 022 NR 032 NR ACT TOOL 009
003 6 013 NR 023 NR 033 NR NXT TOX NR
804 9 014 NR 024 NR 034 NR
005 13 01S NR 025 NR 835 NR
006 14 01£ NR 026 NR 036 NR
007 19 017 NR 027 NR 037 NR
*008 NR 018 NR 028 NR 030 NR
009 NR 019 NR 029 NR 039 NR
010 NR 020 NR 030 NR 040 NR

-TO
•TO
•TO
•IN
LIBRARY] ITOOL fra- |BIAS- I
|lCSSACc|
P. SET I |DISPLAY) SONCLI NOSIS| [EXTENDI

nÿrrr)rrrif?ÿrFrirrriiT'7i(T~8i

Fig. 2-84 ATC Tool Set (Tool Reference) Screen

(2) ATC Tool Set (Pot Reference)

MDI OPERATION TSTS.MIN 0TST9 N

*ATC TOOL SET (POT RED*

POT TOOL POT TOOL POT TOX POT TOX

NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO.
4 1 NR 11 NR SPCY POT NR
2 001 12 005 ACT TOX 089
3 NR 13 NR > 1 234 5 6 789 NXT TOX NR
4 002 14 005 B
5 D 15 NR
6 003L 16 NR
7 0 >17 NR
8 NR 18 D
9 004 19 007L
18 NR 20 D

•TD
•TD
•TO
IN
LIBRARY
P. SET | i«4 [EXTENDI

rr~nrrriiT3iiTÿrPTinÿrrTirrÿ

Fig. 2-85 ATC Tool Set (Pot Reference) Screen

 L

3754-E P-287-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-6. Message Display (optional)

Press function key [F7] (MESSAGE) to display the messages in a program. An MSG command in a program
automatically changes the display to the message page during the automatic mode operation and the
programmed message is displayed in double-extension characters.
While the display screen is in the message display mode, display page may be switched to the actual
position display, program display, block display, and check display using a proper function key. The NMSG
command in a program automatically returns the display mode from the message display mode to the
original display mode. The message displayed on the display screen is the one specified in the program last.
Example:
N100
N101
N102 MOO MSG (CHECK TOOLI) This automatically changes the display mode to
the message mode and “CHECK TOOLI” appears
on the display screen.
N103 NMSG This restores the display mode to the original
mode.
N104 :
N110 X100 Y100 (WORK FINISH) Switching the display mode into the message by
pressing function key allows the display screen to
display the comment “WORK FINISH”.

AUTO OPERATION B.MIN 01 N003 3

CHECK TOOL!

PROGRAM ACTUAL TPWf I SLOCX T

SELECT |POSIT. | PROGRAM| DATA | SCARCH|
OCCK
DATA I [EXTEND]

fF~n(Tin(TTifFÿ(TTnfFinfTTifF~Tr)

Fig. 2-86 Message Display Screen

 3754-E P-288-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-7. Check Display

The OSP has a number of check functions by which the panel input/output status and the machine signal
input/output status are indicated on the display screen during operation in automatic mode, MDI mode, and
manual mode. The following items can be monitored:
1. Field Net I/O
2. Panel input
3. Panel output
4. Machine input
5. Machine output
6. NC input
7. NC output
8. NC specification codes
9. Machine specification codes
10. NC axis data
11. Machine axis data
12. Diagnostics
13. System variables
14. DNC (optional)
Select the data to be displayed by an NC optional parameter (bit) No. 5, bit 0 to bit 4.
Contents of input/output signals displayed at the CHECK DATA display page differ depending on machine
tool model and specifications. For details, refer to Maintenance Manual for individual models.
 3754-E P-289-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Description of operating procedure:

(1) Press either the MANUAL, MDI or
AUTO key.

I JL OKUMA QSP700QI
\Jx CÿHSiÿ3 CS3 CS Cÿ3(ÿl

A)E EHM D
acciMiMise
EJEJEJEJEIEJEIS
V]0(X|[Y ,!

®®®0 E
'@®i ®®®@E
CED dD CM) di)[?5) (H)Cn) CHI ®©j ®®®® r
©@l ®OG© L

(2) Press function key [F7] (3) Press the page key to change the
(CHECK DATA). screen display one screen at a time.

Fig. 2-87 Displaying the CHECK DATA INDEX Page

(1) Press either MANUAL, MDI, or AUTO key.
The guides shown in the illustration above are displayed, but for FI, a different guide is indicated for each
of the modes, as shown below.
- Automatic mode operation PROGRAM SELECT
- MDI mode operation DATA INPUT
- Manual Mode Operation . None
(2) Press function key [F7] (CHECK DATA).
The display screeridisplays a check data indications page.
(3) Press either the (ÿ)
or (g) page key to display the check data desired.
Pressing once advances a page.
Pressing once returns a page.
The SEARCH command displays the check data by one-touch operation, without repeatedly pressing the
page key.
The explanation of operations (1) and (2) given above is omitted here as they both apply in this case.
(4) Press function key [F5] (SEARCH).
“= F is displayed on the display screen console line.
(5) Enter the desired page number through the keyboard.
The input data is displayed following “= F ”.
Example: = FI_I 10
 JL.

3754-E P-290-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(6) Press the WRITE key.

This will display the desired check data.
When the WRITE key is pressed without inputting data following “= F I_J ”, the menu display shown
below will be displayed.

AUTO OPERATION A. MIN 0 N 2

CHECK DATA INDEX PAGE 1

NO. ITEM NO. ITEM

1 riELDNET I/O 13 MACHINE AXIS DATA MAG. DISP.
2 PANEL INPUT 14 MEMORY DATA
3 PANEL OUTPUT 15 SPINDLE DIAGNOSIS
* 4 MACHINE INPUT 16 SYS. VAR. AXIS DATA
5 MACHINE OUTPUT 17 SYS. VAR. ZERO OFFSET
6 NC INPUT 18 SYS. VAR. ZERO OFFSET MSB
7 NC OUTPUT 19 SYS. VAR. TOOL OFFSET
8 NC SPEC TABLE 20 SYS. VAR. TOOL OFFSET MSB
9 MC SPEC TABLE 21 SYS. VAR. SYSTEM PARAMETER
10 NC AXIS DATA 22 SYS. VAR. HOME POSITION
11 NC AXIS DATA httG. DISP. 23 SYS. VAR. MACHINE DATA
12 MACHINE AXIS DATA 24 SYS. VAR. NC COMMUNICATION

-F
Input » number of screen. !
PROGRAM) ACTUAL I PART I Hÿon CHECK I
SELECT) POSIT.|PROGRAM) MTfl | SEARCH |«TOflFC| DATA | CEXTEND3

rrriiTTifFÿrrTifTFifiÿfFTirFe'i

Fig. 2-88 Check Display Screen

Input the number for required item and press the WRITE key to display the first page of the required item
screen.
11-7-1. Field Net I/O
The field net input/output statuses are indicated by highlight displays.

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 1

CHECK DATA FIELWCT I/O PAGE 1

SS01
No. hex b it7 blt6 blt5 bit4 b lt3 btt2 bill bitO
In 1 00 AXSX AXSY AXSZ AXS4 AXS5 PHCN RPDP RPDN
In 2 00 MRIX MRIY l-RIZ MRI4 BLSK PBR1 PBR2 ITLK
In 3 00 f-LOK DRYR SSTP STI-L ZLOK JOGP JGF JOGN
In 4 00 RST DILE DIRS SORT SNTR SCW SSP SCCH

blt7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 blt2 bitl bitO

Outl 00 AX>L
0ut2 00 MRXL
Out 3 00 HLKL
AXYL
M?YL
DRYL
Out 4 EO 222311 0231
_AX2L
MRZL
SSTL
AX4L
MR4L
SLKL
OPTL
AX5L
BSKL
2LKL
NTRL
PH.
PB1L

SOL
SPARE

JGPL
PB2L
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
MILL
JGN-
CCWL

A-Mtd SPATLT

PROGRAM) ACTUAL I PART ran ||ATC/APC| CHECK I

SELECT) POSIT. |PROGR«I| DATA |SEARCH DATA |CEXTEND3

fTmfFTlfTTirF'4lfF~5lf?~F)f?~7irF'8l

Fig. 2-89 Field Net I/O Screen

 3754-E P-291-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-7-2. Panel Input

On the “CHECK DATA *PANEL INPUT*” pages, the on/off status of individual switches on the machine
operation panel are displayed.

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 1

OCCK DATA PANEL INPUT PAGE 20

No. name dot* No. dot* No. n*m* d*t«

37 OHLN 0 49 PW5 0 61 DCSS 0
36 OLMN 0 50 PH4 0 DOT 0
39 SP2 0 51 PHZ 0 63 DCAF 0
40 NAAN 0 0 64 DCOT 0
41 WARN 0 53 PW 0 65 DOF 0
42 COLN 0 54 PH10 0 66 IGON 0
43 ROVC 0 55 PH50 0 67 IGUG
44 SOVC 0 56 P1G0 0 68 IGTG 0
45 rove 0 57 DCUL 0 69 IGPS 0
46 PH22 0 58 DCTO 0 70 IGM5 0
47 PHSP 0 59 DCCI1 0 71 IGAT 0
48 PH6 0 60 DCII1 0 72 IN09 0
A-Mtd SPATLT

PROGRAMl ACTUAL I PART I BLOCK OCCK

SELECT! POSIT. I PROGRAM! DATA |SEARCH |ATC/APC DATA EXTENDI

fpTirFÿfTÿrFÿfFÿrF~6irF~TirF~8'i

Fig. 2-90 Panel Input Screen

11-7-3. Panel Output

On the “CHECK DATA PANEL OUTPUT*” pages, the on/off status of individual indicating lamps on the
*
machine operation panel are displayed.

AUTO OPERATION A. MIN 0 N

CHECK IAT A PAICL OUTPUT PAGE 24 1mm

Iks. data No. data

37 CYL1 0 49 OHLL 0 61 PEXE 0
33 AACL O 50 CLML G 62 SPLB 0
39 APCL 0 51 SP2L 0 63 SPLA 0
40 ATCL 1 52 HAAL 0 64 MAMA 0
41 SP3L 0 53 HAIL 0 65 TDST 0
42 CHPL 0 54 COLL 0 66 ODST 0
43 CCFL 0 55 BUZZER 0 67 PDST 0
44 SP1L 0 56 «J1 0 68 PROP 0
45 LUBL 0 57 LIMT 1 69 MAN 0
46 LITL 0 58 PSTP 0 70 MDI 0
47 SH L 0 59 HTST 0 71 AUT 1
48 cm. : 60 STIC 0 72 FD1L 0
A-Mtd SPATLT

PRGGR*Ml ACTUAL | PART

SELEC T| POSIT.|PROGRAI
BLOCK I
DATA |SEARCH IATC/APc| CHECK]|
DATA [EXTEND]

Fig. 2-91 Panel Output Screen

 .1

3754-E P-292-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-7-4. Machine Input

On the “CHECK DATA *EC INPUT*” pages, the on/off status of individual input signals from the limit
switches are displayed.

AUTO OPERATION ft. MIN 0 N 2

CHECK DATA MACHINE INPUT PAGE 31 1mm

No. name data No. name data No. name data

37 INDV 0 49 MTCY 0 61 AB1U 0
38 OLHM 0 50 SPTC 0 62 ATMC 0
39 OHFL 0 51 SPTU 0 63 ATMR 0
4G WARI 0 52 OLZ/ 0 64 AIR/ 0
41 ATM/ 0 53 TPBA 0 65 ATVE 0
42 OAO/ 0 54 SGHL 0 66 AHON 0
43 OAL/ 0 55 SGLL 0 67 AHOf 0
44 OAOL 0 56 SGML 0 68 AATC 0
45 TBSA 0 57 ROT/ 0 69 AATU 0
46 TBSB 0 58 SPTL 0 70 LBYZ 0
47 DROL 0 59 SPTN 0 71 ATCC 0
48 DRCL 0 60 ABIC 0 72 ATCU 0
A-Mtd

PROGRAM ACTUAL PART BLOCK CHECK

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH | ATC/APC DATA [EXTENDI

IF 1 l("ft cDf F 4 H F 5 H ft 6 If F 7~)tF 81

Fig. 2-92 Machine Input Screen

11-7-5. Machine Output

On the “CHECK DATA *EC OUTPUT*” pages, the on/off status of individual output signals to solenoids
and relays are displayed.

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 2

CHECK DATA MACHINE OUTPUT PAGE 36 lrnm

No. name data No. name data No. name data

37 SGSA 0 49 ATCC 0 61 EXUH 0
38 SGSB 0 50 COLV 0 62 EXUR 0
39 COON 0 51 CABV 0 63 EXUL 0
40 SPTL 0 52 ATHf l 0 64 EXUM 0
41 SPTN 0 53 ATHF 0 65 EXUS 0
42 AATC 0 54 OMSV 0 66 ATCG 0
43 AATU 0 55 OMSH 0 67 AASB 0
44 ATMC 0 56 ATCU 0 68 ATPT 0
45 ATMR 0 57 MGMI 0 69 ATPB 0
46 SABV 0 58 MGD 0 70 ATFC 0
47 ASAC 0 59 CRBL 0 71 ATFR 0
48 CBAC 0 60 EXUV 0 72 ATFI 0
A-Mtd

PROGRAM] ACTUAL I PART BLOCK I CHECK |

SELECT POSIT.|PROGRAM DATA | SEARCH |ATC/APC| DATA [EXTEND]

rFT]fFT]iT~TiiTTrirFÿiTÿrF~7irFei
Fig. 2-93 Machine Output Screen
 .X

3754-E P-293
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-7-6. NC Input
On the “CHECK DATA *NC INPUT pages, the on/off status of individual input signals to the NC processor
are displayed. *”
AUTO OPERATION A. MIN 0 N 2

CHECK DATA NC INPUT PAGE 39 1mm

NO. data bit? blt6 bit5 btt4 blt3 blt2 bttl bit0
1 00000000.06 SALM
2 00000000*06 EALM ANDT AXCD AML2 AML1 Aft_0
3 00000000.0O AXD4 AXD3 AXD2 AXD1 AXD0
4 00000000-00 ERST OBLD RBTS STRE PBAT PFOK WRDY HUP
5 00111111-3F AACZ BBS
b 00000111-07 UIT3 UIT2 UIT1
7 00000000-00 HP7 HP6 HP5 HP4 HP3 HP2 HP1 HP0
8 00000000-00 HP31 HP30 HP29 HP28 FP27 HP26 tf>25 HP24
9
10
11
00000000-00 SAB TAB NAB RTAB
00100000-20 ERST ESTR
00000000-00
EXIP
WPAB CLSW CLSV
_ RSAB
EBON
CLSU
PRST RHAB TNAB
EBRP EBRN ODRL
CLSZ CLSY CLSX
12 00000111-07 RIAB RPAB EMOC EMOB EMOA
A-Mtd

PROGRANl ACTUAL I PART I a-ocK| CHECK I

SELECT! POSIT.IPROGRAM! DATA I SEARCH |ATC/APC| DATA | [EXTEND]

fTTir?T]rTÿfrTi(TT]rrFi(T7TfF~8]

Fig. 2-94 NC Input Screen

11-7-7. NC Output
On the “CHECK DATA *NC OUTPUT*” pages, the on/off status of individual output signals from the NC
processor are displayed.

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 2

CHECK DATA NC OUTPUT PAGE 41 1mm

NO. data bit7 bit6 bitS bit4 bit3 blt2 bitl bit0
1 00000000-00 MAL2 MALI MAL0
2 00000000-00 ERSS MDRS
3 00000000-00 DRVW DRW DRVU DRVZ DRW DRVX
4 00000000-00 DRVC DRVB DRVA
5 00000000-00 UCLH UCLV UCLU UCLZ UCLY UCLX
6 00000000-00 UCLC UCLB UCLA
7 00000000-00 HF7 HF6 HF5 HF4 HF3 HF2 HF1 FF0
8 01111110-7E HF31 QB HF24
9 00000000-00 PRNA PRER HPFW HPTV HPTU HPFZ HPTY HPFX
10
11
00000000-00
00000001-01
TNF RMF
ST Tf
RSTF SPCR EBOL HPFC HPFB HPTA
If RTF RSF PRSA RHF
MINT ZLOK SLOK MLOK
_
12 00000000-00 SVDI RPF RIF
A-Mtd

PROGRAM] ACTUAL | PART | axon CHECK |

SELECT| POSIT.| PROGRAM! DATA (SEARCH |ATC/APC| DATA |[EXTEND]

IT~T1IT~2TIT'3irFTllTÿr?~6irF~T1fF~sT

Fig. 2-95 NC Output Screen

 -X

3754-E P-294
SECTION OPERATION
2

11-7-8. NC Specification Codes

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 2

CHECK BATA NC SPEC TABLE PAGE 43 1mm

NO. data bit? bit6 blt5 bit4 btt3 bit2 bttl bit0
1 11111011-FB SDPR SBPR ECAL SYV 01DG 01MC REVF INML
2 01000111-47 T100 T300 T200 Z050 2020 3DCR MVOL LSTR
3 01000000-40 BRJN EPHD PHD3 PHD2 MIPH S6AX S5AX S4AX
4 11111111-FF G50S G62S G61S G43S G92S G31S G60S HELI
5 00010010-12 EPSN OKUM 232C F1PR F1D4 F1DG RAMC
6 01010110-56 MADS FRPB BLSM EC-T AX-T EC-P AX-P
7 00000000-00 GRTB SYC5 RLT1 RLT0 SYC4 SYC2 SYCY SYCX
6 00100111-27 EXP4 EXP2 GRP PPC IGF FDFI FDFO COLR
9 10000000-00 AXCH EXPB EXPA MIRS MIR5 MIR4 BSPS BSP2
10 01111111-7F EIGF EPBK MSG G22S G28S MAP5 MAP4 MAP2
11 11101100-EC SSTP RET AXSC MEED PHID AXSL JGNF SFTH
12 11000000-C0 EIML EGCA DNC3 DNC2 DNC1 DNCB DNCA
A-Mtd

PROGRAM! ACTUAL I PART BLOCK I CHECK I

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH ATC/APC DATA [EXTEND]

COD CEZ) COD CEZ)CEE) CED CEzD CEE)

Fig. 2-96 NC Specification Codes Screen

11-7-9. Machine Specification Codes

AUTO OPERATION A. MIN 0 N 1

CHECK DATA MC SPEC TABLE PAGE 39

NO. data. b lt7 bit6 blt$ bit4 bit3 bit2 bltl bttO
1 00000001-01 SPR3 SPR2 SPR1 AAC APC ATC
2 00000000-00 NCST PDNT SPOL MOT1
3 00001000-08 M120 M100 MG70 MG50 MG32 MG30 MG20
4 00000000-00 MSPC EXAT ATTC ATAT PLSB ASC SAH
5 00000000-00 CRS2 ACW CR10 CRSF
6 00000000-00 PLTR DRIL PL12 PL10 PL6
7 00000000-00 APIL NSST APUN ARCS
8 00000000-00 AACR AACC AACT AACF
9 00000000-00 ATCD ATRF MAAC MATT
10 01111111-7F CHIP WKSO OHLH MST AIRA AIRN COL
11 00000000-00 TSUT TOI SPCT ATOH SOLH OLHL HOLH
12 00000000-00 WARN EXHM SRV2 NCY2 SRVM NCYM
A-Mtd

-F 14

PROGRAM ACTUAL PART BLOCK CHECK [

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH ATC/APC DATA [EXTEND]

CET) CEDCOD CEZICEE) CE13 CEz) CEEI

Fig. 2-97 Machine Specification Codes Screen
 .X

3754-E P-295-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-7-10.NC Axis Data

The NC axis data is displayed in decimal numbers on the display screen, as shown below.

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 1

CHECK DATA NC AXIS DATA PAGE 39 1mm

X Y Z
RDir Q.O01 0.001 0.001
ODir 0.000 0.000 0.000
RCCN 20480.000 20480.000 16384.000
RAPA 20479.999 20479.999 16383.999
RSAPA 0.000 0.000 0.000
RSVPVAR1 14.917 15.969 14.917
RSVPVAR2 0.000 0.000 0.000
FIDTR(AK) 0000 0000 0000

B-Mtd

PROGRf4'll ACTUAL
SELECTr|
PART
POSIT.|PROGRAM|
aZaC](SEARCH I|ATC/APC|| CHECK I [EXTEND]
DATA DATA |

(TT1ITTllTTirF~7irF~F)rFTl[TTl(TTl
Fig. 2-98 NC Axis Data Screen

__
RDIF Difference between calculated value and position encoder output
ODIF Difference between calculated value and position encoder output with acceleration/
deceleration activated
RCON . Calculated value
RAPA . Position encoder output
RSAPA Position encoder output when contact with the touch setter is detected
RAWAR1 Servo data
(Designate the content of display with NC optional parameter (word) No. 10.)
RAVVAR2 .... Servo data
(Designate the content of display with NC optional parameter (word) No. 10.)
FIDFR (AK) .. Indicates the inductosyn ON/OFF state
Additionally, the NC axis data enlarge display screen displaying ODIF, RAPA and load data in enlarged
characters is provided.
 L,
•

3754-E P-296-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-7-11. Machine Axis Data

The machine axis data is displayed in decimal numbers on the display screen, as shown below.

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N

CHECK DATA MACHINE AXIS DATA PACE 36 lmm

HA MA TS TI
RDIF 0.000 0.000 0.000 ;000
ODIF 0.000 0.000 0.000 000
RCCN 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
RPPA 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
RCOM 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
RSWAR1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
RSWAR2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

PROGRAMl ACTUAL I PART I SLOCK I I I CHECK I

SELECT| POSIT. PROGRAM| DATA | SEARCH | ATOAPCl DATA |IEXTEND3

!TTifTTirrarFxiiTTi(TT)rF~7irF~8i

Fig. 2-99 Machine Axis Data Screen

RDIF Difference between calculated value and position encoder output
ODIF Difference between calculated value and position encoder output with acceleration/
deceleration activated
RCON . Calculated value

__ __
RAPA . Position encoder output
RCOM Command value
RCCON This is the RCON with the position encoder offset incorporated (applies to systems with axis
switching specifications).
RCAPA This is the RAPA with the position encoder offset incorporated (applies to systems with axis
switching specifications).
RAWAR1 Servo data
(Designate the content of display with NC optional parameter (word) No. 10.)
RAWAR2 Servo data
(Designate the content of display with NC optional parameter (word) No. 10.)
WA Crossrail
MA Magazine
TS Varies depending on the machine being used. Refer to the Maintenance Manual for the
machine in question.
TI Varies depending on the machine being used. Refer to the Maintenance Manual for the
machine in question.
Additionally, the machine axis data enlarge display screen displaying ODIF, RAPA and load data in enlarged
characters is provided.
 3754-E P-297-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-7-12.Diagnostics
Any memory content in the memory can be displayed in a designated format on the screen.

Address display

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 2

CHECK DATA DATA PAGE 53 imm

X Y Z
MACHINE COORDS 0.000 0.000 0.000

DCM-P0*$00000000

PCM 2

HEX A

FLU 6

BIT 8
ill
V*
v*
A-Mtd

CHECK I
psrpMÿjÿi SEARCH ATC/APC DATA I C EXTEND]

rmim CODCOD CEZ) COD

Decimal code indication (4 bytes)

Decimal code indication (4 bytes or 2 bytes)
Hexadecimal code indication (4 bytes)
Floating decimal point indication (8 bytes)
Bit string indication (1 byte)

Fig. 2-100 Diagnostics Screen

Displayed to the right of the diagnosis data: indicates the cursor key operation enabling
a)
* : position.
(Once a check address is set in the conventional manner, check address is increased or
decreased in units of the data type being checked and setting position is changed by pressing
the cursor keys @ @ (§) @ , , .)
b) W : 2-byte indication of DCM data
L : 4-byte indication of DCM data
Additionally, the spindle diagnosis display screen is provided.
 -X

3754-E P-298-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-7-13.System Variables
The contents of the system variables are displayed on the display screen for each individual format.

i AUTO OPERATION A.hIN 0 N 2

CHECK DATA SYSTEM VARIABLE PAGE 55 1mm

X Y Z
VRCO* 20480.000 20400.000 16384.000
VAPA* 20479.999 20479.999 16383.999
VSAP* 0.000 0.000 0.000
VDIM* 0.017 0.018 0.019
VALA* -10.000 0.034 0.035
VODM* 0.065 0.066 0.067
VDMP* 5250 5250 5250
VDDA* 16364 16384 16384
WDA* 3900 3900 3900
VDAM* 1 2 3

A-Mtd

PROGRAMl ACTUAL I PART I BLOCK CHECK I

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH IATOAPC DATA I C EXTENDI

COD CODCEIDCEZD CEE) CEE) CEZ) CEE)

Fig. 2-101 System Variables Screen (1)

AUTO OPERATION A.MIM 0 N 2

CHECK DATA SYSTEM VARIABLE PAGE 56 1mm

X Y Z
VZOf*[ 13 0.000 0.000 0.000
Z 23 0.000 0.000 -1000.000
Z 33 45.000 32.000 3002.000
C 43 1003.000 2003.000 3003.000
C 53 1004.000 2004.000 3004.000
C 63 1005.000 2005.000 3005.000
C 73 1006.000 2006.000 3006.000
C 83 1007.000 2007.000 3007.000
C 93 1008.000 2008.000 3008.000
C 103 1009.000 2009.000 3009.000

A-Mtd

PROGRAM! ACTUAL | PART | BLOCK n CHECK II C EXTENDD

SELECT POSIT.IPROGRAM DATA SEARCH I ATC/APC| DATA

r7ÿirrirrFinÿ(TTif?ÿ(TTirF~83

Fig. 2-102 System Variables Screen (2)

 ~L.

3754-E P-299-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 1

CHECK LATA SYSTEM VARIABLE PAGE 56 lfrtfil

X Y Z
VZOT*[ 513 -100.000 -200.000 -999.990
C 523 0.000 0.000 0.000
[ 533 1400.000 1400.000 900.000
C 54] 0.000 0.000 0.000
C 55] 0.000 0.000 0.000
C 56] 0.000 O.OOO 0.000
C 57] 0.000 0.000 0.000
C 58] 0.000 0.000 0.000
C 59] 0.000 0.000 0.000
C 60] -150.000 -300.000 .
0 000

B-Mtd

PROGRAM ACTUAL PART BLOCK I CHECK

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH ATOAPC DATA [EXTEND]

(fc 1 if?1 3"1[F 4](F 5 irF"6")[ F 7l[ F Qj

Fig. 2-103 System Variables Screen (3)

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 1

CHECK DATA SYSTEM VARIABLE PAGE 58 1mm

VTOTHCN] VTOFDCN]
NO. NO. NO. NO.
1 22.000 11 0.000 1 50.000 11 0.000
2 5.000 12 -41.230 20.000 12 12.500
3 0.000 13 0.000 3 0.000 13 0.000
4 -43.750 14 136.914 4 0.000 14 0.000
5 0.000 15 O.0GO 5 10.000 15 0.000
6 -10.154 16 -28.654 6 5.000 16 Oi 000
7 0.000 17 O.OOO 7 0.000 17 0.000
8 45.970 18 O.OOO 8 1O.000 18 0.000
9 0.000 19 0.000 9 0.000 19 0.000
10 36.474 20 -92.030 10 0.000 20 0.000

B-Mtd

*
PROGRAM! ACTUAL PART BLOCK CHECK
SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH ATC/APC DATA C EXTEND]

CED CEUD COD CEZD(ZD CEE) CEzDCED

Fig. 2-104 System Variables Screen (4)
 JL.

3754-E P-300-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 1

CHECK DATA SYSTEM VARIABLE PAGE 73 1mm

VTOFHCM VTOFBCN]
NO. NO. NO. NO.
301 0.000 311 0.000 301 -1.919 311 -2.747
302 0.000 312 0.000 302 3.069 312 2.279
303 0.000 313 0.000 303 -2.747 313 -1.919
304 0.000 314 0.000 304 2.279 314 3.069
305 -69.995 315 0.000 305 -1.919 315 -2.747
306 0.000 316 0.000 306 3.069 316 2.279
307 0.000 317 0.000 307 -2.747 317 -1 919
308 O.OOO 318 0.000 308 2.279 318 3.069
309 0.000 319 0.000 309 -1.919 319 -2.747
310 0.000 320 0.000 310 3.069 320 2.279

B-Mtd

PROGRAM ACTUAL PART BLOCK CHECK

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH I ATC/APC DATA [EXTENDI

[ £ 1 HP 2 H F 3l[fÿ 4JTf 5JLÿ 6")LF_7JCF 8}

Fig. 2-105 System Variables Screen (5)

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 1

CHECK DATA SYSTEM VARIABLE PAGE 74 1mm

X Y Z
VPPL* 5000.000 5000.000 35O0.000
VIPL* -5OG0.0OO -5000.000 -5000.000
VPSL* 5000.000 5O0O.0OO 3500.000
VNSL* -5000.000 -5000.000 -5000.000
VHP* 0.003 0.003 0.003
VBLC* 0.000 O.OOO 0.000
VMOF* 16384.00*3 16384.000 16384.0OO
VHPI 0.020 0.020 0.02O
*

B-Mtd

*
PROGRAM ACTUAL PART BLOCK CHECK
SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM; DATA SEARCH I ATC/APC DATA [EXTEND]

COD CES COD CEZ) CEE) CODCOD CES

Fig. 2-106 System Variables Screen (6)
 -A.

3754-E P-301-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

AUTO OPERATION A. MIN 0 N 1

CHECK DATA SYSTEM VARIABLE PAGE 75 lmm

X Y Z
VHPP*C 13 100.000 101.000 102.000
t 23 200.000 201.000 202.000
t 33 -300.000 -301.000 -302.000
C 43 400.000 -401.000 -402.000
C 53 500.000 0.000 -100.000
C 63 0.000 0.000 300.000
C 73 7.000 47.000 87.000
C 83 6.000 48.000 88.000

B-Mtd

PROGRAM ACTUAL PART BLOCK CHECK I

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH |ATC/APC DATA | C EXTEND 3

[ E 1 jfF"lT)LF...3J[F 4jrrilLF 6JLF 7JCF81

Fig. 2-107 System Variables Screen (7)

AUTO OPERATION A. MIN 0 N i

OECK DATA MC SYSTEM VARIABLE PAGE 76 lmm

VATOL 2
VNTOL 2
VSPTN 120
VPLTK 0

B-Mtd

PROGRAHI ACTUAL PART BLOCK CHECK

SELECT POSIT.|PROGRAM J DATA SEARCH ATC/APC DATA |C EXTEND3

Fig. 2-108 System Variables Screen (8)

 3754-E P-302-R1
SECTION 2 OPERATION

AUTO OPERATION A.HIM 0 N 1

CHECK DATA SYSTEM VARIABLE PAGE 77 lmm

VNC0MC13 00OO0000
C2D 00000000
[33 00000O12
[4] 00000000

B-Mtd

PROGRAM! ACTUAL I PART ! BLOCK CHECK

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH ATC/APC| DATA [EXTEND]

(TinrFTirrFiiTÿfFT](Tÿ(TT]rF~8T

Fig. 2-109 System Variables Screen (9)

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 0 N 1

CHECK DATA SYSTEM VARIABLE PAGE 78 1mm

VPCNT 0 VEST 00000001-01

V0K1 00000000-00 VINCH 10000010-82
V0K2 00000000-00 VSPCO 01000011-43
VHUM 0 VSPSB 11111111-FF
VINTG 0 VMLOK 00000000.00
VPRT 00000000-00 VACOD 1
VMPC1 00000000-00 VFDMX 200000
VMPC2 00000000-00 VFSOV 100
VMPT 00000000-00 VTLNN 2
VTLCM 2 VSTH 00000000-00
VIMS 10000010-82
VINF 00000000-00
B-Mtd

PROGRAM ACTUAL] PART BLOCK CHECK |

SELECT POSIT.|PROGRAM DATA SEARCH I ATC/APC DATA [EXTEND]

Fig. 2-110 System Variables Screen (10)

 3754-E P-303
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-7-14.DNC (optional)

AUTO OPERATION DNC-PAOGRAN N

OCCX DATA DNC RCCZIVC DATA PACE lan

*
*0300 C644S3S9 4C0387B2 D2445903 4441S3CS rDSTN.72RDT.DASe
13010 D43381R0 A0«MOA0 A030B744 30303033 T01 0700003
*0020 B23O3032 41303030 3S3030B1 64X3030 2OO0A00OSO014O00
S0030 30303036 B4303030 35303230 30303030 0096400050000000
*0040 3003CSC6 53CSD403 CSC653C5 D403C5C6 B.ETSrr.ETSrr.EF
*0050 53C5D403 CSC6S3C5 D403CSC6 53C3W03 STr.EFSeT.ErSET.
(0060 csc6S3cs W03C5C6 S3CSO403 csc653cs erscT.ErseT.erse
*0070 D4C3C5C6 S3CSD403 CSC653CS D403CSC6 T.CrSCT.ErSCT.EF
(0030 S3CSO403 CSC6S3CS D403CSC6 53C3W03 SCT.ETSeT.ErSrr.
*0090 C5C653CS D403CSC6 53C5D403 CSC653C5 EFSCT ETSCT.EFSE .
ROAD POINTER t 8 TRANSFIX CODC ISO
WtITC POINTER 8 PAOCAAN CODC ISO
R-ttU*
-EX
-CH
•PM

PAOCAAN ACTUAL PART 8L0CX OCCX

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH DATA CEXTDO)

(TTirrÿiTTinrÿrrÿrrrirFTirFT)

Fig. 2-111 DNC Screen (1)

AUTO OPERATION DNC-PAOCAAH N

OCCX DATA « DNC HISTORT « PACE Inn

R-NO TIME STATUS ITEM CONTENTS

CS0Q0O 0: 3:24.15 2 S 5 54
CS0O01 0: 3:24.30 2 6 5 6
CS3Q02 0: 3:28.00 2 4 1 7
CI2003 0: 3:28.80 2 5 5 54
Cl3024 0: 3:28.95 2 6 5 6
CS00CS 0: 3:33.45 2 4 1 7
Cl2003 0i 3:33.45 2 5 5 54
CS0O07 0: 3:33.60 2 6 5 6
C(0C£S 0: 3:38.10 2 4 I 7
CS00O9 0: 3:38.18 2 5 5 54
CURRENT POINTER C*08
-EX LAST ERROR POINTER E10200
-CH R-NU
-FM

SEARCH) I
PROGRAM) ACTUAL PART CLOCK OCCX
SELECT |POSIT. PROCSAN| DATA DATA CCXTOO)

!TT1(TT)rFÿ(TTllTT1(~F~6irF~Tlf~F~a1

Fig. 2-112 DNC Screen (2)

 x.

3754-E P-304
SECTION 2 OPERATION

AUTO OPERATION M

OCCK DATA ONC (B) PACE £ 1M

HOST CPU STATUS

OC STATUS
PARAMETER N> 2000 bÿt*
No SO but*
N» 10 tlavs
Tp S HC
To 20 i«c
Tl 10 M*e
T« 100 M*C
Tw S »*c
CONVERT COOE A0
CONVERTED CODE A0
HOST CPUCRTY3 STATUS

PROGRAMl ACTUAL PART BLOCK OCCK

SELECT |POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH DATA ICXTETO]

r?T1(TTlfFT>(TT)(TTIflÿf?TlfF~8l

Fig. 2-113 DNC Screen (3)

 3754-E P-305
SECTION 2 OPERATION

11-8. Run Guide Display

After selecting the EDIT AUX mode, press function key [F7] (RUN GUIDE), and the RUN GUIDE screen is
displayed.

(1) RUNNING FILE

The operation status of the file currently selected is displayed at the left half area on the screen.

PROGRAM OPERATION RIJN GUIDE

RUNNING FILE SELECT ERROR FILE

MANUAL SELECT MODE

(a) MAIN FILE NAME MAIN FILE NAME
- TST9.MIN RUNNING EMPTY
(b) MAIN PROGRAM NAME MAIN PROGRAM NAME
. 0TST9 EMPTY
SUB FILE NAME
(c) EMPTY
RUNNING METHOD SELECT RUNNING METHOD
(d) A-Mtd

-GD

(a)
Tilt I INIT |DELETE |RENAME T FREE |
RUN
GUIDE |[EXTEND]

n=nnrrr)fFÿ(TTiiTÿfF~6ÿiT~TirF~8~i

Fig. 2-114 Running File Display

a) File selection method

This field indicates how the file has been selected and is being operated.

Display Contents
MULTI VOLUME MODE Multi-volume operation
PPC MODE Operation in the pallet pool line control
EXTERNAL SELECT MODE Operation by external program selection command
SCHEDULE MODE Scheduled program operation
MANUAL SELECT MODE Operation by manual program selection

b) MAIN FILE NAME

This field indicates the main file name currently selected.

c) MAIN PROGRAM NAME

This field indicates the main file program name currently selected.
 3754-E P-306
SECTION 2 OPERATION

d) RUNNING METHOD
This field indicates the operation method of the program currently selected.

Display Contents
A-Mtd Normal operation
B-Mtd Large volume operation
S-Mtd Operation without branching and subprogram
M-Mtd Multi-volume operation

e) Operation status
This field indicates the current operation status of the program selected.

Display Contents
SELECTED Program selection complete, but it is not run.
RUNNING Program is being executed.
END Program execution has been completed; this dis¬
play is given until the next program is selected or
the next cycle is started._
 3754-E P-307
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) SELECT ERROR FILE

If an error occurred during automatic program selection, file is displayed at the right half of the screen.

PROGRAM OPERATICM RUN GUIDE

[2203a POM 51 <Schedule program: main program load 10000010
RUNNING FILE SELECT ERROR FILE (0
SCHEDULE MODE
SCHEDULE PROGRAM FILE MAIN FILE NAME (h)
-
A.SDF
MAIN FILE NAME
A.MIN END 0TST9
_
TST9.MIN
MAIN PROGRAM NAME 0)
MAIN PROGRAM NATE SUB FILE NAME
EMPTY -
Ef*>TY
RUNHING 1CTHOD
A-Mtd A-Mtd
_
SELECT RUTTING IETH0D

•EX

RUN
TIME INIT DELETE |RENAME FREE GUIDE [EXTENDI

rrri(TÿrT?inr4irÿrrri(?ÿrF~8i

Fig. 2-115 Select Error File Display

f) MAIN FILE NAME

This field indicates the main file name selected if a program selection error has occurred.
g) MAIN PROGRAM NAME
This field indicates the main file program name selected if a program selection error has occurred.
h) SUB FILE NAME
This field indicates the sub file name selected if a program selection error has occurred.

i) SELECTED RUNNING METHOD

This field indicates the operation method selected when a program selection error has occurred.
The operation method is explained in detail in d) in (1), “RUNNING FILE".
 JL

3754-E P-308-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12. FUNCTIONS AND OPERATIONS IN AUTOMATIC MODE OPERATION

12-1. Main Program Selection and Operation
In order to execute a part program in the automatic mode, first select the part program. Programs stored in
the memory have their own file names since programs are managed as files. The specified main program is
read from the part programs stored in the file and the subprogram, called in the main program, is searched
out in the specified sub file to be loaded to the NC.
The operating procedure is described below:
(1) Press AUTO.

ri «-t.m Ii a i i-syi i u»« iI«W»I

A'FBIdol ETF'II G f§
JI Trarnig
o ii p ii dddTMH

®©@© @
(s>ÿi ©©©© 0
M ©©@© n
7
®o©o p
7
/(4) Press WRITE.
(2) Press function key [F1] (3) Press the cursor keys to position
(PROGRAM SELECT). the cursor at the desired file name.

Fig. 2-116 Selecting and Executing Main Program

(1) Press the AUTO key.

(2) Press function key [F1] (PROGRAM SELECT).
“PS” is displayed in the 21st line on the display screen.
 3754-E P-309
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Enter the designation mode from the table below.

The data entered is indicated following the prompt “PS L_J

The input format is as indicatedbelow and entry of an asterisk (*) instead of a file name, will display a file
name directory.
=PS main-file-name, main-program-name, sub-file-name; option
i_i

Main-file-name File name of main programs

Sub-file-name File name of sub programs which are called from a main program
Option Designation of A, B and S option
For details, refer to 16-1, “PSELECT BLOCK” in the Programming Manual for OSP7000M.

Designation Contents Remarks

Procedure
Mode
a) PSÿ* Designates main file name. Designation of device name for
calling out main file is also
possible. _
PSi—i *; Designates main file name and Same as above.
option. _
b) PSL-I*,* Designates main file name and main Same as above.
_
program name.
PSL-,*,*; Designates main file name, main Same as above.
program name and option.
c) PSL_J ,*,*,* Designates main file name, main Designation of device name for
program name and sub file name. calling out main and sub file is
also possible. _
PS_J*,*,*; Designates main tile name, main Same as above.
program name, sub file name and
option. _
d) PS_J*„* Designates main file name and sub
file name.
PSL_I ,*,* A.MIN is automatically selected as
main file name. Designates main
program name and sub tile name.
 1.

3754-E P-310
SECTION 2 OPERATION

a) Designation mode PS i_i

* (or PS I_J *;)

AUTO OPERATION A. MIN 01 HSTR 1

lmrrt
PROGRAM SELECT INDEX
MAIN PROGRAM FILE PAGE 1
JW.MIN _
H MIN
D.MIN
KS.MIN
K51.MIN
ABCD.MIN
K52.MIN
K53.MIN
P03.MIN
POO.MIN

•PS
*It the file name for program telKt ?
PROGRRfll ACTUAL PART BLOCK OCCK
SELECT |POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCHl DATA [EXTENDI

rF~?l (~F~3~) fF~4~l f~F~5~l fF~6~l (~F~7n fF~8ÿl

1) Key in as PSL_< or PSLJ

2)
*
Press the WRITE key.
The display is changed to the PROGRAM SELECT INDEX page and main file names
registered are displayed. (This searches files having extension “MIN” from MD1:.)
3) Position the cursor at the desired file name.
4) Press the WRITE key.

AUTO OPERATION A.MIN 01 N 3

1mm
PROGRAM SELECT INDEX
MAIN PROGRAM FILE PAGE 1
JW.MIN
B.MIN
D.MIN
KS.MIN
K51.MIN
ABCD.MIN
K52.MIN
K53.MIN
P03.MIN
POO.MIN

-PS *;
that Is the file name for pr ogr am select ?

Mhat Is the option for program select ? IB

PROGRAMl ACTUAL |PART BLOCK I
_
Aimethod A Bimethod B Siwlthout branch, subprogram function

OCCK
SELECT |POSIT. |PROGRAM! DATA I SEARCH! DATA C EXTENDI

ITTirFT1ITÿ(TÿrFÿ(TÿfF7lfF~8l
 3754-E P-311-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

5) If there is an option designation “;”,the screen automatically goes to the option designation
mode and the messages below are displayed at the lower block on the display screen.
A: method A B: method B S: without branch, subprogram function
What is the option for program select? I
Key in “A”, “B", or “S" as desired. (Option B and option S can be specified simultaneously.)
6) Press the WRITE key.
Entry of “B” in response to the prompt “What is the option for program select? !“ selects the
operation method B (large capacity operation method). If the control is not supported by this
operation method, the entry is ignored.
When the WRITE key is pressed without entering any character in response to the prompt
“What is the option for program select? I”, the control operates in accordance with the setting of
the NC optional parameter (word) No. 11.
b) Designation mode PS I_I (or PS I_J *,*;)

AUTO OPERATION ft. WIN 01 9

lim
PROGRAM SELECT INDEX
MAIN PROGRAM FILE PAGE
WHEEL100. MIN
SHIL2. MIN
QEAR-1. MIN
BOX-1. MIN
OHOLE. MIN
BOX. MIN
0SHT2. MIN
OEARMIN
SHAFT. MIN

•PS *,*
V*i«t 1* the file MM for progrwn (elect ?
l+i»t It the orooreo nine for program (elect ? I
PROGRAM! ACTUAL
SELECT |POSIT. |EU K? I I CHECK
DATA T
[EXTENDI

CED CODCOD CEZD CEE) COD CEZ) COD

1) Key in as PS i_i or PS I_I

2) Select main file names in the same procedures as 2), 3) and 4) in (a).
3) Enter the main program name when the prompt “What is the program name for program
select? I” is displayed at the lower section of the screen.
For example, selecting main program name 0100 is as follows:
What is the program name for program select? 10100
4) Press the WRITE key.
If the WRITE key is pressed without entering the program name, the first program in the main
file is selected.
5) When there is an option designation the CRT allows the entry of option designation
code. Follow the steps 5) and 6) in a).
 X

3754-E P-312-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

c) Designation mode PS L_» *,*,* (or PS I_I *,*,*;)

AUTO OPERATION B.MIN O10C H 9

lim
PROGRAM SELECT INDEX
SUB PROGRAM FILE PAGE 1
JW. SUB
JW1.SUB

0SHT2. SUB
SHTHCLE. SUB
BOX1. SUB

-PS *.*.*
that It the flit ntm foe progrom tcltct 7
Uhtt It th* program non* for program tclaet T 10100

-
Uiat It lha flit name for oroaram tcltct 7
[PRRT T BLOCK I I
_ CICCX 1
PROGRAM ACTUAL
SELECT POSIT. IPROGRPMI DATA | SEARCH] | DATA | C EXTEND]

(TT1(TT1ITÿITÿITÿ(TÿITTirF~Fl

1) Key in as PS u *,*,* or PS LJ *,*,*;.

2) Select the main file name in the same procedures as 2), 3) and 4) in (a).
3) Select the program name in the same procedures as 3) and 4) in (b).

4) The screen will then display the subprogram file names.

Files having extension “SUB” in MD1:.
5) Position the cursor at the desired file name.

6) Press the WRITE key.

7) If there is an option designation “;”,the CRT allows the entry of option designation code.
Follow the steps 5) and 6) in (a).
(4) By pressing the WRITE key, the main program can be read from the specified main file, while the
subprogram called up in the main program is loaded to the NC, and the main program is displayed
on the display screen.
If the subprogram called up in the main program cannot be found in the specified sub file, it should be
searched for in the sub file of the extension SSB so that loading can start. If it still cannot be found, an
error occurs.

(5) Press the CYCLE START button.

By pressing the CYCLE START button, the main program can be started.
 JL

3754-E P-313-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : 1. If a main file name is omitted, A.MIN is used. If the main program is omitted, the first
program in the main file name is used.

2. Search of the subprogram which has been stored as a part of the main file is made
first.

3. When the sub file name is omitted, the search of a subprogram called in the main
program is made only for the sub file of the extension SSB or MSB. Therefore, the
sub file with extension .SUB should be input without fail. Only one kind of sub file can
be input.
(If the subprogram in the main file calls the other subprogram, the subprogram to
becalled must be stored after the one from which it is called.)
4. If there is no specified file name or program name, an error occurs. Then, the
program selected previously becomes invalid. Always confirm that the valid file
name or program name is displayed on the first line of the display screen.
5. A program once selected is valid until the next program is selected. Selecting the
schedule program is invalid.
6. Direct specification of the file name without using symbol “*”is also allowed.
7. Main and sub file name directory can be searched for using alphabetic character,
“?”, or
 Table 2.1 Operation Comparison between Normal Storage Capacity Memory and Large Storage Capacity Memory

Selection and Operation of Selection and Operation of Large Storage Capacity Remarks
Item
Normal Storage Capacity
Parameter setting Method A Method B
Specification of S option in Invalid Valid
PROGRAM SELECT command mode S option not specified | S option specified
Program size Main program Up to total length of the stored main program
limitation
Subprogram Total tape length is less
than 80 meters (3.15 ft.).
>
* (optionally 160 meters Total tape length is Total tape length is
Library program less than 100 meters
(6.30 ft.)*1 less than 100 meters
(3.94 ft.).*2 (3.94 ft.).*2
Schedule program
Subprogram function Available Available Unavailable (alarm)
Branch function Available Available Unavailable (alarm)
Instruction for Main program Sequence label only
jump destination
Subprogram
of branch Sequence label, sequence Sequence label or
instruction Library program number sequence number
Schedule program
Main program sequence label limit No limit Fewer than 30 pcs. No limit
Execution time for PROGRAM Several tens seconds to Several tens seconds to Ends at once
SELECT command _ several minutes _ several minutes _

[Supplement] : 1. When operation buffer expansion specification is selected, capacity is extended to 320 to 1280 meters (12.60 to
50.39 ft.).

2. When operation buffer expansion specification is selected, the length is as follow: co

m
- Less than 270 meters (10.63 ft.) for 320 meter (12.60 ft.) specification
o
- Less than 590 meters (23.23 ft.) for 320 meter (25.20 ft.) specification z
- Less than 1230 meters (48.43 ft.) for 320 meter (50.39 ft.) specification o6*
a?m
3J
ido «y
Z -U
 3754-E P-315-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-2. Schedule Program Selection and Operation

This function allows unmanned automatic and continuous machining work by utilizing the pallet changer
when successive identical work pieces are machined.
For details, refer to Section 16, “Schedule Programs” in the Programming Manual for OSP7000M.
The operating procedure is described below:
(1) Press AUTO.

|1 OKUM«OaP7WM |

SSSHEDIJS
©©©© (BS
©©©© 0
(E3(H)(DCE)©(s)ClKl] w ©0®© n
®@l ©000 “

7 7
(5) Press WRITE.
(4) Key in
(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND).

(3) Press function key [F4] (SP SELECT).

Fig. 2-117 Selecting and Executing Schedule Program

(1) Press the AUTO key.

(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) twice.

For the guidance of function keys, [F1] (NUMBER SEARCH) and others are displayed on the display
screen.
(3) Press function key [F4] (SP SELECT).
“SS" is displayed on the 21st line on the screen.
(4) Enter"*”.
SS i_ i

*
 ~L

3754-E P-316
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) Press the WRITE key.

The display will be switched to the PROGRAM SELECT INDEX page and the schedule program file
names registered are shown. (Files having an extension of “SDP are searched from the MD1:.)

AUTO OPERATION 0 M 9

lmm
PROGRAM SELECT INDEX

P00.SDF
AH. SDF _
SCHEDULE PROGRAM FILE PAGE 1

•EX
•ss *
jjat |» the fll M st lect ?
NUMBER I HJMBERl Sp'<><'rjSP-MO.
SEARCH RESTART| STOP | SELECT) SEARCH CEXTEHM

nnnfF?)fr?>frT>fFÿf?ÿrr7if?~8i

(6) Position the cursor at the desired file name.

(7) Press the WRITE key.

The schedule program is selected and the control is placed in the scheduled operation mode.

(8) Press the CYCLE START button.

This starts the continuous operation in accordance with the programmed schedule.

[Supplement] : 1. Selection of a schedule program file by directly keying in the file name is also
possible.
SS i—i schedule-program-file-name [WRITE]

2. Main and sub file name directory can be searched for using alphabetic character,
or”*”.
 3754-E P-317
SECTION 2 OPERATION

CYCLE STOP:
The cycle stops after the execution of a main program when the CYCLE STOP key has been
pressed to turn on the lamp (CYCLE STOP function activated).
To resume the operation, press the CYCLE START button.

CYCLE
STOP

[Supplement] : 1. Schedule program selection should be done only after resetting the NC. If the
schedule program is selected during operation, an error will occur.

2. When the normal automatic operation (AUTO mode operation by main program
selection) is done after selecting the schedule program, the program should be
selected again.

3. When the CYCLE START button is pressed with the SINGLE BLOCK switch set ON
in schedule program operation mode, the main program will be selected by the
schedule program and the machine will wait in the start state. Then, if the CYCLE
START button is pressed, the machine returns to the normal single block mode state.
But the machine will not stop in the blocks containing VSET, IF and GOTO
instructions.

4. When the RESET button is pressed during the operation in accordance with a
schedule program, the part program selected when the NC has been reset will be
executed again from the start if the CYCLE START button is pressed.
If the repetition number of the part program is specified in the program block selection
block in the schedule program, the program execution stopped during machining will
not be counted.

5. When the CYCLE START button is pressed after; selecting the schedule program,
the main program is first selected and machine operation using the selected main
program begins after the completion of main program selection. If the control is reset
while a main program is being selected, the main program is not selected.

6. The main program executed in the schedule program operation mode is cleared from
the operation buffer after the completion of the program execution.
 3754-E P-318-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-3. Cycle Start and Slide Hold

(1) Cycle Start
Press the CYCLE START button on the machine operation panel to start the NC operation.

CYCLE START

Press CYCLE START button.

a) Cycle start after NC reset:

This is effective during automatic operation or MDI operation. The program is read and executed
for each separate mode, cycle start requires the following conditions.
[In automatic operation]
The schedule program or the main program has been selected correctly.
[In MDI operation]
The one-block instruction has been entered in the MDI buffer.
b) Cycle start after shutdown by single block or program stop:
The next block can be executed by pressing the CYCLE START button in automatic mode.
c) Cycle start in slide hold mode:
When the CYCLE START button is pressed, function generation which was interrupted, begins
again.
[Supplement] : 1. Press and release the CYCLE START button to begin the operation, but when the
machine is stopped temporarily due to the activation of the SLIDE HOLD button,
cycle start is made when the CYCLE START button is only pressed.
2. Pressing the CYCLE START button during the program selection, sequence number
searching and return search is ineffective.
3. While the SLIDE HOLD button is being pressed, the CYCLE START button is
inoperative.
4. During the operation, the RUN lamp on the STATUS display screen comes on,
excluding the slide hold mode.
5. Even in the setting mode, cycle start is possible provided that the mode previously
selected is auto or MDI and the setting of bit 5 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 2 is
“1"
6. When alarms (P, A, B, and C) are on, cycle start by pressing the CYCLE START
button is impossible.
7. An error occurs when the CYCLE START button is pressed after return search has
been executed. In this case, cycle start is possible by pressing the SEQUENCE
RESTART button.
 X.

3754-E P-319-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Slide Hold

Axis movement can be stopped temporarily or program execution can be stopped by pressing the
SLIDE MOLD button during operation.
Slide hold means the NC halt is made during axis movement. Start-up hold means the NC halt made
before or after the completion of an axis movement.
SLIDE HOLD

Press SLIDE HOLD button.

Slide hold during function generation:

- During axis movement by rapid feed or cutting feed
Axis movement stops after deceleration. When the axis stops halfway in a commanded axis travel, it
is in a slide hold state. If the axis reaches the target point before it is stopped, or the operation mode
stops after the execution of the other commands in that block are completed, then this is the start-up
hold state, and is the same as a stop in the single block or program stop.
- During dwell
Dwell immediately stops and the machine is brought to the slide hold state.
During operation, excluding function generation
(during the execution of miscellaneous commands):
The slide hold is not effective for miscellaneous functions but the SLIDE HOLD lamp stays on. The
machine is brought to a start-up hold state, since the operation halts after the execution of

......
miscellaneous functions.
[Supplement] : 1. When axis movement and miscellaneous functions are in the same block, there are

......
two cases for the execution order of the commands.
a) With The execution of axis movement commands and auxiliary
functions start simultaneously.
b) After The axis movement is completed the execution of
miscellaneous function starts.
Depending on the above conditions,
if machine hold occurs during axis movement (including dwell) Slide hold
if the machine halts at a time other than axis movement Start-up hold
2. During the slide hold (excluding start-up hold), the SLIDE HOLD lamp on the
STATUS display comes on (although the slide hold state is a part of the machine
operating state, the RUN lamp will go off).
3. If the machine is brought to the start-up hold state by the activation of the SLIDE
HOLD button, both the SLIDE HOLD and the RUN lamp go off.
A-
CAUTION : Cycle start in slide hold is activated once the CYCLE START button is pressed. (In the
start-up hold state, cycle start is activated when the pressed CYCLE START button is
released.)
 .JEL

3754-E P-320
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Examples of slide hold

[During axis movement]

Axis movement Slow up

Slow down

During slide
SLIDE HOLD button hold state
CYCLE START button

[During miscellaneous function execution]

During miscellaneous Miscellaneous function

function execution execution completed

Operation of next block

During slide During start-up

hold state hold state
SLIDE HOLD button CYCLE START button

[Supplement] : 1.
Fig. 2-118 Examples of slide hold
Even if the SLIDE HOLD button is pressed
during the execution of a tapping cycle - G84
(tapping cycle) and G74 (reverse tapping cycle),
the tapping cycle is not interrupted. Slide hold is
Rapid feed ....
-
Cutting feed

ur-
activated after the completion of the tapping
cycle. The machine will not stop operation, but
after the operation is completed, it stops During this period,
operation temporarily. Note that the slide hold state is
synchronizedtapping cycle (G284 and G274) is not activated.
different from above described tapping cycle.
For details, refer to Section 8, “Synchronized
Tapping Function” in the manual for OSP7000M
Special Function No. 1 .
2. The slide hold function can be activated and deactivated by the programmed M
codes, M140 and M141.
M140 : Slide hold ineffective
M141 : Slide hold effective
The SLIDE HOLD button is inoperative for the blocks containing M140 and M141,
and the slide hold function is not activated even when the SLIDE HOLD button is
pressed during such period.
Note that the control is in the M141 mode after it is reset.
 3754-E P-321
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-4. Resetting NC
The NC reset means initializing the internal NC status.
The NC system is reset when:

(1) the RESET button is pressed,

(2) the external reset signal is input,

(3) the MACHINE LOCK key is turned on or off,

(4) the operation mode is changed over from MANUAL mode to AUTO or MDI mode,

(5) the operation mode is changed over from AUTO or MDI mode to MANUAL mode,

(6) the operation mode is changed from MANUAL mode to DATA SET mode and then to AUTO or MDI
mode.
NC resetting operation:
The state that the NC is reset by the change of the operation mode is called mode reset.
The NC resetting operation stops the machine operation immediately and the NC system is initialized at
the same time.

[Supplement] : 1. When the RESET button is pressed during axis movement, the machine slows down
and then stops axis movement. The actual reset is done after axis movement has
stopped.

2. Even if the RESET button is continuously pressed, reset is done only one time.

3. By the mode reset, the status conditions related to the spindle (spindle rotation,
orientation, spindle speed and selected gear range) will not be reset, and the
previous status is retained.
 3754-E P-322-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-5. Sequence Search and Mid-Start

Sequence search is used to start the operation from a required sequence of a main program. The specified
sequence is searched by the sequence name or the cursor, and then the operation is started from the
searched sequence by pressing the CYCLE START button.
The operating procedure for the sequence search is described below.

(1) Sequence Search by Sequence Name or No. of Blocks

When the main program is selected correctly in automatic mode, perform the following operation.
(1) Press AUTO.

/
[ CBgj rggi rsari psssn |
/
00000000

BIBHMHMBP
SBBBBFIBS
®©®@ @
BB 0©®© 0
@@ ©@@© n
E|ED ® (H) @
©©©©!ÿ
7 /
7 7
/[5) Press WRITE.
(4) Key in the sequence name.
(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) twice.

(3) Press function key [F1] (NUMBER SEARCH).

Fig. 2-119 Sequence Search by Sequence Name or No. of Blocks

a) Press the AUTO key.
b) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) twice.
Function names such as [F1] NUMBER SEARCH will be displayed.
c) Press function key [F1] (NUMBER SEARCH). “NS" is displayed on the 21st line of the display
screen.
d) Enter the specified sequence name or the required number of blocks.
e) Press the WRITE key.
The sequence name is searched for from the main program head currently selected, and the sequence
pointer moves to the found sequence name position. When the number of blocks has been keyed in, the
search is made in the specified number (either positive or negative) of blocks from the currently located
pointer position.
 •X

3754-E P-323-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

The following cases result in errors:

1) When the specified sequence name is not found in the program.

2) While the schedule program is executed (from schedule program start-up to the end).
3) Whether the search is made or not during the execution of a main program can be
selected by setting proper data at bit 3 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 4.

4) When the main program is not selected correctly.

Note: In cases 2) and3), the sequence number search can be executedafter resetting the NC.

(2) Sequence Search by Cursor

In the automatic mode, the sequence pointer may be moved as desired by the cursor keys when the
main program has been selected correctly and the display screen displays the program.
@ one sequence advance
@ one sequence return
In the following cases, the cursor keys are inoperative:
- While the schedule program is being executed
- When the display screen display is not the program display
- When the sequence pointer leaves the selected main program by the cursor key operation

(3) Restart after Sequence Search

Program execution starts from the sequence identified by the sequence pointer when the CYCLE
START button is pressed.
Since programmed commands which were not read during the sequence search are not valid, a model
status must be set as needed by entering the necessary commands from the keyboard so that the
actual status and the programmed status match.
[Supplement] : 1. During the sequence search, the read pointer is moved, while the modal instruction
value and coordinate instruction value are disregarded. Subprogram CALL and
GOTO are not done.

2. The sequence search is used for start-up after a pause during the machining work,
while the return search is used for the return to the block while the machining is
underway.

3. The number of the sequence repetition cannot be specified during sequence search.

4. Additionally, the optional block skip does not affect the sequence search.
 3754-E P-324-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-6. Return Search and Sequence Restart

When the machining cycle is interrupted during automatic operation because of tool breakage or other
troubles, this function is used to restart the operation after necessary measures such as tool replacement
have been taken.
After locating the sequence pointer to the specified sequence by return-search-operation, in which the
commands are processed in the CPU, press the SEQ. RESTART button. This positions the axes at the point
commanded last at the manual cutting feedrate. Press the CYCLE START button, then the operation will be
resumed from the same sequence.

(1) Return Search

When the main program is selected correctly in the automatic mode, carry out the steps following:

_J_ (1) Press AUTO.

rsn r5g°i nanrÿn

B00000S0

(DmXD (is
©©©© (E
CED (M) CB B3 CM]ElCEp3
pm <2)®(I)0 r
®O©0 "
7 / zL
7 7
/ (5) Press WRITE.
(4) Key In the sequence name and repetition count.
(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) twice.
(3) Press function key [F2] (RESTART).

Fig. 2-120 Return Search and Sequence Restart

a) Press the AUTO key.

b) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) twice.
c) Press function key [F2] (RESTART).
“RS" is displayed on the 21st line on the display screen.
 3754-E P-325
SECTION 2 OPERATION

d) Enter the sequence name and repetition count, or the block count.
Input format is as follows:
= RS I_I sequence name, repetition count or block count value
When the sequence name is specified, the repetition count must be less than 9999. If entry of the
repetition counter is omitted, it is regarded as “1”.
When the block count is specified, the count value must be less than 99999999.
For entering a block count, the relative number may be given as indicated below.
Example:
592 592nd block
Block count value which was counted at NC reset
**-2 The block two blocks ahead of the block count value above

e) Press the WRITE key.

The return operation is executed up to the specified sequence.
Restarting operation refers to the operation in which all the commands are processed within the control,
without giving output signals for axis motions, and S, T, M and B functions. CALL command, RTS
command and coordinate system shifting are also processed.
The block count is the count of the sequence executed from the program start after reset. Control
statements such as GOTO, CALL, etc. are not counted. The count value and sequence name are not
cleared by NC reset or by turning the power source on or off, and can therefore, be used for return after
reset. They are cleared when the operation begins.

[Supplement] : 1. When only function key [F2] (RESTART) is pressed and there is no instruction for the
sequence name or block count, an error occurs.
2. If return search operation is intended while a schedule or a main program is being
executed, an error occurs.

3. The return operation up to M02 of the program is possible by the [F2]

(RESTART) E [WRITE] key operation. Reset by M02 (or M03) is not carried out.
u_)
 3754-E P-326
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Sequence Restart

This function can be used only after the return search.

SEQ.
RESTART

Press the SEQ. RESTART button.

When the SEQ. RESTART button is pressed, the program status up to the specified block is returned
automatically.
Automatic return of miscellaneous functions:
a) Return of the last S code
Whenever there is an S code, the S code is executed unconditionally.
b) T code does not return automatically.
The T code (next tool instruction) does not return automatically. Therefore, if the next tool number,
which is now input, is a different one, it must be reset on the tool data setting page, or if the next tool
number is zero, input must be done by MDI before the start of return search operation.
c) Among the M codes, only those related to spindle operation can be recovered.
The M code is grouped, and the last modal state of the group returns successively.
- The M03, M04, M05, and M19 codes are regarded as belonging to the same group and the return
is made to the M code last given.
- The ones related to the ATC (M06, M63, M64, M65) and the APC (M60, etc.) do not return
automatically. Therefore, the operator should select the tool carefully.
- One-shot M codes (MOO, M01, etc.) do not return automatically.
d) The axes return to the point programmed in the return sequence at a manual cutting feedrate.
e) After axes have reached the return point in the sequence return operation, the operation stops
at that point independent of SINGLE BLOCK key setting. To resume the operation, the
CYCLE START button must be pressed.
1) Key in N100 after pressing function key [F2] (RESTART).
Then, press the WRITE key. This prepares for the return of the
latest state up to the N100.
2) Press the SEQ. RESTART button.
Search for
restart N99 The axes return to the point commanded last at a cutting feedrate
after the S and M states have been recovered automatically.
N100
3) After axes have reached the return point in the sequence
return operation, the operation stops at that point independent
of SINGLE BLOCK key setting. To resume the operation, the
CYCLE START button must be pressed.
 ,!JL

3754-E P-327-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-7. Sequence Stop (optional)

This is the function to stop the program execution at a desired sequence while the automatic operation is
carried out. Note that the sequence to be set must be the one already executed. The operation stops in the
same manner as a single block stop: the spindle, coolant and other miscellaneous functions which are
brought to a stop, when MOO is executed, do not stop. The operation can be resumed by simply pressing the
CYCLE START button.
The operation procedure is described below:
(1) Press AUTO.

[X QKUM»0«P7000 | (33Cp3C23(3HG“Ll[“ÿ)

B
Ail BIcTTnTTToTN
Hjf I If J If K If LT

©00© E
mms
(fTJ(ra)(ra)(M)(H)(ra)(E)(™)
S)T«
©®0© r
0G©O ""
/
(5) Press WRITE.
(4) Key in the sequence name.
(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) twice.
(3) Press function key [F3] (NUMBER STOP).

Fig. 2-121 Sequence Stop Operation

(1) Press the AUTO key.

(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) twice.

(3) Press function key [F3] (NUMBER STOP).

“NST is displayed on the 21st line on the display screen.
(4) Key in the sequence name where the operation is to be halted on the keyboard.
 3754-E P-328
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) Press the WRITE key.

When the block of the specified sequence name is read during automatic operation, theblocks up to the
sequence before the specified sequence are executed and the machine stops.
Example:

When N112 is entered following function key [F3] (NUMBER

N105
STOP) during the execution of N105 sequence, the machine
N106 stops after N112 execution and before N113 execution.

N111
N112
N113

The sequence name, wherethe sequence stop is to be executed, can be changed by specifying another
required sequence name. It is also possible to cancel the sequence stop by pressing the WRITE key
directly following function key [F3] (NUMBER STOP) without keying in any sequence name data.

[Supplement]: 1. The sequence stop setting is cleared by NC reset.

2. The sequence name entered for the step sequence name is handled as a character
string and therefore, comparison as a number is not made.

3. Setting during the scheduled operation causes errors.

4. If the main program is selected correctly, setting is possible either before or during
execution of the main program.
5. Even if the sequence name which has been already read is set, the program cannot
be stopped at that sequence.
 •X,

3754-E P-329-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-8. MDI Operation

MDI is an abbreviation for Manual Data Input and each block of data entered is executed as in automatic
mode operation.
The operation procedure is described below: (1) Press MDI.

[1 OKUMA QSP7000 | (Try) ranreyinsri

EEBBBBBS
7][7)E)f7)fTir71E]fl
O II P II Q II R II S II T II U F*
V II w II X || Y II Z TTIS
®®0 §
E D0®@
[n][ra][ra](H)[ra][ra)[g)[p] r"" D®@®
®© §o©o
7 7
/ (5) Press WRITE.
(4) Key in the data.
(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) twice.
(3) Press function key [F3] (PART PROGRAM).

Fig. 2-122 MDI Operation

(1) Press the MDI key.

“IN” is displayed on the 21st line on the display screen.

(2) Press function key [F3] (PART PROGRAM).

The title *MDI PROGRAM* is displayed on the display screen.
If this display page is not given, press the PAGE key until this page is displayed.
(Note that MDI operation is possible without this step.)

(3) Enter the data of one block on the keyboard.

This data is displayed on the console line (21st line).
 3754-E P-330-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) Press the WRITE key.

The entered data is displayed in the buffer field of the MDI program display. The RTMDI (Return from
MDI) Instruction is automatically inserted.
In the BUFFER field, only one block of commands may be entered. If an attempt is made to enter a
block of commands when another block of commands is displayed in the BUFFER field, the commands
presently displayed are cleared.
(5) Press the CYCLE START button.
The input data is executed when this button is pressed. The input data is transferred from the BUFFER
field to the CURRENT field and the BUFFER field is cleared.
(6) If steps (3) to (5) are executed repeatedly, the NC operates successively.
Automatic mode operation and MDI mode operation:
(1) During the execution of the automatic mode operation, the MDI mode operation may be inserted
after interrupting the automatic mode operation.
(2) Switching the operation mode from the automatic to the MDI causes the control to halt after the
execution of the commands in the block which has been read at the time of operation mode
switching, thus permitting the entry of the data. Note that the block which has just been read is
identified by the symbol “»" on the display screen. (The block being executed is designated with
TO
When the operation mode is switched from the Single Block mode to the MDI mode, the controlis placed
in the MDI mode right after the completion of the block, once it has been executed.
[Program] [MDI]

t N110
N111 GOO X100 Y100
N112
N113
N114
RTMDI

(3) If the MDI mode is switched on during N110 execution by automatic operation (single block mode
off), blocks up to N113 are executed and the machine stops operation. Then, if the machine is
returned to the automatic mode, the program execution is continued from block N114 after several
blocks are executed in the MDI mode.
(4) The commands entered the MDI mode are executed in the same manner as those in a program,
and the modal state established in the MDI mode will remain active after the operation mode is
switched back to automatic.

(5) When the MDI mode is selected while the cutter radius compensation function is active, the axis
movement commands keyed in and executed in the MDI mode are also controlled by this function.
(6) The manually inputted data may be executed directly after the commands of the block which has
been executed when the operation mode is switched from the automatic (single block mode off) to
the MDI. That is, the data reading-in mode as in the single block mode can be set. This setting is
made by bit 7 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 2.
 3754-E P-331
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Subprogram call in the MDI mode operation:

(1) Although the CALL command (single call) may be activated in the MDI mode, the MODIN command
(call of subprogram after axis movement) is not effective in this mode. For the call of a
subprogram, the main program from which the subprogram is called should be selected before it is
called in the MDI mode.
(2) During the execution of a subprogram, the single block mode may be turned on and off as needed.
While the single block mode is off, the called subprogram is executed up to its end and then the
control stops operation. If the single block mode is on, the called subprogram is executed by one
block and the control stops. Pressing the CYCLE START button after that causes blocks of
commands to be executed sequentially block by block each time it is pressed. The entry of new
data is not allowed until the completion of the called subprogram.

[Supplement] : 1. The following commands cannot be specified in the MDI mode:

Branch commands GOTO and IF
Commands used in schedule program VSET, PSELECT, etc.

2. During the execution of a schedule program, the MDI mode operation is possible if a
main program is not being executed.

3. The CYCLE START button becomes effective when it is released after it is pressed
as in the automatic mode operation.
 3754-E P-332
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-9. Single Block

This is the function to check a program by actually executing it block-by-block. The single block mode is
activated by pressing the SINGLE BLOCK key on the machine operation panel.

rsiNGLE
BLOCK

7 Press SINGLE BLOCK key (lamp ON).

There are two types of single blocks.

(1) Execute single block

This stops by the block accompanying axis movement execution, miscellaneous function operation or
coordinate system setting. This does not stop by control statements such as CALL, GOTO, etc., or a
macro call command, return command, and NOEX statement.
(2) Read single block
This stops at all blocks including the control statement.
a) Execute single block is generally used, but for checking programmed operation, read single
block is used.
b) Read single block is switched on by setting 1 at bit 0 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 2.

c) Execute single block is determined by switch status after one-block execution.

The read single block is determined by switch status when one block is read.

d) If the single block is switched on during automatic operation and single block OFF state, the
block under execution is completed and the machine stops operation. If there is any buffered
block at this stage, one block is executed every time the CYCLE START button is pressed. If
the buffer empties, a new block is read and executed.

e) Read single block is used to stop the execution of a program by each control statement, IF,
GOTO and VSET in the schedule program.
f) During the program execution called in MDI mode, setting of the SINGLE BLOCK key is
effective.

g) For the details of the stopping manner during single block mode at macro codes, refer to the
appropriate section.
h) During the area machining mode, the axis stops at the completion of each motion when the
single block is on.
 •A

3754-E P-333
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-10. Optional Block Skip

Any block specified with the slash (/) by the program can be disregarded when the BLOCK SKIP key on the
machine operation pane! is switched on.

BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK

SKIP SKIP SKIP
1 2 3

Press BLOCK SKIP key (lamp ON).

One BLOCK SKIP key is provided as a standard function. Optionally up to three keys are available. For
details, consult Section 2, 9, “Optional Block Skip” in the Programming Manual for OSP7000M.

12-11. Program Branch

The program branch command in the part program is executed by pressing the PROGRAM BRANCH key.

PROGRAM PROGRAM
BLANCH BUNCH
1 2

Turn on the PROGRAM BRANCH.

Two PROGRAM BRANCH keys are provided and each of them turns on/off a program branch command
respectively.
For details, refer to Section 2,10, in the Programming Manual for OSP7000M.

12-12. Optional Stop

Program stop is done in the same way as for MOO, by the block specified by the M01 in the program, by
switching on the OPTIONAL STOP key on the machine operation panel. When the key is off, M01 is
neglected.

[OPTIONAL
STOP

Press OPTIONAL STOP key (lamp ON).

[Supplement] : When M01 is executed, the spindle rotation and coolant supply etc. stop as required.
These cannot, however, be returned automatically at the next cycle start.
 X

3754-E P-334
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-13. Mirror Image

Each of X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th, and 6th axes has a flat key for turning on and off the mirror image function, and the
sign of the coordinate value of the ON axis is reversed.
Press MIRROR IMAGE key while holding
down INTERLOCK RELEASE key.

MIRROR ’MIRROR MIRROR

IMAGE IMAGE IMAGE
X Y Z

[INTER
LOCK
RELEASE

The operation procedure is described below:

(1) Press the MIRROR IMAGE key of the desired axis for which mirror image function is to be
performed while holding down the INTERLOCK RELEASE key.

(2) To cancel the mirror image function, press the MIRROR IMAGE key while holding down the
INTERLOCK RELEASE key again.
(3) In addition, there is a programmable mirror image (G62) function, having the mutual relation
described below

Mirror Image Mirror Image Switch of the Coordinate

by Switch by G Code Value Data Signs
OFF OFF Does not switch
OFF ON Switches
ON OFF Switches
ON ON Does not switch

The relation is established for each axis, independently.

The programmable mirror image is optional.
 X

3754-E P-335
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Example:
a) In absolute dimensioning MIRROR IMAGE b) In incremental dimensioning
N80 G90 X100Y100 Setting — N80G90X100Y100
N81 X50 Y80 changed here N81 G91 X-50 Y-20

Y (50, 120) (150, 120)

Y
(100, 100)
100-
10Or
(-50, 80)
-
50-
(50, 80)
/
/
/'I
/
/ 50-
(50, 80)
(100, 100)
(150,80)

/ /
/ /
X
50 / / 100 50 100
/
/ /
i (50, -80)
"
(-50,-80)

© X,Y: Normal ® X,Y: Mirror image ON

@ X : Mirror image ON ® X : Normal
Y : Normal Y : Mirror image ON
Fig. 2-123 Example of Mirror Image
When the mirror image is on, as shown in the example, the sign of the programmed command itself is
switched, disregarding whether the selected dimensioning system is absolute or incremental.

[Supplement] : 1. When the MIRROR IMAGE key is changed during automatic operation, the state will
be changed over from the newly read block. The buffered commands are executed in
the previously selected mirror image/normal state.

2. During the single block mode operation switching, the MIRROR IMAGE key from on
to off or vice versa after the completion of a block of commands will change over the
state from the next block.
Example: N100 When, after the execution block N101 in the single block
mode, start-up is done with mirror image ON, the
N101
operation starts from N102 in the mirror image ON state.
N102

Mirror image ON

3. Be aware of the following related capabilities:

The mirror image function is valid for the instruction G92 P_ which establishes a
work coordinate system.

4. The mirror image function is valid for the instruction G51 P_ which indicates the
coordinates of the center for scaling.
 3754-E P-336
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : 5. The mirror image function is invalid for the coordinate system shift G11 P_.
6. While the mirror image function is active, G codes which indicate the direction of axis
movement and I, J, and K commands are changed as needed.
Circular interpolation (G02.G03)
Cutter radius compensation (G41.G42), etc.

7. The positioning direction for 660 one-direction positioning is not changed even in a
mirror image ON state.
Example:
Y

Mirror image ON Mirror image OFF

8. On the CRT, the mirror image ON axes are identified by the sign before the axis
address of X, Y, Z, etc.
Refer to Section 4-5, “Programmable Mirror Image (G62)" in the Programming
Manual for OSP7000M for details.

12-13-1. Mirror Image in the Work Coordinate System

Normally, when programming is executed in the local coordinate system, the mirror image function is
effective in the local coordinate system. However, it is also possible to activate the mirror image function in
the work coordinate system currently selected by changing parameter data.

(1) Parameter Setting

Whether the mirror image function is activated in the local coordinate system or in the work coordinate
system can be set at the following parameter:

NC Optional Parameter (bit) No. 34, bit 2

0 The mirror image function is activated in the local coordinate system.
1 The mirror image function is activated in the work coordinate system.
The initial setting is “0”.

A When the setting has been changed, press function key [F7] (BACKUP). After the completion
CAUTION
-
:
of backup operation, turn off the power to the NC and turn it back on again. The new setting
does not become effective only by changing the setting.
 X.

3754-E P-337
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Comparison of Mirror Image Between in the Local Coordinate System and in the Work Coordinate
System
In the figure to the right, the local coordinate system X’-Y’ is set on the X-Y plane of the work coordinate
system X-Y, and area A is machined. Under such conditions, the relation of mirror image between in the
local coordinate system and in the work coordinate system is as explained below.
Yi

*
(J

o X

a) In the G90 (absolute command) mode

1) Mirror image in the local coordinate system
Y

I
&

Fig. 2-124 Mirror Image in the Local Coordinate System (G90 Mode)
2) Mirror image in the work coordinate system
«* Y
e
rf- 4
4* h.
%

or
*
o x

Fig. 2-125 Mirror Image in the Work Coordinate System (G90 Mode)
 X

3754-E P-338
SECTION OPERATION
2

b) In the G91 (incremental command) mode

1) Mirror image in the local coordinate system
Y

K w
s
*
0 X

Fig. 2-126 Mirror Image in the Local Coordinate System (G91 Mode)

2) Mirror image in the work coordinate system

Y :
I
re*

b• I,

c-
0
& X
I

Fig. 2-127 Mirror Image in the Work Coordinate System (G91 Mode)

In the G91 mode, if no rotational elements are included in the local coordinate system and the
coordinate system is shifted only parallel, the mirror image function has the same effect in the local and
work coordinate systems.
Explanation for the figures:
AX X-axis mirror image is turned on for machining area A.
AY Y-axis mirror image is turned on for machining area A.
AXY X-axis mirror image and Y-axis mirror image are turned on for machining area A.
(Machining order : a -ÿ
b-* c-* d)
 -L

3754-E P-339
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-14. Override
These are rotary switches to change the feedrate or the spindle speed within a certain range during machine
operation.
(1) Feedrate Override
Programmed, manually input, or dial-set feedrates can be changed during operation.
a) Rapid feedrate override
Pendant Operation Panel Machine Operation panel

RAPID OVERRIDE (%) RAPID OVERRIDE (%)

80 50
10 70
1
5 ,80
1 90
0

This is effective during manual rapid feed operation and programmed rapid feed mode (GOO, G60,
etc.).
When 100% is selected, the axes move at the rapid feedrate of the machine.

b) Cutting feedrate override

This is effective for the programmed cutting feedrates in G01, G02, G03 and other modes.
Pendant Operation Panel Machine Operation panel
FEEDRATE (%) FEEDRATE (%)

80»aiÿ.l“0
70
90 95®
8Vn-ay7~i05
SO
60 120 70
180 110
60 Oj 60 120
140
40 150 50 180
80 160 40 140
20 170 80 150
10 180 20 160
60 aw wo 10 170
6 o mm
[Supplement] : 1 . Override rotary switch setting is ignored in tapping cycles called by G74 and G84.
2. After the M136 execution, the override rate is fixed at 100% irrespective of the rotary
switch setting until M137 is commanded and executed.

3. The axis does not move at a 0% override switch setting.

 .JL

3754-E P-340-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Spindle Speed Override

This is a rotary switch to change the spindle speed on the DC or VAC spindle drive motor specification.
13 steps from 50% to 200% can be selected.
SPINDLE OVERRIDE

no 120 130
100. .140
90
hi

80 160

70 180
50 200

With an S command, spindle drive gear range selection is done automatically. This gear range selection
is made assuming that the override switch is set as 100%. Therefore, if an override rate other than
100% is selected, the actual spindle speed might require the gear range change although the
programmed spindle speed does not change. In this case, no gear range change is actually done and
the following spindle speed is selected, instead.
a) The S command causes a spindle speed over the maximum spindle speed in the selected
range when it is multiplied by the set override rate.
The spindle rotates at the maximum spindle speed in the selected gear range.
b) The S command causes a spindle speed below the minimum spindle speed in the selected
range to occur when it is multiplied by the set override rate.
The spindle rotates at the minimum spindle speed in the selected gear range.
The actual spindle speed is displayed on the display screen.
 3754-E P-341-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-15. Manual Intervention During Automatic Operation and Restart

Manualintervention refers to the function in whichmanual operation is performed during AUTO or MDI mode
operations.
The operation below is the procedure to return to carry out manual operation using this manual intervention
function.
Pendant Operation Panel Machine Operation Panel
VMANUAL
INT INT
ON OFF AUTO
[MANUAL
MID AUTO MANUAL is turned on
Press MANUAL INT ON key¬ when pressed once, and then
turned off when pressed again.
press MANUAL INT OFF key.

(1) During the AUTO or MDI mode operation, press either the SLIDE HOLD button or the SINGLE
BLOCK button to stop the cycle.
(2) Press the MANUAL INT. ON (MID AUTO MANUAL) button (lamp ON).
The control is now placed in the manual intervention mode.

(3) Carry out necessary manual operations.

- Manual axis cutting feed
- Manual axis rapid feed
- Manual axis feed by pulse handle
- Spindle rotation
- Tool change, etc.
After manual axis feed, that distance is displayed on the 3rd page of ACT POSIT pages:
[Screen display]
MANUAL SHIFT ACTUL Manually shifted amount in the present manual intervention
operation.
MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL A total of manually shifted amounts until the present manual
intervention operation.

(4) Before restarting the sequence operation, restore the miscellaneous functions to the previous
conditions, and locate the axes near the position where the intervention has been made using
manual cutting feed or pulse handle. Then, press the SEQ. RESTART button. With this, the axes
return to the original position. The data displayed at MANUAL SHIFT ACTUL will become zero at
the same time.

A CAUTION ’ ln tllis return operation, the axes are fed at a rapid feedrate. Therefore, it is necessary to
- confirm that the return motion will not cause interference between the spindle or the cutting
tool with the workpiece or the fixture on the table.
If the SEQ. RESTART button is not pressed, the manually fed amount is not zeroed.
 ,x

3754-E P-342
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(5) Pressing the MANUAL INT. ON (MID AUTO MANUAL) or SEQ. RESTART button automatically
cancels the manual intervention mode.
Example of Manual Intervention:

Manually a)
shifted SEQ.RESTART not pressed after manual
axis feed
amount
<r b)
SEQ.RESTART pressed after manual axis
Manual intervention feed
activated point
Programmed path

ct
c
St r a) SEQ.RESTART not pressed after manual
b) c) axis feed
b) SEQ.RESTART pressed after manual axis
feed
c /'Total of manually
shifted amounts
c) SEQ.RESTART not pressed after manual

a)
/ axis feed
programmed path

[Supplement] : During manual intervention mode, automatic return of miscellaneous functions is not
made. This permits the change of spindle speed or tools during this mode.

A CAUTION : Even when t001 offset and/or cutter radius compensation data has been changed for a newly
- set tool (manual change), this data does not become effective at the point when the return to
the originally located position is completed.
 3754-E P-343-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-16. Inserting Pulse Handle Operations

On a machining center, it is sometimes required to feed the Z-axis manually while positioning of the X- and
Y-axis is made as programmed. Or when machining a cast workpiece on which stock removal amount varies
greatly, it is necessary to adjust the depth of cut manually. In such operations, axis motion controlled by the
pulse handle can be inserted to the programmed axis movements.
Operation to insert axis movement by the pulse handle is explained below:

[PULSE
HANDLE
[ SHIFT

/Press PULSE HANDLE SHIFT key (lamp ON).

(1) Press the PULSE HANDLE SHIFT key to turn it on (lamp ON).
(2) Set the AXIS SELECT selector on the pulse handle operation panel to the axis which is to be
moved. Also select the multiplication factor.

(3) Feed the axis by turning the pulse handle.

The amount fed by the pulse handle is shown in the MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL line. Automatic return is
not made for the amount fed by the pulse handle. If it is then necessary to return the axis by turning the
pulse handle while observing the MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL data on the display screen.

[Supplement] : 1. The MANUAL SHIFT ACTUL data is cleared (“0”) when the MANUAL INT. ON key is
pressed.

2. The MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL data is cleared (“0”) when the POWER ON button is
pressed.
It is also cleared when the RESET button is pressed when parametric data (bit 2 of
NC optional parameter (bit) No. 4) is so set.
3. Axis travel amount using the pulse handle is added to the axis position data which is
used for judging travel end.
4. While the PULSE HANDLE SHIFT key is off, the pulse handle is inoperative.
 3754-E P-344-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-17. Lock Functions

(1) Machine Lock
This is the function to check the program only by the display while all machine movement is stopped.
The actual position values given on display screen are updated as the program is executed.
Operating Procedure:
Press MACHINE LOCK key while holding
down INTERLOCK RELEASE key.

TNTER MACHINE
LOCK LOCK
RELEASE

Press the MACHINE LOCK key while holding down the INTERLOCK RELEASE key. The control is
then placed in the machine lock state.
To cancel the machine lock state, press the MACHINE LOCK key while holding down the INTERLOCK
RELEASE key.
(2) Cancellation of Axis Command
This is the function to lock the movement of the specified axis. It is effectively used to plot the
programmed path by a pen fixed on the spindle.
Auxiliary functions other than S,T and M are all locked.
M functions associated with an axis motion are not executed.
The axis to be locked is set to the Z-axis as the standard specification but this may be optionally
changed to the X- or Y-axis.
(3) S, T, and M Function Lock (optional)
This is the function to check the program by executing the axis movement commands without
miscellaneous commands.
Press STM LOCK key (lamp ON).
Press AXIS COM. CANCEL key (lamp ON).

S.T.M ’AXIS
LOCK COM.
CANCEL

[Supplement] : 1. Override or dry function is also effective as in normal cutting operation.

2. The axis specified by the axis command cancel function may be moved by manual or
manual intervention operation.
3. The spindle does not turn while the STM lock function is active. In this mode, the
feedrate programmed in “mm/rev” mode is calculated assuming that the spindle
speed is 2000 rpm.
4. The home position return which is accompanied by an M06 tool change command is
ineffective as long as the STM lock function is active.
5. While the STM lock function is active, manual operation of S, T and M functions is
possible by manual intervention operation.
 3754-E P-345
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-18. Dry Run

Dry run is a function for running the machine at the feedrate set by the cutting feedrate rotary switch on the
machine operation panel, while disregarding the programmed feedrates in G01, G02, G03 and other similar
modes.
_
(inchl/min) JOG
(mm/min) SPEED
INTER DRY “S 600
LOCK RUN
RELEASE 1000
60-
Press DRY RUN key while holding 20'
down INTERLOCK RELEASE key. 1 4000

In the rapid feed (GOO) mode, the data set at bit 2 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 2 determines whether
the dry run is effective or not.
Switching the DRY RUN key on/off is possible even while commands in a block are being executed. When
changed over, the machine is immediately set to the state selected.
S, T and M functions are executed as usual when the DRY RUN key is on.
The dry run function is effective while the machine lock function is active.
Be careful when activating this dry run function since it is effective during a G74 and G84 tapping cycle, or
during the G31 skip function.
Be sure to press the INTERLOCK RELEASE key when pressing the DRY RUN key to turn on or off the DRY
RUN function.

12-19. Operation End Light (optional)

The operation end light goes on when the following conditions have been satisfied. However, the LIGHT
switch on the OPERATION END MODE panel must first be turned on.

Mode Condition LIGHT

Automatic operation When program is completed

(1) schedule program after executing END in a
Single block off
schedule program.
(2) main program after executing MOO, M01,
§
M02 or M30 in a main program. _ o
Restarting will extinguish the operation end light.
When the alarm occurs, resetting the OSP7000M will extinguish the operation end light.

12-20. Operation End Buzzer (optional)

Operates in the same conditions as the operation end light. The operation end BUZZER
buzzer sounds when these conditions have been satisfied. However, the
BUZZER switch on the OPERATION END MODE panel must first be turned on.
The buzzer will sound during the period set by the MC user parameter (word) No.
7 - operation end buzzer timer.
o
Restarting will cut off the operation end buzzer.
 3754-E P-346
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-21. Error Light (optional) ERROR LIGHT

The error light is turned on when an alarm state is detected. The ERROR LIGHT I
switch must first be turned on. The lamp is turned off when the control is reset. If
the control is provided with the alarm warninglight specification, the operation end
light or the operation end buzzer will not be activated when an alarm occurs. 0o
12-22. Auto Power Off (optional)
The power cuts off when the following conditions have been satisfied. However, the AUTO POWER OFF
switch on the OPERATION END MODE panel must first be turned on.
AUTO POWER
Mode Condition OFF
Automatic operation (1) Schedule program after executing END in a I
Single block off schedule program
(2) Main program after executing M02 or M30 in
a main program _ §>
o
When this function is used and there are blocks changing/setting parameters on the program, it is
recommended to make the backup function effective with M02/M03 (Set “1" at NC optional parameter (bit)
No. 33, bit 1).
 -X

3754-E P-347-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-23. Library Program Registration

This is the function necessary for executing such items as a subprogram and a G code macro through the
MDI operation or for operating the program which contains subprogram call commands in the large capacity
mode operation after specifying the S option. That is, the registration of subprograms s possible with this
library program registration function. Such a registration is usually made when the PROGRAM SELECT
function key is pressed.
The operating procedure is shown below:
(1) Press AUTO.

(H | E T. M || 8S ||~sr|| UMT ||«U«M|

0BBSBSSS
0000GL)00(§§
0000000®
00000000
00000GEM)
®©®0 (BS
©©©©
[|T3[ra][ra][M][ra)[ra]Cg)[p]
©@@© r
7 /
W® ®0©0 t
7
(2) Press (unction key [F8] (EXTEND).
(3) Press function key [F1] (LIBRARY P.SET).

Fig. 2-128 Registering Library Programs

(1) Press the AUTO key.

(2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND).The function messages will change as shown above. (The
message “LIBRARY P. SET" appears above F1 .)
(3) Press function key [F1] (LIBRARY P. SET).
“LP” is displayed on the 21st line on display screen.
 3754-E P-348-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Operating procedure for library program registration:

(1) Library Program Directory Display
Press function key [F1] (LIBRARY P.SET), key in “LP t_j " and then press the WRITE key.

bytes. __ _
The display screen displays the library program directory and the remaining capacity in the number of

0100 N
AUTO OPERATION 3

LIBWWY raocwn
SIZE

86
0100 10

nsr
1904

-LP
•LP 0180,n.sua
•IP

UWflfff (fCSSACcj
r. SET I IBuJTW’SJ CDaoe)

(ED(E2D CED COD CES(ZSCEZ)(ES

Fig. 2-129 Library Program Directory Display

When library program directory is displayed on two pages, use the BS or WRITE key to change the
display screen.
(2) Library Program Registration
Press function key [F1] (LIBRARY P. SET) and key in program name and file name as follows:
LP «_i program name, file name [WRITE]
The library program can now be registered.
When a file name is omitted, subprograms in all the SSB files are registered when the entered program
name is ‘‘O****’’.
When a program name is omitted, all the subprograms in the file specified following the comma (,) are
registered as library programs.
Up to 65 subprograms can be registered.
Note that a main program cannot be registered as a library program.
(3) Deleting Library Program
Press function key [F1] (LIBRARY P. SET) and key in the program name as follows:
LP i_i program name;C [WRITE]
With the operation above, the programs registered as library programs are deleted.
 JL

3754-E P-349
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(4) Initializing Library Program

Press function key [F1] (LIBRARY P.SET) and key in as follows:
LP u_i ;l [WRITE]
With the operation above, the programs registered as library programs are all deleted.

(5) Specifying Buffer Size of Library Program

Press function key [F1] (LIBRARY P.SET) and key in as follows:
LPi_i n;l [WRITE]

With the operation above, the buffer size of “n" bytes for registering the library programs is ensured. At
the time of delivery, this “n” is set at “0”.
Note that when the buffer size specification is changed, the library program registration state and the
program selection state are all cleared.

[Supplement] : To ensure the NC program registration area for operation without using library programs
as much as practicable, zero the library program registration by the operation below.
Press function key [F1] (LIBRARY P. SET) and key in as follows:
LPu 0;l [WRITE]
The library programs registered in the operations above, can be accessed by the required MDI mode
operation. They can also be referenced in the S option mode or the equivalent operation mode (DNC,
for instance).
(6) The subprograms in the file which have an extension LIB are automatically registered as library
programs when power supply to the control is turned on. Therefore, G code macro or other
subprograms which are frequently used are recommended to be stored in the LIB file. This permits
them to be called any time as conventional G codes.

A CAUTION ' A library program is distinguished only by its program name. Therefore, it is impossible to
- register more than one library program which have the same name.
If the subprogram in the user program has the same name as the library program, the library
program is given priority when such a subprogram is intended to be called.
(2) Turn off and on the power alter adding a new library program.
12-24. Work Counter (optional)
Count data is incremented when the machining completion signal (M02 or M30) is executed. The counter
has a six-digit capacity (0 to 999999). It is provided with the reset function.

[l oooooo |

Reset button
 A

3754-E P-350
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-25. Hour Meter (optional)

POWER ON TIME
(1) POWER ON TIME Hour Meter
The hour meter accumulates length of time in which operation
power has been turned on.
l|0 1 2 3 4 |
Hour meter range: 0 to 99999.9 hours
HOURMETER

(2) NC RUNNING TIME Hour Meter NC RUNNING TIME

The hour meter accumulates length of time in which the RUN lamp O
in the NC operation panel status indicating lamps has been lit. RESET

Hour meter range: 0 to 9999.9 hours |[0 1 2 3 4 l [T|H~|

The hour meter is provided with the RESET button.
HOURMETER

(3) CUTTING TIME Hour Meter CUTTING TIME

The hour meter accumulates length of time in which cutting has O

RESET
been conducted (G01, G02 or G03 mode) in the automatic or MDI
operations.
Hour meter range: 0 to 9999.9 hours
[|0 1 2 3 4m
HOURMETER
The hour meter is provided with the RESET button.

(4) SPINDLE REVOLUTION TIME Hour Meter SPINDLE

REVOLUTION TIME
The hour meter accumulates length of time in which the spindle has
been rotating (CW or CCW) disregarding the operation mode. O
RESET
Hour meter range: 0 to 9999.9 hours
||0 1 2 3 4 |.|S]H|
The hour meter is provided with the RESET button.
HOURMETER

[Supplement] : When hour meters are selected, (1) POWER ON TIME hour meter and (2) NC RUNNING
TIME hour meter are usually equipped.
 .X.

3754-E P-351
SECTION 2 OPERATION

12-26. F1-Digit Feed (optional)

(1) The F1-digit feed function allows the use of feedrate setting dials (F1 to F8, or F1 to F4) on the F1
to digit feed operation panel. The operator should set axis feedrates on these dials and when F1 to
F8 (or F1 to F4) command is read, the corresponding feedrate setting dial is selected and axis
motion commands are executed at the feedrate set on the dial.

(2) The indicating lamp above the dial lights up when the corresponding feedrate setting dial is
selected. Once the dial is selected, the selected condition is not cleared by resetting the NC. It is
cleared when a four-digit F command is executed or the power to the control is turned off.
(3) Setting of the dial can be changed while a cutting is in progress.

(4) The feedrate override dial is ineffective while a feedrate command is given in one-digit F command.

(5) An alarm occurs if an F1-digit command is given in the G95 (feed per revolution) mode.

FI F2 F*
1.0 100 1.0 MO 1.0 too
500 10 600 10 to
1.0 100. 1.0 100 1.0 100
1000 40 / .1000 40 .1000 40
10 60 1 2.0 60 10. 60'
2000 SO 2000 SO 2000. SO
0.2 M' 0.2 0.2 20’
0.04 l1 4000 100 0.04 1 4000 100 0.04 4000 100

L F1-digit Feedrate Setting Dials-

 3754-E P-352-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13. MANUAL OPERATION FUNCTIONS

Manual operation is possible when the MANUAL lamp is on or flickering.

13-1. Manual Axis Feed Functions

13-1-1. Manual Rapid Feed
It is possible to manually feed each axis at a rapid feedrate.

(1) Select the axis to feed by the AXIS SELECT switch (key).
Machine Operation Panel

AXIS SELECT -1
X Y
VZ

4 5 PULSE
HANDLE

(2) Select the override rate by this rapid feedrate selection rotary switch.
This switch is operative while an axis is being fed.
Machine Operation Panel

RAPID OVERRIDE (%)

30 50
10. 70
5 80
1 90
o '[Tool

(3) Press the RAPID/+ button to feed the axis in the plus direction.
Press the RAPID/- button to feed the axis in the minus direction.
The axis moves only as long as these buttons are pressed down. When they are released, axis motion
stops.
Machine Operation Panel

r MANUAL RAPID FEED]

+
 „JL

3754-E P-353-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13-1-2. Manual Cutting (Jog) Feed

It is possible to manually feed each axis at a specific jog feedrate.
(1) Select the axis to feed by the AXIS SELECT switch (key).
Machine Operation Panel

AXIS SELECT -1
7
X Y z

4 5 PULSE
HANDLE

(2) Select the jog feedrate by the jog feedrate selector switch. This rotary switch is operative even
during axis feed.
Machine Operation Panel

200
600
100
1000
GO i
2000
20
1 4000

(3) Press the JOG/+ button to feed the axis in the plus direction.
Press the JOG/- button to feed the axis in the minus direction.
Pressing these buttons once will activate the axis feed until the JOG OFF button is pressed.
While an axis is moving, pressing the JOG feed button, which requires feed in the opposite direction,
stops the axis feed then starts in the newly selected direction. Therefore, an indicating lamp is provided
for each of the JOG feed buttons so that the operator can know the direction of present axis feed.
Machine Operation Panel

MANUAL CUTTING
(JOG) FEED

+ OFF

(4) When the JOG OFF button is pressed, the axis feed is stopped.
 3754-E P-354-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13-1-3. Manual Pulse Feed

It is possible to feed each axis using the pulse handle.

(1) Select the PULSE HANDLE from AXIS SELECT.

Machine Operation Panel
AXIS SELECT

4 5 PULSE
HANDLE

(2) Select the magnification factor with the magnification factor selector switch.
1 The selected axis is fed 0.001 mm (0.00004 in.) each pulse.
10 The selected axis is fed 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.) each pulse.
50 The selected axis is fed 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) each pulse.

(3) Select the axis to be fed with the AXIS SELECT switch (key).

(4) Turn the pulse handle.

Turning the handle in the clockwise direction feeds the axis in the positive (plus) direction.
Turning the handle in the counterclockwise direction feeds the axis in the negative (minus) direction.
[Supplement] : When “50" is selected for the magnification, the axis feeds almost as fast as rapid
feedrate. In this case, the alarm sometimes occurs.

J-L-L

PULSE HANOLE
Main X Y 2
10/1

50/1
_
+

OKUMA,

I
I

Ir

:
 .X

3754-E P-355
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13-1-4. Crossrail Control

Crossrail can be moved rapidly.

(1) Select CROSS RAIL.

x Y 2
PULSE
HANDLE CROSSRAIL

(2) Turn the crossrail clamp/unclamp switch in the unclamp position.

CROSSRAIL

(3) After making sure that the crossrail clamp indication lamp has been turned off, press the RAPID/+ or
RAPID/- button depending on the desired crossrail movement direction.
RAPID/+ upward
RAPID/- downward

W + W

[Supplement] : When the crossrail movable indicating lamp is provided and if it is not on, pressing the
RAPID/+ or RAPID/- button does not start crossrail movement. This indicates that the
spindlehead is positioned either at the left or at the right end of the crossrail. Move the
. spindlehead (Y-axis) away from the end position.
 CO
N>

c: a)
•g
33 CL
a ©
B> O
5 "a
® (D
S
o o o O =2:
O
,— ,
—, - -, ,- 3

1—f HBH
ATC OPERATION
AXIS SELECT NC OPERATION
- CB CYCLE START

0@3(5) QQfg RE INTER

LOCK

__
RBEASE

OCONTROLOFF RR(2) BRRR RS1S1RBH HHHB •gB SLIDE HOLD

'W RAPID
TJ]
vKmmnBH
f KE
I SPINOLE I m civ
WA JOG

BEGB BfBOD
RESTART

RAPID
01 O STOP
o vwv
BBIl BRRR
'\A/ % OVERRII (mm/min) SPEED m % FEEDRATE
30 50 / TO 110
NDLEBVERRI
<2° 130 \ 200 90 96 nnf EMG. STOP
S2> 140
500 20 90. tv-A—fl . 105 NC PANEL
70 Lÿ110 EDIT
DOOR INTERLOCK 5, 4.0 60 120 LOCK UNLOCK LOCK
O 1. ,90 1000 40

GS
gQ

~
60 100

N| • I<00
70

50’
,oN 2\ 50'
80
40 q
30
I
IO, RESET

" 0.0V.I O\ X
170
4000060
”
5T '200180
/ \ \ \ \

o o o o
\ Spindle release

Spindle override Spindle counterclockwise operation

Spindle orientation Spindle stop

Interlock release Spindle clockwise operation CO

m
O
d
o
z
1X3
03
O 3
2 •
m
3 m
5 ~P
U tn
Z CD
 -X.

3754-E P-357
SECTION 2 OPERATION

a) Spindle rotation
Enter the desired spindle speed (S command) in the MDI mode. This automatically selects the
spindle drive gear range. Note that an S command cannot be given in the manual mode.
Switch to the manual mode, select the spindle rotation direction either CW or CCW, then press the
key selected while holding down INTERLOCK RELEASE button
The spindle starts rotation at a commanded speed. When the spindle speed override rotary switch
is set at other than 100%, the spindle rotates at the overridden speed.

b) Spindle stop
Press the SPINDLE STOP button to stop the spindle.

c) Spindle release
Press the SPINDLE RELEASE button to put the spindle gear into the release (neutral) position.
This button is operative only while the spindle stays at rest (SPINDLE STOP button pressed). This
release state permits manual spindle rotation.
Pressing the CW/CCW button while the spindle is in the release state starts the spindle at a
commanded speed after the gear range previously selected has been selected again. The spindle
release cannot be canceled in any other way.

d) Spindle orientation
Press the SPINDLE ORIENTATION button while holding down INTERLOCK RELEASE button to
stop the spindle at a definite angular position. This ORIENTATION button is operative while the
spindle is rotating. Pressing the ORIENTATION button simultaneously initiates spindle orientation
and triggers the button’s indicator lamp.
Upon completion of the orientation, the lamp stops flashing and remains illuminated. Rotating the
spindle cancels the orientation state. The orientation position and speed are set by machine
system parameters.
 3754-E P-358
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13-3. Indexing Swivel Head (Indexing Attachment)

The swivel head (attachment) can be indexed to the required position by pressing the swivel head
(attachment) indexing start button after selecting the requiredposition (FR/RH/RR/LH) by the index position
selecting switch. For the swivel head (attachment) indexing operation, following conditions must be met.

BACK RIGHT

O ¥'
INDLE INDEX

SWIVAL HEAD

Conditions for the operation:

(1) Spindle is stopped.

(2) Tool is clamped (both for vertical and horizontal spindles).

(3) Tool change arm is retracted.

(4) Swivel head in indexable range indicating lamp is illuminated.

(5) Swivel head index pin is extracted, (only for MCM)

(6) Spindle orientation pin is not extracted.

(Swivel head index command includes the orientation pin extraction.)
(7) Not in alarm A occurrence

(8) ATC operation sequence number is within 1 to 19, 50 to 66. (only for MCM)

[Supplement] : 1. In completely automated operation including ATC, the swivel head is automatically
indexed for automatic tool change operation after Z-axis is moved up to the tool
change position, (only for MCM)
RR position for vertical spindle
FR position for horizontal spindle

2. Usually, the swivel head (attachment) is rotated in the clockwise direction. In the M17
mode, it is rotated in the counterclockwise direction.
 .X

3754-E P-359
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13-4. ATC
13-4-1. ATC Operations

(1) Establishment of Correspondence between Toolpot Numbers and Tool Numbers by Manual Tool
Change Operation
This method is applied to the following models with 32-tool or smaller ATC capacity.
MC-30VA, MC-40VA, MC-50VA, MC-60VA
In the memory-random ATC system the tool in the spindle is returned to the toolpot in which the tool to be
set in the spindle next is held. Therefore, the correspondence between the toolpot numbers and the tool
numbers changes each time the automatic tool change cycle is carried out. This means that the initial
correspondence between toolpot numbers and tool numbers must be set and stored in the memory
before starting the ATC operation.
For setting this correspondence, there are two ways as follows:

1) The table listing the correspondence between the toolpot numbers and tool numbers is
made in advance, the correspondence table is established on the screen and individual
tools are stored in the corresponding toolpots according to the established
correspondence.

2) A tool is manually set in the spindle and is returned to the toolpot specified or to an empty
pot, automatically selected by the manual tool change operation.
In this section the procedure for 2) is explained. Refer to 6-5-2, “ATC Pot NoVTool No. Table" for the
procedure for 1).
a) Setting procedure

1) Switch the mode to “manual” by pressing the MANUAL key.

The display is possible in the automatic and MDI modes also. However, the setting is effective
only in the manual mode.

2) Press function key [F8] (EXTEND) to change function key guide message. Then press
function key [F2] (TOOL SET).
3) The *ATC TOOL SET (POT REF)* page is displayed. Pressing function key [F3]
(ITEM J) changes the display page to *ATC TOOL SET (TOOL REF)*.
 X..

3754-E P-360
SECTION 2 OPERATION

MANUAL OPERATION N i

*ATC TOOL SET (POT RET)*

POT TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL

NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO.
1 002 11 011 21 D 31 031 SPCY POT mi
2 001 12 012 22 022 32 032 ACT TOOL NA
3 003 13 013 23 023 33 033 NXT TOOL 005
4 004 14 014 24 024 34 034
5 005 15 015 25 025 35 035
6 006 16 016 26 026 36 036
7 007 17 017 27 027 37 037
8 008 18 018 28 028 38 038
9 009 19 019 29 029 39 039
10 010 20 020 30 030 40 040

•EX
•TS
>S

SET ITEMT ITEM! QUIT

nÿ(T~2)(TT)frT)CWT)[F 6 ) t F 7HF e~)

MANUAL OPERATION X.MIN 0 NOG 3

*ATC TOOL SET (TOOL RED*

TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL POT TOOL POT

NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO.
001 2 011
012
11
12
021
022
NA
22
031
032
31
32
SPCV POT nm
ACT TOOL 005
002 1
>0O3 3 013 13 023 23 033 33 NXT TOOL 003
004 4 014 14 024 24 034 34
*005 5 015 15 025 25 035 35
006 6 016 16 026 26 036 36
007 7 017 17 027 27 037 37
008 8 018 18 028 28 038 38
009 9 019 19 029 29 039 39
010 10 020 20 030 30 040 40

A-Mtd
•EX
•TS
>IB
>S

SET ITEMT ITEM! QUIT

rrri(Tÿr?ÿ(Tÿrr5irrÿrr7irF~ri
 JU.

3754-E P-361-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Setting is possible on either of the display pages.

Note that POT NO. and TOOL NO. at the left hand column are only for display purpose and setting them
is impossible.
b) Symbols on the display pages are as follows
1) ATC TOOL SET (POT REF)
-* : Indicates the next tool.
» : Indicates the toolpot number which is located at the position where a tool can be
manually removed from or inserted into the toolpot.
2) ATC TOOL SET (TOOL REF)
» : Indicates the next tool.
Indicates the active tool.
c) *
The data to be set
1) SPCYPOT
This is used for specifying the toolpot to which the active tool is to be returned, if necessary.
[Supplement] : 1 . The maximum number is the number of toolpots in the magazine.
MC-40VA 20 tools
MC-50VA 20 tools
MC-60VA 20 tools
2. If another tool number has already been assigned to the specified toolpot number, an
error occurs.
3. When specifying a toolpot number for returning a large-diameter tool,” the adjacent
toolpots should have a dummy tool or they should be left empty. Otherwise, an error
occurs.
2) ACT TOOL
This indicates the tool number of the tool set in the spindle.
[Supplement] : 1. The maximum tool number is the same as the number of tool offsets. (50 in standard)
2. In case the set tool number has already been assigned to another toolpot number, an
error occurs. Although a large-diameter tool (XX, L) can be set, setting of a dummy
tool (D) is impossible. In case the pot number has already been specified in the SPCY
POT column, and when a large-diameter tool is specified, the adjacent toolpots
should have no tool data or be assigned with dummy tool (D). Otherwise, an alarm
occurs.
3. Setting of a large-diameter tool (XX, L) is possible but the setting of a dummy tool (D)
is impossible.
4. In case a large-diameter tool is specified with pot number entered in the SPCY POT,
an error will occur if no tool or a dummy tool (D) is not assigned with the pots prior/next
to the SPCY POT.
5. In case a large-diameter tool is specified with no pot number entered in the SPCY
POT data location, an error will occur if there are no three empty pots arranged in
succession or no two empty pots in succession next to the pot assigned with a dummy
tool (D).
 ~JL

3754-E P-362
SECTION 2 OPERATION

3) NXT TOOL
This indicates the tool number to be set in the spindle next. No data is entered for the first tool
returning cycle.

[Supplement] : 1. The maximum number is the same as the active tool.

2. In case there is a mismatch between the tool number specified and the toolpot
number, an error occurs.

3. Setting of a large-diameter tool (,L) and dummy tool (D) is impossible.

4. An error will occur when pot number is specified in the SPCY POT data location.
d) Returning a tool to the magazine
When returning a tool to the magazine pot, there are two methods such as (a) specifying the tooipot
number; and (b) returning the tool to an empty pot automatically. These two methods are detailed
below. For the procedure to set a tool on the spindle manually, refer to the section covering the
manual tool change procedure.
Tool return cycle with pot number specified:
1) Position the cursor on the SPCY POT data location.
Key in the return pot number and press the WRITE key.
2) Set a tool in the spindle.
3) Position the cursor on the ACT TOOL data location.
After keying in the active tool number, press the WRITE key. In this case, the data of NXT
TOOL should be NA. If a tool number has been entered, key in after locating the cursor on
NXT TOOL, to clear the data.
4) Press the 1 CYCLE START key.
The tool in the spindle is returned to the specified pot and the correspondence between the
toolpot number and the tool number is set and stored.
If this operation is intended for the pot which is assigned with another tool number, an error
occurs and tool return cycle is not started.
Tool return cycle without pot number specified:
1) Clear the data of the SPCY POT by entering as asterisk (*).
2) Set a tool in the spindle.
3) Enter the active tool number for ACT TOOL.
In this data entry, the NXT TOOL data must be NA.

4) Press the 1 CYCLE START key.

The empty pot located nearest to the presently indexed pot is automatically selected and the
tool return cycle is started.
 .JL

3754-E P-363-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

[Supplement] : 1. Pressing the 1 CYCLE START key with the next tool number specified, initiates the
normal tool change cycle.
2. The SPCY POT data is automatically cleared after the execution of “1 cycle start”
command.
3. The SPCY POT data is only for tool return cycle. Therefore, if this data and the NXT
TOOL data have both been entered when the 1 CYCLE START key is pressed, an
error occurs.
4. In the automatic empty pot selection, the empty pot is looked for in the magazine
clockwise direction rotation. If there is no empty pot, an error occurs and no return
cycle is carried out.
5. When entering a large-diameter tool, enter “,L” following the tool number.
 X

3754-E P-364-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) OPERATION ON ATC OPERATION PANEL

a) Status indication and operation keys

This indicates that the display screen displays the ATC status.

AUTO OPERAttOH

ATC/ ARC ATC DATA

*
ACTIVE XEXT ACT. POS. SEQ.NO.

ATC 001 002 0I0 00I ATC operation sequence

READY number _
Pot number presently selected
in the magazine. _
X y B
ACT Po/lT (WORK) 200.000 100.000 0.000 0. 0000
Next tool number
Tool number currently set in
PROGRAM[ACTUAL I PART I BLOCKI I CHECK I the spindle. _
/SELECTI POSIT. IPROGRAMI DATA ISEARCII IATC/APCI DATA I [EXTEND]

/ITT1ITT1(TT)rr71fTTl(7HinfT"7inHn
This filed displays “READY”,
“RUN”, depending on the
/9
operation status._
ATC OPERATION
Releases interlock.
INTER
APC
/ATC RELEASE

Operations for ATC

17 £7
are selected._
SElKHlIgS
/Reverses one step at a time.
Advances one step at a time.

Executes tool RETURN CYCLE.

Executes one cycle.

 JL

3754-E P-365-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

1) ATC/APC display
In the automatic, MDI or manual mode, press function key [F6] (ATC/APC) to display the
ATC/APC screen.
2) Selection of ATC operation
Press the ATC key at the ATC OPERATION panel. Whether the ATC operation is selected can
be checked by the display screen display - *ATC DATA*.
3) 1 CYCLE START
The “1-cycle start” operation is allowed only when the message “READY” is displayed with the
ATC sequence number set at “1”. This automatically carries out one complete automatic tool
change cycle.
When it is necessary to change the tool numbers of ACTIVE and NEXT, follow the procedure
indicated in 13-4-1 for memory-random ATC specification, and 6-5, “Tool Data Sef for fixed
address ATC specification.
4) RETURN CYCLE START
The return cycle operation is possible from any ATC operation sequence number.
The operations activated by the pressing of the RETURN CYCLE START key depend on the
ATC operation sequence where it is pressed. That is, when it is pressed before the tool change
arm 180 degree rotation, the tool return cycle immediately starts and no tool change cycle
occurs. However, when the RETURN CYCLE START key is pressed after the tool change arm
180 degree rotation sequence, then the automatic tool change cycle is continued.
5) 1 STEP ADVANCE
ATC operations advance one step at a time. When the cycle does not advance even if this key
is pressed, due to presence of unfulfilled conditions for tool change position or spindle
orientation, press the I STEP ADVANCE key while pressing the INTERLOCK RELEASE key. It
will then ignore them and continue operations.
This key is inoperative while the message “RUN” is being displayed on the display screen even
if the ATC is notoperating. In this case, clear the “RUN” message from the screen by resetting,
before pressing the 1 STEP ADVANCE key.
Note that when mechanical conditions are not met, the 1 STEP ADVANCE key is not operative
even when the INTERLOCK RELEASE key is pressed since these conditions are not ignored.
The message “RUN" remains on the display screen.
6) 1 STEP REVERSE
This returns the ATC operations one step each time it is pressed. Functions of the 1 STEP
RETURN key are the same as the 1 STEP ADVANCE key except that the ATC operations are
returned instead of advanced.
7) INTERLOCK RELEASE
The spindle orientation completion and tool change position conditions are ignored only as
long as this key is pressed. It will not ignore other mechanical conditions.
For ATC operation, refer to the maintenance manuals for each models.
 3754-E P-366-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

b) ATC restoration
1) When the ATC shuts down during the cycle, discover the defect by a diagnosis message,
and, after restoring conditions, reset the ATC operation sequence number to 1 with the 1
STEP ADVANCE key.
For diagnosis message, refer to the Maintenance Manual for individual machine models.
2) If a disconnection occurs during ATC cycle execution, the spindle orientation completion
and the tool change position conditions are erased. To restore, press the 1 STEP
ADVANCE key while pressing the INTERLOCK RELEASE key to reset the ATC operation
sequence number to “1”.
3) When the ATC operation is reset during the cycle, the 1 STEP ADVANCE, 1 STEP
REVERSE or RETURN CYCLE START key can also be used.
4) In the return cycle, even when the ATC operation sequence number is set to “1” by
depressing the RETURN CYCLE START key after resetting the operation, the next tool
number is not set at “0”. The operation above, during the ATC operation sequence,
numbers smaller than those indicated above, resets the next tool number to “0”. This is
because the tool change operation with the next tool will possibly be made if the next tool
number has been written when the ATC operation sequenced number is set to “1” by the 1
STEP ADVANCE key.
When it is necessary to set the next tool number to “0”, enter TOO in the MDI mode and press
the CYCLE START button after pressing the WRITE key since “0” entry for the next tool is
impossible in the tool data setting mode.
To change the next tool number, set the required number at the TOOL DATA SET screen.

[Supplement] : ATC operation sequence numbers corresponding to tool return cycle are indicatedbelow.
Operation Sequence Numbers
MC-400H 11 to 14
MC-500H/600H 22 to 24
MCV-A 24-tool ATC 19 to 24
MCV-B 24-tool ATC 19 to 24
MCV-A 50- or more tools ATC 16 to 20
MCV-B 50- or more tools ATC 34 to 42
MCR-B 41 to 53

For details, refer to the maintenance manuals for each models.

 3754-E P-367
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13-4-2. Manual Tool Change

(1) Press the TOOL CHANGE
CYCLE button. _
[5
o
—
I 0 UJMJM. roxouwz
o
(2) Press the TOOL CLAMP button.

cnxc Y | TOOL (2) Press the TOOL UNCLAMP button.

J
(Arrangement of operation switches
varies depending on machine model.)

(1) Press the TooL CHANGE CYCLE button.

The X-, Y- and Z-axis move together to the tool change position, (varies depending on machine model.)
(2) Hold the tool set in the spindle by hand, press the TOOL UNCLAMP button, and remove the tool.

(3) Set the new tool in the spindle and press the TOOL CLAMP button. This completes manual tool
change operation.
A lamp lights for each button pressed to show the respective condition.

I1 A CAUTION]1 :
-
When chan9ing tools manually, the tool number presently on the spindle and the active tool
number displayed on the ATC operation panel will differ. Write the correct active tool number
on the *TOOL DATA SET* page to avoid having the tool returned to the wrong magazine pot.
 3754-E P-368
SECTION 2 OPERATION

MCM:

(1) Press the TOOL CHANGE CYCLE button.

The indicating lamp above the TOOL CHANGE CYCLE button comes l*-5
on indicating that a tool change cycle can be carried out.

(2) Hold the tool in the spindle by hand or using a proper base and
press the TOOL UNCLAMP button for vertical or horizontal spindle.
o
® (•)
The tool in the spindle can be removed. When the TOOL
UNCLAMP button is pressed, the indicating lamp above the button
comes on. O O
(3) Set a new tool in the spindle and press the TOOL CLAMP button for
the spindle for which the tool is to be set. This turns off the TOOL
UNCLAMP and TOOL CHANGE CYCLE lamps and the manual tool
change cycle ends.
O O
IAH : (1) When it is necessary to cancel the manual tool change cycle mode after pressing the
TOOL CHANGE CYCLE button, simply press the TOOL CHANGE FINISH button on the
machine operation panel.
(2) When changing tools manually, the tool number presently on the spindle and the active tool
number displayed on the ATC operation panel will differ. Write the correct active tool number
on the *TOOL DATA SET* screen to avoid having the tool returned to the swing magazine
pot.

13-4-3. Manual Magazine Operation

Turn theMANUAL INT. switch on the MG MANUAL operation panel ON to allow manual magazine operation.

Switch Name Function

MANUAL INT - ON The automatic tool change cycle is interrupted immediately eve during
ATC operation when the MANUAL INT. switch is ON. The lamp above
the switch lights, indicating that manual magazine operations are
enabled. The lamp will not light up when manual magazine operation
creates hazards and it is not allowed. After returning the MANUAL INT.
switch back to OFF from ON, the interrupted cycle will automatically
restart from the ATC operation point reached before turning the switch to
ON and will execute until up to the end of the cycle. _
CONSTANT INDEX - ON Continuously rotates the magazine without stopping at each pot.
INDEX START - CW/CCW CW Rotates the magazine in a clockwise direction.
CCW Rotates the magazine in a counterclockwise direction.
INDEX STOP Pressing this button while the magazine is in continuous rotation stops
the magazine at the nearest pot position in the direction of rotation.
EMG. STOP Cuts operating power to the NC control box.
(Refer to 5-2, “Emergency Stop”.) _
 3754-E P-369
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Operating method is shown below:

IV MG MANUAL _
(1) Turn the MANUAL INT
switch to ON.
O
% WSANT INDEX
MANUAL I

(2) Turn the CONSTANT INDEX

switch to ON or OFF._
_
INDEX STOP INDEX START
CWÿssÿgCW
(3) Press the INDEX START button to CW or CCW.

_
(4) Press the INDEX STOP button to shut-down
continuous indexing.
IEMG.STOPI

(Arrangement of operation switches varies

depending on machine model.)

£oJ
Fig. 2-130 Manual Magazine Operation
(1) The lamp lights when the MANUAL INT. switch is ON, indicating that manual magazine operation is

......
possible.
(2) Set the CONSTANT INDEX switch ON or OFF.
ON Starts continuous rotations.
OFF Stops at each pot.
(3) After setting the INDEX START button to CW or CCW, press it. The magazine starts rotating.
Magazine operating conditions are shown below.
Constant Index Index Start Magazine Operation
CW Continuous rotation in the clockwise direction until the
ON
INDEX STOP button is pressed _
CCW Continuous rotation in the counterclockwise direction until
the INDEX STOP button is pressed _
CW Stops at each pot while rotating in the clockwise direction.
OFF Stops at each pot while rotating in the counterclockwise
CCW
direction.
With the CONSTANT INDEX switch turned OFF, the magazine will rotate as long as the INDEX START
button is pressed. Releasing the button will stop the magazine at the nearest pot position in the direction
of rotation.
(4) The magazine rotates continuously when the CONSTANT INDEX switch is turned ON. Pressing the
INDEX STOP button stops the magazine at the nearest pot position in the direction of rotation.
 JL

3754-E P-370
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13-4-4. Manual Tool Change in Automatic Mode Operation

(1) MDB
The entry of M06 places the control in the manual tool change mode like the TOOL CHANGE CYCLE
button has been pressed.
Exchange the tools in the same manner as exchanging the tools in the manual mode operation.
After the completion of the tool exchange, press the TOOL CHANGE CYCLE FINISH button on the
machine operation panel.

(2) MCV.MCR.MCM
The entry of M70 places the control in the manual tool change mode like the TOOL CHANGE CYCLE
button has been pressed.
Exchange the tools in the same manner as exchanging the tools in the manual mode operation.
After the completion of the tool exchange, press the TOOL CHANGE CYCLE FINISH button on the
machine operation panel.
 X-

3754-E P-371-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13-5. APC
13-5-1. APC Operation
(1) Status Indication and operation keys

This indicates that the display screen displays the APC status.

AUTOOPEgATtOT

DATA
ATC ''APC
* APC *
ACTIVE NEXT ACT. POS. SEQ. NO.

APC 00I 002 010 oo1 APC operation sequence

READY
number _
Pot number presently selected
_
in the magazine.
X Y B
ACT POSNT (WORK ) 200.000 100.000 0. 000ÿ-ÿJ). 0000 Next tool number
Tool number currently set in
PBOGRAMlACTUAI. I PART I BI.OCK I
...
I CHECK I
_
the spindle.
ELECTI POSIT. IPROCRAM I DATA ISEARCH IATC/APCI DATA I [EXTEND]

/rmrrarmrmrmrmrmrm
This filed displays “READY”,
“RUN", depending on the
/f
operation status.
ATC OPERATION
Releases interlock.

Operations for APC

are selected. 1 CYCLE BEUIRN

3lM
_ STEP 1 STEP
pE\ÿR8E

/ Reverses one step at a time.

Advances one step at a time.

Executes tool return cycle.

Executes one cycle.

Fig. 2-131 APC Operation Using Flat Panel

 3754-E P-372-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

a) ATC/APC display
In the automatic, MDI or manual mode, press function key [F6] (ATC/APC) to display the ATC/APC
screen.
b) Selection of APC operation
Press the APC key at the APC OPERATION panel. Whether the APC operation is selected can be
checked by the CRT screen display - *APC DATA*.
c) 1 CYCLE START
When this key is pressed, one automatic pallet change cycle is carried out. Note that this operation
is effective only when the message “READY" is displayed on the screen.

d) RETURN CYCLE START

When this key is pressed, the automatic pallet change cycle is carried out in the reverse order up to
its operation sequence number of “1".
e) 1 STEP ADVANCE
Each time this key is pressed, the automatic pallet change cycle is advanced step by step. Notethat
this key is inoperative when “RUN” is displayed on the screen.
If “RUN” message is displayed for a long time, the cycle will be stopped due to unfulfilled step
advance conditions. In this case, press the RESET button to clear “RUN" message and then press
the 1 STEP ADVANCE key. Should “RUN” message appear again, consult your local Okuma
representative.

f) 1 STEP REVERSE
This operation returns the automatic pallet change cycle step by step each time it is pressed.
Functions of the 1 STEP REVERSE key are the same as the 1 STEP ADVANCE key except that the
APC operations are returned instead of advanced.
For ATC operation, refer to maintenance manuals for each models.
 JL

3754-E P-373
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13-5-2. Automatic APC Operations

(1) Pallet Change

Automatic pallet change cycle is carried out by executing the M60 command.
(2) Workpiece Setup Completion
The automatic pallet change cycle is carried out after the workpiece setup has been confirmed. This
setup completion condition is confirmed by pressing the WORK LOAD FINISHED button.
The WORK LOAD FINISHED button is located on the operation panel and also on the separately
installed APC operation panel (option). Both of these buttons have the same function. When the WORK
LOAD FINISHED button is pressed, its indicating lamp lights.
Even when the automatic pallet change M code command is read while the workpiece setup completion
is not confirmed (lamp OFF), the APC does not operate. In this case, the diagnosis message tells that
the workpiece setup is not confirmed. Press the WORK LOAD FINISHED button after making sure that
the workpiece has been set on the pallet.
In the manual mode, the control is always in the state that the WORK LOAD FINISHED button is
pressed.

(3) WORK LOAD RESET Pushbutton Switch

If the WORK LOAD FINISHED button is pressed mistakenly while a workpiece has not been set on the
pallet, this setup completion confirmation state can be cancelled by pressing the WORK LOAD RESET
button.
The WORK LOAD RESET button is located on the operation panel and also on the separately installed
APC operation panel (option). Both of these buttons have the same function. When the WORK LOAD
RESET button is pressed, its indicating lamp goes off.
The workpiece setup completed state cannot be cancelled by pressing the RESET button.
 3754-E P-374
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13-5-3. Manual APC Operations

Manual pallet changer operation is possible when the MANUAL INT. switch is set at the ON position.

(1) Parallel or Rotary Type 2-Pallet APC (Vertical/Horizontal Machining Center)

w O
CYCLE START
APC OPERATION

o SET UP COMPLETION

o
SLIDE HOLD DOOR
EMG. STOP

OPEN

CLOSE

Fig. 2-132 APC Operation Panel - Parallel or Rotary Type 2-pallet APC
(Vertical/Horizontal Machining Center)
a) MANUAL INT. ON/OFF
Turning the MANUAL INT. switch ON during the automatic pallet change cycle interrupts the
automatic pallet change cycle being carried out and manual pallet change operation is permitted.
The indicating lamp above this selector switch lights when the switch is ON. In case the manual
pallet change operation is dangerous, the indicating lamp does not come on, thus inhibiting manual
pallet change operation intervention.
Returning the switch to the OFF position and pressing the SETUP COMPLETION button will
automatically resume the interrupted automatic pallet change cycle from the sequence where the
interruption has occurred up to the end of the cycle.
b) SETUP COMPLETION
This button should be pressed after the setup of workpiece on the pallet has been completed. The
indicating lamp lights and the OSP7000M acknowledges set up completion.
c) DOOR OPEN/CLOSE
OPEN . The door enclosing the machine is opened.
CLOSE The door enclosing the machine is closed.
The setting of the DOOR CLOSE/DOOR OPEN switch is effective even when the MANUAL INT.
switch is set in the OFF position. During the automatic pallet change cycle, the door will not be
closed even when the switch is turned down to the CLOSE position since automatic pallet change
cycle is carried out with the door open. The door will be closed only after the completion of the cycle.

d) CYCLE START
Pressing this button starts the NC system operation.
 JL

3754-E P-375
SECTION 2 OPERATION

e) SLIDE HOLD
This button brings the NC system into the slide hold mode.

f) EMG. STOP
This button shuts off the control power of the NC system.
g) PALLET IN POSITION (for MC-H parallel type 2-pallet APC)
The PALLET IN POSITION lamp will light when the pallet is positioned at the predetermined
position.

h) SAFETY GUARD INTERLOCK (rotary type 2-pallet APC)

While the guard is open, the SAFETY GUARD INTERLOCK indicating lamp stays on and
automatic pallet changer cycle is disabled. The lamp will go off when the safety guard is closed,
thus enabling pallet changer position.
(2) Multi-Pallet APC (Horizontal Machining Center)

o j. SETUP COMPLETION r SETUP COMPLETION “1

INPOSITION
CYCLE START
o MANUAL
INT. o o
SET RESET OFF ON LOADING UNLOADING

o
SLIDE HOLD
5 _
PALLET SELECTION
PALLET
INDEX
SAFETY DOOR
INTERLOCK
o
EMG. STOP

£$>; O
ALL PALLET 10
DOOR
OPEN

0
CLOSE

Is *5*
r0
Fig. 2-133 APC Operation Panel - Multi-Pallet APC (Horizontal Machining Center)

a) PALLET MANUAL INT. ON.

Turning the MANUAL INT. switch to the ON position during the automatic pallet change cycle
interrupts the current automatic pallet change cycle and manual pallet change operation is
permitted. The indicating lamp above this switch lights when the switch is ON. If the manual pallet
change operation is dangerous, the indicating lamp does not come on, thus inhibiting manual pallet
change operation intervention.
Returning the switch OFF will automatically resume the interrupted automatic pallet change cycle
from the sequence where the interruption has occurred to the end of the cycle.
 3754-E P-376
SECTION 2 OPERATION

b) SETUP STATION
1) UNLOADING
The pallet at the pallet changer is transferred to the setup station.
2) LOADING
The pallet on the setup station is transferred to the pallet changer.
3) IN POSITION
This indicating lamp lights when a pallet is set at the predetermined correct position on the
setup station.
APC

Unloading | j Loading

Setup
station

c) SAFETY DOOR INTERLOCK

While the guard is open, the SAFETY DOOR INTERLOCK indication lamp stays on and automatic
pallet change cycle is disabled. The lamp will gooff when the safety guard is closed, thus permitting
pallet changer operation.
d)
OPEN
CLOSE ......
DOOR OPEN/CLOSE
The door enclosing the machine is opened.
The door enclosing the machine is closed.
The setting of the DOOR OPEN/CLOSE switch is effective even when the PALLET MANUAL INT.
switch is set in the OFF position. During the automatic pallet change cycle, the door will not be
closed even when the switch is turned down to the CLOSE position since automatic pallet change
cycle is carried out with the door open. The door will be closed only after completion of the cycle.

e) PALLET SELECTION
This switch is used to select the pallet number for pallet indexing operation. It is also used for setting
or resetting the SETUP COMPLETION state.
f) PALLET INDEX
When the PALLET INDEX button is pressed, the pallet station corresponding to the number set on
the PALLET SELECTION dial is indexed to the pallet change position in front of the machine table.
When the PALLET SELECTION dial is set in the ALL PALLET position, a single pallet is selected
each time the PALLET INDEX button is pressed.
Continual pressing results in constant rotation, until it is released, the next pallet is indexed at the
pallet change position.
 3754-E P-377
SECTION 2 OPERATION

g) SETUP COMPLETION
1) SET
After the completion of the setup on a pallet, select the pallet number of that pallet on the
PALLET SELECTION dial and then press the SET button. This establishes a ready for
machining status of that pallet. The indicating lamp will light when the SET button is pressed.
Pressing the SET button with the PALLET SELECTION dial set in the ALL PALLET position
allows all pallets to be set in the ready for machining status.

2) RESET
This button is used for canceling the ready for machining status for a pallet which has been set
in the ready for machining status. Select the pallet number by the PALLET SELECTION dial
and then press the RESET button. This cancels the ready for machining status of that pallet.
The indicating lamp will go off when the cancel operation is accepted.
Pressing the RESET button with the PALLET SELECTION dial set in the ALL PALLET position
allows the ready for machining status to be canceled for all pallets.

h) CYCLE START
Pressing this button starts the NC system operation.

i) SLIDE HOLD
This button brings the NC system into the slide hold mode.

j) EMG. STOP
Pressing this button shuts off control power of the NC system.
 3754-E P-378
SECTION 2 OPERATION

Example of Pallet Changer Operations (Multi-Pallet APC)

a) Pallet Indexing

1) Turn MANUAL INT. switch ON.

o
o r SETUP COMPLETION \ 1
SETUP COMPLETION
INPOSITION 1

CYCLE START o MANUAL

INr. o o
SET RESET OFF ON LOADING UNLOADING

o PALLET SELECTION PALLET SAFETY DOOR

INTERLOCK EMG. STOP
SLIDE HOLD 4*6 INDEX
o
3 7
DOOR
2 8 OPEN
1 9
ALL PALLET
10
0
CLOSE

IP; 7 o
3) Press PALLET INDEX.

2) Select the desired pallet.

Fig. 2-134 Example of Pallet Changer Operations (Multi-pallet APC) - Indexing Pallet

1) Turn the MANUAL INT. switch to the ON position.

2) Select the required pallet by the PALLET SELECTION dial.

3) Press the PALLET INDEX button.

Steps 1) through 3) index the required pallet to the machine table position for pallet change
operation.
 JL

3754-E P-379
SECTION 2 OPERATION

b) Setup Completion - Set/Reset Operations

1) Turn MANUAL INT. switch ON.

QJ
o r SETUP COMPLETION | r
1
SETUP COMPLETION
INPOSITION 1

CYCLE START
o MANUAL
II
o o
SET RESET OFF ON LOADING UNLOADING

o PALLET SELECTION PALLET

INDEX
SAFETY DOOR
INTERLOCK EMG. STOP
SLIDE HOLD
4 1 6
o
3 7
DOOR
2 8 OPEN
1 9
ALL PALLET
10
CLOSE

r0
t
2) Select the desired pallet.
3) Press PALLET INDEX.

Fig. 2-135 Example of Pallet Changer Operations (Multi-pallet APC)

Setup Completion - Set/Reset Operations

1) Turn the MANUAL INT. switch ON.

2) Dial the required pallet on the PALLET SELECTION dial.

3) Press the SET button after the completion of setup on the selected pallet. To cancel the
setup completion or ready for machining state press the RESET button.
In case the ALL PALLET position is selected, in step 2) above, SET and RESET buttons are
effective for all pallets.
 3754-E P-380
SECTION 2 OPERATION

c) Setup Station
1) Turn MANUAL INT. switch ON.

4) Press LOADING.
5) Madesiredke sure that IN¬
POSITION lamp is on.
4) Press SET
7) Press UNLOADING
T \ \

o r SETUP COMPLETION r
1
SETUP COMPLETION
INPOSITION 1

CYCLE START
o MANUAL
INT. o
.SET RESET OFF ON LOADING UNLOADING

o PALLET SELECTION PALLET

INDEX
SAFETY DOOR
INTERLOCK EMG. STOP
4I6
SLIDE HOLD

3 7 o
DOOR
2 8 OPEN
9
1
ALL PALLET
10
ft
CLOSE

Id) 'ey ©I
3) Press PALLET INDEX.

_
2) Select the ALL PALLET
position.

Fig. 2-136 Example of Pallet Changer Operations (Multi-pallet APC)

Setup Station - Loading/Unloading a Pallet

1) Turn the MANUAL INT. switch ON.

2) Turn the PALLET SELECTION dial to the ALL PALLET position.
3) Position the required pallet in front of the setup station by pressing the PALLET INDEX
button.

4) Press the LOADING button to transfer the pallet to the setup station.

5) Set a workpiece to be machined on the pallet. Make sure that the pallet is located at the
correct position by the illumination of the IN POSITION indicating lamp. If it is not on, then
adjust the pallet position so that the IN POSITION lamp will light.

6) Press the SET button to establish the ready for machining status for that pallet.

7) Press the UNLOADING button to transfer the pallet to the APC.

 3754-E P-381
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(3) Double-Column Machining Center

a) WORK LOAD FINISHED

Press this button after loading a workpiece on the pallet. When this button is pressed, its indicating
lamp lights and the workpiece setup completed state is on.

b) WORK LOAD RESET

In case that workpiece re-setup operation should be performed after completion of the workpiece
setup, press this button to cancel the workpiece setup completed state. When this button is
pressed, its indicating lamp goes off.

WORK LOAD
O
RESET FINISHED

©©
 3754-E P-382-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

13-6. Other Functions

These include the COOLANT, OIL MIST, AIR BLOW, OIL HOLE, CHIP CONVEYOR and DISPLAY
SCREEN.
(1) Operation keys

COOL- A. B.
A. B. NOZ LIGHT LUB
ANT ADAPT

OIL OIL HOLE SHOWER CRT CHIP

MIST OFF CON

These keys are flat keys. When a key is pressed, the LED at the upper left corner turns on and the
corresponding function is turned on. When it is pressed again, the function is turned off and the lamp
goes off simultaneously.
 X

3754-E P-383-R2
SECTION 2 OPERATION

(2) Keys

a) COOLANT, OIL MIST, AIR BLOW, OIL HOLE

Setting of these keys is effective independent of the operation mode, whether MANUAL, MDI or
AUTO.
For both M08 and M09, the M code entered last becomes effective in the same way as the coolant
switches.

b) LUB.
When the key is pressed, axis slideway is lubricated.

c) SCR
ON Display is disabled.
OFF Display is enabled.
Turning this key off when display screen is not required can elongate service life of display screen.

ACAUTION : d) Y/Z AXIS CROSS RAIL (W) CLAMP

When these axis clamp switches set at the upper position, the corresponding axis (Y for
spindlehead, Z for ram and W for crossrail) is clamped with the indicating lamp lighted up.
Turning the switches to the lower position unclamp the axis and the indicating lamp goes off.
If the axes are clamped during axis feed, the axis movement is brought to a stop and clamped.
However, this operation will cause the guideways to be worn rapidly and therefore
clamp/unclamp operation should no be carried out while the axes are being fed.
\When power is turned on to the machine, X-, Y-axis andcrossrail (W-axis) are in the unclamp
state.
 JL.

3754-E P-384-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

1. KINDS OF PARAMETERS USED BY OSP7000M

With the OSP7000M, parameters are classified as indicatedbelow and special display screens are prepared
for individual parameter types to allow parameter setting by directly inputting a numerical value or setting
required data in units of bits.

(1) Common variable

(2) User parameter

(3) G/M code macro

(4) Machine user parameter (long word)

(5) Machine user parameter (word)

(6) Machine user parameter (bit)

(7) NC optional parameter (long word)

(8) NC optional parameter (word)

(9) NC optional parameter (bit)

(10) Input unit system

(11) Machine axis parameter

(12) Machine system parameter (long word)

(13) Machine system parameter (word)

(14) System parameter

(15) Pitch error compensation

 X.

3754-E P-385
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

2. PARAMETER TABLE BY FUNCTION

Setting Item Parameter to be Set Remarks

Travel end limit SYSTEM PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma

P TRAVEL LIMIT
N TRAVEL LIMIT
Programmable limit USER PARAMETER Specified by user.
P PROG LIMIT WRK Factory-set at the same value
as the system parameter
N PROG LIMIT WRK
P PROG UMIT MC
N PROG LIMIT MC
Pitch error compensation SYSTEM PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma
P PITCH ERR COMP
N PITCH ERR COMP
PITCH COMP SPAN
PITCH POINT
NO OPTIONAL PARAMETER
(WORD)
NO. 33 (Number of pitch
error compensation points)
PITCH ERROR COMP.
In-position check amount SYSTEM PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma
(Exact stop check) IN POSITION
In-position check amount SYSTEM PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma
(Exact stop check at a home
IN POSITION (H)
position command)
Backlash compensation USER PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma
BACKLASH
Machine coordinate system SYSTEM PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma
offset value
ZERO OFFSET (MC)
ATC home position SYSTEM PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma
HOME POSITION 1
Home position of: SYSTEM PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma
Parallel type 2-pallet APC-L HOME POSITION 3
Multi-pallet APC
Home position of parallel type SYSTEM PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma
2-pallet APC-R
HOME POSITION 4
 JL.

3754-E P-386-R1
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting Item Parameter to be Set Remarks

Servo drive unit controlling SYSTEM PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma

constants
Machine origin of magazine
HARD SERVO COEFF
KV VALUE
SLOW-UP/DOWN
MACHINE AXIS PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma
MA-axis zero point
MB-axis zero point
MC-axis zero point

ATC ATC tool number entry for tool This setting should be limited
data setting to such cases where the
recovery is impossible due to
NXT TOOL trouble in the ATC.
ACT TOOL
MC SYSTEM PARAMETER
(WORD)
No. 1 ATC SEQUENCE NO.
No. 5 TA ARM A.B MODE
APC MC SYSTEM PARAMETER This setting should be limited
(WORD) to such cases where the
recovery is impossible due to
No. 2 APC SEQUENCE NO. a problem in the APC.
No. 6 PALLET A.B MODE
Spindle Spindle orientation MC SYSTEM PARAMETER Factory-set by Okuma
(WORD)
No. 21 SPDL ORIENT OFST
Spindle oscillation MC SYSTEM PARAMETER
(WORD)
No. 27 SPINDLE OSCIL DA
No. 28 OSCILLATE
FREQCY
No. 29 OSCILLATE PERIOD
Uni-directional positioning USER PARAMETER Excess travel for uni¬
G60 OVERRUN AMT directional positioning
Factory-set at 1 mm (0.04 in.)
for double-column model and
0.3 mm (0.012 in.) for vertical
model
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Final positioning direction for
(BIT) one-directional positioning
No. 19: bit 0 to bit 5 Factory-set at P direction for
all axes
 3754-E P-387
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting Item Parameter to be Set Remarks

Fixed cycle NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Retraction for G73 cycle

(LONG WORD)
Factory-set at 0.3 mm (0.012
No. 1 in.)
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Retraction for G83 cycle
(LONG WORD)
Factory-set at 1 mm (0.04 in.)
No. 2
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Retraction for G76 and G87
(LONG WORD) before orientation
No. 11 Factory set at 0.5 mm (0.02
in.)
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Always keeps the fixed cycle’s
(BIT) cycle axis at the Z-axis.
No. 17: bit 0 Not factory-set at Z-axis
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Shift direction for fixed cycle
(BIT)
No. 17: bit 1 & bit 2
Tape punch NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Number of tape feed holes for
(WORD) tape punching
No. 1 Factory-set at 600
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Individual tape length for
(WORD) incremental tape punching
NO. 2 Factory-set at 180 meters
(590 feet)
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Tape code for tape punching
(BIT)
Factory-set at ISO code
No. 1: bit 0
Puncher NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Puncher’s baud rate
(WORD)
Factory-set at 600BPS
No. 6
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Stop bit
(BIT)
Factory-set at 2 stop bits
No. 8: bit 0
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Sets whether the DATA
(BIT) READY signal is controlled by
No. 8: bit 1
an external signal
Factory-set at “controlled by
internal signal”
 i

3754-E P-388
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting Item Parameter to be Set Remarks

Puncher NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Parity check execution

(BIT) Factory-set at “not execute’
No. 8: bit 2

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Even parity

(BIT) Factory-set at odd parity
No. 8: bit 3

Tape Reading NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Code for tape reading, such

(BIT) as fixed tape code and
automatic recognition
No. 1: bit 0
Factory-set at automatic
No. 1: bit 1 recognition and ISO code

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER TV check run

(BIT)
Factory-set at ’not execute”
No. 1: bit 2

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Tape delimiter code

(BIT)
Factory-set at feed holes
No. 1: bit 3

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Verifying on tape rewinding

(BIT) after tape reading
No. 1: bit 4 Factory-set at “not execute’

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Automatic tape rewinding after

(BIT) tape reading
No. 1: bit 5 Factory-set at “not execute”

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Special code as an alarm

(BIT)
Factory-set at an alarm
No. 1: bit 6

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Special code neglected

(BIT)
Factory-set at ’not neglected’
No. l: bit 7

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER A block including control

(BIT) statements such as CALL and
QOTO is handled as a block.
No. 2: bit 0
Not factory-set as such
 ,x

3754-E P-389
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting Item Parameter to be Set Remarks

Offset Cutter radius NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Data for compensation vector

compensation (LONG WORD) check
No. 4 Factory-set at 0.05 mm (0.002
in.)

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Starting/endpoint decelerating

(LONG WORD) distance compensation comer
override
No. 5
No. 6 Factory-set at 0 for both
points

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Data for errors in calculating

(LONG WORD) minute arc and quasi-full
circles
No. 9
Factory-set at 0.01 mm
(0.0004 in.)

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Decelerating rate for

(WORD) compensation comer override
No. 3 Factory-set at 100%

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Internal identification angle for

(WORD) compensation comer override
No. 4 Factory-set at 90 degrees

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Decelerating rate for

(WORD) compensation arc’s internal
override
No. 5
Factory-set at 100%

Three-dimensional NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Size of offset vector for three-

tool offset (LONG WORD) dimensional tool offset
No. 7 Factory-set at 0 mm

Circular interpolation NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Data for circular arc check

(LONG WORD) (Difference in radius between
starting and end points)
No. 3
Factory-set at 0.01 mm
(0.0004 in.)

NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER For single-axis command,

(BIT) actual position or a point on
the arc is taken as the
No. 20: bit 1
command value for the axis
not programmed.
Factory-set at “actual
position*
 -X.

3754-E P-390
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting item Parameter to be Set Remarks

Unit system for setting NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Change in the setting unit
(BIT) system
No. 9: bits 0 to 7 Factory-set at 1 mm (0.04 in.),
1°, 1 sec, 1mm/min (0.04
INPUT UNIT SYSTEM
ipm) and 1 mm/rev (0.04 ipr)
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER
(BIT)
No. 3: bits 0 to 7
Display NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Subprogram (SSB) not
(BIT) displayed
No. 4: bit 4 Factory-set at “displayed”
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Program display, indicating the
(BIT) remaining amount of travel
No. 4: bit 5 Factory-set at “not displayed”
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER 4 x 4 as the size of the
(BIT) enlarged display characters for
the actual position
No. 4: bit 6
Factory-set at 2 x 2
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Check display’s screen mode
(BIT)
Factory-set at I/O bit,
No. 5: bits 0 to 4 specification bit, axis data, NC
diagnostic data, system and
I/O parameters
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Current value display including
(BIT) the addition of manual
intervention
No. 5: bit 7
Factory-set at the value
obtained by addition
Processing at power on NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Automatic program selection
(BIT)
No. 4: bit 1 Factory-set at “execute”
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Selection of G code which is
(BIT) set automatically when power
supply is turned on
No. 18: bits 0 to 6
Factory-set at GOO, G17, G53,
G90, G94 and G23
Processing at resetting NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER NC reset, bringing the total
(BIT) sum of manual intervention to
0
No. 4: bit 2
Factory-set at 0
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER NC reset, causing the mirror
(BIT) image to be normal for all
axes
No. 17: bit 3
Factory-set at “not normal’

Setting Item
Workpiece geometry
enlargement/reduction
Axis command cancel
Display and setting of:
System parameter
Pitch error compensation
Machine system parameter
(long word)
Machine system parameter
(word)
NC optional parameter
(long word)
No. 33 and trailing data
NC optional parameter
(word)
No. 33 and trailing data
NC optional parameter (bit)
No. 17 and trailing data
Lubrication
3754-E P-391
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS
Parameter to be Set Remarks
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Execution of workpiece
(BIT) geometry enlargement or
reduction
No. 6: bits 0 to 5
Factory-set at “not execute’
for all axes
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Selection of the axis to be
(BIT) command canceled
No. 7: bits 0 to 5 Factory-set at Z-axis
command cancel
NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER Making all these parameters
(BIT) settable
No. 16: bit 7 Factory-set at “not settable"
MC USER PARAMETER (WORD) Axis lubricating Interval timer
No. 1: AXIS LUBE TIME Factory-set at 30 min
MC USER PARAMETER (WORD) Crossrail lubricating interval
No. 2: CROSSRL LUBE TIME
timer
Factory-set at 2 min
MC USER PARAMETER (WORD) Axis lubricating pump ON time
No. 3: AXIS PUMP TIME Factory-set at 30 sec
MC USER PARAMETER (WORD) Crossrail lubricating pump ON
time
No. 4: CROSSRL PUMP TIME
Factory-set at 30 sec
 X.

3754-E P-392
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting Item Parameter to be Set Remarks

ATC MC USER PARAMETER (WORD) Spindle tool unclamp time

No. 5: TOOL UNCLAMP TIME Factory-set at 3 sec
MC USER PARAMETER (WORD) Plug tool number
No. 8: PLUG TOOL NO. Factory-set at 0
End buzzer MC USER PARAMETER (WORD) End-of-operation buzzer ON
time
No. 7: END BUZZER TIME
Factory-set at 10 sec
Power save MC USER PARAMETER (WORD) Power save condition check
time
No. 6: POWER SAVING TIME
Factory-set at 30 min
 ,~L.

3754-E P-393
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER AND SETTING PROCEDURE

3-1. Common Variables
The variables, which are common to schedule programs, main programs and subprograms, may be
referenced and updated. For details, see Section 13, 2-1, “Common Variables” in the Programming Manual
for OSP7000M. There are 128 sets, from VC1 to VC128. Setting procedure is shown below.
(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the COMMON VARIABLE screen appears.

(3) One page of display includes 40 sets of datalf the particular page does not include desired data,
switch page using the page keys (cS) and ([g) , and position the cursor to the desired setting.
Alternatively, use function key [F4] (SEARCH) to set the cursor at the desired data element.

PARAMETER SET

NO.
•COMMON VARIABLE* (VC
NO. NO.
)
- NO.
11 10.65 21 10.65 31 -5
Cursor 2 320 12 106.205 22 39.286 32 300
3 100000 13 -1.5 23 -1.5 33 EMPTY(*>
500 14 -30.956 24 -30.7 34 EMPTY!*)
0 15 0 25 0 35 EMPTY!*)
10 16 -20 26 0 36 EMPTY!*)
0 17 0 27 0 37 EMPTY!*)
0 18 0 28 0 38 EMPTY!*)
0 19 0 29 0 39 EMPTY!*)
1 0 20 0 30 0 40 EMPTY!*)

X Y Z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 99.994 99.999 S1.21S
A-Mtd

•S 1.234

SET I ADtNsI I SEARCH| | ITEM* ITEM* |C EXTEND)

(TT) f?T)(Tg1fFniT8l

Entry data

Press the function key [FI] (SET) or [F2] (ADD).

(4) Setting

a) When the value of a common variable is known, then press function key [F1] (SET) and enter
that value.

b) When the value has already been set and the increment/decrement from that value is to be
set, press function key [F2] (ADD) and enter those values.

(5) Press the WRITE key.

This allows the value to be written at the position indicated by the cursor.
 3754-E P-394
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

[Supplement] : Up to eight digits of data elements may be entered. Internally, they are floating point
numbers which are eight bytes long.

63 56 48 47 40 32 24 16 8 0

0 0 S 0 E 1 M
I

Exponent
Sign bit part Decimal point position

Mantissa part
0£E 255
*
T_
(-1)S*1.M*2(E-128> Reference value: 128 E<0 . Exponent underflow
E > 256 Exponent overflow

Key in V as entry data and press the WRITE key. This results in setting EMPTY. The
EMPTY data is displayed as EMPTY(*). For EMPTY, refer to Section 13, 2, “Variables
Function" in the Programming Manual for OSP7000M.
 3754-E P-395
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-2. User Parameters

The following user parameters are available.

Factory-set
No. CRT Display Contents Setting Range
Initial Value
1 P PROG LIMIT Software-based P-directional and N- Depends on machine -99999999 to
WRK directional travel end limits disclosed to specification +99999999
2 N PROG LIMIT users. Displayed in the work coordinate Same as above -99999999 to
system. + 99999999
WRK
3 P PROG LIMIT Software-based P-directional and N- Same as above -99999999 to
MC directional travel end limits disclosed to + 99999999
4 N PROG LIMIT users. Displayed in the machine Same as above -99999999 to
MC coordinate system. + 99999999
5 G60 OVERRUN Amount of a jump in uni-directional Double-column : 0 to 30000
AMT positioning. 1000
[1 mm (0.04 in.)]
The direction is set by the NC optional
parameter (bit), No. 19. Vertical :
300
[0.3 mm (0.012 in.)]
6 BACKLASH Backlash compensation amounts for 10 Oto 1000
individual axes are set. [0.01 mm (0.0004 in.)]
7 CLAMP IN-P Clamp in-position width for each axis. 0 0.000 to 1.000
(If the setting is “0", clamp in-position
check is not carried out.)

The P PROG LIMIT WRK and P PROG LIMIT MC display the same data as the coordinate values in the work
machine and coordinate systems. Both data may be switched either by parameter setting or by program
(G22) setting. The same applies to the N PROG LIMIT WRK and N PROG LIMIT MC.
 3754-E P-396
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting procedure is shown below:

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the USER PARAMETER screen appears.

PARAMETER SET
•USE* PARPrCTER*
P FOOC LIMIT UK 1500.000 1500.000
N POOS LIMIT UK -3500.000 -3500
P PROS LIMIT MC 3500.000 3500.000
N PROS LIMIT MC
S50 OVEPRLM PMT
-2500.000
10.000
-3500.000
1.000
- 1.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000

X Y 2
ACT POSIT <MC> 1099.994 1099.999 1051.315

•IF
•IF Entry data

SET | ADO | CAL | SEPAC*) | ITEM* | ITEM* |[EXTOOI

41GEDIZSCEZ)im
nyncEZinÿpiF Vl2) Press the function key
\ [F6] or JF7] (ITEM).
(5) Press the function key either 1 (3) Press the function key
[F5] (AXIS CHANGE).
[F11 (SET), [F2] (ADD) or
[F31 (CAL).

(3) When it is necessary to set data for the additional axes (the 5th and following axes), press function
key [F5] (AXIS CHANGE).

(4) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor at the setting data.

(5) Setting

a) When a value is known, press function key [F1] (SET) and enter that value.

b) When setting any increment as viewed from the previously set position, press function key [F2]
(ADD) and enter that increment on the keyboard.

c) In new setting at any position relative to the active value (position), press function key [F3]
(CAL) and enter the data, which is the relative value of the position to be set as viewed from
the active value (position) with numerical keys.
Note that this setting may not be used for the excess travel in one-directional positioning.

(6) Press the WRITE key.

This rewrites the data indicated by the cursor. When the set data is outside the travel end limits set by
the system parameter, the corresponding error message appears. In this case, the data is ineffective
and is not set.
 .JL-.

3754-E P-397-R1
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-3. G/M Code Macro Setting

(1) Geode Macro
The G code macro provides the functions equivalent to MODIN, MODOUT and CALL.

a) G100
The same code as MODOUT, which cancels MODIN. Its format is as follows:
G100 (no argument setting)
b) G101 to G110
The same code as MODIN, which executes the specified subprograms after axis movement on a
block basis. Its format is:
G101 (argument setting)

c) G111 to G120
The same as CALL, which is a simple subprogram call. Its format is:
G111 (argument setting)
Thus, the program name used by this G code is set by a parameter.

(2) M code Macro

The M code macro is a function which allows an M code to call a subprogram. It consists of M201 to
M210. The program name used by the M code is set by a parameter.
For the details of G and M code macros, see SECTION 10, 3, “G and M Code Macro Functions” in the
Programming Manual for OSP7000M.
 3754-E P-398
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Operating procedure is as follows:

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the G/M CODE MACRO screen appears.

PARAMETER SET
*6 core MACRO* *M CODE MACRO*
MODIN CALL CALL
6101 01234 6111 E2Q M201
6102 6112 M202
6103 ** 6113 ** M203 **
6104 ** 6114 ** M204 **
6105 ** 6115 ** M205
6106
** 6116 ** M206
6107 ** 6117 ** M207
6108 ** 6118 ** M208
6109 ** 6119 **
m M209
6110
** 6120 M210
** **
ACT POSIT (WORK) 067 .419 1000.013 1102.560
•IF
01234
OABCD

SET I SCPRoJ ITEM* | ITEM* |cEXTENDI

7
n=~nimrF~4i(m rrari

(4) Press the function key [F1] (SET). (2) Press the function key
[F6] or [F7] (ITEM).

(3) Using the cursor keys, place the cursor at the desired data.

(4) Press function key [F1] (SET) and enter a program name on the keyboard.
To clear the program name, enter V.

(5) Press the WRITE key.

This rewrites the data indicated by the cursor.
the program name column indicates that the corresponding program name has not been
Display of
“**” in
registered.
[Supplement] : A program name which is set at OOOOO to 00999 will result in an alarm. The OOOOO and
following are intended for use by the maker subprograms only, users are not allowed to
use them.
 -X

3754-E P-399-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-4. Machine User Parameter (Long Word)

Param- Screen Display Effective Factory Set Setting Setting
eter Name Contents Command Initial value Range Unit
No.
1 CROSSRL Movable range of SET, ADD Depends on -99999999 0.001 mm
P LIMIT crossrail (Y-axis) in the CAL machine to 99999999 (0.00004
positive direction specification in.)
2 CROSSRL Movable range of Same as Same as Same as Same as
N LIMIT crossrail (Y-axis) in the above above above above
negative direction
3 ATY-P Index allowable range of Same as Same as Same as Same as
swivel head or attach¬ above above above above
ment in the positive
direction of Y-axis
4 ATY-N Index allowable range of Same as Same as Same as Same as
swivel head or attach¬ above above above above
ment in the negative
direction of Y-axis
5 ATC Y-P LIMIT Tool change allowable Same as Same as Same as Same as
range in the positive above above above above
direction of Y-axis
6 ATC Y-N LIMIT Tool change allowable Same as Same as Same as Same as
range in the negative above above above above
direction of Y-axis
7 APC Y-P LIMIT Pallet change allowable Same as Same as Same as Same as
range in the positive above above above above
direction of Y-axis
8 APC Y-N LIMIT Pallet change allowable Same as Same as Same as Same as
range in the negative above above above above
direction of Y-axis
9 APC Z-P LIMIT Pallet change allowable Same as Same as Same as Same as
range in the positive above above above above
direction of Z-axis
10 APC Z-N LIMIT Pallet change allowable Same as Same as Same as Same as
range in the negative above above above above
direction of Z-axis
11 APC W-P LIMIT Pallet change allowable Same as Same as Same as Same as
range in the positive above above above above
direction of W-axis
12 APC W-N LIMIT Pallet change allowable Same as Same as Same as Same as
in the negative direction above above above above
of W-axis
13 ATC W-P LIMIT ATC change allowable Same as 0 Same as Same as
range in the positive above above above
direction of W-axis
14 ATC W-N LIMIT ATC change allowable Same as 0 Same as Same as
range in the negative above above above
direction of W-axis
15 ATC X-P LIMIT ATC change allowable Same as 0 Same as Same as
range in the positive above above above
direction of X-axis
16 ATC X-N LIMIT ATC change allowable Same as 0 Same as Same as
range in the negative above above above
direction of X-axis
 ..X-

3754-E P-400
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Operating procedure is as follows:

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the MC USER PARAMETER (LONG WORD) screen
appears.

PARAMETER SET

*MC USER PARAMETER (LONG WORD)*

NO. NO.
1 CROSSRL P LIMIT 11 APC W-P LIMIT 0
CROSSRL N LIMIT 0 12 APC W-N LIMIT 0
3 AT Y-P 0 13 ATC M-P LIMIT 0
4 AT Y-N B 14 ATC W-N LIMIT 0
5 ATC Y-P LIMIT Q 15 ATC X-P LIMIT 0
6 ATC Y-N LIMIT 0 16 ATC X-N LIMIT 0
7 APC Y-P LIMIT 0 17 0
Y-N LIMIT 0 18 0
9 APC Z-P LIMIT 0 19 0
10 APC Z-N LIMIT 0 20 0

Y
ACT POSIT (MC) 1.476 1.344 31.581
A-Mtd

•IB
•S 1234567

9CT | ADD I CAL I SEARCH T ITOIt I ITEM! |CEXTENDI

irnir~nim(T~si rT~6~t ir"n(THD

/ Y&) Press the function kt

Entry data/ \ [F6] or [F7] (ITEM).
' (4) Press the function key either
[F1] (SET), [F2] (ADD) or
[F3] (CAL).

(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor at the desired data.
(4) Setting

a) When the data to be set is previously known, press function key [F1] (SET) and enter that
data.

b) When data has already been set and it is necessary to set the increment relative to that
position, press function key [F2] (ADD) and enter the increment.
c) If new data is set at a position relative to the active value (position), press function key [F3]
(CAL) and key in the data, which is the relative value of the position to be set as viewed from
the active value (position).
(5) Press the WRITE key.
This rewrites the data at the position indicated by the cursor.
 3754-E P-401-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-5. Machine User Parameter (Word)

The machine user parameter (word) consists of the following elements:

Param- Factory
Screen Display Effective Setting Setting
eter
Name Contents Set Initial
No. Command Range Unit
Value
1 AXIS LUBE TIME Cycle time for axis SET, ADD 10 min 0-10 1 min
lubrication (Interval)
2 CROSSRL LUBE Cycle time for crossrail Same as 2 min 0-120 1 min
TIME lubrication (interval) above
3 AXIS PUMP TIME Time during which the axis Same as Depends 15 120- 1 sec
lubrication pump motor is on above on
machine
specifi¬
cation
4 CROSSRL PUMP Time during which the Same as Same as 15-60 1 sec
TIME crossrail lubricating pump above above
motor is on
5 TOOL UNCLAMP Maximum time taken to Same as 3 sec 0-30 1 sec
TIME unclamp the tool after above
pressing the tool unclamp
button
6 POWER SAVING Time for a power save Same as 30 min 0-60 1 min
TIME which is made when a above
preset time has elapsed the
NC comes to a stop
7 END BUZZER Time required from the Same as 10 sec 0-600 1 sec
TIME moment the OPERATION above
END buzzer begins to
sound until it stops
sounding
8 PLUG TOOL NO. After the end of operation, if SET only Depends 0 to the
it is necessary to keep the on number
tool mounted on the spindle machine of maga¬
free of foreign matter, that specifica zine
tool is specified. tion tools
9 SPDL OVERLOAD Time for the control to SET, ADD Same as 0-60 1 sec
TIME determine “overload" state above
after the meter relay has
been actuated
10 OIL MIST TIME Mist on time of the oil mist
coolant supply system
Same as
above
Same as
above
-
0 3600 1 sec

11 CROSSRL STOP Stop time for the crossrail in Same as Same as 0-600 0.1 sec
TIME its upward movements above above
 L

3754-E P-402-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Param- Factory
Screen Display Effective Setting Setting
eter Name Contents Set Initial
No. Command Range Unit
Value
12 CROSSRL UP Upward movement time of SET, Depends 0-600 0.1 sec
TIME the crossrail in its upward ADD on
movements machine
specifi¬
cation
13 CHIP CLEANER ON duration of chip cleaner Same as Same as 0-60 1 sec
TIME above above
14 AIR BLOW TIME ON duration of tapped hole
chip air blow
Same as
above
Same as
above
-
0 3600 1 sec

15 RT COUNTER Same as Same as 0-999

above above
16 SET UP ST. POS. Pallet carrier position at SET Same as Oto
setup station is set. above maxi¬
mum
number
of
pallets
17 AXIS LUBE TIME Cycle time for second axis SET. Same as Oto 120 1 min
2 lubrication (Interval) ADD above
18 AXIS PUMP TIME Time during which second Same as Same as 0-180 1 sec
2 axis lubrication pump motor above above
is on
19 WORK CLAMP Workpiece clamping is SET Same as 0-1000 0.01
TIME assumed to have been above sec
completed when a period,
set at this timer, has
elapsed after the execution
of workpiece clamp
command.
21 Same as
above
Same as -
0 1000 0.01
above sec
22 Same as Same as 0 - 1000 0.01
above above sec
40 System check mode Same as 0 0-999
above
 3754-E P-403
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting procedure is as follows:

(1) Press PARAMETER.

V

| rssnrrmSOD reyinanrÿn

BBBBSBSS
4BIC,|pI/llflMlÿ
ZJujQlZ)Q©®cE
3000000EE
vjlÿMmlzIlTlKF
®©(D© Bs)
S ©©©©
[FpCfp [ra](E)(H)[ÿ]Cÿ]Cg3 wm ©®@® r
®Q0O 7
z z (6) Press WRITE key.
(2) Press function key
[F61 or [F71 (ITEM). (5) Key in data.
(4) Press function key [F1] or [F2] (ADD). (3) Press the cursor key.

Fig. 3-1 Machine User Parameter (Word)

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the MC USER PARAMETER (WORD) screen appears.

(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor at the desired data.
 3754-E P-404
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

PARAMETER SET
*MC USER PARArETER CHORD)*
NO. NO.
1 AXIS LUBE TIPC 11 CROSSRL STOP TIIC 0
2 CROSSRL LUBE TIME 1 12 CROSSRL UP Tire 8
3 OXIS PUC TIIC 30 13 CHIP CLCflfCR Tire a
4 CROSSRL PUC TIIC 30 14 AIR BLOW Tire e
S TOX LNCLAfP TIIC 3 15 RT COUNTER 8
6 POLER SAVING THE 33 16 SETUP RT. roe 0
7 END BUZZER TIIC 10 17 AXIS LUBE TIME 2 0
8 PLUG TOOL NO. 0 18 AMS PUMP TIME 2 8
9 SPDL OVLOAD TIME 0 19 WORK CLAMP TIME 8
10 OIL MIST TIIC 0 28 8

X Y z
ACT POSIT CMC) 899.994 999.999 -1100.888

.IP
•IF
•S 60

SET ADD CAL I SEARCH! ITEM* ITEM* |C EXTEND3

r?rirrÿ(TTifFÿrrÿrF~riiTTirF~sT

Setting:
If data is previously known:
(4) Press function key [F1] (SET).

(5) Enter data on the keyboard.

If data has already been set and it is necessary to set the increment against the data:
(4) Press function key [F2] (ADD).
(5) Enter the increment.
(6) Press the WRITE key.
This rewrites the data at the cursor position.
 3754-E P-405
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-6. Machine User Parameter (Bit)

The machine user parameter bits available are listed below:

Factory
Parameter Bit SET 1 SETO Set Initial
Contents
No. No. Value
0 Issuing an M09 command does not turn off the Does not Turns off 0
coolant turn off
1
_
Issuing an M09 command does not turn off the
through-the-tool coolant low pressure.
Does not
turn off
Turns off 0

1
2
_
Issuing an M09 command does not turn off the
through-the-tool coolant high pressure.
Does not
turn off
Turns off 0

3 Issuing an M09 command does not turn off the Does not Turns off 0
_
air blow (nozzle) type. turn off.
4 Issuing an M09 command does not turn off the Does not Turns off 0
air blow (adapter type). turn off
5 Issuing an M09 command does not turn off the Does not Turns off 0
oil mist turn off
6 Issuing an M09 command does not turn off the Does not Turns off 0
work shower. turn off
7 0
0
coolant groups _
An M0O/M01 does not turn off the spindle or Does not
turn off
Turns off 0

1 Alarm generation is added as a requirement for Adds Does not 0

automatic power shutdown (OFF). _ add
2 Spindle stops when an alarm of level B occurs. Stops Does not 0
stop

2
3
_
Spindle speed override is made effective for S2-
digit specification.
Effective Ineffective 0

4 A level A alarm is made ineffective when APC Ineffective Effective 0

door open confirmation signal is turned off.
5 0
6 Power save function is made ineffective during Ineffective Effective 0
MOO or M01 mode.
7 Power save function is made ineffective. Ineffective Effective 0
0 M181 external M command is made effective Effective Ineffective 0
_
after completion of positioning.
1 M182 external M command is made effective Effective Ineffective 0
_
after completion of positioning.
2 M183 external M command is made effective Effective Ineffective 0
after completion of positioning. _
3 M184 external M command is made effective Effective Ineffective 0
3 _
after completion of positioning.
4 M185 external M command is made effective Effective Ineffective 0
after completion of positioning. _
5 M186 external M command is made effective Effective Ineffective 0
after completion of positioning. _
6 M187 external M command is made effective Effective Ineffective 0
after completion of positioning. _
7 M188 external M command is made effective Effective Ineffective 0
after completion of positioning.
 -fc.

3754-E P-406
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Factory
Parameter Bit SET 1 SETO Set Initial
Contents
No. No. ValuP
0 Attachment joint air blower is ineffective when Ineffective Effective 0
_
attachment is installed.
1 Attachment joint air blower is ineffective when Ineffective Effective 0
adaptor is installed. _
2 For multi-link magazine, command is executed Executed Not 0
for the No. 2 magazine. _ executed
4 3 For multi-link magazine, command is executed Executed Not 0
for the No. 3 magazine. _ executed
4 With MC-40H and MC-3VA, standby is carried Carried out Not earned 0
out at magazine rotation position. _ out
5 With MC-40H, tool change arm door open Ineffective Effective 0
interlock function is made ineffective.
6 Spindle rotation is continued even when Continued Not 0
operation door interlock function is activated. continued
7 Manual intervention mode is made ineffective Ineffective Effective 0
when magazine door interlock function is
activated.
0 Specification code of the second timer is Ignored Not ignored 0
ignored._
1 The second timer is used for counting spindle Used Not used 0
rotation period. _
2 The second timer is used for counting NC Used Not used 0
operation period.
5 3 Automatic operation condition is added for the Added Not added 0
second timer.
4 Automatic operation and single block off Added Not added 0
conditions are added to the second timer.
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 Specification code of the third timer is ignored. Ignored Not Ignored 0
1 The third timer is used for counting spindle Used Not used 0
rotation period. _
2 The third timer is used for counting NC operation Used Not used 0
period. _
3 Automatic operation condition is added for the Added Not added 0
6 third timer.
4 Automatic operation and single block off Added Not added 0
conditions are added to the third timer.
6 0
6 0
7 0
 X.

3754-E P-407
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Factory
Parameter Bit SET 1 SETO Set Initial
Contents
No. No. Value
0 Single block off condition is made ineffective for Ineffective Effective 0
the third indicating lamp (NC running)._
1 Automatic operation and single block off Ineffective Effective 0
conditions are made ineffective for the third
indicating lamp (NC running). _
2 The third indicating lamp (NC running) is turned Turned off Not turned 0
off when an alarm occurs. Off
7
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 Single block off condition for alarm lamp is made Ineffective Effective 0
ineffective
1 Automatic operation and single block off Ineffective Effective 0
conditions for alarm lamp are made ineffective.
2 0
3 0
8 4 Single block off condition for operation end Ineffective Effective 0
indicating lamp is made ineffective._
5 Automatic operation and single block off Ineffective Effective 0
conditions for operation end indicating lamp are
made ineffective.
6 0
7 0
0 Single block off condition for operation end Ineffective Effective 0
warning buzzer is made ineffective._
1 Automatic operation and single block off Ineffective Effective 0
conditions for operation end warning buzzer are
made ineffective
2 Operation end warning buzzer is not turned off Not turned Turned off 0
by timer. _ off
9
3 Operation end warning buzzer is not turned on Not turned Turned on 0
when alarm occurs. on
4 Operation end warning buzzer is not turned on Not turned Turned on 0
when completing the program. _ on
5 0
6 0
7 0
 3754-E P-408-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Parameter
No.
Bit
No.
0
Contents SET 1

ATC cycle in progress for APC start conditions is Ineffective

SETO

Effective
IF
0
made ineffective.
1 The S command entered through the pendant Ineffective Effective 0
operation panel is made ineffective during
manual intervention.
10
2 WRITE and READ are made ineffective for the Ineffective Effective 0
ATC sequence, TD, and S data. _
3 0

4 The operation logic of the APC for the FMS Effective Ineffective 0
specification is made effective.
5 The value of S command can be minimized up to Can Can not 0
the minimum value for the motor speed.
6 A level A alarm is generated when the X-, Y-, or Alarm A Alarm C 0
Z-axis overload Is detected.
7 Chuck grips the ID of the workpiece. ID OD 0
0 Enter “Automatic operation mode* to output Enter Not enter 1
conditions of external hour meter.
1 Enter “RUN lamp on” to output conditions of Enter Not enter 1
external hour meter.
2 Enter “Spindle in rotating* to output conditions of Enter Not enter 0
external hour meter.
3 Enter “Axis moving* to output conditions of Enter Not enter 0
11 external hour meter.
4 Enter “Spindle speed override 100%* to output Enter Not enter 1
conditions of external hour meter.
5 Enter “Feedrate override 100%* to output Enter Not enter 1
conditions of external hour meter.
6 Enter "Single block off" to output conditions of Enter Not enter 1
external hour meter.
7
0 Interface TYPE-B for the robot/loader is made Effective Ineffective 0
effective.
1 Interface TYPE-C for the robot/loader is made Effective Ineffective 0
effective.
2 The “tool exist in magazine pot confirmation" Ineffective Effective 0
interlock is made ineffective.
13 3 Manual tool change is enabled nearby the tool Enabled Not 0
orientation position. (MC-500H/600H) enabled
4 Pin IN/OUT command from the stacker crane Ineffective Effective 0
and APC for the FMS specification are made
ineffective.
5 Ineffective Effective 0
6 The ‘no tool in spindle” interlock is made Ineffective Effective 0
ineffective.
7 0
 .1.

3754-E P-409
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Factory
Parameter Bit SET 1 SETO Set Initial
Contents
No. No. Value
0 Automatic power shutoff is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
1 Operation completion indicating lamp is made Effective Ineffective 0
effective.
2 Alarm indicating lamp is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
3 Operation end warning buzzer is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
14
4 The third indicating lamp is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 Selection of the magnification for magnetic pulse X4 X1 0
21 generator from X4 or Xi _
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 This makes setting of the attachment swivel Ineffective Effective 0
range ineffective. _
1 0
2 0
3 0
39
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 This makes crossrail automatic offset mode Effective Ineffective 0
effective.
1 This makes input from the crossrail automatic Ineffective Effective 0
positioning sensor ineffective. _
2 0
40 3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
 X

3754-E P-410
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting procedure is as follows:

(1) Press PARAMETER.

\ _
I nsnrtnnUSD
HRHffffiR
AMBIICMDI
HII I II J If K ]
Ollpll Q ]|R]
vllwll XIIYI
®®®0 (D
®®®® 0
ms. ©®@© n
Cÿ[ra](D(H][ra](ÿ](R)[re) BB ®G©0 7
7
(6) Press WRITE key.
(2) Press function key
fF61 or [F71 (ITEM). (5) Key in data.
(4) Press function key [F1] or [F2] (ADD). (3) Press the cursor key.

Fig. 3-2 Machine User Parameter (Bit)

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the MC USER PARAMETER (BIT) screen appears.
(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor at the desired data.

(4) Press function key [F1] (SET).

(5) Enter the data.
The entry data is only 0 or 1.
 -A

3754-E P-411
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

(6) Press the WRITE key.

This rewrites data indicated by the cursor.

PARAMETER SET
USER PHWCTER (BIT)*
NO. 76543218 NO. 76543210
1 1 1 0 0 8 8 0 1 11 08888888
2 0 1 1 8 8 8 8 1 12 08888880
3 88118880 13 88880088
4 8 0 8 1 1 8 8 8 14 08800888
5 88891108 15 88880888
6 88808118 16 08880008
7 0 8 8 8 8 0 1 1 17 88888888
8 08888888 18 88088888
9 08888888 19 80888888
10 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 28 1 0 8 1 8 0 8

X Y Z
OCT POSIT CMC) 1099.994 1099.999 18S1.31S

-S 1

SET’ I SCORCH! ITEM* ITEN* | [EXTEND)

(Z31CEII3CEI3CE13CEII3CE13CEII3CE13

Entry data Cursor

 .X:

3754-E P-412-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-7. NC Optional Parameter (Long Word)

The optional parameter (long words) that follow are available. The parameter numbers are keyed to the
numbers on the display screen.

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
1* - Retraction in In Q73 cycle, Z-axis is infed by “Q*. 300 Oto 10000
Q73 cycle (high¬ retracted to level “d" and then infed by (0.3 mm)
speed deep “Q + d\ “d" is the retraction amount. (0.012 in.)
hole)
Return point level
*! %
:
R

Q
t i rd
Q
z

2* Retraction in In G83 cycle, Z-axis is infed by “Q", 1000 Oto 1000

G83 cycle (deep retracted to level *R* in a rapid feedrate, (1 mm)
hole) and then positioned to the level \T higher (0.04 in.)
than the previously infed level. Infeed by
“Q +d" is made after that, ‘d’ is the
retraction amount.
Return point level
°!
: ?
R-T-H f :
Q :
*
Q
rd
*
Q
Id
z -A *
Q

3* Arc check data An alarm will occur if, in an arc command, 10 2 to 200
the difference in radius between the starting (0.01 mm)
point and the end point is greater than the (0.0004 in.)
preset level, set by the check data.

# \n fgx\ unit specification, the factory set initial value and the setting range are ten times those in
mm unit specification.
 3754-E P-413
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
4* Cutter radius For an extremely small corner movement, if 60 0 to 5000
compensation AVx AV and AVy AV, then ignores (0.05 mm)
vector check the rear moving point for movement. The (0.002 in.)
data AV is set by the check data.

AVx
1
T'y
»
AVy
i

5 Decelerating 0 0 to 99999999
distance at end
point for cutter Nl_*
radius B
Pi
compensation ee
comer override Is N2

6 Decelerating
distance at A : Override ON point
starting point for B : N1 positioning point
cutter radius C : Override OFF point
compensation N1 X_ Y_ FI
corner override N2 X_ Y_ F2
to: Decelerating distance at corner’s end
point
ls: Decelerating distance at corner’s
starting point

$ In pm unit specification, the factory set initial value and the setting range are ten times those in
mm unit specification.
 .x.

3754-E P-414
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
7 Three- Three-dimensional 0 -99999999 to
dimensional tool tool offset vector + 99999999
offset vector size
G41 tool path

Programmed *
path
Vector component in Xp-axis direction:
AVx = ir/p
Vector component in Yp-axis direction:
AVy = jr/p
Vector component in Zp-axis direction:
AVz = kr/p
where
i, j & k: Values specified by I, J and K,
respectively
r : Tool offset value corresponding to
the tool offset number specified by
D
p : Parameter-set Value; for 0, the
following equation applies.
P = V/2 +j2+*4
8* G31 Sets the feedrate for G31 (skip function) 0 1 to 20000
(skip function)
feedrate

In pm unit specification, the factory set initial value and the setting range are ten times those in
* mm unit specification.
 X.

3754-E P-415
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
9m Error data 10 2 to 200
resulting from (0.01 mm)
cutter radius (0.0004 in.)
AX &x
compensation
calculation for Ay
minute circular
arcs and quasi¬
full circles in
cutter radius
compensation
mode

Minute arc Quasi-full circle

( AX AV, AY AV )
(a) Minute arc
The horizontal and vertical distances
between the starting point and the
end point of a circular arc are smaller
than the setting.
(b) Quasi-full circle
A circular arc which is almost a full
circle. The horizontal and vertical
distances of the gap of the arc are
smaller than the setting.
The setting AV is given by the error data.
The endpoint of a minute circular arc is
ignored and no arc movement takes place.
The endpoint of a quasi-full circle is ignored
and the arc is handled as a full circle which
begins at the starting point.
10 Maximum When an attempt is made to feed an axis at Rapid feedrate 0 to 200000
feedrate clamp a rate exceeding the preset value, the axis of machine
value feedrate is clamped at this value and the .
alarm indication setting unit is mm/min.

# In ftm unit specification, the factory set initial value and the setting range are ten times those in
mm unit specification.
 X-

3754-E P-416
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Factory
Param¬ Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
11* Retraction In the G76 and G87 cycle, the cutting tool is 500 Oto 10000
amount in G76 infed to level “Z" where a dwell of “P" (0.05 mm)
(fine boring) and seconds is carried out and then it is (0.02 in.)
G87 (back retracted upwards by “d". At this retracted
boring) cycles level, the cutting tool is shifted by “Q” in the
direction opposite to the tool bit. This
sets the amount “d".
— *9
?
Return point level
R

r"1 Td
Q '

12* Positioning point Sets the distance between the first 500 500 to 5000
for RMILI (inner positioning point for RMILI (inner round (0.05 mm)
round milling) milling) and the workpiece endface. (0.02 in.)
13 Number of bytes Sets the number of bytes for the program 0 0 to 99999999
for the program data transmission until the cycle start in the
data DNC-B remote buffer operation mode with
transmission communication control protocol is started.
until the DNC-B
cycle start.
14 Feedrate change Sets the feedrate value when the rapid 20000 1 to 20000
value in the fixed feedrate is changed to a cutting feedrate in (20m/min)
cycle when the the fixed cycle during 3-D coordinate
coordinate system conversion.
system
conversion
15 Spindle index Spindle index zero position (Spindle index Depends on •0 to 359999
zero machine zero for E command) machine or
specification 0 to 3599999
16 Spindle IN-P Spindle (C-axis) IN-P check value is set. Depends on *0 to 359999
check value machine or
specification 0 to 3599999
17 Spindle index Rapid feedrate (angle) of spindle indexing is Depends on *0 to 359999
angle at rapid set. machine or
feedrate specification 0 to 3599999

* Setting unit: VAC control unit (1/1000° or 1 '10000°)

In yum unit specification, the factory set initial value and the setting range are ten times those in
* mm unit specification.
 -X

3754-E P-417
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Flange
No. Value
18X Tolerance for the When the programmed tool path is different 0 (ptm) 0 to 99999999
interference with from the actual tool path as shown in the
cutter radius figure below, a tool interference error is
compensation generated while the tool does not interfere
with the workpiece.
To avoid this, set the tolerance range (V in
the figure below) for interference.
Interference error will not be generated
when the gap between the programmed tool
path and the actual tool path is within the
tolerance range.
Center of tool
/

\x * Programmed
K tool path
£3
19 Spindle Sets the offset amount during spindle 0 (deg) 0 to 3599999
orientation offset orientation with the high-precision VAC.
value
22* Acceleration/dec Sets the acceleration/deceleration speed 0 0 to 4000000
eleration speed constant for F1-digit feed (both rotary switch
constant for F1- and parameter).
digrt feed
23 Motor Sets the spindle motor cont. rating for the 0 (W) 110 to
continuous rating synchronized tapping torque monitor. Refer 99999999
to the final specifications of the machine
when setting data.
33 Synchronization If the setting is “0" when power is turned 0 Automatic
position shift on, the difference between the master and setting
amount (/ÿm) slave axis command values (SRSCON) is
automatically set as the synchronization shift
amount.
34 Cutting start Sets the distance between the cutting start 0 0<m) -99999999 to
point for RMILO point for RMILO (outer round milling) and + 99999999
(outer round the workpiece endface.
milling)
35 Cutting start Sets the distance between the cutting start 0 0/m) -99999999 to
point for RMILI point for RMILI (inner round milling) and the +99999999
(inner round workpiece endface.
milling)

X In pm unit specification, the factory set initial value and the setting range are ten times those in
mm unit specification.
 -A.

3754-E P-418
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Factory
Param- Set
Contents Setting
eter Item Initial Range
No. Value
36 Z-axis cutting For l-MAP B specifications, this 0(nm) -99999999 to
position parameter sets the tool’s OD for convex +99999999
solid profiles at a position (Z-cut
position) away from the cutting
allowance.
Standard setting amount: 5000
37 Approach For l-MAP B specifications, this 0(nm) -99999999 to
position parameter sets the approach position for +99999999
concave solid profiles.
Standard setting amount: 1000
38 Travel width at For l-MAP B specifications, this 0(nm) -99999999 to
pick operation parameter sets the travel width at pick +99999999
operation for irregular solid profiles.
Standard setting amount: 1500
44 Maximum tool Sets the maximum length of tool to be 0 (pm) 0 to 999
length used.
This setting is necessary to shorten the
operation time by using the automatic
tool length offset/broken tool detection
function.
 3754-E P-419
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Data setting procedure is as follows:

(1) Press PARAMETER.

x
IJL OKUWOOTMO | C-DEI3
x P'lS*'!I UMTT|«L«II»I|

RRHRÿRRH
ppplpppH
m
0©®© (BS)
0®0© j CAH

GjDEjD ©©HD(p)(F7) © ©0®0 r

®Q©0 7
7 Z
(2) Press function key /(6) Press WRITE key.
fF61 or [F7] (ITEM). (5) Key in data.
(4) Press function key [F1] or [F2] (ADD). (3) Press the cursor key.

Fig. 3-3 NC Optional Parameter (Long Word)

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (LONG WORD)
screen appears.
(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor at desired data.
 •JL

3754-E P-420
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Cursor

PARAMETER/S ET
«fC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (LONS WORD)*

rT
NO. NO. NO.
11 a 21 60 31 0
1000 12 a 22 0 32 0
3 10 13 a 23 0
4 50 14 a 24 0
5 0 15 a 25 a
6 0 16 a 26 600
Parameter No. 7 0 17 0 27 0
0 3000 IB 0 28 0
9 10 19 a 28 0
U0 20000 20 30 30 0

X V z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 99.994 99.999 SI.SIS

Entry data
•S 500/

SET ADD | SEARCH! ITOH- ITEM* |t EXTENDI

(TT1(TTl(TTirFÿfFÿnÿfTTirF~8l

Setting:
When data is previously known:

(4) Press function key [F1] (SET).

(5) Enter the data on the keyboard.

(6) Press the WRITE key.

This rewrites the data indicated by the cursor.
When data has already been set and it is necessary to set the increment from the data:

(4) Press function key [F2] (ADD).

(5) Enter the increment on the keyboard.

(6) Press the WRITE key.

This rewrites the data indicated by the cursor.
 -JL

3754-E P-421
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-8. NC Optional Parameter (Word)

The optional parameter (words) the follow are available.

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
1 Tape feed holes For a punchout in the PIP (transfer) mode, 600 1 to 10000
in punching there is a jape feed before the program is
punched out, which is followed by tape
feed. The number of feed holes is set by
this parameter.
2 Defaults of tape A file of part programs which is too long to 180 m 1 to 300 m
lengths in be stored in a roll of paper tape is divided
divided punching into smaller files to be punched out. The
(590 feet) -
(3 984 feet.)

lengths of the divisions are closed at the

breaks of each block, so that the setting is
slightly different from the actual tape length.
A divided punchout gives the beginning of
each tape part a file name. Note that the
setting does not include the lengths
corresponding to the file name and feed
holes.
3 Decelerating I
100% 1 to 100%
ratio of cutter l i
radius
compensation
comer override

N1 X Y FI
N2 X_Y_ F2
4 Internal A : Override ON point 90 deg 1 to 179 deg
identification
angle of cutter B : N1 positioning
radius C : Override OFF point
compensation r : Decelerating ratio
comer override d : Corner’s internal identification angle

I m
ff
x F2
FI
i
i Distance
 3754-E P-422
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (word)

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
5 Decelerating Programmed 100% 1 to 100%
ratio of cutter path
radius
compensation
arc’s internal
override
/
Tool path
rP
rc
\
Generally, the feedrate during cutter radius
compensation is controlled so that the tool
center path gets the specified speed.
Parameter setting, however, provides and
override which permits the feedrate on the
programmed path to get the specified speed
although it is limited to circular arc’s inside
cutting.
(a) When rc/rp X100 Parameter
setting
-
Actual feedrate Specified speed x rc/rp
(b) When rc/rp x 100 < Parameter
setting
Actual feedrate = Specified speed x
(Parameter setting/100)
*6 NC baud rate for This parameter sets the baud rate of the 600 110 to 19200
RC232C
Channel 0 puncher. _
RS232C interface when used for the (0.6 K baud) (baud)

Baud rate
110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200

If a baud rate other than the value indicated

above is set, the baud rate closest to and
smaller than the setting is selected.
 I

3754-E P-423
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (word)

Factory
Param-
Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No.
Value
7 Override in Pocket milling (spiral type) PMILR 100% 1 to 100%
pocket milling
(spiral type)
corner cutting

In the movement illustrated above, this

parameter specifies the override of the
feedrate of the 45-degree cut.
Actual feedrate = Specified speed x
(r/100)
This value of r is set by the parameter.
8 Magazine pot This parameter specifies the magazine pot 0 0 to Number
number for touch number for storing the touch probe. of magazine
probe pots
9 Imaginary This parameter specifies the imaginary 2000 min-i 1 to 8000
spindle rpm for spindle speed for the machine lock mode (rpm) min-1 (rpm)
machine lock operation.
10 Servo processor This parameter specifies the number of 0 0 to 9999
monitor function DSVPVAR1 (leftmost 2 digits) and
RSVPVAR2 (rightmost 2 digits) display on
the CHECK page.
11 Designation of This specifies the operation method to be 1 0 to 3
operation selected when option designation is not
method given at the time program selection is made.
Setting Operation Method
0 Normal operation (method A)
1 Large volume operation
(method B)
2 Operation without branching and
subprograms (method S)
3 Multi-volume operation
(method M)
 -L.

3754-E P-424
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (word)

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
12 Rapid feedrate This specifies the override value for rapid 0 0 to 100%
override in feedrate when traveling rapidly to home
traveling to position.
home position
13 Schedule Automatic updating of schedule program 0 Oto 1
program auto 0 : Ineffective
update
1 : Effective
15 Machine number This parameter specifies the machine 0 0 to 9999
for DNC link number for DNC link.
16 Number of bytes This specifies the number of bytes in one 0 0 to 4000
in one block for block when NC program is reverse-
batch output in transmitted in protocol A.
DNC-B mode
17 Baud rate for This specifies the baud rate for RS422 200 (baud) 111 to 19200
RS422 channel channels (MAIN CARD 7) (baud)
18 STM answer When S, T and M commands are executed, 120 (min) 0 to 120 (min)
back time over if the completion of the command is not
check period confirmed within the period set at this
parameter, an alarm occurs.
19 In-position time If all axes do not arrive within in-position 6000 0 to 6000
over check zone within the preset duration after the (600 sec) (x 0.1 sec)
period completion of calculation, an alarm occurs.
20 Spindle load Set the percent value which corresponds to 180 0 to 500
max.% full scale (torque command $FF) indication
of the spindle load to be displayed on the
load display screen.
21 Allowable An alarm occurs when the spindle load 0 Oto 32
number (n) of torque exceeds the allowable value for the
torque tow for duration of 6.4*n (msec) continuously while
synchronized the synchronized tapping torque is
tapping monitored.
Sets the allowable number (n) of low torque
for the synchronized tapping
23 File read waiting Sets the duration from filename designation 0 sec 0 to 9999
time for channel (DC4 output) to the file read (DC1 output)
0 in DNC-B for channel 0 with DC code control. If “0"
mode is set, the parameter No. 34 will be used
automatically.
24 File read waiting Sets the duration from filename designation 0 sec 0 to 9999
time for channel (DC4 output) to file read (DC1 output) for
1 in DNC-B channel 1 with DC code control. If “0” is
mode set, the parameter No. 35 will be used
automatically.
 .X

3754-E P-425
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (word)

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
25 File read waiting Sets the duration from filename designation 0 sec 0 to 9999
time for channel (DC4 output) to file read (DC1 output) for
2 in DNC-B channel 2 with DC code control. If *0" is
mode set, the parameter No. 36 will be used
automatically.
26 File read waiting Sets the duration from filename designation 0 sec 0 to 9999
time for channel (DC4 output) to file read (DC1 output) for
3 in DNC-B channel 3 with DC code control. If ‘0* is
mode set, the parameter No. 37 will be used
automatically.
27 File read waiting Sets the duration from filename designation 0 sec 0 to 9999
time for channel (DC4 output) to file read (DC1 output) for
4 in DNC-B channel 4 with DC code control. If *0’ is
mode set, the parameter No. 38 will be used
automatically.
28 Answer waiting In the DNC-C specification, limit of answer 30 1 to 9999
period in DNC-C waiting period after sending [C.NCP] (NC
mode program transmission request) for input and
verify operations.
29 Home position This specifies the home position number for 0 1 to 8
number of the the first reference point return command
tape conversion specification (FANUC).
-
first sequence
point
30 Home position This specifies the home position number for 0 1 to 8
number of the the second reference point return command
second - tape conversion specification (FANUC).
reference point
31 Home position This specifies the home position number for 0 1 to 8
number of the the third reference point return command -
third reference tape conversion specification (FANUC).
point
32 Home position This specifies the home position number for 0 1 to 8
number of the the fourth reference point return command -
fourth reference tape conversion specification (FANUC).
point
33 Maximum This parameter specifies the total number of 2304 0 to 2304
allowable sets of sets of pitch error compensation data of all
screw pitch error axes.
compensation
 3754-E P-426
SECTION PARAMETERS
3

NC optional parameter (word)

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
*34 Ready This specifies the duration in which the 10 (sec) 1 to 9999
completion RS232C channel 0 must be set ready. If it (sec)
waiting time for is not set ready within the time specified, an
RS232C channel alarm occurs.
0
*35 Ready This specifies the duration in which the 10 (sec) 1 to 9999
completion RS232C channel 1 must be set ready. If it (sec)
waiting time for is not set ready within the time specified, an
RS232C channel alarm occurs.
1
*36 Ready This specifies the duration in which the 10 (sec) 1 to 9999
completion RS232C channel 2 must be set ready. If it (sec)
waiting time for is not set ready within the time specified, an
RS232C channel alarm occurs.
2
*37 Ready This specifies the duration in which the 10 (sec) 1 to 9999
completion RS232C channel 3 must be set ready. If it (sec)
waiting time for is not set ready within the time specified, an
RS232C channel alarm occurs.
3
*38 Ready This specifies the duration in which the 10 (sec) 1 to 9999
completion RS232C channel 4 must be set ready. If it (sec)
waiting time for is not set ready within the time specified, an
RS232C channel alarm occurs.
4
Baud rate of This parameter specifies the baud rate for 600 110 to 19200
RS232C channel RS232C channel 1. (0.6K baud) (baud)
1
*40 Baud rate of This parameter specifies the baud rate for 600 110 to 19200
RS232C channel RS232C channel 2. (0.6 K baud) (baud)
2
*41 Baud rate of This parameter specifies the baud rate for 600 110 to 19200
RS232C channel RS232C channel 3. (0.6 K baud) (baud)
3
*42 Baud rate of This parameter specifies the baud rate for 600 110 to 19200
RS232C channel RS232C channel 4. (0.6 K baud) (baud)
4

Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off the power supply once after setting new
data, then turn it on again.
 3754-E P-427
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (word)

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
43 RS232C channel 0 (channel) 0 to 4
used for DNC-A Setting Device Name (channel)
channel
0 TT : (CNO) [RS232C]
1 CN1 : [RS232C]
2 CN2 : [RS232C]
3 CN3 : [RS232C]
4 CN4 : [RS232C]

44 Channel No. for Sets the channel No. for DC code control in 0 0 to 4
DC code control the infinite buffer operation mode.

CNO 0
CN1 1
CN2 2
CN3 3
CN4 4

*46 Designation of 0 0 to 5
punch device Setting Device Name
0 TT : (CNO) [RS232C]
1 CN1 [RS232CJ
2 CN2 (RS232CJ
3 CN3 [RS232C]
4 CN4 [RS232C]
5 PP [Parallel]

Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off the power supply once after setting new
data, then turn it on again.
 3754-E P-428
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (word)

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
*46 Designation of 0 0 to 5
print data output Setting Device Name
external device TT : (CNO) [RS232C]
0
name
1 CN1 [RS232C]
2 CN2 [RS232C]
3 CN3 [RS232C]
4 CN4 [RS232C]
5 PR [Centronics]

48 Average number This specifies the number (n) of load data 16 4 to 80

of sampling data sets to be sampled; spindle and axis load
sets for load data is the average value of these sampled
display data sets.
*49 Time constant This specifies the time constant for linear 20 0 to 30
for linear acceleration/deceleration for synchronized
acceleration/ control. (N x 12.8 ms)
deceleration
50 Synchronization If a synchronization error between the 200 (ÿm) Oto 1000
error allowance master and slave axes exceeds this value (0.008 in.)
A during normal machine operation conditions,
an alarm occurs.
51 Synchronization If a synchronization error between the 1000 Gum) 0 to 5000
error allowance master and slave axes exceeds this value (0.04 in.)
B when power is turned on, an alarm occurs.
*57 Designation of 0 Oto 5
read device (no Setting Device Name
DC code control)
0 TR : Standard tape reader

1 CNO: RS232C channel 0 tape reader

2 CN1: RS232C channel 1 tape reader
3 CN2: RS232C channel 2 tape reader
4 CN3: RS232C channel 3 tape reader
5 CN4: RS232C channel 4 tape reader

59 3-D arc The tolerance amount used to determine 0 0 to 32767

projection path whether the path obtained by projecting the
judgment 3-D arc on a plane is a line or not.
tolerance
amount

Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off the power supply once after setting new
data, then turn it on again.
 1

3754-E P-429
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (word)

Factory
Param- Set Setting
eter Item Contents Initial Range
No. Value
61 Synchronized Synchronized tapping torque monitoring 0% 1 to 100
tapping torque starts in the following manner
monitor
(1) Spindle overload is ignored until the
Spindle speed spindle speed reaches A% of the S
(A) command value.
(2) When the spindle speed reaches A% of
the S command value, torque
monitoring starts after duration T (100
msec) to wait the spindle speed to be
constant.

T: Spindle overload it ignored

Motor current before the spindle speed
does not become constant.
t: Duration V (set by the
T t parameter), the spindle
62 Synchronized 0 (x 0.1sec) 1 to 1000
overload is ignored.
tapping torque
monitor
s. arlng torque value
Waiting time (t)
Spindle constant speed

-Time
Spindle is recognized
- at the constant speed.
S command
value

A« 100%

- Time
 •X

3754-E P-430
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (word)

Factory
Param- Set
Item Contents Setting
eter Initial Range
No. Value
*103 Default device Sets the default device name for the 0 0 to 11
name for PUNCH function.
PUNCH 0: TT (CNO) 1:CN1 2:CN2 3: CN3
function 4: CN4 5: PP 6: MDO 7: MD1 8: FDO
9: FD1 10: FD2 11:FD3
*104 Default device Sets the default device names for the 0 0 to 11
names for READ and VERIFY functions.
READ and 0: TR 1:TT (CNO) 2:CN1 3: CN2
VERIFY 4: CN3 5: CN4 6: MDO 7: MD1 8: FDO
functions 9:FD1 10: FD2 11:FD3
105 Interactive Sets the initial (first pass) approach 0 0 to 2000
gauging speed toward the workpiece at
approach interactive gauging.
speed
110 Indexing offsetSets the touch probe’s indexing (M19) 0 0 to 359
amount offset amount for one-direction gauging
at the AUTO gauging function.
111 Puncher IF and Delay period timer which sets the delay 0 0 to 9999
parameter time from the point when the puncher IF
input/output and parameter input/output command
ends (normal or error end), until the
point when the RS switches OFF.
When set to “0”, RS is not switched
OFF.
112 Puncher IF and Designates the amount of RS OFF time 0 0 to 9999
parameter after the puncher IF and parameter
input/output input/output command ends (normal or
error end). (RS switches ON when this
period elapses.)
Parameter Nos. 111 and 112 can be
used simultaneously.
113 Synchronous Sets the return speed override value (%) 0 1 to 200
tapping return for synchronous tapping.
speed override A setting of “0” is processed as 100%.

Parameters indicated by and asterisk (*) require turning off power supply once after setting new data.
Turn it back on.
 -i

3754-E P-431
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Data setting procedure is as follows:

(1) Press PARAMETER.

V
\
I rsnrnvi

EBBe§BBS
I H II I II J II K II L II M || N

yU ®©@© BS)
£3 ©©©© L ©@®0 r
®Q©0 7
7
(2) Press function key /(6) Press WRITE key.
fF61 or fF7] (ITEM). (5) Key in data.
(4) Press function key [F1] or [F2] (ADD). (3) Press the cursor key.

Fig. 3-4 NC Optional Parameter (Word)

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) more than once until the NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER
(WORD) screen appears.
(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor at the desired data.
 _L

3754-E P-432
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Cursor

PARAMETER
/
SET
«MC OPTIONAL PARHCTER (WORD)*

n2
3
188
188
Ja
S'
12
13 e
NO.
e zi
e 22
23
18
18
8
NO.
31
32
8
8

4 98 14 e 24 8
5 188 15 e 25 8
6 2488 16 e » 8
Parameter No. 7 188 17 e 27 8
8 8 18 e 28 8
9 2888 19 8 29 1
Lie 8 28 38 38 I

X v z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 99.994 99.999 51.215

Entry data
-S 588

SET ADD ITEM* ITEM* |[EXTENDI

r?~riiT~rirTÿiTTi(TTinrT)CFT)rFT)

Setting:
When data is previously known:
(4) Press function key [F1] (SET).

(5) Enter the data with key board.

(6) Press the WRITE key.

This rewrites the data indicated by the cursor.
When data has already been set and it is necessary to set the increment from the data:

(4) Press function key [F2] (ADD).

(5) Enter the increment with key board.

(6) Press the WRITE key.
This rewrites the data indicated by the cursor.
 1.

3754-E P-433
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-9. NC Optional Parameter (Bit)

The optional parameter (bits) the follow are available.

Factory
Param-
Bit Set
eter
No. Contents Set 1 Set 0 Initial
No.
Value
0 Sets Tape ISO EIA 1
code
1 Recognition Does Does not 1
tape code
automatically
Tape Code
Automatic
2 Carries out Taps Code Operating Conditions Does Does not 0
Setting
a tape TV Recognition
check In “READ" and ‘VERIFY’,
tape code is automatically
3 There is a t i recognized irrespective of ISO% Feed 0
tape delimi¬ ISO/EIA. In ‘PUNCH", EIA ER holes
ting code. ISO is used.
In ‘READ* and ‘VERIFY’,
4 Verifies tape tape code ia automatically Does Does not 0
1 during o 1 discriminated irrespective of
reading ISO/EIA. In ‘PUNCH’,
EIA is used.
5 Rewinds tape In ‘READ’ and ‘VERIFY",
Does Does not 0
without ISO code is used, and
verifying 1 0 wrong tape code results in
after tape an error. In ‘PUNCH",
reading ISO is used.
In ‘READ’ and ‘VERIFY’,
6 Handles EIA code is used, and Does Does not 1
special code o o wrong tape code results in
(other than an error. In ‘PUNCH’,
$20-$5F, HT) EIA is used.
as an alarm.
7 Does not Does Does not 0
store special
code
 3754-E P-434
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param¬ Set
Bit Set 1 Set 0
eter Contents Initial
No.
No. Value
0 During automatic operation with the single block ON, a block Stop Non-Stop 0
of a control statement such as IF, GOTO or CALL usually
does not come to a stop until the next block is executed. This
bit is intended to select a stop or a non-stop in the particular
control statement block.
1 In multiple rotary table rotation control, rounding processing of Does Does not 0
the actual value on the work coordinate system is carried out
when the control is reset.
2 Makes the dry run effective even at rapid feed, and operates Effective Ineffective 0
2 by the manually selected feedrate.
3
4 Output of print function to external device is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
5 Cycle start after the mode has been switched from the Possible Impossible 0
automatic to setting is possible.
6 Makes fraction processing. Always set at ‘‘I”. Does Does not 1
7 During automatic operation with the single block OFF, does No Buffering 0
not carry out reading or arithmetic operations for any of the buffering
blocks that follow the block in process until the operation is
completed. Note, however, that during cutter radius
compensation, reading and arithmetic operations are carried
out until the intersecting point is found (for up to three blocks).
0 Selects inches or mm for length unit system. *1 Inch mm 0
1 Selects 1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec for the input unit Ves As set by 1
system. bit 2 to bit
5 and bit
7
2 Selects 0.01 mm or 0.001 mm for length unit system. 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0
3 Selects either 0.1 mm/mln and 0.01 inch/min or 1 mm/min and 0.1 1 mm/min 0
0.1 inch/min for the speed input system. mm/min 0.1
0.01 inch/mm
inch/min
3
4 Selects either 0.001 mm/rev and 0.0001 inch/rev or 0.01 0.001 0.01 0
mm/rev and 0.001 inch/rev for the speed input system. mm/rev mm/rev
0.0001 0.001
inch/rev inch/rev
S Selects 0.01 sec or 0.1 sec for the time input unit. 0.01 sec 0.1 sec 0
6 Selects 1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec for the unit of the data Yes As set by 0
with decimal point. -
bit 1 bit
5 and bit
7
7 Selects 0.001 sec or 0.1 sec for the time input system. *2 0.001 0.1 sec 0
sec

[Supplement]
*1 Setting of bit 0 is effective only when the optional inch/metric switchable function is selected.
*2 Unit of input time always 0.01 sec when setting of bit 5 is “1”.
 J...

3754-E P-435
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param¬ Set
Bit
eter Contents Set 1 Set 0
No. Initial
No. Value
0 Selects 0.001 deg or 0.0001 deg for angle unit system. 0.0001 0.001 deg 0
deg
1 A system reset is followed by bubble memory loading and it Does Does not 1
takes 80 seconds or so for the NC to be normal. Then, the
automatic operation mode is established. This bit is
intended to make an automatic selection of the program
selected before the system reset. (The same applies also
when the power supply is turned on.)
4 2 In an NC reset, zeros the manual shift in manual interruption Does Does not, 1
and the shift in pulse handle interruption (MANUAL SHIFT but as it
ACTUL/MANUAL SHIFT TOTAL). is.
3 Enables the program sequence number search after NC Possible Impossible 1
start.
4 Does not display the system subprogram (SSC, LIB) in Does not Does 0
automatic operation mode.
5 0
6 Selects 4 x 4 as the character size for the enlarged display Does Does not 0
of the actual position data. (4 x 4) (2 x 2 is
selected)
7 Displays position data on the remote position display unit in Does Does not 0
incremental values in reference to the position
0 Input/output bit screen Does not Displays 0
In automatic, MDI or manual display
1 operation mode, if the check Displays
Specification bit screen Does not 0
display is selected, these display
screens do not appear. That
2 Axis data screen is, pressing the page key Does not Displays 0
provides a display of screens display
3 NC/spindle diagnostic whose bit is “0" but no display Does not Displays 0
of screens whose bit is “1”. display
data screen
5
4 System & I/O variable Does not Displays 0
screen display
5 Index of diagnosis page is displayed by $4000. Display by Display by 0
$4000 $20
6 Actual position data (extended characters) is displayed in From local From work 0
reference to the origin of local coordinate system. coordinate coordinate
system system
origin origin
7 To produce the current value and graphic to be displayed, Does Does not 1
adds the shift in the manual intervention or pulse handle
overlap.
 i.

3754-E P-436
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param¬
Bit Set
eter Contents Set 1 Set 0
No. Initial
No.
Value
0 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the X-axis. Does Does not 0
1 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the Y-axis. Does Does not 0
2 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the Z-axis. Does Does not 0
6 3 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the 4th-axis. Does Does not 0
4 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the 5th-axis. Does Does not 0
5 Enlarges/reduces the graph for the 6th-axis. Does Does not 0
6 Displays the current position (enlarged) on the slanted Does Does not 0
coordinate system.
7 External simultaneous axis position display There is There is 0
not
0 Cancels the X-axis command Does Does not 0
When the AXIS COM. Cancels the Y-axis command Does 0
1 Does not
CANCEL switch is turned
2 ON, the axis commands Cancels the Z-axis command Does Does not 1
3 whose bit is “1” are Cancels the 4th-axis Does Does not 0
canceled and neither command
7 arithmetic operation nor
4 ordinary operation is Cancels the 5th-axis Does Does not 0
carried out. command
5 Cancels the 6th-axis Does Does not 0
command
6 All axis locked Does Does not 0
Axis lock all
7 Axis lock ON/OFF ON OFF 0
*0 Stop bit Of CNO: (RS232C) 1 bit 2 bit 0
*1 Ready signal of CNO: (RS232C) Internal External 1
READY READY
*2 Parity check of CNO: (RS232C) Checked Not 0
checked
*3 Parity of CNO: (RS232C) Even Odd 0
8
*4 8-bit JIS of CNO: (RS232C) There is There is 0
not
*5 DC code of CNO: (RSC232C) There is There is 0
not
*6 DC code control type 2 of CNO: (RS232C) Executed Not 0
executed
*7 File name present in reading operation at CNO: (RS232C) Present Not 0
in DNC-A mode present
Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off of power supply once after setting new data.
Turn it back on.
 X.

3754-E P-437
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param-
Bit Set
eter Contents Set 1 Set 0
No. Initial
No.
Value
0 In data setting, unit system of length is either “inch" or Inch mm 0
“mm".
1 In data setting, setting unit is either minimum setting unit 1 mm, Minimum 1
or 1 mm, 1 inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec. 1 inch, setting
1 deg, unit
1 sec
2 In data setting, unit system of length is either 0.1 /an or Does Does not 0
0.00001 inch.
3 In data setting, unit system of angle is either 0.001 deg. or 0.0001 0.001 0
0.0001 deg. deg. deg.
9
4 0
5 Operation mode(s) inoperative for edit lock specification Program Program 0
when the EDIT LOCK (partly restricted) mode is selected. edit, edit
param¬
eter
setting
6 In the data setting, the decimal point indicates 1 mm, 1 Basic Bit 1 0
inch, 1 deg. and 1 sec. unit setting
7 In the EDIT LOCK mode, the maximum increment for tool 0
length upset and cutter radius compensation is 1 mm/0.1
inch.
0 Default of EBCDIC, for floppy disk of IBM format Does Does not 0
1 Default of ASCII, for floppy disk of IBM format Does Does not 0
2 End code (%) is available for floppy disk of IBM format. Yes No 0
3 NC file name is not output at DNC punch output. Not Output 0
output
4 Verify output is made at DNC punch output. Output Not 0
10 output
*5 Selection of IBM format (standard IBM format and JIS JIS Standard 0
specified IBM format) specified IBM
IBM format
format
*6 Extension is used for file name in data input/output using Not used Used 0
floppy disk of IBM format (blank)
7 Tool length and tool radius compensation can be added Can Can not 0
maximum 1 mm/0.1 inch when PL mode is selected.

Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off of power supply once after setting new data.
Turn it back on.
 3754-E P-438
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param- Set
Bit Contents Set 1 Set 0
eter Initial
No.
No. Value

*0 Tape conversion function is executed. Yes No 0

(OSP3000M level I, FS-9M level I /II)
1 0
2 0
3 End of record code for NC program transmission LF CR, LF 0
(DNC-B, C)
11 4 0
5 Designation of the parameter setting screen for coordinate 2nd 1st 0
system conversion screen screen
6 Gives a command for transmitting the coordinate system Dose Dose not 0
conversion value when the operation mode is switched to
MANUAL.
7 Ignores the minimum value for the 0.1 external position Dose Dose not 0
display. (displays)
0 Spindle speed is programmed in S2-digit when tape 2-digit 4-digit 0
conversion function is on. comman comman
d d
1 Spindle speed is programmed in S2-digit when tape 2-digit 4-digit 0
conversion function is off. comman comman
d d
2 File name output for tape punch out Not Punched 0
12 punched
3 End of record code for tape punch operation in ISO code LF CR, LF 0
4 Code used for tape feed for tape punch operation Space NULL 0
5 Specifies whether tape feed portion is punched. Punched Not 0
punched
6 Communication link is reset by pressing NC reset button Reset Not reset 0
(DNC-C).
7 0

Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off of power supply once after setting new data.
Turn it back on.
 3754-E P-439
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param-
Bit Set
eter Contents Set 1 SetO
No.
No. Initial
Value
*0 Stop bit of CN1: (RS232C) 1 bit 2 bit 0
*1 Ready signal of CN1: (RS232C) Internal External 0
READY READY
*2 Parity check of CN1: (RS232C) Checked Not 0
checked
*3 Parity of CN1: (RS232C) Even Odd 0
13 *4 8-bit JIS of CN1: (RS232C) There is There is 0
not
*5 DC code of CN1: (RS232C) There is There is 0
not
*6 DC code control type 2 of CN1: (RS232C) Executed Not 0
executed
*7 File name present in reading operation at CN1: (RS232C) Present Not 0
in DNC-A mode present
*0 Stop bit of CN2: (RS232C) 1 bit 2 bit 0
*1 Ready signal of CN2: (RS232C) Internal External 0
READY READY
*2 Parity check of CN2: (RS232C) Checked Not 0
checked
*3 Parity of CN2: (RS232C) Even Odd 0
14 *4 8-bit JIS of CN2: (RS232C) There is There is 0
not
*5 DC code of CN2: (RS232C) There is There is 0
not
*6 DC code control type 2 of CN2: (RS232C) Executed Not 0
executed
*7 File name present in reading operation at CN2: (RS232C) Present Not 0
in DNC-A mode present

Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off of power supply once after setting new data.
Turn it back on.
 .1,

3754-E P-440
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param- Set
Bit
eter Contents Set 1 SetO Initial
No.
No. Value
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
15 5 STM answer time over check function is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
Alarm 615 STM time over
Optional parameter (word) No. 18
6 In-position time over check function is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
Alarm 616 In-position monitoring time over
Optional parameter (word) No. 19
7 In the inch system, the unit system for an F command 25.4 1 deg/min 0
used for a rotary axis can be selected. deg/min
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 Type A buffer operation in the DNC-B mode Type A Type B 0
(large
16 capacity)
6 Displays the common variable setting screen with the Does Does not 0
comment.
7 Displays and enables the setting of: system parameter, Setting Setting 0
pitch error compensation, machine system parameter OK NG
(word), machine system parameter (long word) and No. 33
and following Nos. in the NC optional parameter (word);
and No. 17 and trailing Nos. in the NC optional parameter
(bit).
 3754-E P-441
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param-
Bit Set
eter Contents Set 1 Set 0
No. Initial
No.
Value
0 Fixes the cycle axis for a fixed cycle, which may be any Does Does not 0
axis other than plane designation, at the Z-axis.
1 0
Bit 1 0 0 1 1
2 0
Bit 2 0 1 0 1
See the table
Shift direction P-X N-X P-Y N-Y at the left.

Specifies the shift direction and axis in a fixed cycle (G76,

G87).
This is effective only when bit 0 is “1".
17 3 At a reset, clears the mirror images for all axes, providing Does Does not 0
normal conditions.
4 0
5 External program selection is executed for main program Schedule Main 0
or schedule program. program program
6 In external program selection operation, the selection of Does not Does 0
the same file name is not executed.
7 Specifies which tapping cycle the G codes (G74, G84) Synchro¬ Conven¬ 0
call, conventional tapping cycle or synchronized nized tional
tapping tapping
cycle cycle
0 GOO G01 1
1 G18 G17 0
2 G19 G17 0
3 Specifies the G code to be set automatically when the
G56 G53 0
18 power supply is turned on.
4 G91 G90 0
5 G95 G94 0
6 G22 G23 0
7 0
 .1-

3754-E P-442
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Param-
Factory
Bit Set
eter Contents Set 1 SetO
No. Initial
No.
Value
0 X-axis One-directional positioning at a target point is N P 0
carried out after an overrun is made against that direction direction
point. It is possible to determine the final
1 Y-axis positioning direction on an axis base. In other Same as Same as 0
words, once the N-direction is established, N-
above above
directional positioning does not involve an overrun;
but P-directional positioning involves an overrun
2 Z-axis before actual positioning. If the P-direction is Same as Same as 1
established, the relationship is reversed. above above

3 4th axis Bit-0. Bit5* 1 Same as Same as 0

19
A
above above
Bit-1 [ Bit-0
4 5th axis Same as Same as 0
above above
N P
5 6th axis /Target Same as Same as 0
point
(value) above above

(This excess travel is set by

a user parameter.)

6 DNC communication ON/OFF ON OFF 0

7 DNC buffer operation ON/OFF ON OFF 0
 3754-E P-443
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param-
Bit Set
eter
No. Contents Set 1 SetO Initial
No.
Value
0 Gives D.STA transmission request in the simple DNC (DNC- Does Does not 0
C) mode
1 For single-axis command, actual position or a point on the arc Any point Actual 0
is taken as the command value for the axis not programmed. on arc position
20 2 Z-axis moves to the upward limit position when alarm B Yes No 0
occurs.
3 Message code in the simple DNC (DNC-C) mode ASCII ISO 0
4 End code in the simple DNC (DNC-C) mode ETX CR 0
5 Delimiter code in the simple DNC (DNC-C) mode NUL % 0
6 Designates the file extension in host computer in the simple Does Does not 0
DNC (DNC-C) mode
7 Protocol selection in the DNC-B mode Protocol Protocol 0
B A
*0 Stop bit of CN3: (RS232C) 1 bit 2 bit 0
*1 Ready signal of CN3: (RS232C) Internal External 0
READY READY
*2 Parity check of CN3: (RS232C) Checked Not 0
checked
*3 Parity of CN3: (RS232C) Even Odd 0
21
*4 8-bit JIS of CN3: (RS232C) There is There is 0
not
*5 DC code of CN3: (RS232C) There is There is 0
not
*6 DC control type 2 of CN3: (RS232C) Executed Not 0
executed
*7 File name present in reading operation at CN3: (RS232C) in Present Not 0
DNC-A mode present

Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off of power supply once after setting new data.
Turn it back on.
 +Ji.

3754-E P-444
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Param- Factory
Bit Set
eter Contents Set 1 Set 0
No. Initial
No. Value
•0 Stop bit of CN4: (RS232C) 1 bit 2 bit 0
*1 Ready signal of CN4: (RS232C) Internal External 0
READY READY
*2 Parity check of CN4: (RS232C) Checked Not 0
checked
*3 Parity of CN4: (RS232C) Even Odd 0
22 *4 8-bit JIS of CN4: (RS232C) There is There is 0
not
*5 DC code of CN4: (RS232C) There is There is 0
not
*6 DC control type 2 of CN4: (RS232C) Executed Not 0
executed
*7 File name present in reading operation at CN4: (RS232C) Present Not 0
in DNC-A mode present
0 No. 1 Parameter Override 0
switch
1 No. 2 Parameter Override 0
switch
2 No. 3 In the positioning at the home position, its rapid Parameter Override 0
feedrate is controlled either by setting of override switch
3 No. 4 switch or setting value for NC optional parameter Parameter Override 0
(word) No. 12. switch
23
4 No. 5 Setting is possible from No. 1 to No. 32. Parameter Override 0
No. 1 corresponds to home position number 1. switch
5 No. 6 Parameter Override 0
switch
6 No. 7 Parameter Override 0
switch
7 No. 8 Parameter Override 0
switch

Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off of power supply once after setting new data.
Turn it back on.
 3754-E P-445
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Param- Factory
Bit Set
eter Contents Set 1 Set 0
No. Initial
No. Value
0 No. 9 Parameter Override 0
switch
1 No. 10 Parameter Override 0
switch
In the positioning at the home position, its rapid
2 No. 11 Parameter Override 0
feedrate is controlled either by setting of override
switch
switch or setting value for NC optional parameter
3 No. 12 (word) No. 12. Parameter Override 0
24
Setting is possible from No. 1 to No. 32. switch
4 No. 13 No. 1 corresponds to home position number 1. Parameter Override 0
switch
5 No. 14 Parameter Override 0
switch
6 No. 15 Parameter Override 0
switch
7 No. 16 Parameter Override 0
switch
0 No. 17 Parameter Override 0
switch
1 No. 18 Parameter Override 0
switch
2 No. 19 In the positioning at the home position, its rapid Parameter Override 0
feedrate is controlled either by setting of override switch
3 No. 20 switch or setting value for NC optional parameter Parameter Override 0
25 (word) No. 12. switch
4 No. 21 Setting is possible from No. 1 to No. 32. Parameter Override 0
No. 1 corresponds to home position number 1 . switch
5 No. 22 Parameter Override 0
switch
6 No. 23 Parameter Override 0
switch
7 No. 24 Parameter Override 0
switch
 -X

3754-E P-446
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param¬ Set
Bit
eter Contents Set 1 Set 0 Initial
No.
No. Value
0 No. 25 Parameter Override 0
switch
1 No. 26 Parameter Override 0
switch
2 No. 27 Parameter Override 0
In the positioning at the home position, its rapid switch
by setting of override
3 No. 28 feedrate is controlled either Parameter Override 0
switch or setting value for NC optional parameter switch
26 (word) No. 12.
4 No. 29 Parameter Override 0
Setting is possible from No. 1 to No. 32.
switch
No. 1 corresponds to home position number 1.
5 No. 30 Parameter Override 0
switch
6 No. 31 Parameter Override 0
switch
7 No. 32 Parameter Override 0
switch
0 Punched Not 0
punched
1 Punched Not 0
punched
2 Punched Not 0
Specifies the EIA code which represents “ = punched
3 Conditions of the hole, punched or not punched, when the Punched Not 0
key to be used for punching the symbol “ = ' is pressed punched
27 are set in terms of the bit data.
4 Punched Not 0
Same for following setting.
punched
5 Punched Not 0
punched
6 Punched Not 0
punched
7 Punched Not 0
punched
 ...x...

3754-E P-447
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param-
Bit Set
eter Contents Set 1 SetO
No. Initial
No.
Value
0 Punched Not 0
punched
1 Punched Not 0
punched
2 Punched Not 0
punched
3 Punched Not 0
Specifies the EIA code which represents “ÿ*.
punched
28
4 Punched Not 0
punched
5 Punched Not 0
punched
6 Punched Not 0
punched
7 Punched Not 0
punched
0 Punched Not 0
punched
1 Punched Not 0
punched
2 Punched Not 0
punched
3 Punched Not 0
Specifies the EIA code which represents “[". punched
29
4 Punched Not 0
punched
5 Punched Not 0
punched
6 Punched Not 0
punched
7 Punched Not 0
punched
 3754-E P-448
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param-
Bit Set
eter Contents SeM SetO
No. Initial
No.
Value
0 Punched Not 0
punched
1 Punched Not 0
punched
2 Punched Not 0
punched
3 Punched Not 0
Specifies the EIA code which represents *]". punched
30
4 Punched Not 0
punched
5 Punched Not 0
punched
6 Punched Not 0
punched
7 Punched Not 0
punched
0 Punched Not 0
punched
1 Punched Not 0
punched
2 Punched Not 0
punched
3 Punched Not 0
Specifies the EIA code which represents punched
31
4 Punched Not 0
punched
5 Punched Not 0
punched
6 Punched Not 0
punched
7 Punched Not 0
punched
 3754-E P-449
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param¬ Set
eter
Bit Contents Set 1 SetO
No. Initial
No. Value
0 Setting of machine parameter data is enabled when Enabled Not 0
debugging enabled
1 During AUTO and MDI mode cutting feed, an alarm is Does Does not 0
activated if one or more axes is at the limit.
2 0
32 3 0
4 0
5 0
6 NC output is performed during box check. Output Not 0
output
7 Carries out box check. Does Does not 0
0 Graphic coordinate system is made effective when Effective Ineffective 0
NC is reset.
1 Backup function is effective when M02 or M30 is Effective Ineffective 0
executed.
2 The mirror image function is effective in the slanted Effective Follow 0
coordinate system (“0” is set at No. 34, bit 2) No. 34, bit
2
33 3 Counting of counters (work counter, NC running Only All modes 0
counter, spindle rotation counter, cutting time counter) AUTO
occurs only in auto mode. mode
4 0
5 0
6 The Z-axis automatic retract function is effective when Effective Ineffective 0
a B-axis rotation command is given
7 Gathering minute blocks when interpreting a program Effective Ineffective 0
 3754-E P-450
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param- Set
Bit Set 1
eter Contents SetO Initial
No.
No. Value
0 Single block stop at point R level in the fixed cycle is Effective Ineffective 0
effective.
*1 Communication with MOP Not made Made 0
*2 Mirror image effective in Work Local 0
coordinate coordinate
system system or
slanted
coordinate
system
3 System Q code macros 300 •349 are MODIN type. MODIN CALL 0
34
*4 System variable V1NCH is made write enabled. READ/WR Only 0
ITE READ
enabled enabled
5 Splash guard interlock is effective. Effective Ineffective 0
*8 To set whether the calculation results of the function With Integer 0
(ROUND, FIX, FUP) are to convert numerical data into an decimal
integer with or without a decimal point when setting it for point
an address character.
7 Space for attachment rotation offset U-/V-/W- X-/Y-/Z- 0
axis axis
0 EC-P check on diagnosis screen Effective Ineffective 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
35
4 B-axis rotation interlock status Ineffictive Effective 0
5 0
6 0
7 0

Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off the power supply once after setting new data.
Turn it back on.
 A.

3754-E P-451
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param-
Bit Set
eter
No. Contents Set 1 Set 0
Initial
No.
Value
0 The unit of variables assigned to MSB is set at 0.001 mm 0.001 mm 1 mm 0
(0.0001 inches) when bit 0 and bit 6 of NC optional (0.0001 in.) (1 in.)
parameter (bit) No. 3 are *0’ and “1”, respectively.
1 Uni-direction automatic gauging with touch probe Does Does not 0
2 Automatic gauging and automatic tool length Does Does not 0
36 offset/broken tool detection with ring sensor
3 Default of the maximum tool length for automatic tool Effective Ineffective 0
length offset/broken tool detection
4 MCV-A chip cover interference prevention Does Does not 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 Synchronized operation; synchronized error ON OFF 0
compensation mode input
1 Synchronized operation; synchronized position shift Possible Impossible 0
amount setting
2 Semi-synchronized operation in the DNC-B mode Effective Ineffective 0
3 Plane on which 3-D arc is projected is fixed using G17, Effective Ineffective 0
G18, or G19.
37
4 In the rapid feed mode operation, the command causing Yes No 0
overtravel causes an alarm
5 Selection of PQR command method for 3-D arc Normal Position 0
vector
6 With PPC P selection, the workpiece number is taken as Yes No 0
the file name.
7 Pitch error compensation ineffective (laser measurement Ineffective Effective 0
mode) (in 0.1 //m control specification)
 -i.

3754-E P-452
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param-
Bit Contents Set 1
Set
eter SetO
No. Initial
No.
Value
0 Stop bit of MOP-TOOL 1 bit 2 bit 0
1 Read signal of MOP-TOOL Internal External 0
READY READY
2 Parity check of MOP-TOOL Checked Not 0
checked
38 3 Parity of MOP-TOOL Even Odd 0
4 0
5 NG1 tool as replacement tool Does not Does 0
(for spare tool replacement specs.)
6 0
7 Communication device of MOP-TOOL (RS-232C) 0
0 Interruption effective command (EIN) Ineffective Effective 0
1 Interruption signal Status Edge 0
trigger trigger
2 Execution of the interruption program End of Interrupting 0
block block
39 *3 A-axis multi-turn function is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
*4 B-axis multi-turn function is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
*5 C-axis multi-turn function is made effective. Effective Ineffective 0
6 Animated graphic display Not Supported 0
supported
7 0
0 Designation of master or slave station for CNO: Slave Master 0
RS232C IF channel station station
1 Designation of master or slave station for CN1: Slave Master 0
RS232C IF channel station station
2 Designation of master or slave station for CN2: Slave Master 0
RS232C IF channel station station
3 Designation of master or slave station for CN3: Slave Master 0
RS232C IF channel station station
4 Designation of master or slave station for CN4: Slave Master 0
40 RS232C IF channel station
5 No alarm activated by cutter radius compensation Does not Does 0
interference check
6 DC2, DC4 input/output at parameter input/output, Does not Does 0
file transmission reading, and punch _
7 No END DC at vacant reading and DC code control Does not Does 0
or DC code control type 2, following the data end
code at parameter input/output and file
transmission reading
(No END DC3 wait at slave station punching.)
Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off the power supply once after setting new data.
Turn it back on.
 JL

3754-E P-453
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param-
Bit Set
eter Contents Set 1 Set 0
No. Initial
No.
Value
0 DNC-B method, protocol A 0
Data at 41st to -44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 0
1 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 1 0
2 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 2 0
43
3 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 3 0
4 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 4 0
5 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 5 0
6 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 6 0
7 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 7 0
0 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 8 0
1 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 9 0
2 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 10 0
3 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 11 0
44
4 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 12 0
5 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 13 0
6 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 14 0
7 Data at 41st to 44th byte of SAT and SET command bit 15 0
0 GOO linear interpolation positioning is carried out. Ves No 0
1 G60 linear interpolation positioning is carried out. Yes No 0
2 G30 linear interpolation positioning is carried out. Yes No 0
3 M6, M60 linear interpolation positioning is earned out. Yes No 0
4 Level B alarm occurs if a positioning point exceeds the travel Effective Ineffec- 0
46 limit. tive
5

6 Auto-cycle/single is effective at the start of interactive work Auto/ Auto 0

gauging operation. single effective
effective
7 Automatic zero point setting is earned out in interactive work Carried Not 0
gauging operation. out carried
out
 i

3754-E P-454
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param- Set
Bit Contents Set 1 SetO
eter Initial
No.
No. Value
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
47
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 0
1 Coordinate system in which tool length offset is carried Slanted Work 0
out in 3-D coordinate system conversion coordin coordinat
ate e system
system
2 0
3 Gauging at 3 points to find the center between the 3 points 2 points 0
opposing inner faces or outer-faces. _
48
4 External program selection ON/OFF switch. Ineffecti Effective 0
ve
5 Cutter radius compensation designated according to Does Does not 0
the tool list file which is automatically selected when
program is selected.
6 Selection of method for synchronized tapping torque 0
monitoring _
7 Executes tape conversion operation. Does Does not 0
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
49 Specifies the EIA code which represents
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
 .X.,

3754-E P-455-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param- Set
Bit Contents Set 1 SetO
eter Initial
No.
No. Value
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
50 Specifies an irregular code.
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
51 Specifies a regular code.
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
0 Additional axis selection in the upper surface detection Addi¬ Basic 0
mode for fixed cycle LE command tional axis
axis
1 Shifts by the manual interruption shift amount in the 0
broken tool detection mode for fixed cycle LP command
2 0
Input PNO one-time at parameter input/output function
3
punch output _ 0

4 Parameter input/output function,; file name is output in 0

54 punch operation. _
5 0
6 For 0.0001 ckg type M-axis, the pulse handle x 10 SW 0
magnification is 10 times the indicated value. the SW indication
x1 -» x10, x 10 -> X100, x50-» X500 indica- applies
tion as is
7 For multiple rotating axis parameters, or No. 39, bits 3, 4 Basic No. 39 bit 0
and 5. axis for 3, 4 and
rotation 5
axis pa¬
rameter
 3754-E P-456-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

NC optional parameter (bit)

Factory
Param- Set
Bit Contents Set 1 SetO
eter Initial
No.
No.
Value
0 At G11/G10 commands, the actual position Enabled Disabled 0
(including mirror image, increment, attachment
offset, and tool length offset) is calculated.
1 At G11/G10 commands, the actual position Enabled Disabled 0
(including mirror image and increment) is
calculated.
2 At G69/G68 commands, the actual position Enabled Disabled 0
(including mirror image, increment, attachment
offset, and tool length offset) is calculated.
60
3 G-codes and M-codes will not be initialized when Not Initialized 0
NC RESET is pressed during l-PACK editing. Initialized
However, the cutter radius compensation codes
(G40, G41, G42) will be initialized.
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
*0 Sensor input 1 A-contact/B-contact switching. B-contact A-contact 0
MSB touch sensor (touch signal) _
*1 Sensor input 2 A-contact/B-contact switching. B-contact A-contact 0
MSB touch probe (touch signal) _
*2 Sensor input 3 A-contact/B-contact switching. B-contact A-contact 0
MSB touch probe (CD carrier maintenance signal)
*3 Sensor input 4 A-contact/B-contact switching. B-contact A-contact 0
61 User sensor 1 (touch signal)
*4 Sensor input 5 A-contact/B-contact switching. B-contact A-contact 0
User sensor 2 (touch signal) _
‘5 Sensor input 6 A-contact/B-contact switching. B-contact A-contact 0
User sensor (CD carrier maintenance signal)
*6 Sensor input 7 A-contact/B-contact switching. B-contact A-contact 0
*7 Sensor input 8 A-contact/B-contact switching. B-contact A-contact
Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off the power supply once after setting new data.

[Supplement] : 1. The bit 0 setting is only valid at systems with inch/metric switching specifications
(Optioal).

2. When the bit 5 setting is 1, the time units will always be 0.01 secs.
 ,x,,

3754-E P-457
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Data setting procedure is as follows:

(1) Press PARAMETER.

I1 OKUMA Q8P7000 | [ RUN ) | 8.T.M| EHG"DG“i"]

lÿUTO j|ÿ MOI

0000(D00i§
00000(D0©
00000000
00000000
©©©© 0
©©©© 0
|D[g3[ra][M][re][re][ÿ][ra)
_
OHO
@1
©®@© r
®0©0 7

(6) Press WRITE.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM.)
/ (5) Key in data.

(4) Press function key [F1] (SET). (3) Press the cursor keys.

Fig. 3-5 NC Optional Parameter (Bit)

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (BIT) screen
appears.

(3) Position the cursor at the desired data.

 3754-E P-458
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Cursor

PARAMETER SET
*tc OPTIONAL PARPTCTER (BIT)*
NO. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0100001 1
NO.
11
7
0
6 5 4 3\2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 O _
2 01000000 12 O0000O00
3 0000001 0 13 00000000
4 000011 11 14 00000000
.5 10000000 15 00000000
Parameter No. 6
7
00000000
00000100
16 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

8 00000000
9 00000010
10 00000000

X Y 2
ACT POSIT (WORK) 99.994 99.999 51.315

Zi.
SET \l I I SEARCH! ITEM. ITEM. I [EXTENDI
CED (TTirFTirFÿrF6~irF~7irF8i

Entry data

(4) Press function key [F1] (SET).

(5) Enter the data with keyboard.

The entry of any number other than 0 and 1 or any character will result in an error.

(6) Press the WRITE key.

This rewrites the data indicated by the cursor.
 X

3754-E P-459
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-10. Unit Systems for Programming

The unit systems set by NC optional parameter (bit) No. 3, bit 0 through bit 7, and No. 9, bit 0 andbit 1, can be
confirmed on the display.
From this page, it is possible to set the unit system.
Note that the unit systems of length, angle, feedrate (mm/min), feedrate (mm/rev) and time are determined
by the combination of bit data, changing the unit systems from this page might unexpectedly change other
unit systems.
The setting for REAL NUMBER (Y/N) is related with the setting for bit 6 of NC optional parameter (bit) No. 3
and No. 9.
If the change of the unit systems is required, change them using the NC optional parameter (bit) No.3.

PARAMETER SET

* It'PUT UNIT SYSTEM

*
PART PROGRAM UNIT DATA SET UNIT

(ÿETRIC/INCH ((VI) •11 METRIC/INCH (IVI) M

REAL NUMBER (Y/N) •N REAL NUMBER (Y/N) N

LENGTH (mm) • 1.000 LENGTH (mm) • 1.000

ANGLE C) • 1.000 ANGLE C) • 1.0000
FEEDRATE (nm/min> • 1.000
FEEDRATE (mm/rev) 1.000
DOWEL TIME («ec> 1.000

X Y Z
ACT POSIT (WORK)

SET SEARCHI ITEM*' T ITEM* |C EXTENDI

ITÿITT)ITT1ITXl(TÿITÿITTirF~8)

Fig. 3-6 Unit Systems for Programming

Operation parameter (bit)

No. 4 No.3 Length Angle Speed Speed Time
0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (mm) (°) (mm/min) (mm/rev) (sec)
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
0 *0 * *0 *0 *0 *0 0 0 0.001 0.001 1 0.01 0.1
0 0 * 0 0 0 1 0 0 0.01 0.001 1 0.01 0.1
0 0 * 0 0 1 0 0 0 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.01 0.1
0 0 * 0 1 0 0 0 0 0.001 0.001 1 0.001 0.1
0 * 1 0 0 0 0 0 0.001 0.001 1 0.01 0.01
0 *1 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.001 0.001 1 0.01 0.001
1 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.001 0.0001 1 0.01 0.1
*
 .JL

3754-E P-460-R1
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-11. Machine axis parameter

The machine axis parameters designate the settings for data related to the machine axis. All the machine
axis are listed below, though some may not be present at certain machine models.
MA axis: ATC Magazine axis 1
MB axis: ATC Magazine axis 2 (Multiple magazines)
MC axis: ATC Magazine axis 3 (Multiple magazines)
TS axis: ATC change arm rotation axis
Tl axis: ATC change arm IN/OUT axis
PA axis: APC axis 1
PB axis: APC axis 2
PL axis: Multi-pallet magazine axis
AT axis: Attachment axis
AA axis: Attachment magazine axis 1
AB axis: Attachment magazine axis 2
CA axis: ATC carrier axis
CB axis: AAC (AT) carrier axis
WA axis: Crossrail (EC-W) axis
The machine axis parameters are listed below.
<Screen 1>
Factory Set
Display Screen Setting
Contents Initial Value Setting Unit
Name Range
mm (in.)
P TRAVEL P-directional travel end limit in the Depends on -99999999 to Selected unit
LIMIT machine coordinate system machine +99999999 system
specification
N TRAVEL N-directional travel end limit in the Same as Same as Same as
LIMIT machine coordinate system above above above
IN POSITION “In-position confirmation zone” at Same as 0.000 to Same as
positioning above 10.000 above
CLAMP “Positioning clamp confirmation Same as Same as Same as
zone” at positioning above above above
ZERO-POINT Distance from encoder zero-point to Same as 0.000 to Same as
control zero-point above 99999.999 above
ENCODER Encoder’s zero cross shift amount Same as -99999.999 Same as
OFFSET above to 99999.999 above
BACKLASH Back lash compensation amount Same as Same as Same as
above above above
OVERRUN Overrun amount at single-direction Same as 0.000 to Same as
AMT positioning _ above 99999.999 above
 1.

3754-E P-461-R1
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 2>
Factory Set
Display Screen Setting
Contents Initial Value Setting Unit
Name Range
mm (in.)
OFFSET General purpose data used at each Depends on -99999.999 Selected unit
1 to 8 axis machine to 99999.999 system
specification

<Screen 3>
Factory Set
Display Screen Setting
Contents Initial Value Setting Unit
Name mm (in.) Range

OFFSET General purpose data used at each Depends on -99999.999 Selected unit
9 to 16 axis machine to 99999.999 system
specification

<Contents of each axis parameter

axis Item Contents
MA P TRAVEL LIMIT Not used.
MB N TRAVEL LIMIT Not used.
MC IN POSITION Sets the in position amount.
CLAMP Sets the clamp width.
ZERO-POINT Designates the magazine’s zero-point.
Designates the APA setting when pot No. 1 is positioned at
the tool change unit.
ENCODER OFFSET Sets the encoder compansation amount.
BACKLASH Sets the backlash amount.
OVERRUN AMT Not used.
OFFSET 2 Tool unloading unit offset
Inorder to position the magazine at the tool unloading unit,
the distance from zero-point when pot No. 1 is at the tool
unloading unit must be designated.

axis Item Contents

TS P TRAVEL LIMIT Sets the P stroke limit.
N TRAVEL LIMIT Sets the N stroke limit.
IN POSITION Sets the in position amount.
CLAMP Sets the clamp width.
ZERO-POINT Designates the zero-point (tool change arm’s “tool grasp”
position).
ENCODER OFFSET Sets the encoder compansation amount.
BACKLASH Sets the backlash amount.
 3754-E P-462-R1
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

axis Item Contents

TS OVERRUN AMT Not used.
OFFSET 1 Tool change arm’s “tool grasp” distance
Designates the distance from the tool change arm’s waiting
position to its “tool grasp" position.

axis Item Contents

Tl P TRAVEL LIMIT Sets the P stroke limit.
N TRAVEL LIMIT Sets the N stroke limit.
IN POSITION Sets the in position amount.
CLAMP Sets the clamp width.
ZERO-POINT Designates the zero-point (vertical spindle’s tool insertion
position).
ENCODER OFFSET Sets the encoder compansation amount.
BACKLASH Sets the backlash amount.
OVERRUN AMT Not used.
OFFSET 1 Horizonatal spindle’s tool insertion position
(MCR-B2/MCM-B)
Designates the relative distance between zero-point and the
horizontal spindle’s tool insertion position.
Protective pot’s tool insertion position (MCV-A2)
Designates the relative distance between zero-point and the
protective pot’s tool insertion position.
OFFSET 2 Magazine’s tool insertion position
Designates the relative distance between zero-point and the
magazine’s tool insertion position.
OFFSET 3 Tool extraction position
Designates the relative distance between zero-point and the
tool extraction position.
OFFSET 4 Tool insertion position (15° tilt)
Designates the relative distance between zero-point and the
tool imsertion position.
OFFSET 5 Tool insertion position (30° tilt)
Designates the relative distance between zero-point and the
tool imsertion position.
OFFSET 6 Tool insertion position (45° tilt)
Designates the relative distance between zero-point and the
tool imsertion position.
OFFSET 7 Tool insertion position (60° tilt)
Designates the relative distance between zero-point and the
tool imsertion position.
OFFSET 8 Tool insertion position (75° tilt)
Designates the relative distance between zero-point and the
tool imsertion position.
 ,.x

3754-E P-463-R1
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

axis Item Contents

PA P TRAVEL LIMIT Not used.
N TRAVEL LIMIT Not used.
IN POSITION Sets the in position amount.
CLAMP Sets the clamp width.
ZERO-POINT Designates the shifter’s zero-point.
ENCODER OFFSET Sets the encoder compansation amount.
BACKLASH Sets the backlash amount.
OVERRUN AMT Not used.
OFFSET 1 APC axis travel enabled position
Designates the APC shifter axis position where X- and B-
axis travel are enabled.
OFFSET 2 Shifter HP confirmation position
Designates the shifter stop position during a shifter ADVANCE
when the X-, Z-, and B- axis are not at their home positions.

axis Item Contents

PL P TRAVEL LIMIT Not used.
N TRAVEL LIMIT Not used.
IN POSITION Sets the in position amount.
CLAMP Sets the clamp width.
ZERO-POINT Designates the pallet magazine’s zero-point.
ENCODER OFFSET Sets the encoder compansation amount.
BACKLASH Sets the backlash amount.
OVERRUN AMT Not used.
 ,JL

3754-E P-464-R1
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

axis Item Contents

CA P TRAVEL LIMIT Sets the P stroke limit.
N TRAVEL LIMIT Sets the N stroke limit.
IN POSITION Sets the in position amount.
CLAMP Sets the clamp width.
ZERO-POINT Designates the carrier’s zero-point.
ENCODER OFFSET Sets the encoder compansation amount.
BACKLASH Sets the backlash amount.
OVERRUN AMT Not used.
OFFSET 1 Vertical spindle tool insertion position
Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the vertical
spindle’s tool insertion position.
OFFSET 2 Horizontal spindle tool insertion position
Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the
horizontal spindle’s tool insertion position.
OFFSET 3 Magazine tool insertion position
Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the
magazine’s tool insertion position.
OFFSET 4 Tool extraction position
Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the
spindle’s tool extraction position.
OFFSET 5 Attachment tool change position
Designates the relative distacne from zero-point to the
attachment tool change position.

axis Item Contents

CB P TRAVEL LIMIT Sets the P stroke limit.
N TRAVEL LIMIT Sets the N stroke limit.
IN POSITION Sets the in position amount.
CLAMP Sets the clamp width.
ZERO-POINT Designates the AT carrier’s zero-point.
ENCODER OFFSET Sets the encoder compansation amount.
BACKLASH Sets the backlash amount.
OVERRUN AMT Not used.
OFFSET 1 AT carrier wait position
Designates the attachment carrier’s waiting position.
 3754-E P-465-R1
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

axis Item Contents

WA P TRAVEL LIMIT Sets the P stroke limit.
N TRAVEL LIMIT Sets the N stroke limit.
IN POSITION Sets the in position amount.
CLAMP Sets the clamp width.
ZERO-POINT Designates the crossrail zero-point.
ENCODER OFFSET Sets the encoder compansation amount.
BACKLASH Sets the backlash amount.
OVERRUN AMT Sets Overrun amount at single-direction positioning.
OFFSET 1 Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the position
attained by M199/M85 positioning.
OFFSET 2 Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the position
attained by M198/M84 positioning.
OFFSET 3 Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the position
attained by M197/M83 positioning.
OFFSET 4 Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the position
attained by M196/M82 positioning.
OFFSET 5 Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the position
attained by M195/M81 positioning.
OFFSET 6 Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the position
attained by M194 positioning.
OFFSET 7 Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the position
attained by M193 positioning.
OFFSET 8 Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the position
attained by M192 positioning.
OFFSET 9 Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the position
attained by M191 positioning.
OFFSET 10 Designates the relative distance from zero-point to the position
attained by M190 positioning.
OFFSET 11 Display zero-offset
Designates the relative distance of the actual position display’s
“machine axis” WP zero-point from the crossrail zero-point.
Axis except above are not used.
 3754-E P-466-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting procedure is as follows:

(1) Press PARAMETER.

V

\ 1 OKUMA Q8P7000 | ( wuw |

0000(T)00is)
00000©©©
00000000
00000000
®®®© (is
MM ©©©© 0
|ÿ(ÿ[Fg[ÿ(75][F6](R][Fg3 X
/
M ©@®© n
"
t ®o©o
z

(9) Press the page keys to display

scteen No. 2 and 3._ (8) Press WRITE key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) to

display the NC optional parameter (bit). (7) Key in data.
(3) Press function key (F5] (AXIS
SWITCH) to designate data. (3) Press the cursor keys to position
the desired position.
(6) Press function key [F1] (SET).
[F2] (ADD) or [F3] (CAL).

Fig. 3-7 Machine System Parameter (Word)

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the MACHINE AXIS DATA screen appears.
 Ju

3754-E P-467-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

PARAMETER SKT

INR AXIS DATA#

MA T$ T! PA
P TRAVRI. LIMIT 0. 000 0. 000 0.000 0.000
N TRAVEL LIMIT 0. 000 0. 000 0.000 0.000
IN POSITION 0. 000 0.000 0.000 0.000
CLAMP 0. 000 0.000 0. 000 0. 000
ZERO OFFSET 0.000 0.000 0. 000 0.000
ENCODER OFFSET 0.000 0.000 0.000 0. 000
BACKLASH 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000
OVERRUN AMT 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000

MA TS TI PA
ACT POSIT 100.000 200.000 300.000 400.000

SET ! ADD ! I
CAL I I ! [EXTEND]

nÿllÿlT~T1(TTI(T5l(TTllTTllF 8)

(3) To designate data settings for mount axis subsequent to axis No. 5, press function key [F5] (AXIS
SWITCH).

(4) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor at the desired position.

(5) Setting:

a) When data is previously known

(6) Press function key [F1] (SET).

(7) Enter the data with keyboard.

b) When data has already been set and it is necessary to set the increment decrement against
the data

(6) Press function key [F2] (ADD).

(7) Enter the increment/decrement with keyboard.

c) When new setting is made at the position relative to the current value

(6) Press function key [F3] (CAL).

(7) Enter the relative value.

[Supplement] : This procedure cannot be used for the following setting items: in-position, clamp zone,
encoder offset, backlash, and single-direction overshoot amount.
 3754-E P-468
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

(8) Press the WRITE key.

This rewrites the data indicated by the cursor.
(9) Press the (ÿ) (®) page keys to display screen No. 2 and 3.

PARAMETER SET

AXIS DATA*
MA TS Tl PA
OFFSET 1 0. 000 0.000 0. 000 0. 000
OFFSET 2 0. 000 0. 000 0.000 0.000
OFFSET 3 0. 000 0.000 0.000 0.000
OFFSET 4 0. 000 0.000 0. 000 0.000
OFFSET 5 0. 000 0.000 0. 000 0. 000
OFFSET 6 0. 000 0.000 0.000 0. 000
OFFSET 7 0. 000 0.000 0. 000 0.000
OFFSET 8 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000 0. 000

MA TS Tl PA
ACT POSIT 100.000 200.000 300.000 400.000

I I I I
SET I ADD I CAL I I [EXTEND]

CED CE2D CEID CE33 CEZ3 COD CEzD CEID

PARAMETER SET

AXIS DATA*
MA TS Tl PA
OFFSET 9 0. 000 0.000 0. 000 0.000
OFFSET 10 0. 000 0.000 0.000 0. 000
OFFSET 11 0. 000 0.000 0. 000 0. 000
OFFSET 12 0. 000 0.000 0. 000 0. 000
OFFSET 13 0. 000 0.000 0.000 0. 000
OFFSET 14 0. 000 0.000 0. 000 0. 000
OFFSET 15 0. 000 0. 000 0.000 0.000
OFFSET 16 0. 000 0.000 0. 000 0. 000

MA TS Tl PA
ACT POSIT 100.000 200. 000 300. 000 400.000

I I I I
SET I ADD I CAI. I I I [EXTEND]

CED CEE) COD CEZD CEZD CEB CEzD COD

 -JL

3754-E P-469-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-12. Machine System Parameter (Long Word)

The machine system parameter (long word) consists of the setting items that follow.

Param- Effective Factory Set Setting Setting

Display Contents
eter
Screen Name Command Initial Value Range Unit
No.
10 AT BACKLASH Backlash compensation SET Depends on -999 to 1 part
(P) amount for attachment ADD machine 999
indexing specification
(in the forward direction)
13 SWIVEL HEAD Output value of the ab¬ SET Same as Depends on 1 part
OFFST solute position encoder above machine
at the attachment’s for¬ specification
ward position
15 AT AIR Z-axis position in the SET Same as -99999999 0.001 mm
Z-P LIMIT positive direction for air ADD above to (0.00004
blow range of attach¬
CAL
+ 99999999 in.)
ment joint
16 AT AIR Z-axis position in the Same as Same as Same as 0.001 mm
Z-N LIMIT negative direction for air above above above (0.00004
blow range of attach¬ in.)
ment joint
17 AT SWIVEL Z-axis position in the Same as Same as Same as 0.001 mm
Z-P LIMIT positive direction for at¬ above above above (0.00004
tachment swivel range in.)
18 AT SWIVEL Z-axis position in the Same as Same as Same as 0.001 mm
Z-N LIMIT negative direction for at- above above above (0.00004
tachment swivel range in.)
19 AT IN In position width for SET Same as 9 to 999 1 part
POSITION manual attachment in¬ ADD above
dexing _
20 AT BACKLASH Backlash compensation Same as Same as -999 to 1 part
(N) amount for attachment above above + 999
indexing
(in the reverse direction)
21 CROSS Crossrail follow-up off¬ Same as Oto 0.001 mm
OFFSET set value of the maga- above 99999999 (0.00004
zine in.)
46 AT-B IN In position width for at¬ SET Same as Oto 0.001
POSITION tachment B-axis index- ADD above 359,999 deg.
ing
47 AT-B Backlash compensation Same as Same as Same as 0.001
BACKLASH amount for attachment above above above deg.
B-axis indexing_
48 SPINDLE Spindle index offset SET Same as Oto 0.001
INDEX POS (high-precision VAC) ADD above 359,999 deg.
CAL
 3754-E P-470-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Param- Display Effective Factory Set Setting Setting

eter Contents Command Initial Value Range Unit
Screen Name
No.
58 AT SPINDLE Spindle index position Same as Depends on Oto 0.001
INDEX POS for attachment C-axis above machine 359,999 deg.
indexing specification
(in increment of 5°)

68 AT-B INDEX Spindle index position SET Same as Oto 0.001

OFFSET for attachment B-axis ADD above 359,999 deg.
indexing
CAL
75 AT-C INDEX Spindle index position Same as Same as Same as 0.001
OFFSET for attachment C-axis above above above deg.
indexing
(in increment of 1°)
 3754-E P-471
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting procedure is as follows:

(1) Press PARAMETER.

|1 0KUMAO8P700Q |

m
m
HjuJyJuiJuJlÿJLNj
WTOS B
vJMMKJMMLJH
©00© (is]
00®© E
0®0© r~
[FT]ÿ3(re][M}[M](ÿ)[ÿ3 © ©Q0O ""

(6) Press WRITE key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (11) Press WRITE key.
(ITEM) to display the NC operation
parameter (bit). (5) Key in 1.
(7) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (10) Key in data.
(ITEM) to display the MC system <
parameter (tong word)._ (3) Press the cursor keys to position
the cursor at bit 7 of parameter No. 16.
(8) Press the cursor key. _
(4) Press function key [F1] (SET).
(9) Press function key [F1] (SET),
[F2] (ADD) or [F3] (CAL).

Fig. 3-8 Machine System Parameter (Long Word)

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (BIT) screen appears.
(3) Press the cursor keys to position the cursor at bit 7 of parameter No. 16.

(4) Press function key [F1] (set) and key in 1.

(5) Press the WRITE key.

Parameter No. 17 and following data are displayed on the CRT.
This enables the setting of the MC system parameter (long word).
 ,JL

3754-E P-472-R1
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

PARAf-ETER SET

#MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (LONG WORD)*

NO. NO.
0 11 0
2 0 12 0
3 0 13 SWIVL HEAD OFST 0
0 14 0
5 0 15 AT AIR Z-P LIMIT 0
6 0 16 AT AIR Z-N LIMIT 0
7 0 17 AT Z-P LIMIT 0
8 0 18 AT Z-N LIMIT 0
9 _0_ 19 AT IN POSITION 0
10 AT BACKLASH (P) 20 AT BACKLASH <N> 0

X Z
ACT POSIT 4096.000 4096.000 0.000
B-Mtd

SET ADD CAL SEARCH ITEMt ITEM! C EXTEND]

ITT)(Till(TT1(T~5lfF~6irrTirFir)

(6) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (LONG WORD) screen
appears.

(7) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor at the desired position.
Setting:

a) When data is previously known

(8) Press function key [F1] (SET).

(9) Enter the data with keyboard.

a) When data has already been set and it is necessary to set the increment against the data

(8) Press function key [F2] (ADD)

(9) Enter the increment with keyboard.

b) When new setting is made at the position relative to the current value

(8) Press function key [F3] (CAL).

(9) Enter the relative value with keyboard.

(10) Press the WRITE key.

This rewrites the data indicated by the cursor.
 3754-E P-473-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-13. Machine System Parameter (Word)

The MC system parameter (word) includes the setting items that follow.

Param- Factory
Display Screen Effective Setting Setting
eter Contents Set Initial
Name Command Value Range Unit
No.
1 ATC SEQUENCE Operation sequence number SET Depends The range
NO. of the ATC on of ATC
machine operation
specifica¬ Sequence
tion. number
2 APC SEQUENCE Operation sequence number Same as Same as The range
NO. of the APC above above of APC
operation
sequence
number
3 AAC(F) SEQUENCE Operation sequence number Same as Same as The range
NO. of the AAC (floor type) above above of AAC
operation
sequence
number
4 AAC(T) SEQUENCE Operation sequence number Same as Same as Same as
NO. of the AAC (table type) above above above
5 TA ARM A,B MODE The ATC change arm, Same as Same as 1 or 2
because of its mechanism, above above
does not rotate only in one
direction, but alternately
changes its direction between
right and left. Either mode is
specified by this parameter.
6 PALLET A.B MODE APC pallet operation mode A, Same as Same as Same as
B (A= 1 B>2) above above above
7 PLUG TOOL Set the T number of the plug Same as Same as 0 to 999
(AAC-F) tool (floor type). above above
8 PLUG TOOL Set the T number of the plug Same as Same as Same as
(AAC-T) tool (table type). above above above
9 LTC SEQ NO. Operation sequence number Same as Same as The range
of the LTC (long tool change above above of LTC
unit) operation
sequence
number
 3754-E P-474-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Machine system parameter (word)

Param- Factory
Display Screen Effective Setting Setting
eter Contents Set Initial
Name Command Range Unit
No. Value
10 AT SEQ NO. Operation sequence number SET Depends Oto 10
for swivel head or attachment on
machine
specifica¬
tion.
11 AAC(C) SEQ NO. Operation sequence number Same as Same as The
for AAC operations (column above above range of
type) AAC
operation
sequence
number
12 AT-B SEQ NO. Operation sequence number Same as Same as Oto 10
for attachment B-axis above above
indexing
13 AT-C SEQ NO. Operation sequence number Same as Same as Oto 10
for attachment C-axis above above
indexing
21 SPDL ORIENT OFST In the execution of M06 or SET Depends -4095 to 1 pulse
M19 which orients the ADD on 4095
spindle, this parameter CAL machine
specifies how many pulses specifica¬
there are from the orientation tion.
position to the spindle pulse's
marker position.
22 ORIENT V2 SPEED This parameter specifies SET Same as 0 to 200 1 rpm
spindle speed for beginning ADD above
spindle orientation.
23 ORIENT DECEL This parameter specifies the Same as Same as 0 to 4095 1 part
POS point at which deceleration above above
begins in spindle orientation
in terms of the number of
parts prior to the spindle
orientation position.
24 ORIENT V3 DA This parameter specifies the Same as Same as 0 to 100 1 bit
creep speed (speed after above above
deceleration) for spindle
orientation.
25 ORIENT INP VAL This parameter specifies the Same as Same as Oto 100 1 part
in-position confirmation above above
position for spindle
orientation in terms of the
number of parts prior to the
spindle orientation position.
26
 3754-E P-475-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Machine system parameter (word)

Param- Effective Factory

Display Screen Setting Setting
eter Contents Comman Set Initial
Name Range Unit
No. d Value
27 SPINDLE OSCIL DA This spindle will oscillate in SET 100 0 to
gear change. DA output in 16383
this oscillation is set by this
parameter.
DA voltage = [(parameter
setting)/! 6383]*1OV
28 OSCILLATE In spindle oscillation, there is SET 100 0 to 600 10 sec
FREQCY an output to the gear shifting ADD
solenoid and the motor is
oscillated after a period of
time, which is set by this
parameter.
29 OSCILLATE In spindle oscillation, the Same as 500 0 to 500 Same
PERIOD motor repeats CW and CCW above as
movements, the time for above
which is set by this
parameter.
30 AAC COUNTER Same as Depends 1 to 4
above on
machine
specifica¬
tion.
31 ACCEL/DECEL 1G This parameter specifies the SET Same as Oto
acceleration/deceleration ADD above 16383
constant for the first spindle
speed range.
32 ACCEL/DECEL 2G This parameter specifies the Same as Same as Same
acceleration/deceleration above above as
constant for the second above
spindle speed range.
33 ACCEL/DECEL 3G This parameter specifies the Same as Same as Same
acceleration/deceleration above above as
constant for the third spindle above
speed range.
34 ACCEL/DECEL 4G This parameter specifies the Same as Same as Same
acceleration/deceleration above above as
constant for the fourth above
spindle speed range.
35 ACCEL/DECEL This parameter specifies the SET Depends 0 to
COEFF spindle rotation ADD on 65535
acceleration/deceleration machine
factor. specifica¬
tion.
 L

3754-E P-476-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Machine system parameter (word)

Param- Factory
Display Screen Effective Setting Setting
eter Contents Set Initial
Name Command Range Unit
No. Value

36

37

38

39

40 BOX CHECK SET 0 Oto 15

MODE

41 ORIENT V2 The ORIENT V2 SPEED for SET Varies 0 to 200

SPEED second range speed is set. ADD depending
on
machine
model
42 ORIENT DECEL The ORIENT DECEL POS for Same as Same as 0 to
POS2Q the second range speed is above above 4095
set.
43 ORIENT V3DA 2Q The ORIENT V3DA for Same as Same as Oto 100
second range speed is set. above above
44 ORIENT INP VAL The ORIENT INP VAL for Same as Same as Oto 100
2Q second range speed is set. above above
45 ORIENT V2 The ORIENT V2 SPEED for Same as Same as 0 to 200
SPEED 3Q third range speed is set. above above
46 ORIENT DECEL The ORIENT DECEL POS for Same as Same as Oto
POS3Q third range speed is set. above above 4095
47 ORIENT V3DA 3G The ORIENT V3DA for third Same as Same as 0 to 100
range speed is set above above
48 ORIENT INP VAL The ORIENT INP VAL for Same as Same as 0 to 100
3Q third range speed is set. above above
49

55 AAC CROSS POS. Crossrail position during AAC SET Same as 0 to 200
operation above

56 AT-B 1° INDEX IN- In position width for SET Same as 0 to 1 part

P attachment B-axis indexing ADD above 1000
(in increment of 1°)
57 AT-C 1° INDEX IN- In position width for Same as Same as Same Same
P attachment C-axis indexing above above as as
(in increment of 1°) _ above above
 3754-E P-477
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting procedure is as follows:

(1) Press PARAMETER.

\
|X OKUMA OSP7QOO I i m. 1 1 «- T. M 1 1 fa ]i"gyH~5sriE5Si

00093000

00000000
00000000
®®®® 0
®®@® 0
CE0 (H) © (£4) (F5) © [FT) [F8) W® ® ®00
M ®O,©0
z /
7
(6) Press WRITE key.
(11) Press WRITE key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) to dis¬ (5) Key in 1.
play the NC optional parameter (bit). (10) Key in data.
(7) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) to
display the NC system parameter (word). I (3) Press the cursor keys to position the
cursor at bit 7 of parameter No. 16.
(4) Press function key [F1] (SET). (8) Press the cursor key.
(9) Press function key [F1) (SET),
[F2] (ADD) or [F3] (CAL).

Fig. 3-9 System Parameter

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (BIT) screen
appears.
(3) Press the cursor keys to position the cursor at bit 7 of parameter No. 16.

(4) Press function key [F1] (SET) and key in 1 with keyboard.

(5) Press the WRITE key.

Parameter No. 17 and following data are displayed on the display screen. This enables the setting of the
NC system parameter (word).
(6) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the NC SYSTEM PARAMETER (WORD) appears.
 3754-E P-478
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

(7) If no setting data is on the screen, press the page key [Pi] to advance the screen to page 2.
Page 1 looks like:

PCPÿ-CTER SET

*MC SYSTEM PARAMETER CHORD)*

NO. NO.
1 ATC SCOXNCE NO. II AACCO SEQ NO. 0
2 APC SCOUCNCE fO. 1 12 fiT-B SEO NC*. 0
3 AAC(r> SCO NO. 0 13 AT-C SCO K*. 0
0 14 0
4 MKt T) SCO to.
5 TA PPM A.B MOLE 0 15 0
0 IS 0
6 PALLET A.B HOCC
r tuTtv (AAI-F) 0 17 0
0 18 0
8 (UTIY
9 LTC SCO NO. 0 19 0
0
10 AT SCO ro. 0 20

X Y z
ACT POSIT (MC> 1.476 1.344 31.561
A-Htd

•IP
•IB
•5

SET ADI- CR. serpen ITEMt ITCM1 I[EXTEND

f7HirTÿ[TÿrFTirriTfTÿ(TTlfF~8~)

Page 2 looks like:

PARWCTCR SET

*rc SYSTEM PARAMETER (WORD)*

NO. NO.
O 31 ACCEL/TCCEL 1C 0
21 SPEC ORIENT OPST
0 32 ACOX/LCCa. 2C 0
22 ORIENT V2 SPEED
23 ORIENT CCCEL POS 0 33 ACCEL''ECCCL 3G 0
24 ORIENT V3 DA 0 34 ACCEL/KCEL 4G 0
0 35 ACCEL/DECEL COCPF 0
25 ORIENT irP VAL
0 36 0
26
27 SPINDLE OSCIL DA 20 37 0
100 38 0
20 OSCILLATE FREOCY
500 39 0
2S OSCILLATE PERIOD
0 40 0
30 APC DIRECTION

X Y Z
ACT POSIT (NC) 1.476 1.344 31.581
AH1td

•IP
•IB

SCT ADD CAL SEARCH ITEMt ITEM! It EXTEND)

trÿ(TTi[TTifTÿ(TTirFTirrT)rrei
 3754-E P-479
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

(8) Position the cursor at the desired position.

Setting:

a) When data is previously known

(9) Press function key [F1] (SET).

(10) Enter the data with keyboard

b) When data has already been set and it is necessary to set the increment against the data

(9) Press function key [F2] (ADD).

(10) Enter the increment with keyboard

c) When new data is made at the position relative to the current value
(9) Press function key [F3] (CAL).

(10) Enter the relative value with keyboard

(11) Press the WRITE key.

This rewrites the data indicated by the cursor.
 -L

3754-E P-480-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-14. System Parameter

On the PARAMETER* display screen, page 1 includes the following items are displayed:
The display screen is not provided depending on the machine model.
<Screen 1>

Factory Set
Display Screen Setting
Contents Initial Value Range Setting Unit
Name mm (in.)
P TRAVEL P-directional travel end limit in the Depends on -99999999 to Selected unit
LIMIT machine coordinate system machine +99999999 system
specification
N TRAVEL N-directional travel end limit in the Same as Same as Same as
LIMIT machine coordinate system above above above
P PITCH ERR Specifies the range for pitch error Same as Same as Same as
COMP compensation in the machine above above above
coordinate system. Sets the P-
and N-directional boundaries.
N NPITCH Normally, sets the value equivalent Same as Same as Same as
ERROR COMP to the travel end limit. (Note 1) above above above

IN POSITION Sets the check data to be used in 3 Oto 1000 Same as

executing exact stop checks. above

ZERO OFFSET Sets the zero offset of the Depends on 0 to 99999999 Same as
machine coordinate system for machine above
(MACHINE)
each axis. specification.
IN POSITION Sets the in-position width used in 20 0 to 1000 Same as
(H) positioning at the home position of above
each axis at the execution of ATC,
APC, etc.

' lf P anci,or N boundary value is set inside the TRAVEL LIMIT (P, N), compensation within the
- zone outside the boundary to TRAVEL END is carried out using the compensation value
effective at the boundary.

TRAVEL LIMIT TRAVEL LIMIT

N P
i

!
I

— Pitch error compensation range — I

N boundary value P boundary value

Compensation value within this zone Compensation value within this zone
is identical to the compensation is identical to the compensation
value at N-directional boundary value at P-directional boundary
 -X.,

3754-E P-481-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 2>

Display Screen Factory Set Initial Setting

Name
Contents Value mm (in.) Range Setting Unit

SWLHD These parameters set the positions X = 400 (15.75) -99999999 Selected
POS FRONT (front, left, rear and right) of the to 99999999 unit system
Y = -150 (-5.91)
horizontal spindle in reference to the
spindle vertical position. Z = -330 (-12.99)
SWLHD X = -150 (-5.91) Same as Same as
POS LEFT Y = -400 (-15.75) above above
Z = -330 (-12.99)
SWL HD
— \ X = -400 (-15.75) Same as Same as
POS REAR (HL) (HR) above above
Y = 150 (5.91)
Z = -330 (-12.99)
SWLHD / Reference point for X = 150 (5.91) Same as Same as
POS RIGHT Compensation (V position) above above
Y = 400 (15.75)
Z = -330 (-12.99)

<Screen 3>
Display Screen Factory Set Initial Setting
Contents Setting Unit
Name Value mm (in.) Range
BARRIER On MC-H series machining center, if 0 -99999999 Selected
(Y, Z) both of Y- and Z-axis enter a certain to 99999999 unit system
area at the same time, they will inter¬
fere with each other.
To prevent this, a barrier is set so that
an alarm is triggered with axis motion
halted if both of these two axis exist in
the barrier zone at the same time.
The setting is effective only for Y- and
Z-axis.
This function is not effective for mod¬
els other than MC-H.
ALIGN¬ This parameter designates the 0 Same as Same as
MENT amount of misalignment between the above above
CORREC¬ rotational center line of the rotating
TION axis and the mechanical zero point of
AMOUNT the linear axis.
ENCODER This parameter offsets the zero-cross 0 Same as Same as
OFFSET* point of the position encoder. above above
*P-STROKE This is the No.2 P-direction stroke limit at the machine coor¬ Same as Same as
LIMIT 2 dinate system (varies according to machine specs. See the above above
operation manual for the machine in question.)
N-STROKE This is the No.2 N-direction stroke limit at the machine coor¬ Same as Same as
LIMIT 2 dinate system (varies according to machine specs. See the above above
operation manual for the machine in question.)
 .

3754-E P-482-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 4>
Factory Set
Setting
Display Screen Contents Initial Value Range
Setting Unit
Name mm (in.)

HOME Sets the home position for the Depends on -99999999 Selected unit
POSITION 1 ATC. machine to system
specification +99999999
Setting should be carried out in
the machine coordinate system.
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 2 above above
HOME Sets the home position for a left Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 3 pallet change in the rotary type 2- above above
pallet APC. This is also employed
as the home position for the
parallel type 2-pallet APC and
rotary type multi-pallet APC.
Setting should be carried out in
the machine coordinate system.
HOME Sets the home position for a right Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 4 pallet change in the rotary type 2- above above
pallet APC. This is also employed
as the home position for the
parallel type 2-pallet APC.
Setting should be carried out in
the machine coordinate system.
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 5 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 6 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 7 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 8 above above
 3754-E P-483-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 5>

Factory Set
Display Screen Setting
Contents Initial Value Range Setting Unit
Name
mm (in.)

HOME Depends on -99999999 Selected unit

POSITION 9 machine to system
specification + 99999999
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 10 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 11 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 12 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 13 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 14 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 15 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 16 above above

<Screen 6>

Factory Set
Display Screen Setting
Contents Initial Value Setting Unit
Name Range
mm (in.)

HOME Depends on -99999999 Selected unit

POSITION 17 machine to system
specification + 99999999
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 18 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 19 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 20 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 21 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 22 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 23 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 24 above above
 ~.JL

3754-E P-484-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 7>

Factory Set
Display Screen Setting
Contents Initial Value Range Setting Unit
Name
mm (in.)

HOME Depends on -99999999 Selected unit

POSITION 25 machine to system
specification •*ÿ99999999

HOME Same as above Same as Same as

POSITION 26 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 27 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 28 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 29 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 30 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 31 above above
HOME Same as above Same as Same as
POSITION 32 above above
 3754-E P-485-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 8> *HOME POSITION MOVEMENT ORDER*

Factory Set
Display Screen Setting
Contents Initial Value Range Setting Unit
Name
mm (in.)

HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Depends on 0 to 3

POSITION 1 the home position 1 machine
specification.
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 2 the home position 2 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 3 the home position 3 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 4 the home position 4 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 5 the home position 5 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 6 the home position 6 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 7 the home position 7 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 8 the home position 8 _ above

0 No axis movement
1 1st
2 2nd
3 3rd

A CAUTION
-
' the Same home Position numl)er- the operation sequence should be set so that the axes
are moved sequentially. Assigning numbers which are not consecutive causes the operation
to be interrupted.
Example: HOME POSITION 1 X Y Z
1 0 3
Z-axis does not move.
 3754-E P-486-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 9> *HOME POSITION MOVEMENT ORDER*

Factory Set
Display Screen Setting
Contents Initial Value Setting Unit
Name Range
mm (in.)

HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Depends on 0 to 3

POSITION 9 the home position 9 machine
specification
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 10 the home position 10 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 11 the home position 11 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 12 the home position 12 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 13 the home position 13 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 14 the home position 14 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 15 the home position 15 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 16 the home position 16 _ above

<Screen 10> *HOME POSITION MOVEMENT ORDER*

Factory Set
Display Screen Setting
Contents Initial Value Setting Unit
Name Range
mm (in.)

HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Depends on 0 to 3

POSITION 17 the home position 17 machine
specification
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 18 the home position 18 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 19 the home position 19 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 20 the home position 20 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 21 the home position 21 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 22 the home position 22 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 23 the home position 23 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 24 the home position 24 above
 L

3754-E P-487-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 11> *HOME POSITION MOVEMENT ORDER*

Factory Set
Display Screen Setting
Contents Initial Value Range Setting Unit
Name
mm (in.)

HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Depends on 0 to 3

POSITION 25 the home position 25 machine
specification
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 26 the home position 26 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 27 the home position 27 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 28 the home position 28 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 29 the home position 29 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 30 the home position 30 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 31 the home position 31 above
HOME Sets the axis moving sequence in Same as above Same as
POSITION 32 the home position 32 _ above

<Screen 12>*HOME POSITION MOVEMENT ORDER*

Factory Set
Display Screen Initial Value Setting
Contents Setting Unit
Name mm (in.) Range

INDUCTOSYN This parameter data is used for Depends on -81920 to

OFFSET* matching the phase of the machine and 49152
introducsyn and type E position axis
sensor, and it is not effective for
models not equipped with
introducsyn scale.
P-INDUCTO- Designates the inductosyn’s effec¬ 0 -99999999 Selected
SYN RANGE tive P-direction range at the ma¬ to 99999999 unit system
chine coordinate system.
N-INDUCTO- Designates the inductosyn’s effec¬ 0
SYN RANGE tive N-direction range at the ma¬
chine coordinate system.
 3754-E P-488-R2
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 13> *HOME POSITION MOVEMENT ORDER*

Factory Set
Setting
Display Screen Contents Initial Value Setting Unit
Name Range
mm (in.)

PITCH COMP Specifies the interval between sets Depends on 0 to 65535 Selected unit
SPAN* of points for setting pitch error machine and system
compensation data axis
PITCH POINT* Sets the total number of pitch Same as above 0 to 384
points for each axis (Note 2)
HARD SERVO Sets the two servo processor: Same as above Oto 16384
COEFF coefficient:
Setting = Hard servo ratio (%)
x 163.84
KV VALUE Sets the KV value: Same as above 52 to 5200
Setting = KV x 52
SLOW Sets the accel/decel coefficient: Same as above 105 to 21000
UP/DOWN Setting = Kcv[1/sec] x 105
COEFF

Parameters indicated by an asterisk (*) require turning off the power supply once after setting new
data. Turn it back on.

[Supplement] : If the product of the PITCH COMP SPAN and PITCH POINT is smaller than the pitch
compensation range, the pitch error compensation is not effective within the area beyond
the point calculated as the product of them up to the P boundary point, which will cause
pitch error alarm. Therefore, pitch error compensation parameter data must be set to
meet the following inequality.
(P-direction boundary) - (N-direction boundary) S (Pitch comp span) * (Pitch point)

N boundary value P boundary value

-ÿ

(PITCH COMP SPAN) (PITCH POINT)

*
Pitch error
compensation
not effective
 L

3754-E-R1 P-489
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 2>

PARAMETER SET
’•‘SYSTEM PARAMETER* lmm
X Y Z
SWL HD POS PROMT 400.nwj -150.000 -330.000
SWL HD POS LETT -150.000 •400.000 -330.000
SWL MD POS REAR -400.000 150.000 -330.000
SWL HD POS RIGHT 150.000 400.000 -330.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000

X Y Z
ACT POSIT <MC) -250.000 -100.000 300.000

•IF
•IF
•IF

SET ADD CAL SEARCH ITEM** ITEM* [EXTEND]

(TTirTFl(TTl(TTirFT1lTÿlT~TlfF~8l

Fig. 3-10 System Parameter Display Screen 2

<Screen 3>

PARAMETER SET
PARAMETER* 1mm
X Y Z
.
1.1 Chit) 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
BARRIER (Y,Z) 0.000 -99999.999 -3000.000
PIVOT DISTANCE 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
ENCODER OFFSET
P TRAVEL LIMIT 2 0.000 0.000 0.000
N TRAVEL LIMIT 2 0.000 0.000 0.000

X Y Z
ACT POSIT CMC) 4096.000 4096.000 0.000
B-Mtd

ITEMt ITEM! [EXTENDI

SET ADD CAL SEARCH

fFnilTT1lT31lTÿ(TTllFÿrFÿrF8l

Fig. 3-11 System Parameter Display Screen 3

 3754-E P-490
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 4>

PARAMETER SET
•SYSTEM PARAMETER* 1mm
X Y Z
HOfC POSITION 1 0.030 0.000 0.000
HOfC POSITION 2 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOfC POSITION 3 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 4 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOlC POSITION 5 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 6 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 7 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 0 0.000 0.000 0.000

X Y Z
ACT POSIT (MC> -250.000 -100.000 300.000

•IF
•IF
•IF

SET ADD CPL I SEARCH] ITEM*- ITEM* fEXTENDJ

grifFÿnÿ(iÿ(Tinrrÿ

Fig. 3-12 System Parameter Display Screen 4

<Screen 5>

PARAMETER SET
1mm
X
* SYSTEM PARAMETER*
Y Z
HOME POSITION 9 31.030 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 10 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 11 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 12 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITIONÿ 13 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 14 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 15 0.000 0.000 0.000
HCYE POSITION 16 0.000 0.000 0.000

X Y z
ACT POSIT <MC) -250.000 -1OO.000 300.000

•IF
•IF
•IF

SET ADD CAL SEARCH ITEM* ITEM* I C EXTENDI

Fig. 3-13 System Parameter Display Screen 5

 3754-E P-491
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 6>

PARAMETER SET
•SYSTEM PARAMETER* lmm
X Y Z
HOME POSITION 17 0-000 0.000 0.000
HOfC POSITION 10 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 19 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 20 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOTC POSITION 21 0.000 0.000 0.000
NOTE POSITION 22 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 23 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 24 0.000 0.000 0.000

X Y Z
ACT POSIT <MC) -250.000 -100.000 30O.OOO

•ir
•ir
•IF

SET ADD CAL SEARCH ITEM* ITEM4- (EXTEND]

GHJ1T21PÿfFÿnÿ

Fig. 3-14 System Parameter Display Screen 6

<Screen 7>

f A ?: A M E TER SET
•SYSTEM PARAMETER* lmm
X Y 2
HC«C POSITION 25 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 26 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 27 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOME POSITION 28 0.000 0.OOO 0.000
HOME POSITION 29 0.000 0.0O0 0.000
HOME POSITION 30 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOIC POSITION 31 0.000 0.000 0.000
HOC* POSITION 32 0.000 0.000 0.000

X Y Z
ACT POSIT <MC) -250.000 -100.000 300.000

•IF
•IF
•IF

SET ADD CAL SEARCH ITEM* ITEM* I CEXTEND3

rrT)rrT\rpT)rrT\rFT](Tÿrf7)CKs

Fig. 3-15 System Parameter Display Screen 7

 X

3754-E P-492
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 8>

PARAMETER SET
PARAMETER* 1mm

*HOf€ POSITION MOVEMENT ORDER*

X Y Z
HOME POSITION 1 Q 0 1
HOME POSITION 2 e 0 1
HOME POSITION 3 2 2 1
HOME POSITION 4 2 2 1
HOME POSITION 5 0 0 1 0: NO MOVEMENT
HOME POSITION 6 0 0 1 1: FIRST
HOfE POSITION 7 0 0 1 2: SECOND
HOfC POSITION 8 0 0 1 3: THIRD
X Y Z
ACT POSIT <MC> -250.000 -100.000 300.000

•IF
•IF
•IF

SET ADD CAL SEARCH ITEM* ITEM* CEXTENDJ

(TT1(ÿTlfFTlfTT1IT~5irF6irFTirF~Fl

Fig. 3-16 System Parameter Display Screen 8

<Screen 9>

PARAMETER SET

*SYSTEM PARAMETER* 1mm

POSITION MOVEMENT ORDER*

X Y Z
HOME POSITION 9 p 0 0
HOME POSITION 10 0 0 0
HOME POSITION 11 0 0 0
HOME POSITION 12 0 0 0
HOME POSITION 13 0 0 0 0: NO MOVEMENT
HOME POSITION 14 0 0 0 1: FIRST
HOME POSITION 15 0 0 0 2: SECOND
.HOME POSITION 16 0 0 0 3.: THIRD

X Y Z
ACT POSIT CMC) -250.000 -100.000 300.000

•IF
•IF
•IF

SET ADD CAL SEARCH ITEM* ITEM* CEXTENDJ

fTHH (T~3) (Fÿ (F6l(F71(F81

Fig. 3-17 System Parameter Display Screen 9

 3754-E P-493
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 10>

PARAMETER SET
*SYSTQ1 PARAMETER* 1mm

*WDME POSITION MOVEMENT ORDER*

X Y 2
H0f€ POSITION 17
HOME POSITION 18
o
0
0
0
Q
0
HOfC POSITION 19 0 0 0
HOTt POSITION 20 0 0 0
HOfC POSITION 21 0 0 0 0: NO MOVEMENT
HOME POSITION 22 0 0 0 1: FIRST
HOfC POSITION 23 0 0 0 2: SECOND
HOME POSITION 24 0 0 0 3: THIRD

X Y 2
ACT POSIT <MC> -250.000 -100.000 300.000

•IF

SET ADD CAL SEARCH ITEM* ITEM* [EXTEND]

[F 1 )[ F 2 ](TTl(TTirFinPFin(TT1(~Firi

Fig. 3-18 System Parameter Display Screen 10

<Screen 11>

F A R A METER SET
•SYSTEM PARAMETER* lwm

<*+:«ÿ£POSITION MOVEl'CNT ORDER*

X Y 2
WOI'C POSITION 25 El 0 0
HOME POSITION 26 0 0 0
HOME POSITION 27 0 0 0
HOME POSITION 28 0 0 0
HOME POSITION 29 0 0 0 0: NO MOVEMENT
HOME POSITION 30 0 0 0 1: FIRST
HOME POSITION 31 0 0 0 2: SECOND
HOME POSITION 32 0 0 0 3: THIRD

X Y Z
ACT POSIT <MC> -250.000 -100.000 300.000

•IF
•IF

CAL SEARCH ITEM* ITEM* [EXTEND]

SET ADD

rmimr~F~3~if F A H F 5 H F 6 HF 7 J(F_8J

Fig. 3-19 System Parameter Display Screen 11

 3754-E P-494-R1
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

<Screen 12>

PARAMETER* <SV-P> 1mm

X Y Z
INDUCTOSYN OFFSET] -21.320 -14.220
P INDUCTOSYN AREA 0.000 0.000 0.000
N INDUCTOSYN AREA 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000

X Y Z
ACT POSIT <MC) 4096.000 4096.000 0.000
B-Mtd

ITEMt ITEM! [EXTEND]

SET ADD CAL SEARCH

Fig. 3-20 System Parameter Display Screen 12

<Screen 13>

PARAMETER SET
PARAIETER* <SV-P> IftWil
X Y Z
PITCH COMP SPAN 32000 32000 28000
PITCH POINT 384 384 384
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0

X Y Z
ACT POSIT CMC) -250.000 -100.000 300.000

•IF
•IF
•IF
m

SET ADD CAL SEARCH ITEM* ITEM* [EXTEND]

rFÿrrr)fFÿrrÿrFÿrrw]ffÿT)(TÿQ)

Fig. 3-21 System Parameter Display Screen 13

 3754-E P-495
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

3-15. Pitch Error Compensation

The ball screws each have their own pitch-to-pitch errors, which may be compensated for by the setting of
the pitch error compensation data.
The pitch error compensation data provides a total of 2304 values for all the axes (384 values for each axis).
Note that the amount displayed in one screen covers only 40 values for a single axis.
Before setting the pitch error compensation value, use the following procedure:
(1) Set the P PITCH ERR COMP and N PITCH ERR COMP on page 1 of the system parameter.
This determines the range of the screw pitch offset - from what position (N) to what position (P) in that
ball screw.
(2) Set the PITCH ERR COMP SPAN on page 7 of the system parameter.
This determines the pitch between values for the screw pitch offset.

(3) In NC optional parameter (word) No. 33, set the total number of screw pitch compensation values
for all the axes.

(4) Set the PITCH POINT on page 7 of the system parameter.

This sets the number of pitch error compensation points for individual axes (max.: 384 points per axis).
Setting is possible for individual axes and it should be made in the order of X, Y, Z the 4th and the 5th
axes.
For further details, refer to Section 3,3-13. “System Parameter”.
Here are a few suggestions to be followed in setting the pitch error compensation:
a) Set “0" as the No. 1 data of each axis.
b) The adjacent error of each data allows up to 16383 pm.

c) When the result of (data sets) * (pitch error compensation) is close to the axis travel, then set
extra data.
 JL

3754-E P-496
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

Setting procedure is as follows:

(1) Press PARAMETER.

V

I JL OKUWMPWOO | | || «.T.M I l"Sri I um I |«tAKM[

0000000H)
000013©®©
00000000
00000000
®®@® 0
SM ®®®@ E
[Fp[ra)[ra][M]Jre][ra][ÿ](ra]
®@ ®0®0 r
/
®0,©0 7"

(6) Press WRITE key.

(13) Press WRITE key.
(8) Press function key [F5]
(AXIS CHANGE) . (9) Press the page key. 1 (5) Key in 1.
\ (12) Key in data.
(3) Press the cursor keys to position
(2) Press function key [F6] or the cursor at bit 7 of parameter No. 16.
[F7] (ITEM) to display the NC (10) Press the cursor key.
operation parameter (bit).
(4) Press function key [F1] (SET). (7) Press function key [F6] or [F7]
(ITEM) to display the MC system
(11) Press function key [F1] (SET). parameter (long word).

Fig. 3-22 System Parameter

(1) Press the PARAMETER key.

(2) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the NC OPTIONAL PARAMETER (BIT) screen
appears.
(3) Press the cursor keys to position the cursor at bit 7 of parameter No. 16.

(4) Press function key [F1] (SET).

(5) Enter 1 on the keyboard.

(6) Press the WRITE key.

 3754-E P-497
SECTION 3 PARAMETERS

This enables the setting of the pitch error compensation.

(7) Press function key [F6] or [F7] (ITEM) until the screw pitch offset appears.

(8) Since one screen displays only one axis data, press function key [F5] (AXIS CHANGE) if it is
necessary to set a different axis from the screen display. Each time that key is pressed, axes are
switched as follows: X-*Y-*Z-*X-*Y-*Z.
(9) Since one screen displays only 40 sets of data, press the (ÿ)
key if it is necessary to display No.
41 and following. Each time that key is pressed, the screen advances one page.

Axis name

PARAMETER SET
•PITCH ERROR COMP. XJ*
HO. NO. NO. NO.
0 11 3 21 0 31 0
2 0 12 3 22 -1 32 0
3 0 13 3 23 -1 33 0
4 2 14 3 24 -1 34 0
5 2 15 3 25 -1 35 0
6 2 16 2 26 -1 36 0
7 17 0 27 -1 37 0
8 1 18 -1 28 0 38 0
9 2 19 0 29 0 39 0
10 2 20 0 30 40 0

X Y Z
ACT POSIT (WORK) 867.419 1000.013 1102.500

3*5
•S -1
•S -1*6
»S 1
[ AXIS I
SET ADD SEARCH) CHANGEI ITD11* ITEM* I CEXTCND1

(TÿfFTirFÿ(TT)fFÿrF~6irF'7ÿrF8T

(10) Position the cursor at the desired position.

(11) Press function key [F1] (SET).

(12) Key in the compensation value through the keyboard.

If it is necessary to set the same data continuously starting at the position indicated by the cursor, enter
data as follows:
[offset] [data elements]
*
Example: [7] [20]
*
Data of “7 pm” is set at 20 points from the cursor located point.

(13) Press the WRITE key.

This rewrites data indicated by the cursor.

(14) After carrying out back-up operations, turn off the power supply once and then turn it back on.
 3754-E P-498
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

1. NC OPERATION PANEL

di mmmm
[E @@@0
a n
©@©o
QD @@00 ©@@©
QD 0000 ®@®o
CE @000 ©©©©
CE @000
1 0 g@0@ Dipÿ
a3
S
0-

@ B @@@@ ntafe©
C
i
2
o
O
o
z
5d)
© il

©
©
©
©
is ©
 .X

3754-E P-499-R1
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

2. MACHINE OPERATION PANEL

o o
I
1
t

rSDlOSIl
L
l[[[§a® Jpg
ip i
0.
o hI
O 8
1
afflsisftfg &
0)

SIS)
asa m I
IBS u §
§! S.
i i 2
3
•—
i®a , .s»
LL

Bo|gi , §

ajji
BSSSf *
o BMHHIW o
8 E

sr0SELiÿ
EBlf
lOÿ
*00
8 I, - -n . $O

!ÿ !ÿ
a [

I.
o o
 I

3754-E P-500-R2
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

3. PULSE HANDLE
i / \l TN
\i >

PULSE HANDLE
Main X Jj. 2
10/1

50/1
+

OKUMA

i
i
i

i
j
\ i

I
!

Fig. 4-5 Pulse Handle

 O
TJ
d
o
o o o o o o z
TJ
PUNCHER HOUR METER OPERATION MODE >
z
SERIAL m
r-
BUZZER LIGHT

||0 I 2 8
HOUR METER®
AC. 100V 2A
AUTO POWER
O ERROR LIGHT
OFF
RESET

HOUR METER®

CO
m
O
o o
d
o o o o O
2
Puncher Hour Meter Operation End Mode
>
T>
-o
m w
2
5 2
Fig. 4-6 Option Panel m
o m
3 y
O or
c g
33 d
m 33
CO to
 JL

3754-E P-502-R2
SECTION APPENDED FIGURES
4

5. MANUAL TOOL CHANGE OPERATION PANEL FOR OSP7000M

5-1. Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MC-40VA/50VA/60VA)

(5 MANUAL TOOL CHANGE

1
o
QÿTOOL CHANGE CYCLE 'I" TOOL aAMP TOOL UNCLAMP

4J
Fig. 4-7 Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MC-30VA/40VA/50VA/60VA)

5-2. Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MC-400H/500H/600H/800H)

r°j
ft MANUAL TOOL CHAN

gÿTOOL CHANGE CYCLE

J§1 TOOL CLAMP

"f" TOOL UNCLAMP

Fig. 4-8 Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MC-400H/500H/600H/800H)

 1-

3754-E P-503
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

5-3. Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MDB-A/B, MCV-A/B)

Spindle Release Indicating Lamp

Tool Change Set Indicating Lamp
Tool Inserted Indicating Lamp
Tool Removed Indicating Lamp

X
® ©
© © Tb
pp
4

o ®,
/ Tool Removal Pushbutton Switch

Tool Insertion Pushbutton Switch

Tool Change Set Pushbutton Switch

Spindle Release Pushbutton Switch

Fig. 4-9 Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MDB-A/B, MCV-A/B)

5-4. Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MDB-A/B, MCV-A/B)

Tool Change Cycle Indicating Lamp

Tool Clamp Indicating Lamp
Tool Unclamp Indicating Lamp

H m
/Tool Unclamp Pushbutton Switch

Tool Clamp Pushbutton Switch

Tool Change Cycle Pushbutton Switch

Fig. 4-10 Manual Tool Change Operation Panel (MDB-A/B, MCV-A/B)

 ...L,

3754-E P-504
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

6. MAGAZINE MANUAL OPERATION PANEL

6-1. Magazine Manual Operation Panel 6-2. Magazine Manual Operation Panel

(MC-30VA/40VA/50VA/60VA) (MC-400H/500H/600H/800H)

MG.MANUAL MANUAL INT.

O MANUAL
INT
MANUAL INT. CONSTANT INDEX
o I Q i S; ®
CONSTANT INOEX
O I

INDEX STOP INOEX START

cw CCW
°)
r NDEX STAR
T1
C°
cw CCW

lEMG.STOPl INDEX STOP

°) RESTART DOOR
INTERLOCK
c°
©

lEMG.STOPl
[Si
MG.MANUAL

©
MANUAL INT. INDEX START
O | cw CCW

| EMG. STOP|

Fig. 4-11 Magazine Manual Operation Panel Fig. 4-12. Magazine Manual Operation Panel
 CD
P

MC MANUAL 03
MANUAL CQ
INT
P Manual Intervention R
Enable Indicating Lamp 5'
O. CD
Manual Intervention ON/OFF
Selection Switch _
c
CONSTANT
Continuoous Magazine Index 2L
INDEX ON/OFF Selection Switch
Toolpot Selection Pushbutton O O
(clockwise)_ Magazine Index Stop Pushbutton
Switch so'
Til n
u I n 3

on
TOOL POT SELECT Toolpot Selection Pushbutton J Magazine Index Stop Pushbutton *U
(counterclockwise) Switch

f w> Emergency Stop Pushbutton #0

o
O Switch

o 2
CD
o
9.
c
o 3
3

03
m

(ATC: 50-tool or more)

[ewe.; 3
O
4*.
>
3
(ATC: 50-tool or more) m
“
5?
om
C T3
Fig. 4-13 Machine Manual Operation Panel (Double Column)
3s
03 03
 X

3754-E P-506
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

7. PARALLEL TYPE 2-PALLET APC OPERATION PANEL

7-1. Parallel Type 2-Pallet APC Operation Panel (MC-40VA/50VA/60VA)

P” o CYCLE START
APC
o
MANUAL INT.
W. LOAD FINISHED

EMG. STOP
SLIDE HOLD DOOR
OPEN

CLOSE

s,
Fig. 4-14 Parallel Type 2-Pallet APC Operation Panel (MC-40VA/50VA/60VA)

7-2. Parallel Type 2-Pallet APC Operation Panel (MC-500H/600H/800H)

f o
CYCLE START
o
MANUAL INT.
O
APC
RESTART
W.LOAD
FINISHED

o
SLIDE HOLD OPEN
DOOR
CLOSE
EMG. STOP

Fig. 4-15 Parallel Type 2-Pallet APC Operation Panel (MC-500H/600H/800H)

 £.

3754-E P-507
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

8. ROTARY TYPE 2-PALLET APC OPERATION PANEL

W APC OPERATION
CYCLE START O
MANUAL INT.
SETUP COMPLETION

OFF ON

EMG. STOP
SLIDE HOLD
DOOR
SAFETY GUARD
OPEN INTERLOCK

CLOSE

(% tfo,
Fig. 4-16 Rotary Type 2-Pallet APC Operation Panel
 3754-E P-508
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

9. ROTARY TYPE MULTI-PALLET APC OPERATION PANEL

9-1. Rotary Type Multi-pallet APC Operation (with Setup Station)

PJ
.—SETUP COMPLETION SETUP STATION
INPOSITION

CYCLE START © MANUAL

INT. ©
SET RESET OFF ON LOADING UNLOADING

© PALLET SELECTION PALLET

SAFETY DOOR
INTERLOCK EMG. STOP
5 INDEX
SLIDE HOLD
A
6
3 7

2- -a OPEN
»
ALL PALLET 10

CLOSE

Fig. 4-17 Rotary Type Multi-pallet APC Operation (with Setup Station)

9-2. Rotary Type Multi-pallet APC Operation (without Setup Station)

r SETUP COMPLETION1 PALLET

INPOSITION
CYCLE START MANUAL
INT.
SET RESET OFF ON
DOOR
OPEN SAFETYDOOR
' INTERLOCK

CLOSE
PALLET SELECTION
EMG. STOP
0 I
4
1 PALLET INDEX
SLIDE HOLD I

i. I

I
ALL P/ 10
*313*

Fig. 4-18 Rotary Type Multi-pallet APC Operation (without Setup Station)
 3754-E P-509
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

10. ATTACHMENT OPERATION PANEL

AAC MAN. OPERATION

‘ATT OPERATION
START
LK
ULK CL D.S.O I ENA.

•n
COVER

‘OP*1
UCL

SP
0
Fig. 4-19 AAC Operation Panel

O O
MANUAL TOOL CHANGE

o
gÿTOOL CHANGE CYCLE

o
Jf’ TOOL CLAMP

o
TOOL UNCLAMP

O O

Fig. 4-20 Attachment Manual Tool Change Panel

 3754-E P-510-R2
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

11. LIST OF G CODES

Code Group Functions Optional

GOO *3 1 Positioning
G01 *3 Linear interpolation
G02 Circular interpolation-Helical cutting (CW)
G03 Circular interpolation-Helical cutting (CCW)
G04 *2 2 Dwell
G05
G06
G07
G08
G09 *2 18 Exact stop
G10 *1 3 Cancel of G11 O
G11 Parallel and rotation shift of coordinate system
G12
G13
G14 Axis name designation/cancel O
G15 4 Selection of work coordinate system (Modal) O
G16 *2 Selection of work coordinate system (One-shot)
G17 *3 5 Plane selection: XY
G18 *2 Plane selection: ZX
Gl9 *2 Plane selection: YZ
G20 *2 15 Inch input confirmation o
G21 *2 Metric input confirmation
G22 *3 6 Programmable travel limit ON o
G23 *3 Programmable travel limit cancel
G24
G25
G26
G27
G28
G29

*1 Has already been set when power supply is turned on.

*2 Effective in a specified block.
*3 May be set by an initial condition parameter.
 3754-E P-511-R2
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

(cont’d)

Code Group Functions Optional

G30 *2 16 Positioning to home position

G31 *2 17 Skip function O
G32
G33
G34
G35
G36
G37
G38
G40 *1 7 Cutter radius compensation cancel
G41 Cutter radius compensation, left
G42 Cutter Radius compensation, right
G43 *1 8 Three dimensional compensation cancel O
G44 Three dimensional compensation ON
G45
G46
G47
G48
G49
G50 *1 9 Enlargement and reduction of geometry cancel o
G51 Enlargement and reduction of geometry ON
G52
G53*3 10 Tool length offset cancel
G54 Tool length offset, X-axis
G55 Tool length offset, Y-axis
G56 *3 Tool length offset, Y-axis
G57 Tool length offset, 4th-axis
G58 Tool length offset, 5th-axis
G59 Tool length offset, 6th-axis
G60 1 One-directional positioning
G61 14 Exact stop mode

*1 Has already been set when power supply is turned on.

*2 Effective in a specified block.
*3 May be set by an initial condition parameter.
 .JL

3754-E P-512
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

(cont’d)

Code Group Functions Optional

G62 19 Programmable mirror image function O

G63
G64 *1 14 Cutting mode o
G65
G66
G67
G68 24 Cancel of G68 o
G69 Setting of 3-D coordinate system conversion
G70
G71 11 Fixed cycle, Designation of return level for M53
G72
G73 11 Fixed cycle, High speed drilling cycle
G74 Fixed cycle, Reverse tapping
G75
G76 11 Fixed cycle, Fine boring
G77
G78
G79
G80 *1 11 Fixed cycle, Mode cancel
G81 Fixed cycle, Drill/spot boring
G82 Fixed cycle, Drill/counter boring
G83 Fixed cycle, Deep-hole drilling cycle
G84 Fixed cycle, Tapping
G85 Fixed cycle, Boring
G86 Fixed cycle, Boring
G87 Fixed cycle, Back boring
G88
G89 11 Fixed cycle, Boring
G90 *3 12 Absolute dimensioning
G91 "3 Incremental dimensioning

*1 Has already been set when power supply is turned on.

*2 Effective in a specified block.
*3 May be set by an initial condition parameter.
 -X.

3754-E P-513-R2
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

(cont’d)
Code Group Functions Optional
G92 20 Setting of work coordinate system
G93
G94 *3 Feed per min
13
G95 *3 Feed per rev
G96
G97
G98
G99
G172 0 3-D arc nearest path
G173 0 3-D arc farthest path
G174 77 Cylinder side-face machining OFF
G175 77 Cylinder side-face machining ON
G176 71 F-code and S-code ignore CANCEL
G177 71 F-code and S-code ignore
G178 Threading fixed cycle in the No. 1 axis direction in a
0
plane
G179 Threading fixed cycle in the No. 2 axis direction in a
0
plane
G180 64 Attachment rotation compensation CANCEL
G181 64 Attachment rotation compensation facing FRONT
G182 64 Attachment rotation compensation facing LEFT
G183 64 Attachment rotation compensation facing REAR
G184 64 Attachment rotation compensation facing RIGHT
G185 64 Attachment rotation compensation facing DOWN
G186 65 Tolerance control mode CANCEL
G187 65 Tolerance control mode ON
G188 69 No. 2 tool length offset CANCEL
G189 69 No. 2 tool length offset ON
G190 39 Constant G90 mode (absolute) processing
G191 25 Manual shift amount CANCEL
G192 67 Top face detection fixed cycle mode CANCEL
G193 67 Top face detection fixed cycle mode ON
G194 68 Fixed cycle mode with breakage detection CANCEL
G195 68 Fixed cycle mode with breakage detection ON
G196 26 Block call at each sub-program ON
G197 26 Block call at each sub-program CANCEL
 ...1-

3754-E P-514-R2
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

(cont’d)
Code Group Functions Optional
G198 Threading compound fixed cycle in the No. 1 axis
70
direction in a plane
G199 Threading compound fixed cycle in the No. 2 axis
70
direction in a plane
G256 78 3-D arc projection surface selection
G274 Fixed cycle synchronous tapping reverse tapping O
10
cycle
G284 10 Fixed cycle synchronous tapping tapping cycle O
*1 Has already been set when power supply is turned on.
*2 Effective in a specified block.
*3 May be set by an initial condition parameter.
 -li»

3754-E P-515
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

12. LIST OF MNEMONIC CODES

Code Group Contents Optional

NOEX 34 Specification of the sequence not executed

CALL 27 Subprogram, Simple call
RTS Subprogram, End code
MODIN Subprogram, Call after positioning mode ON
MODOUT Subprogram, Call after positioning mode OFF
GOTO 28 Branch command, Unconditional jump
IF Branch command, Conditional jump (6 kinds)
RTMCR Macro processing end code (used only in system)
RTMDI MDI processing end code (used only in system)
OMIT 29 Coordinate calculation function, Omit o
RSTRT Coordinate calculation function, Restart
LAA 30 Coordinate calculation function, Line at angle O
ARC Coordinate calculation function, Arc
GRDX Coordinate calculation function, Grid X
GRDY Coordinate calculation function, Grid Y
DGRDX Coordinate calculation function, Double grid X
DGRDY Coordinate calculation function, Double grid Y
SQRX Coordinate calculation function, Square X
SCRY Coordinate calculation function, Square Y
BHC Coordinate calculation function, Bolt hole circle
FMILR 31 Area machining, Face milling (Rough) o
FMILF Area machining, Face milling (Finish)
PMIL Area machining, Pocket milling (Zigzag)
PMILR Area machining, Pocket milling (Spiral)
RMILO Area machining, Round milling (Out)
RMIU Area machining, Round milling (In)
MSG 35 Message display o
NMSG Restoring original display
NCYL 36 Fixed cycle, No cycle movement
COPY 39 Copy, initial value of local coordinate system for parallel shift or rotation O
COPYE Copy end, Incremental value for parallel shift or rotation of local
coordinate system
CHFC Arbitrary-angle chamfering O
CHFR Arbitrary-angle chamfering (rounding)
 -4L

3754-E P-516
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

13. LIST OF M CODES

Against Axis Modal/

Code Group Function Element Movement One-shot Remarks Optional

MOO 1 Program stop After one-shot

M01 Optional stop After one-shot
M02 18 End of program After one-shot
M30 End of tape After one-shot
M03 2 Spindle CW At the same time modal
M04 Spindle CCW At the same time modal
M05 Spindle stop After modal
M19 Spindle orientation After modal
M06 3 Vertical spindle tool change After one-shot
M77 Horizontal spindle tool change After one-shot
M07 8 Oil mist coolant ON At the same time modal o
M08 10 Coolant pump ON At the same time modal O
M09 24 Coolant system OFF (M07, 08, After modal o
12, 50, 51. 59, 120 OFF)
M10 30 A-axis clamp After modal o
M11 A-axis unclamp After modal
M12 22 Chip air blow ON At the same time modal o
M15 5 Rotary index table CW (4th-axis) At the same time modal
M16 Rotary index table CCW At the same time modal
(4th-axis)
M17 7 Swivel head index CCW At the same time one-shot Effective for only
the first M73 -
M76
M20 31 6-axis clamp After modal o
M21 B-axis unclamp After modal (Except
for
MC-H)
M22 32 Y-axis clamp After modal
M23 Y-axis unclamp After modal
M24 33 Z-axis clamp After modal
M25 Z-axis unclamp After modal
M26 35 C-axis clamp After modal o
M27 C-axis unclamp After modal
M32 38 Splash guard door close At the same time modal o
M33 Splash guard door open At the same time modal
 •X.

3754-E P-517
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

(cont'd)

Against Axis Modal/

Code Group Function Element Remarks Optional
Movement One-shot
M40 11 High/middle-high/middle-low/low At the same time modal Spindle gears
range are automatically
At the same time modal
determined by
M41 High/middle-high/middle-low RPM command.
range
M42 High/middle-high range At the same time modal
M43 High range At the same time modal
M44 AAC (F) next attachment clear At the same time one-shot F: Floor type o
T: Table type
M45 AAC (F) change preparation At the same time one-shot
M46 AAC (F) no next attachment At the same time one-shot
M47 AAC (T) no next attachment At the same time one-shot
M48 AAC (T) next attachment clear At the same time one-shot
M49 AAC (T) change preparation At the same time one-shot
M50 23 Through-the-tool coolant, low At the same time modal o
pressure ON
M51 Through-the-tool coolant, high At the same time modal
pressure ON
M52 12 Return level in fixed cycle: At the same time one-shot
upper limit
M53 13 Return level in fixed cycle: At the same time modal
specified level
M54 Return level in fixed cycle: At the same time modal
R level
M57 34 W-axis clamp After modal o
M58 W-axis unclamp After modal
M59 25 Chip air blow ON At the same time modal o
M60 4 Pallet change cycle After one-shot o
M62 Vertical spindle tool change After modal o
preparation
M68 Vertical spindle tool clamp After modal
M69 Vertical spindle tool unclamp After modal
M63 21 No next tool in automatic tool At the same time one-shot
change cycle
M64 Next tool return cycle At the same time one-shot
M65 ATC ready At the same time one-shot
 3754-E P-518
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

(cont’d)

Against Axis Modal/

Code Group Function Element Movement One-shot Remarks Optional

M66 14 Continuous tool change between At the same time one-shot

vertical and horizontal spindle
(same tool)
M67 Continuous tool change between At the same time one-shot
vertical and horizontal spindle
(different tool)
M70 3 Manual tool change After one-shot o
M71 Attachment manual tool change After one-shot o
M72 Horizontal spindle tool change After modal
preparation
M78 Horizontal spindle tool clamp After modal
M79 Horizontal spindle tool unclamp After modal
M73 15 Swivel head, front position After one-shot o
M74 Swivel head, left position After one-shot
M75 Swivel head, back position After one-shot
M76 Swivel head, right position After one-shot
M81 27 Automatic W-axis positioning 1 After one-shot o
M82 Automatic W-axis positioning 2 After one-shot
M83 Automatic W-axis positioning 3 After one-shot
M84 Automatic W-axis positioning 4 After one-shot
M85 Automatic W-axis positioning 5 After one-shot
M87 Oil mist/Air blow ON At the same time one-shot Effective for O
M90, 91 and 98
M88 Dust collector ON At the same time modal o
M89 Dust collector OFF At the same time modal
M90 Vertical spindle oil mist cycle At the same time modal
mode ON
M98 Horizontal spindle oil mist cycle At the same time modal
mode ON
M91 Tap-drill hole chip air blow cycle At the same time modal Turned OFF by O
mode ON M09
 -A

3754-E P-519
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

(cont’d)

Against Axis Modal/

Code Group Function Element One-shot Remarks Optional
Movement
M101 4 Pallet selection 1 After one-shot O
M102 Pallet selection 2 After one-shot
M103 Pallet selection 3 After one-shot
M104 Pallet selection 4 After one-shot
M105 Pallet selection 5 After one-shot
M106 Pallet selection 6 After one-shot
M107 Pallet selection 7 After one-shot
M108 Pallet selection 8 After one-shot
M109 Pallet selection 9 After one-shot
M110 Pallet selection 10 After one-shot
M111 Pallet selection 11 After one-shot
M112 Pallet selection 12 After one-shot
M115 6 5th axis-rotary table forward At the same time modal o
M116 5th axis-rotary table reverse At the same time modal
M118 Spindle orientation (reverse) After modal
M119 Spindle orientation After modal
(reverse/forward)
M120 Shower coolant ON At the same time modal O
M130 9 Spindle rotation condition for At the same time modal
cutting feed OFF
Spindle rotation condition for At the same time modal
M131
cutting feed ON
M132 37 Single block ineffective At the same time modal
M133 Single block effective At the same time modal
M134 16 Spindle speed override At the same time modal
ineffective
M135 Spindle speed override effective At the same time modal
M136 17 Feedrate override ineffective At the same time modal
M137 Feedrate override effective At the same time modal
M138 36 Dry run ineffective At the same time modal
M139 Dry run effective At the same time modal
M140 39 Slide hold ineffective At the same time modal
M141 Slide hold effective At the same time modal
 3754-E P-520
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

(cont’d)
Against Axis Modal/ Remarks Optional
Code Group Function Element Movement One-shot
M142 Spindle overload detection At the same time modal O
ineffective
M143 Spindle overload detection At the same time modal
effective
M144 19 Touch sensor advance After modal O
M145 Touch sensor retraction After modal
M150 28 Coolant group specification- At the same time modal O
vertical spindle
M151 Coolant group specification- At the same time modal
horizontal spindle
M152 Coolant group specification- At the same time modal
3rd group
M153 Coolant group specification- At the same time modal
4th group

M154 20 Sensor air blow OFF After modal O

M155 Sensor air blow ON At the same time modal
M157 AAC (2 st.) no next tool After one-shot O
M158 AAC (2 st.) next tool clear After one-shot
M159 AAC (2 st.) attachment After one-shot
preparation
M160 4 Pallet loading command at
PPC ON
M161 Pallet unloading command at
PPC ON
M163 Long tool-no next tool At the same time one-shot o
M165 Long tool-tool change At the same time one-shot Safety cover
preparation specification
for next tool
 L.

3754-E P-521
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

(cont’d)

Against Axis Modal/

Code Group Function Element Movement One-shot Remarks Optional

M172 3 Long tool-tool change-command After one-shot O

M166 ATC active tool return mode At the same time one-shot o
specification
M170 3 AAC (F) attachment change After one-shot F: Floor type
T: able type
M171 AAC (T) attachment change After one-sho
M173 3 AAC (2 st.) attachment change After one-shot o
command
M176 Dust collection mode-sir blow At the same time one-shot O
M178 4 Dust collection mode-ON At the same time modal o
M179 Dust collection mode-OFF At the same time modal
M177 3 Angular attachment tool change After one-shot AT-ATC
M181 38 External M signal At the same time one-shot O
M182 External M signal At the same time one-shot
M183 External M signal At the same time one-shot
M184 External M signal At the same time one-shot
M185 External M signal At the same time one-shot
M186 External M signal At the same time one-shot O
M187 External M signal At the same time one-shot
M188 External M signal At the same time one-shot
M190 Automatic W-axis positioning 1 After one-shot o
M191 Automatic W-axis positioning 2 After one-shot
M192 Automatic W-axis positioning 3 After one-shot
M193 Automatic W-axis positioning 4 After one-shot For
automatic
M194 Automatic W-axis positioning 5 After one-shot W-axis
M195 Automatic W-axis positioning 6 After one-shot positioning
10 points
M196 Automatic W-axis positioning 7 After one-shot specification
M197 Automatic W-axis positioning 8 After one-shot
M198 Automatic W-axis positioning 9 After one-shot
M199 Automatic W-axis positioning 10 After one-shot
 „ L.

3754-E P-522
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

(cont’d)
Against Axis Modal/
Code Group Function Element Remarks Optional
Movement One-shot
M234 50 Synchronized tapping gear
selection range command
(gear determined according to
available spindle speeds in
each gear range)
M235 50 Synchronized tapping gear
selection range command
(spindle speeds in the 1st gear
range are covered by 2nd gear
range)
M236 50 Synchronized tapping gear
selection range command
(spindle speeds in the 1st and
2nd gear ranges are covered
by 3rd gear range)
M237 50 Synchronized tapping gear
selection range command
(entire speeds are covered by
4th gear range)
M238 39 Soft override DISABLED
M239 39 Soft override ENABLED
M292 44 Threading fixed cycle
chamfering ON
M293 44 Threading fixed cycle
chamfering OFF
M294 43 Compound fixed cycle cutting
pattern 1
M295 43 Compound fixed cycle cutting
pattern 2
M296 43 Compound fixed cycle cutting
pattern 3
M323 2 MC500/600H APC/ATC
simultaneous operating
M-code
M326 51 Synchronized tapping torque
monitoring DISABLED
M327 51 Synchronized tapping torque
monitoring ENABLED
M331 56 6th axis rotary table
FORWARD
M332 56 6th axis rotary table REVERSE
M396 49 Synchronized tapping 1-speed
gear indexing _
 3754-E P-523/E
SECTION 4 APPENDED FIGURES

(cont’d)
Against Axis Modal/ Remarks
Code Group Function Element Optional
Movement One-shot
M397 49 Synchronous tapping 2-speed
gear indexing
M398 49 Synchronous tapping 3-speed
gear indexing
M399 49 Synchronous tapping 4-speed
gear indexing
M900 53 Interrupt program DISABLED
command
 11

LIST OF PUBLICATION

Publication No. Date Edition

3754-E April 1994 1st

3754-E-R1 March 1995 2nd A (PL)
3754-E-R2 September 1995 3rd

This manual may be at variance with the actual product due to specification
or design changes.
Please also note that specifications are subject to change without notice.
If you require clarification or further explanation of any point In this manual,
please contact your OKUMA representative.
 .L

OKUMA OFFICES
DOMESTIC OFFICES

REGISTERED OFFICES
1-32 Tsujimachi, Kita-ku
Nagoya 462-91, Japan

WORLD HEADQUARTERS-OGUCHI PLANT

Okuma Corporation
Oguchi-cho, Niwa-gun Aichi, 480-01, Japan
Phone (0587) 95-7825 Fax (0587) 95-6074 Telex 4573310 OKUMA J

KANI PLANT
Okuma Corporation
2 Banchi, Shimogiri, Himegaoka, Kani-shi, Gifu-ken, 509-02, Japan
Phone (0574) 63-5611 Fax (0574) 63-5678

OVERSEAS OFFICES
Okuma Corporation ,Melbourne Liaison Office
c/o Atlas CNC Machines Ltd. 20 Stamford Road Oakleigh East, Victoria 3166 Australia
Phone (03) 567-8105 Fax (03) 569-4024

Okuma Corporation Singapore Branch

422 Tagore Avenue Singapore 2678
Phone 4590819 Fax 4598276

OVERSEAS AFFILIATE
Okuma Machinery, Inc.
12200 Steele Creek Road, Charlotte, NC 28273, U.S.A.
Phone (704) 588-7000 Fax (704) 588-6503

OVERSEAS SUBSIDIARIES
Okuma Machine Tools Inc.
12200 Steele Creek Road, Charlotte, NC 28273, U.S.A.
Phone (704) 588-7000 Fax (704) 588-6503

Okuma Europe GmbH

Europark, Fichtenhain A20
47807 Krefeld , F.R. of Germany
Phone (49) 2151-374-0 Fax (49) 2151-374100

Okuma Service Center TPE

Tatung Co., 22 Chungshan N. Rd.,3rd Sec.Taipei, Taiwan, 10451 R.O.C
Phone (02) 673-6901 Fax (02) 673-6900